Chapter 3

Coded References

This is the description of the References given in Col. 7 of the Table of Acronyms (Chap. 1) and Col. 3 of the Table of Comprehensive Catalogues.

The references are ordered by year and, inside the same year, by the first author’s initial followed by a serial number (or by a second letter for the Comprehensive Catalogue collected above; this letter is ordered before the serial number, e.g. 1974BF is followed by 1974B1, 1974B2...).

The year is generally the year of first introduction of the corresponding acronym. Thus, the acronym LKHA (= LkHα) was introduced in 1954 and continued in several publications; the corresponding references are coded 1954H1 A (1st publication, issued in 1954), 1954H1 B,..., 1954H1 S (issued in 1984). For the acronym HH introduced in 1974, the reference issued in 1992 is the 27^{th} and is numbered 1974H2AA.

In the right column only the main acronym(s) (“main” as explained for the Table of Acronyms) is given. In the case of several acronyms introduced in different Tables of the same paper, the acronyms are written on the line where the relevant Table is described, instead of the first line(s).

In the comments, since about 1987, special emphasis has been given on quoting the existence (year) of coordinates, the presence (or absence) of identification charts.

Remark: the reference codes published in the previous versions (Fernandez et al. 1983; Lortet & Spite 1986) have not been modified, except in a few cases (mostly the references related to the Comprehensive Catalogues).

3–1

3–2 Lortet M.-C., Borde S., Ochsenbein F.: The Second Reference Dictionary

1784M1

MESSIER C. 1784,Published in: Connaissance des Temps, 1784, Paris Catalogue des nebuleuses et des amas d’etoiles

M

(Nos 1-110) ; Reproduced in: Mallas J.H., Kreimer E. 1978, The Messier Album, Sky Publ. Corp., Cambridge

1847B1

BAILY F. 1847,Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci., London A catalogue of those stars in the ”Histoire Celeste Francaise” of J. DELALANDE for which tables of reduction to the epoch 1800 have been published by Professor SCHUMACHER.

Lalande

(Nos 1-47390) ; The most often quoted Lalande stars are often in the FK4 catalogue

1886A1 A

SCHONFELD E. 1886,A. Marcus, Bonn Bonner Durchmusterung des sudlichen Himmels

BD

Southern part δ > −22^{∘}; (Nos -2 1 to -22 6265)

1886A1 B

ARGELANDER F., revised by KUSTNER F. 1903,Marcus + Weber’s Verlag, Bonn Bonner Durchmusterung des nordlichen Himmels

BD

Northern part δ > −1^{∘} ; (Nos -1 1 to +89 38) Total number (north and south): N = 324188 Reprinted in reduced size, Dummler Verlag, Bonn, 1949, 1951

1888D1 A

DREYER J.L.E. 1888,Mem.R.A.S. 49, 1-237 (reprinted in 1953) New general catalogue of nebulae and clusters of stars

NGC

N = 7840 ; Also contains IC, thus: 13226 objects in total. Lists of corrections have been published by Dreyer himself and others

1888D1 B

SULENTIC J.W., TIFFT W.G. 1973,Univ. Arizona Press, Tucson, USA The revised new general catalogue of non-stellar objects.

NGC

N = 7840 ; the catalogue is named RNGC

1892T1 A

THOME J.M. 1892,Results of National Argentine Obs., vol. 16, 1-604 Cordoba Durchmusterung Declination -22^{∘} to -32^{∘}

CD

N = 179800

1892T1 B

THOME J.M. 1894,Results of National Argentine Obs., vol. 17, 1-538 Cordoba Durchmusterung Declination -32^{∘} to -42^{∘}. Errata p. 539-541

CD

N = 160415

1892T1 C

THOME J.M. 1900,Results of National Argentine Obs., vol. 18, 1-502 Cordoba Durchmusterung Declination -42^{∘} to -52^{∘}

CD

N = 149447

1892T1 D

THOME J.M. 1914,Results of National Argentine Obs., vol. 21, 1-305 Cordoba Durchmusterung Declination -52^{∘} to -62^{∘}

CD

N ≃ 18000

Chapter 3: References 3–3

1892T1 E

PERRINE C.D. 1932,Results of National Argentine Obs., vol. 21, 1-140 Cordoba Durchmusterung Declination -62^{∘} to -90^{∘}

CD

N ≃ 7800

1895D1 A

DREYER J.L.E. 1895,Reprinted in 1953: see ref. 1888D1 Index catalogue of nebulae

IC

(Nos 1-1529)

1895D1 B

DREYER J.L.E. 1908,Reprinted R. Astr. Soc., London, 1953: see ref. 1888D1 Second index catalogue of nebulae and clusters of stars

IC

N = 3857 ; (Nos 1530-5386)

1896G1 A

GILL D., KAPTEYN J.C. 1896,Ann. Cape Obs., London, vol. III Cape Photographic Durchmusterung for the equinox 1875 (-18^{∘} to -37^{∘})

CPD

1896G1 B

GILL D., KAPTEYN J.C. 1897,Ann. Cape Obs., London, vol. IV Cape Photographic Durchmusterung for the equinox 1875 (-38^{∘} to -52^{∘})

CPD

1896G1 C

GILL D., KAPTEYN J.C. 1900,Ann. Cape Obs., Edinburgh, vol. V Cape Photographic Durchmusterung for the equinox 1875 (-53^{∘} to -89^{∘})

CPD

1896G1 D

GILL D. 1903,Ann. Cape Obs., Edinburgh, vol. IX Revision of the Cape Photographic Durchmusterung for the equinox 1875

CPD

1899H1

HAGEN I.G. 1899,BEROLINI (Roma ?, Washington) Ed., First serie (several series, several years, several authors)

ASV

Use standard-names or coordinates Note: type of object: sequences of stars around variables stars

1905D1

DYSON F.W., THACKERAY W.G., CHRISTIE W.H.M. 1905,Royal Obs. Greenwich, printed in Edinburgh New reduction of Groombridge’s catalogue of circumpolar stars

Gmb

(Nos 1-4243)

1906B1

BURNHAM S.W. 1906,Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 5, 2 vol., pp. 256+1086 A general catalogue of double stars within 121^{∘} of the North Pole

BDS

Superseded by Aitken’s New General Catalogue, see ADS, and by IDS Nomenclature (Nos 1-13665) The main information is merged in IDS

1908V1

VON ZEIPEL M.H. 1908,Ann. Obs. Paris, Mem. 25, F1-F101 Catalogue de 1571 etoiles contenues dans l’amas globulaire Messier 3 (NGC 5272)

Von Zeipel

N = 1571

1915M1

MELOTTE P.J. 1915,Mem.R.A.S. 60, 175-186 and Plates 16 and 17 A catalogue of star clusters shown on the Franklin-Adams chart plates Melotte

1918C1

CANNON A.J., PICKERING E.C. 1918-1924,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College, Vol. 91-99 Henry Draper Catalogue

HD

Reprinted by Bell and Howell. Corrected version available on magnetic tape and microfiche at CDS Strasbourg Continued by HDE (ref. 1925C1 A and 1925C1 B) (Nos 1-225300)

1918P1 A

PICKERING E.C., KAPTEYN J.C. 1918,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 101 Durchmusterung of selected areas, declination from +90^{∘} to 0^{∘}(Fields 1-115)

SA

N = 67941

1918P1 B

PICKERING E.C., KAPTEYN J.C. 1923,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 102 Durchmusterung of selected areas, declination from -15^{∘} to -30^{∘}(Fields 116-163)

SA

N = 67941

1918P1 C

PICKERING E.C., KAPTEYN J.C. 1924,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 103 Durchmusterung of selected areas, declination from -45^{∘} to -90^{∘}(Fields 164-206)

SA

N = 67941

1918P2

PORTER J.G., YOWELL E.J., SMITH E.S. 1918,Publ. Cincinnati Obs. 18 Catalogue of proper motion stars

Ci 18-

N = 3164 ; μ > 0”.1 See Ci 20 (ref. 1930P1) Cross-identif. with DM where possible, and with other proper-motion catalogues

1919W1

WOLF M. 1919,Veroff. Sternwarte zu Heidelberg 7, No. 10, 195 Katalog von 1053 starken bewegten Fixsternen

Wolf

(Nos 1-1053) Numerous successive lists in Astr. Nachr. 209 to 243, 1919 to 1931. Total number N = 1567

1922G1

GINGRICH C.H. 1922,Ap.J. 56, 139-144 Parallaxes of stars in the region of BD +31 643

Gingrich

N = 20 ; (Nos 1-19 and π ) The star BD +31 643 is designated as π

1922R1

RAAB S. 1922,Medd. Lunds Ser. II, No. 28 A research on open clusters

Raab

N = 152

1925C1 A

CANNON A.J. 1925-1936,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 100 The Henry Draper extension

HDE

N = 46850 Stars numbered 225301-272150, as a continuation of HD number. Designation often abbreviated as HD No charts

1925C1 B

CANNON A.J., WALTON MAYALL M. 1949,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 112, 1-295 The Henry Draper extension. II.

HDE

N ≃ 87000 (Nos 272151-359083) Designation often abbreviated as HD ; Identif. charts, no tables These volumes are available on mag tape. Errata have been published in the Bull. Inf. CDS Nos 2 and 10. Cross-identif. of these stars where available, is listed on the CDS microfiche No. 4008. The spectral classification of the Southern stars is superseded by the Michigan Catalogue.

1925C1 C

ROSER S., BASTIAN U., WIESE K. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 88, 277-280 The second Henry Draper Extension: spectral types, magnitudes and precise positions for 10639 stars

HDE

First portion of the second HDE (ref. 1925C1 B) in the form of a star catalogue ; spectral types ; photographic magnitudes ; precise positions (J2000) ; in many cases, proper motions of the stars (Nos 332335-342973).

1925M1 A

MERRILL P.W., HUMASON M.L., BURWELL C.G. 1925,Ap.J. 61, 389-417 and Plate XI Discovery and observations of stars of class Be

MW

(Nos 1-95)

1925M1 B

MERRILL P.W., HUMASON M.L., BURWELL C.G. 1932,Ap.J. 76, 156-183 Discovery and observations of stars of class Be: Second paper

MW

N = 138 ; (Nos 96-233)

1925M1 C

MERRILL P.W., BURWELL C.G., MILLER W.C. 1942,Ap.J. 96, 15-19 Discovery and observations of stars of class Be: Third paper

MW

N = 86 ; (Nos 234-319)

1925R1

ROSS F.E. 1925,A.J. 36, 96-99 New proper motion stars

Ross

(Nos 1-86) Numerous sucessive lists in A.J. 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 48, from 1925 to 1939 Total number N = 1070 ; (Nos 1-1969b)

1927B1

BARNARD E.E. 1927,Carnegie Inst. Washington A photographic Atlas of selected regions of the Milky Way

Barnard

N = 370

1927K1

KLEIN-WASSINK W.J. 1927,Publ. Kapteyn Astr. Lab. 41 The proper motion and the distance of the Praesepe cluster

KW

N = 577

1929B1 A

BECKER F. 1929,Publ. Astrophys. Obs. Potsdam 27, No. 88 Spektral-Durchmusterung der Kapteyn-Eichfelder des Sudhimmels. I. Pol und Zone -75^{∘} (Feld 200-206)

PSD

N = 3639

1929B1 B

BECKER F. 1930,Publ. Astrophys. Obs. Potsdam 27, No. 89 Spektral-Durchmusterung der Kapteyn-Eichfelder des Sudhimmels. II. Zone -60^{∘} (Feld 188-189)

PSD

N = 11753

1929B1 C

BECKER F. 1931,Publ. Astrophys. Obs. Potsdam 27, No. 90 Spektral-Durchmusterung der Kapteyn-Eichfelder des Sudhimmels. III. Zone -45^{∘} (Feld 164-187)

PSD

N = 17730

1929B1 D

BRUCK H. 1935,Publ. Astrophys. Obs. Potsdam 28, No. 91 Spektral-Durchmusterung der Kapteyn-Eichfelder des Sudhimmels. IV. Zone -30^{∘} (Feld 140-163)

PSD

N = 17045

1929B1 E

BECKER F. 1938,Publ. Astrophys. Obs. Potsdam 28, No. 92 Spektral-Durchmusterung der Kapteyn-Eichfelder des Sudhimmels. V. Zone -15^{∘} (Feld 115-139)

PSD

N = 16536

1930P1

PORTER J.G., YOWELL E.J., SMITH E.S. 1930,Publ. Cincinnati Obs. 20 A catalogue of 1474 stars with proper motions exceeding four-tenths of a second per year

Ci 2O-

N = 1474 ; Cross-identif.

1930S1

SEARES F.H., KAPTEYN J.C., VAN RHIJN P.J. 1930,Carnegie Inst. Washington Mount Wilson Catalogue of Photographic Magnitudes in selected areas 1-139

Mt.W.

N = 67491 Supplementary stars are numbered FFF-NNNs

1930T1

TRUMPLER R.J. 1930,Lick Obs. Bull. XIV, 154-188 and Plate V Preliminary results on the distances, dimensions and space distribu- tion of open star clusters

Trumpler

N = 334

1931C1

COLLINDER P. 1931,Ann. Obs. Lund, No. 2 On structured properties of open galactic clusters and their spatial distribution

Collinder

N = 471

1932A1

AITKEN R.G. 1932,Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 417, 2 Vol., XIII + 1488p. New general catalogue of double stars within 120^{∘}of the North Pole

ADS

12 pages of corrections, Washington 1934 N = 17180 Essential information is merged in IDS (Ref. 1963JV) ; Cross-identif. with BDS, where possible.

1933M1 A

MERRILL P.W., SANFORD R.F., BURWELL C.G. 1933,P.A.S.P. 45, 306-308 Additional stars of classes N and S

MSB

(Nos 1-42)

1933M1 B

MERRILL P.W., SANFORD R.F., BURWELL C.G. 1942,P.A.S.P. 54, 107-109 Additional stars of classes N and S - Second list MSB

1933M2 A

MERRILL P.W., BURWELL C.G. 1933,Ap.J. 78, 87-140 Catalogue and bibliography of stars of classes B and A whose spectra have bright hydrogen lines.

MWC

(Nos 1-416)

1933M2 B

MERRILL P.W., BURWELL C.G. 1943,Ap.J. 98, 153-184 Supplement to the Mount Wilson Catalogue and Bibliography of stars of classes B and A whose spectra have bright hydrogen lines

MWC

N = 250 ; (Nos 417-666)

1933M2 C

MERRILL P.W., BURWELL C.G. 1949,Ap.J. 110, 387-419 Second supplement to the Mount Wilson Catalogue and Bibliography of stars of classes B and A whose spectra have bright hydrogen lines

MWC

N = 422 ; (Nos 667-1088) Extended by AS (ref. 1950M1)

1934S1 A

SCHLESINGER F., BARNEY I., GESLER C. 1934,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 10 Catalogue of the positions and proper motions of ”nnn” stars. Zone between declination + 20^{∘}and + 25^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 B

SCHLESINGER F., BARNEY I. 1939,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 11 Zone from -10^{∘} to -14^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 C

SCHLESINGER F., BARNEY I. 1940,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 12 Part I : Zone from -14^{∘} to -18^{∘}; Part II : Zone from -18^{∘} to -20^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 D

SCHLESINGER F., BARNEY I. 1943,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 13 Part I : Zone from -20^{∘} to -22^{∘}; Part II : Zone from -27^{∘} to -30^{∘}; Idem, vol. 14: Zone from -22^{∘} to -27^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 E

BARNEY I. 1945,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 16 Zone from -6^{∘} to -10^{∘}; Idem, vol. 17: Zone from -2^{∘} to -6^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 F

BARNEY I. 1947,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 18 Zone from +15^{∘} to +20^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 G

BARNEY I. 1948,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 19 Zone from +10^{∘} to +15^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 H

BARNEY I. 1949,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 20 Zone from +1^{∘} to +5^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 I

BARNEY I. 1950,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 21 Zone from -2^{∘} to +1^{∘}; Idem, vol. 22, Part I : Zone from +5^{∘} to +9^{∘}; Part II : Zone from +9^{∘} to +10^{∘} YZ

1934S1 J

BARNEY I. 1951,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 23 Supplementary volume to the Yale Zone Catalogues. Zone from -30^{∘} to +30^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 K

BARNEY I. 1953,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 24 Revised catalogue of the positions and proper motions of ”nnn” stars. Zone from +25^{∘} to +30^{∘}

YZ

1934S1 L

BARNEY I. 1954,Trans. Astr. Obs. Yale Univ. 25 Zone from +20^{∘} to +25^{∘}

YZ

1935B1

BRUGGEMANN H. 1935,Abh. Hamburger Sternwarte IV, 157-200 Der offene Sternhaufen Messier 34

Bruggemann

(Nos 1-190) ; Stars in M34 (NGC 1039) The list is in two part, the second part is in 1937, Abh. Hamburger Sternwarte VII

1935S1

SCHWASSMANN A., VAN RHIJN P.J., PLAUT L. 1935,Bergedorf, Verlag der Sternwarte, Vol. 1 Bergedorf Spektral Durchmusterung, Selected areas 1-19, δ 90^{∘}, 75^{∘}, 60^{∘}

BSD

Other lists (for northern Kapteyn selected areas, containing, for stars down to 13th photographic magnitude, the spectra from surveys with the Lippert astrograph of the Hamburg Observatory at Bergedorf, and the magnitudes from surveys of the Harvard College Observatory, determined by the Kapteyn Astronomical Laboratory of Groningen): 1935, Vol. 1 Selected areas 1-19, δ 90^{∘}, 75^{∘}, 60^{∘} 1938, Vol. 2 Selected areas 20-43, δ 45^{∘} 1947, Vol. 3 Selected areas 44-67, δ 30^{∘} 1951, Vol. 4 Selected areas 68-91, δ 15^{∘} 1953, Vol. 5 Selected areas 92-115, δ 0^{∘} N = 173599 ; (Nos 001-0001 to 115-0619) Southern Kapteyn areas: 1929B1 A to E

1937B1

BOSS B. 1937,Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 468, vol. 1-5 Reprinted by Johnson Reprint Corp., New York 1963 General catalogue of 33342 stars for the epoch 1950, Dudley Observa- tory Albany, N.Y.

GC

N = 33342 ; On magnetic tape

1938T1

TOMBAUGH C.W. 1938,P.A.S.P. 50, 171 Two new faint galactic star clusters

Tombaugh

N = 2 ; (Nos 3-5) defined later on

1939S1 A

STRUVE O., ELVEY C.T. 1939,Ap.J. 89, 119-124 Observations made with the nebular spectrograph of the McDonald Observatory

McD

Table 1: (Nos 1-35)

1939S1 B

STRUVE O., ELVEY C.T. 1939,Ap.J. 89, 517-525 Observations made with the nebular spectrograph of the McDonald Observatory. II.

McD

Table 1: (Nos 36-48)

1939S1 C

STRUVE O., ELVEY C.T., LINKE W. 1939,Ap.J. 90, 301-308 Observations made with the nebular spectrograph of the McDonald Observatory. III.

McD

Table 1: (Nos 49-78)

1939S2

SPENCER-JONES H., JACKSON J. 1939,London (on magnetic tape) Catalogue of 20554 faint stars in the Cape astrographic zone -40^{∘}to -52^{∘} for the equinox of 1900.0, Royal Observatory Cape of Good Hope

CF

1940L1 A

LEE O.J., BALDWIN R.B., HAMLIN D.W., KINNAIRD R.F. 1940,Ann. Dearborn Obs. 4, part 16 Carbon stars in zones - 4^{∘} to + 22^{∘}

Lee

(Nos 1-156)

1940L1 B

LEE O.J., BARTLETT T.J. 1943,Ann. Dearborn Obs. 5, part 3 Carbon stars in zones + 22^{∘} to + 40^{∘}

Lee

(Nos 157-233)

1940L1 C

LEE O.J., BARTLETT T.J. 1943,Ann. Dearborn Obs. 5, part 7 Carbon stars in zones + 22^{∘} to + 40^{∘}

Lee

(Nos 234-365)

1941L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1941,Publ. Astr. Obs. Univ. Minnesota 3, No. 3, 33-50 Catalogue of 832 double stars with common proper motion in the Southern hemisphere

LDS

(Nos 1-832)

1941L1 B

LUYTEN W.J. 1969,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the fourty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. XXI. Double stars with common proper motion

LDS

N = 1230 ; (Nos 833-2062)

1941L1 C

LUYTEN W.J. 1970,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the fourty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. XXV.

LDS

N = 451 ; (Nos 2063-2513)

1941L1 D

LUYTEN W.J. 1972,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the fourty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. XXIX.

LDS

N = 501 ; (Nos 2514-3014)

1941L1 E

LUYTEN W.J. 1975,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with forty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. XL.

LDS

N = 110 ; (Nos 2869-3113)

1941L1 F

LUYTEN W.J. 1977,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the forty-eight inch Schmidt telescope. L.

LDS

1941L1 G

LUYTEN W.J. 1980,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the forty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. LV. First supplement to the NLTT Catalogue

LDS

N = 95 ; (Nos 5159-5254)

1941L1 H

LUYTEN W.J. 1983,Univ. of Minnesota Proper motion survey with the forty-eight inch Schmidt Telescope. LXIV.

LDS

N = 827 ; (Nos 5255-6081) Remark: owing to some duplicate numbering of a few stars, the total number of LDS stars is 6030.

1941L2

LUYTEN W.J. 1941,Publ. Astr. Obs. Univ. Minnesota 3, No. 1 A catalogue of 904 stars in the Southern Hemisphere with proper motions exceeding 0”.5 annually

LPM

(Nos 1-904) Use LFT (ref. 1955L1) and LHS (ref. 1979l1)

1942L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. after 1942, before 1945, without date,Publ. Astr. Obs. Univ. Minnesota 2, No. 12, p. 242 New stars with proper motions exceedinq 0”.5 annually.

L

Old list of proper motion stars (to which BPM, LTT or LFT names have now been given) which should not have been quoted by the authors; the numbering is the BRUCE plates system. N = 8 ; (Nos 1750-12 to 1945-4)

1942L1 B

LUYTEN W.J. 1944,Publ. Astr. Obs. Univ. Minnesota 3, No. 4, 53-76 Bruce Proper Motion Survey: three catalogues.

L

Old list of proper motion stars (to which BPM, LTT or LFT names have now been given) which should not have been quoted by the authors; the numbering is the BRUCE plates system. N ≃ 500 ; (Nos 290-28 to 1007-60)

1943V1 A

VYSSOTSKY A.N. 1943,Ap.J. 97, 381-387 Dwarf M stars found spectrophotometrically. First List

MCC

(Nos 1-82)

1943V1 B

VYSSOTSKY A.N., JANSSEN E.M., MILLER W.J., WALTHER M.E. 1946,Ap.J. 104, 234-238 Dwarf M stars found spectrophotometrically. Second List

MCC

N = 135 ; (Nos 83-217)

1943V1 C

VYSSOTSKY A.N., MATEER B.A. 1952,Ap.J. 116, 117-121 Dwarf M stars found spectrophotometrically. Third List

MCC

N = 133 ; (Nos 218-350)

1943V1 D

VYSSOTSKY A.N. 1956,A.J. 61, 201-213 Dwarf M stars found spectrophotometrically. Fourth List

MCC

N = 526 ; (Nos 351-876)

1943V1 E

VYSSOTSKY A.N. 1958,A.J. 63, 211-212 Dwarf M stars found spectrophotometrically. Supplementary List MCC

1946C1

CEDERBLAD S. 1946,Medd. Lunds Ser. II, No. 119 Studies of bright diffuse galactic nebulae with special regard to their spatial distribution

CED

(Nos 1-215)

1946M1

MINKOWSKI R. 1946,P.A.S.P. 58, 305-309 New emission nebulae

Min 1-

Table I: N = 80 (Nos 1-80) PN Table II: N = 22 (Nos 81-103) H II

1947H1

HUMASON M.L., ZWICKY F. 1947,Ap.J. 105, 85-91 A search for faint blue stars

HZ

N = 48: (Nos 1-15) are in the region of Hyades, and are also designated as CL∗ Melotte 25 HZ in the Simbad database (Nos 16-48) are near the northern galactic pole HZ 43 has been discovered as a double star (HZ 43A and HZ 43B) in 1993 Sterne und Weltraum 32 250-251 by Napiwotzki R.

1947L1

LEE O.J., BALDWIN R.J., HAMLIN D.W., BARTLETT T.J., GORE G.D. 1947,Ann. Dearborn Obs. 5 Dearborn catalog of faint red stars

DO

Part 1A : (Nos 1-8151)

(later re-named DC)

Part 1B : (Nos 8141-22680)

Stars numbered 8141-8151 in part 1A are identically repeated in part 1B

Part 1C : (Nos 22681-44076)

1947M1

MINKOWSKI R. 1947,P.A.S.P. 59, 257-259 New emission nebulae. II.

Min 2-

Table I : N = 56 (Nos 1-56) PN Table II: N = 18 (Nos 57-74) H II

1947M2 A

McCUSKEY S.W., SEYFERT C.K. 1947,Ap.J. 106, 1-19 Variations in the stellar luminosity function

LF

Continued by several authors ; see Collins 11.180 to 11.186 (LF 1 to LF 10) , and Wooden 1970, next ref.

1947M2 B

WOODEN W.H. III 1970,A.J. 75, 324-336 UBV photoelectrc photometry in four southern Milky Way fields

LF

Table I: (Nos 11-14) Tables III to V: photoelectric sequences

1948M1

MINKOWSKI R. 1948,P.A.S.P. 60, 386-388 New emission nebulae. III.

Min 3-

Tables I and II: N = 55 (Nos 1-55) PN

Table III:  N = 7  (Nos 56-62)  H II

1949B1

BLANCO V.M. 1949,P.A.S.P. 61, 183-184 A new galactic star cluster in Sculptor

Blanco

N = 1 ; ζ SCL cluster = C 0001-302

1949H1

HARO G. 1949,A.J. 54, 188-189 Faint spectra showing Hα in emission in the obscuring clouds of Ophiuchus and Scorpius and in a region in Sagittarius

Haro 1-

N = 17

1949K1

KING I. 1949,Harvard Bull. 919, 41-42 Some new galactic clusters

King

N = 21 (among which 9 suspected) ; later continued up to No. 26

1949L1

LUYTEN W.J. 1949,Ap.J. 109, 528-531 An Atlas of Identif. charts of White Dwarfs

LAWD

(Nos 1-96)

1949S1

STRUVE O., RUDKJOBING M. 1949,Ap.J. 109, 92-94 Stellar spectra with emission lines in the obscuring clouds of Ophiuchus and Scorpius

SR

N = 26

1950H1

HOLMBERG E. 1950,Medd. Lunds Ser. II, No. 128 A photometric study of nearby galaxies

Holmberg

N = 5 Ho I, II, III in M 81 region Ho IV, V in M 101 region

1950M1 A

MERRILL P.W., BURWELL C.G. 1950,Ap.J. 112, 72-89 Additional stars whose spectra have a bright Hα line

AS

(Nos 1-519) ; continues MWC (ref. 1933M2)

1950M1 B

MILLER W.C., MERRILL P.W. 1951,Ap.J. 113, 624-625 Spectroscopic observations of Be stars

AS

N = 2 ; (Nos 520 and 521)

1950R1

RYLE M., SMITH F.G., ELSMORE B. 1950,M.N.R.A.S. 110, 508-523 A preliminary survey of radio stars in the northern hemisphere.

1C

First Cambridge catalogue of radio sources N = 50 ; λ = 3.7 m

1950S1 A

SHAJN G.A., GAZE V.F. 1950,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 6, 3-27 (in Russian) A few results of the study of emissive galactic nebulae

Simeis

Table: 2nd column : (Nos 1-9)

(1st column is numbered from 1 to 35)

1950S1 B

GAZE V.F., SHAJN G.A. 1951,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 7, 93-98 (in Russian) Second list of diffuse nebulae

Simeis

Table : 2nd column: (Nos 10-105)

(1st columm is numbered from 1 to 101)

Simeis 31 is not real (Gaze + Shajn, 1954) ; Simeis 106 is defined nowhere ; Simeis 22 = PK 128-04 1

1950S1 C

GAZE V.F., SHAJN G.A. 1952,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 8, 17-18 (in Russian) Two new filamentary nebulae near OMI02 and OMI01 Cygni

Simeis

N = 2 ; (S 107 and S 108) (photographs ibid fig. 8 between p. 6 and 7)

1950S1 D

GAZE V.F., SHAJN G.A. 1952,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 9, 52-67 (in Russian) Third list of diffuse emission nebulae

Simeis

Table : 2nd column: (Nos 109-279) ; (1st column is numbered from 1 to 250) S 121 is not real (Gaze + Shajn, 1954)

1950S1 E

GAZE V.F., SHAJN G.A. 1954,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 11, 39-41 (in Russian) Fourth list of diffuse emission nebulae

Simeis

Table : 2nd column: (Nos 280-301)

(1st columm is numbered from 1 to 31)

(Cross-identifies previous lists with NGC, IC, Mi I or II = Min 1- or 2 -) (Cross-identif. with IC, NGC, Mi I = Min 1-) S 106, 302, 303, 304 are defined nowhere S 305 and 306 are Nos C 257 and C 258 in Gaze and Shajn’s catalogue defining C number (Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 15, 11-30, first columm, ref. 1955G1)

1950S2

STROHMEIER W. 1950,Z. Astrophys. 27, 49-55 Rote Nebel in der Wintermilchstrasse

Str

N = 42

1951C1

COURTES G. 1951,C.R. Acad. Sci. 232 Etude de la voie lactee en lumiere monochromatique Hα

COU

p. 795-797 : 320 a 350^{∘} et 25 a 80^{∘} de longitude galactique p. 1283-1285: 80 a 180^{∘} de longitude galactique Total number: N = 104

1951E1

ELVIUS T. 1951,Stockholm Obs. Ann. 16, No. 4, 1-79 Catalogue of magnitudes, colours, spectral types and spectrophotome- tric measurements for 2550 stars in Kapteyn’s Selected Areas Nos 2, 6, 7, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 40, 41 and 42

SSC

N = 2550

1951KP A

KUKARKIN B.V., PARENAGO P.P., EFREMOV Yu.N., KHOLOPOV P.N. 1951,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Sternberg Astr. Inst., 240 pp. (in Russian) Catalogue of suspected variable stars

CSV

N = 8000 ; Nos 1-5835 and 100000-102299 ; doubtful cases

1951KP B

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUROCHKIN N.E. 1965,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. (in Russian and English) Second catalogue of suspected variable stars

CSV

N = 4000 ; (Nos 5836-9877 and 102300-103137) (doubtful cases) Updated and superseded by NSV (New Catalogue of Suspected Variable Stars) ref. 1982KH, which contains 5954 new suspected V∗ since 1965

1951M1

MARKARIAN B.E. 1951,Soob. Biurakan Obs. No. 9 On the classification of open (galactic) stellar clusters. II. Preliminary list of open O-type star clusters

Markarian

N = 50

1952J1 A

JENKINS L.F. 1952,Yale Univ. Obs., New Haven, USA, 9 + 253 pp. General catalogue of trigonometric stellar parallaxes. Yale Univ. Obs., New Haven, Conn.

Jenkins

(Nos 1-5822)

1952J1 B

JENKINS L.F. 1963,Yale Univ. Obs., New Haven, USA, 47 p. Supplement to the general catalogue of trigonometric stellar parallaxes. Yale Univ. Obs. New Haven, Conn.

Jenkins

N = 1712 Errata to the General Catalogue and 1963 Supplement: Hoffleit D., 1982, Bull. Inf. CDS 22, 112-117 Updated by Van Altena, ref. 1982VA

1952M1

MacRAE D.A. 1952,Ap.J. 116, 592-611 Stellar spectra and colours in Cygnus at galactic latitude +14^{∘}

MacRae

N = 938 ; (Stars in the field ILF-1)

1952M2

MORGAN H.R. 1952,Astr. Pap. prep. An. Ephemeris and Naut. Alm. 13, part III, 109-321 Catalog of 5268 standard stars, 1950.0 based on the normal system N30

N30

N = 5268 ; (Fundamental stars)

1952M3

MILLS B.Y. 1952,Austral. J. Sci. Res. serie A 5, 266-287 The distribution of the discrete sources of cosmic radio radiation

Mills

N = 77 ; ν = 101 MHz

1952V1 A

VAN RHIJN P.J. 1952,Kapteyn Astronomical Laboratory, Groningen, Netherlands Durchmusterung of selected areas of the special plan. Vol. I containing the areas 1 to 29

SASpecial

N ≃ 100000

1952V1 B

VAN RHIJN P.J. 1952,Kapteyn Astronomical Laboratory, Groningen, Netherlands Durchmusterung of selected areas of the special plan. Vol. II containing the areas 30 to 46

SASpecial

N ≃ 100000

1952V2

VAN BUEREN H.G. 1952,B.A.N. 11, 385-402 On the structure of the Hyades cluster

Van Bueren

(Nos 1-152)

1952V3

VAN WIJK U. 1952,Harvard Bull. 921, 7-8 A photoelectric magnitude sequence in the Large Magellanic Cloud

Van Wijk

(Nos 1-16)

1953B1

BRODSKAJA Eh.S. 1953,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 10, 104-119 (in Russian) Spectra and magnitudes for 400 0- to B5 stars in a Milky Way field with centre α = 23h27m, δ = +61^{∘}

Brodskaja

N = 400 ; See also Brodskaja, ref. 1955B3

1953H1

HANBURY BROWN R., HAZARD C. 1953,M.N.R.A.S. 113, 123-133 A survey of 23 localized radio sources in the Northern hemisphere

HB

N = 23

1953H2

HARO G. 1953,Ap.J. 117, 73-82 Hα emission stars and peculiar objects in the region of the Orion nebula

Haro 4-

(Nos 1-255) ; 1900 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1953H3

HARO G., MORENO A. 1953,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 1, No. 7, 11-22 (in Spanish) Estrellas con Hα en emision en las cercanias de IC 434

Haro 5-

N = 98 ; Identif. charts ; no coordinates given

1953H4

HARO G., IRIARTE B., CHAVIRA E. 1953,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 1, No. 8, 3-18 (in Spanish) Nuevas estrellas con emision en las regiones obscuras del Toro-Auriga-Orion investigadas por Joy

Haro 6-

N = 75 ; Nos 29 and 75 are PN and are designated H3- by Perek+, ref. 1967PK A ; Identif. charts ; no coordinates given

H3-

1953H5

HOFFLEIT D. 1953,Ann. Astr. Obs. Harvard College 119, 37-68 A preliminary survey of nebulosities and associated B-stars in Carina

N = 69 (catalogue of bright nebulosities) 63 are Bright N

Hoffleit

6 objects among this list are PN and are prefixed Hf by Perek+, ref. 1967PK A  Hf

2 objects at the bottom of the p. 52 are PN and are named Hf2-1 and Hf2-2 by Perek+, ref. 1967PK A

Hf2-

1953L1

LUYTEN W.J. 1953,A.J. 58 Various lists under the general title: A Search for Faint Blue Stars. I to L (50 papers)

LB

Numerous lists for different regions ; first lists in A.J. 58, 59, 61 (1953 to 1956) then in monographies: The Observatory, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis ; See Collins 19.148 - 19.181 N = 11444

1953L2

LUYTEN W.J. 1953,A.J. 58, 75-78 A further search for faint blue stars

L-Pr

N = 7 ; (Table III)

1953M1 A

McKIBBEN NAIL V., SHAPLEY H. 1953,Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 39, 358

Shapley

Define Constellations I to V in Magellanic Clouds ; (Constellations = major stars forming regions)

1953M1 B

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 46, 79-87 UBV observations of globular clusters in the Magellanic Clouds

Shapley

Constellations VI to IX, map Fig. 14 p. 87

1953S1

SHARPLESS S. 1953,Ap.J. 118, 362-369 A catalogue of emission nebulae near the galactic plane

Sh1-

N = 142 ; Superseded by Sh2- for H II

1953W1

WILSON R.E. 1953,Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 601 General catalogue of stellar radial velocities

Wilson

Reprinted around 1963. On magnetic tape Superseded by Abt+ (ref. 1972AB). See Data Center C52 N = 15106

1954B1

BOLTON J.G., WESTFOLD K.C., STANLEY G.J., SLEE O.B. 1954,Austral. J. Phys. 7, 96-109 Galactic radiation at radio frequencies. VII. Discrete sources with large angular widths

B1

N = 11

1954B2

BOLTON J.G., STANLEY G.J., SLEE O.B. 1954,Austral. J. Phys. 7, 110-129 Galactic radiation at radio frequencies. VIII. Discrete sources at 1OO Mc/s between declinations +50^{∘} and -50^{∘}

B2

N = 104

1954B3

BIDELMAN W.P. 1954,Ap.J.Suppl. 1, 175-267 Catalogue and bibliography of emission-line stars of types later than B

Bi

N = 1540 The content of the 15 different tables Nos 1-15 (stars numbered from No. 1 in each table) is described p. 176 Format is sometimes NN-NNN ; the first number is the table number

1954G1 A

GONZALEZ Gr., GONZALEZ Gu. 1954,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 1, No. 9, 3-20 (in Spanish) Estrellas Be-Ae in Casiopea y Perseo (Be and Ae stars in Perseus and Cassiopeia)

GGA

(Nos 1-192)

1954G1 B

GONZALEZ Gr., GONZALEZ Gu. 1956,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 14, 19-30 (in Spanish) Estrellas con Hα en emision en longitudes galacticas de 103^{∘}a 180^{∘} (Stars with Hα in emission in galactic longitudes 103^{∘} to 180^{∘})

GGA

N = 219 ; (Nos 193-411)

1954H1 A

HERBIG G.H. 1954,Ap.J. 119, 483-495 Emission-line stars associated with the nebulous cluster NGC 2264

LkHA

(Nos 1-84) ; First quoted as LHα , then changed into LkHα or LkH

1954H1 B

HERBIG G.H. 1954,P.A.S.P. 66, 19-22 Bright-Hα stars in IC 348

LkHA

N = 16 ; (Nos 85-100) First quoted as LHα , then changed into LkHα or LkH

1954H1 C

HERBIG G.H. 1956,P.A.S.P. 68, 353-356 The source of illumination of NGC 1579

LkHA

(No. 101) The acronym LkH (or LkHα ) supersedes and continues LHα introduced by Herbig

1954H1 D

HERBIG G.H. 1957,Ap.J. 125, 654-660 Emission-line stars in the vicinity of Messier 8, Messier 20 and Simeis 188

LkHA

(Nos 102-119 and 121-130) No. 120 defined in ref. 1954H1 K

1954H1 E

HERBIG G.H. 1958,Ap.J. 128, 259-266 NGC 7000, IC 5070, and the associated emission-line stars

LkHA

(Nos 131-195)

1954H1 F

HERBIG G.H. 1960,Ap.J.Suppl. 4, 337-368 The spectra of Be- and Ae-type stars associated with nebulosity

Defines LkHα 196-234  LkHA
Tables 3 and 4 : N = 33 ; Be and Ae stars associated with nebulosity  Herbig

1954H1 G

HERBIG G.H. 1960,Ap.J. 131, 516-517 Emission-line stars in IC 5146

LkHA

(Nos 235-257)

1954H1 H

HERBIG G.H. 1961,Ap.J. 133, 337-340 Observations of RY Tauri

LkHA

N = 2 ; Nos 258 and 259 ; No Identif. chart

1954H1 I

WALKER M.F. 1961,Ap.J. 133, 438-456 Studies of extremely young clusters. IV. NGC 6611

LkHA

N = 2 ; Nos 260 and 261

1954H1 J

ROSINO L., ROMANO G. 1962,Contr. Oss. Astrofis. Asiago 127, 1-15 Research on nebular variables. II. Variable stars associated with the nebula NGC 7023 in Cepheus

LkHA

N = 4 ; Nos 425, 427, 428, 513 Hα em. stars discovered by Herbig, numbers assigned by Rosino through a misunderstanding.

1954H1 K

HERBIG G.H. 1962,Adv. Astr. Astrophys. 1, 47-103 The properties and problems of T Tauri stars and related objects

LkHA

N = 8 ; Nos 120, 262-276

1954H1 L

- -,Unpublished in NGC 1333

LkHA

N = 9 ; (Nos 277-285) ; see ref. 1954H1 O

1954H1 M

HERBIG G.H., KUHI L.V. 1963,Ap.J. 137, 398-400 Emission-line stars in the region of NGC 2068

LkHA

N = 35 ; (Nos 286-320)

1954H1 N

- -,Unpublished Near LkHα 120

LkHA

N = 2 ; (Nos 322 and 323) ; see ref. 1954H1 O No. 321 defined in ref. 1954H1 0

1954H1 O

HERBIG G.H., RAO N.K. 1972,Ap.J. 174, 401-423 Second catalogue of emission-line stars of the Orion population

LkHA

Table 1 is the HRC catalogue : (Nos 1-323) (ref. 1972HR) Among them are LkH Nos 321, 324-350.

1954H1 P

HERBIG G.H. 1974,Lick Obs. Bull. 658, 11 p. Draft catalogue of Herbig-Haro objects (HH-1 to HH-43)

LkHA

N = 7 ; (Nos 351-357) Charts only, NGC 1333 region.

1954H1 Q

CUDWORTH K.H., HERBIG G.H. 1979,A.J. 84, 548-551 Two large-proper-motion Herbig-Haro objects (HH-28 and 29)

LkHA

N = 2 ; Nos 358 and 359 Fig. 1 also shows other objects

1954H1 R

DELLA PRUGNA F., CALVET N., ARAQUE M.C. 1984,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 9, 31-33 Accurate positions for young onjects: NGC 7000 and IC 5070

LkHA

Astrometric positions for 58 LKH stars, MWC 1032, AS 441 and 442. AS 441 and 442 are misleadingly quoted as LkH 441 and 442.

1954H1 S

ARAQUE M.C., CALVET N., DELLA PRUGNA F. 1984,Acta Cient. Venezolana 35, 42-43 Accurate positions for young objects: NGC 2264

LkHA

LkHα 1 to 84 except No. 55

1954H2

HADDOCK F.T., MAYER C.H., SLOANAKER R.M. 1954,Nature 174, 176-177 Radio observations of ionized hydrogen nebulae and other discrete sources at a wavelength of 0.4 cm

H

(Nos 1-24)

1954N1 A

NASSAU J.J., BLANCO V.M. 1954,Ap.J. 120, 129-138 Carbon stars al the galactic equator in a zone 4^{∘} wide

Case

(Nos 1-271) ; All cross-identif. with BD

1954N1 B

NASSAU J.J., BLANCO V.M. 1957,Ap.J. 125, 195 Carbon stars in two north milky way zones

Case

N = 422 ; (Nos 272-693) ; All cross-identif. with BD

1954N1 C

BLANCO V.M. 1958,Ap.J. 127, 191-193 Carbon stars at intermediate galactic latitudes

Case

N = 56 ; (Nos 694-74) ; All cross-identif. with BD Carbon stars located between +6 and -6^{∘} or +18 and -18^{∘} of latitude

1954P1

PARENAGO P.P. 1954,Trudy Gos. Astr. Inst. Sternberg 25, 3-547 (in Russian) Investigation of stars in the region of the Orion nebula

Parenago

N = 2982

1955A1

ABELL G.O. 1955,P.A.S.P. 67, 258-261 Globular clusters and planetary nebulae discovered on the National Geographic Society - Palomar Observatory Sky Survey

Table I : (Nos 1-13) GCL The Palomar designation has been continued since then

Pal

Table II: (Nos 1-73)  PN  A55

1955B1

BLANCO V.M., MUNCH L. 1955,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 12, 17-29 (in Spanish) Estrellas rojas entre Popa y Cruz (red stars between Puppis and Crux)

BM

Table IV : (Nos 1-172) Carbon ∗ Table V : (Nos 1-311) M ∗

Table VI :  (Nos 1-15)  M supergiant ∗
Table VII :  (Nos 1-13)  S ∗ (often named TT in the litterature)
Table VIII:  (Nos 1-31)  Stars with possible IR emission

Total number: N = 542

1955B2

BOK B.J., BESTER M.J., WADE C.M. 1955,Daedalus: Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 86, 9-16 Harvard Repr., No. 416 Catalogue of H(II) regions in the Milky Way for longitudes 250^{∘}- 355^{∘}

BBW

N = 41 The format uses ℓ1, b1 galactic coordinates and the minus sign for latitude is indicated by italics for the 2 lasts digits.

1955B3

BRODSKAJA Eh.S. 1955,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 14, 139 pp. (in Russian) Catalogue of spectral classes, magnitudes and colour indices of 5752 stars in a Milky Way field with centre α = 23h25m, δ = 61^{∘}30’

Brodskaja

N = 5752 Includes stars (not all ) of Brodskaja (ref. 1953B1) but the numbering is different.

1955C1

COX A.N. 1955,Ap.J. 121, 628-636 A study of the galactic cluster NGC 2516

Cox

N = 116

1955G1

GAZE V.F., SHAJN G.A. 1955,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 15, 11-30 (in Russian) Catalogue of emission nebulae

GS

N = 286 First column is C number, last column is Simeis = S. Photographs with Simeis numbers identified. Sometimes refered by HS (erroneous transliteration: Haze for Gaze)

1955G2

GUM C.S. 1955,Mem.R.A.S. 67, 155-177 A survey of southern H II regions

Gum

N = 97 ; (Nos 1-85)

1955J1 A

JOHNSON H.M. 1955,Ap.J. 121, 604-610 Symmetric galactic nebulae

J1-

152 objects among which 36 are new (YM 1 - 36)  YM

1955J1 B

JOHNSON H.M. 1956,Ap.J. 124, 90-92 Symmetric galactic nebulae. II.

J2-

32 objects among which 11 are new (YM 37 - 47)  YM

1955K1

KHAVTASI D.Sh. 1955,Byull. Abastumansk. Astrofiz. Obs. 18, 29-114 (in Russian) A statistical study of dark nebulae (catalogue)

Kh

N = 797 The same author used different numbering for atlas, ref. 1960K1

1955L1

LUYTEN W.J. 1955,The Lund Press, Minneapolis, Minnesota, 40 p. Luyten’s Five Tenths. A catalogue of 1849 stars with proper motions exceeding 0.5” annually

LFT

N = 1849 ; Superseded by LHS (ref. 1979L1)

1955M1

MUNCH L. 1955,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, 28-35 (in Spanish) Catalogo de nebulosas de emision en la Via Lactea del sur. (Catalogue of emission nebulae in the southern Milky Way)

Mu

N = 34

1955P1

PAWSEY J.L. 1955,Ap.J. 121, 1-5 A catalogue of reliably known discrete sources of cosmic radio waves

IAU

N = 38 N and S stand for North and South respectively.

1955R1

ROSSITER R.A. 1955,Publ. Obs. Univ. Michigan 11 Catalogue of southern double stars

N = 1031 (Nos 1-1057)  Don
N = 803 (Nos 1-854) Jsp
N = 8065 (Nos 1-8065)  RDS
N = 5534 (Nos 1-5560)  Rst

The main information is included in IDS Nomencl. (ref. 1963JV).

1955S1

SHAKESHAFT J.R., RYLE M., BALDWIN J.E., ELSMORE B., THOMSON J.H. 1955,Mem.R.A.S. 67, 106-154 A survey of radio sources between declinations -38^{∘} and +83^{∘}Second Cambridge catalogue

2C

N = 1936 ; ν = 81.5 MHz ; HPBW = 1.0^{∘} x 7.5^{∘}

1956B1

BOHM-VITENSE E. 1956,P.A.S.P. 68, 430-436 Extragactic nebulae close to the galactic plane

BV

Tables I, II : (Nos 1-23) extragal. neb. Tables III, IV : (Nos 1-21) extragal. neb. Table V : (Nos 1-3) PN: see PK Nomenclature

BV 5-

1956G1

GONZALEZ Gr., GONZALEZ Gu. 1956,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 15, 16-26 (in Spanish) Estrellas con Hα en emision en las longitudes galacticas de 59^{∘} a 9O^{∘} (Stars With Hα in emission in galactic longi- tudes 59^{∘} to 90^{∘}

GGR

(Nos 1-212)

1956H1 A

HUMASON M.L., MAYALL N.U., SANDAGE A.R. 1956,A.J. 61, 97-162 Redshifts and magnitudes of extragalactic nebulae

HMS

N = 21

1956H1 B

NOONAN T.W. 1973,A.J. 78, 26-31 List of clusters of galaxies with published redshifts

HMS

N = 138

1956H2

HENIZE K.G. 1956,Ap.J.Suppl. 2, 315-344 Catalogues of Hα emission stars and nebulae in the Magellanic Clouds

Table 1: N = 172  LMC EM.∗  LHA 120-S
Table 2: N = 221  LMC H II  LHA 120-N
Table 3: N = 65  SMC EM.∗  LHA 115-S
Table 4: N = 90  SMC H II  LHA 115-N

Identif. charts A few nebulae in the LMC are large regions, containing many well defined objects: •N 10, almost a ”constellation”, contains N 11, N 12, N 13, N 14, N 15. N 56 contains N 57 and N 59. •N 135, 2^{∘} in diameter, contains 30 Dor and Shapley II (including N 144 and N 148), thus a number of nebulae between Nos 136 and 170 ; N 135 is correctly identified on the Hodge + Wright charts (ref. 1967HW). However, maybe since 1973ApJ.130.725 (Table 1, p. 726), N 135 has several times been erroneously quoted instead of the SNR 0547-69.7A and B. For instance this SNR is named N 135 in Table 1, N 135D in Fig. 24a of 1984ApJS.51.345 (Mathewson+ ref. 1983M3 B).

1956H3

HILTNER W.A. 1956,Ap.J.Suppl. 2, 389-462 Photometric polarization and spectrographic observation of O and B stars

Hilt

Table 5: (Nos 1-1259)

1956H4

HARO G. 1956,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 14, 8-18 (in Spanish) Nota preliminar sobre galaxias azules con lineas de emision. (Preliminary note on blue galaxies with emission lines)

Haro

N = 10 (Nos 1-10) Em.G N = 34 (Nos 11-44) Blue G

1956I1

IRIARTE B., CHAVIRA E. 1956,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, 31-34 (in Spanish) Lista de estrellas con Hα en emision entre ℓ = 338^{∘} y ℓ = 33^{∘} (List of stars with Hα emission between ℓ = 338^{∘} and ℓ = 33^{∘}

Ir-Ch

(Nos 1-55)

1956K1

KRON G.E. 1956,P.A.S.P. 68, 125-130 Star clusters in the Small Magellanic Cloud. I. Identification of 69 clusters

Kron

N = 69 ; Identif. charts (see also ref. 1977HW)

1956L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1956,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 1-4 A search for faint blue stars. VII. The region of Praesepe

PrR

Additional table for red stars, Table III : (Nos 1-36). See ref. 1953L1

1956L1 B

LUYTEN W.J. 1962,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 24 p. A search for faint blue stars. XXXI. One thousand blue stars in the region of Praesepe

PrR

Additional table for red stars, Table V : (Nos 37-189)

1956L2

LUYTEN W.J., MILLER F.D. 1956,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 5-13 A search for faint blue stars. VIII. A systematic galactic survey

Table II : (Nos 1-11)  Red stars  MR
(Nos 401-1200)  Faint blue ∗ from ref. 1953L1  LB

1956R1 A

REAVES G. 1956,A.J. 61, 69-76 Dwarf galaxies in the Virgo cluster

GR

Tables I and II : N = 66. Dwarf-like or IC 3475-type objects in the Virgo region.

1956R1 B

REAVES G. 1952,Ph. D. Thesis, Univ. of California, Berkeley Dwarf galaxies in the Virgo cluster

GR

(Nos 67-82)

1956R1 C

REAVES G. 1962,P.A.S.P. 74, 392-397 Dwarf galaxies in Virgo Cluster.

GR

Table I : (Nos 84-90)

1956R1 D

REAVES G. 1977,B.M. Tinsley and R.B. Larson (New Haven: Yale Univ. Obs.) p. 39 The evolution of Galaxies and Stellar Populations

GR

See GR (with format +DD NN) ref. 1983R1 for an extensive work

1956S1

SCHULTE D.H. 1956,Ap.J. 123, 250-252 Some recent results of low-dispersion spectral classification

Schulte

N = 2

1956S2

STOCK J. 1956,Ap.J. 123, 258-266 Magnitudes and colors for stars in two new galactic clusters

Stock

N = 2: Stock 1 = C 1933+251 ; Stock 2 = C 0211+590

1956W1

WALKER M.F. 1956,Ap.J.Suppl. 2, 365-387 Studies of extremely young clusters. I. NGC 2264

WALK

(Nos 1-239)

1957B1

BRUN A. 1957,Atlas des 139 ”Selected Areas” du Mt Wilson, Obs. Lyon, St Genis-Laval

Brun

1957H1

HAFFNER H. 1957,Z. Astrophys. 43, 89-94 Neue galaktische Sternhaufen in der sudlichen Milchstrasse

Haffner

N = 27 ; (Nos 1-22) and (1) to (5) ALTER and RUPRECHT transformed Ha (1) into Haffner 23, and Ha (3) to (5) into Haffner 24 to 26.

1957I1 A

IRIARTE B., CHAVIRA E. 1957,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 16, 3-36 (in Spanish) Estrellas azules en el casquete galactico norte. (Finding list of blue stars in high galactic latitudes)

Ton

(Nos 1-817)

1957I1 B

CHAVIRA E. 1959,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 18, 3-30 (in Spanish) Estrellas azules en el casquete galactico norte. II. (Finding list of blue stars in the North Galactic Pole. II)

Ton

1957L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1957,The Lund Press, Minneapolis, Minnesota Luyten’s two tenths. A catalogue of 9867 stars in the Southern Hemisphere with proper motions exceeding 0”.2 annually

LTT

(Nos 1-9867)

1957L1 B

LUYTEN W.J., ANDERSON J.H. 1961,Publ. Astr. Obs. Univ. Minnesota 3, No. 8 Faint stars with large proper motions

LTT

(Nos 9868-9911) and 38 other large proper motion stars given with LP numbers

1957L1 C

LUYTEN W.J. 1961,The Lund Press, Minneapolis, Minnesota A catalogue of 7127 stars in the Northern Hemisphere

LTT

(Nos 10001-17127)

1957L1 D

LUYTEN W.J. 1962,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 20 p. First supplement to the LTT catalogues

LTT

(Nos 17128-18635) The stars of the 3 catalogues and their supplement are all included in the new LTT (NLTT) catalogue (ref. 1979LU)

1957S1

SHAKHBAZIAN R.K. 1957,Astr. Cirk. 177, 11-12 (in Russian) On a stellar cluster in Ursa Major

Shakhbazian

N = 1 ; Shah I = SHCG 1 in Shakhbazian ref. 1973S4, cluster of 17 galaxies. This object was considered as GCL (stellar cluster) in 1970AR and designated with translitteration rules then available.

1957V1

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1957,Ap.J. 126, 323-325 A search for Cepheids in galactic clusters

Van den Bergh

N = 9

1957V2

VELGHE A.G. 1957,Ap.J. 126, 302-317 Hα emission stars and planetary nebulae in the vicinity of M8 and M20 and in Vela from lI = 230^{∘} to lI = 241^{∘} along the galactic equator

Table 1: (Nos 1-31)  Hα em.∗  near M8 and M20  Ve1-
Table 2: (Nos 32-58)  Hα em.∗  near M8 and M20  Ve2-
Table 3: (Nos 59-62)  PN  near M8 and M20  Ve3-
Table 4: (Nos 63-66)  red ∗  near M8 and M20  Ve4-
Table 5: (Nos 1-10)  Hα em.∗  in Vela  Ve5-
Table 6: (Nos 11-25)  Hα em.∗  in Vela  Ve6-
Table 7: (Nos 26 and 27)  PN  in Vela  Ve7-

See PK Nomenclature for Nos 22, 26, 27 (in Vela) and 59-62 (near M8 and M20) which are given the designation Ve

1958A1

ABELL G.O. 1958,Ap.J.Suppl. 3, 211-288 The distribution of rich clusters of galaxies (epoch 1855 Coordinates, ℓ, b and magnitudes)

ABCG

N = 2712 Positions on POSS prints and 1950 coordinates: see Sastry + Rood, 1971, Ap.J.Suppl. 29, 371-419. Revised and extended by ref. 1989Ac

1958A2

AMBARTSUMIAN V.A., SCHACHBAZIAN R.K. 1958,Dokl. Akad. Nauk Armyan. SSR 26, 277-279 Galaxies multiples et radio-galaxies. IV. Objets bleus proches et galaxies elliptiques

ASh

N = 10

1958B1

BARKHATOVA K.A. 1958,Astr. Zh. 35, 448-457 = Sov. Astr. 2, 410-419 Clusters in the region of the North America Nebula

Barkhatova

N = 2 : Barkhatova 1 = (C 2052 + 458) ; Barkhatova 2 = (C 2142 + 509)

1958C1

CHAVIRA E. 1958,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. No. 17, 15-31 (in Spanish) Estrellas azules en el casquete galactico Sur (A finding list of blue stars in the South Galactic Pole)

TonS

(Nos 1-419)

1958F1

FEIGE J. 1958,Ap.J. 128, 267-272 A search for underluminous hot stars

Feige

N = 114 An Atlas of identification for 113 of these stars is given in Ap.J. 129, 600

1958L1

LINDSAY E.M. 1958,M.N.R.A.S. 118, 172-182 The cluster system of the Small Magellanic Cloud

Lindsay

Table III : (Nos 1-116) ; 1900 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. 14 ”Additional possible clusters” (Nos 1-14 of Table II) are not included in Table III. Identif. charts: ref. 1977HW

1958M1 A

MILLS B.Y., SLEE O.B., HILL E.R. 1958,Austral. J. Phys. 11, 360-387 A catalogue of radio sources between declinations +10^{∘} and -20^{∘}

MSH

N = 1159 This catalogue supersedes the preliminary MSH published in 1957

1958M1 B

MILLS B.Y., SLEE O.B., HILL E.R. 1960,Austral. J. Phys. 13, 676-699 A catalogue of radio sources between declinations -20^{∘} and -50^{∘}

MSH

N = 892

1958M1 C

MILLS B.Y., SLEE O.B., HILL E.R. 1961,Austral. J. Phys. 14, 497-507 A catalogue of radio sources between declinations -50^{∘} and -80^{∘}

MSH

N = 219

1958N1

NUMEROVA A.B. 1958,Izv. Krym. Astrofiz. Obs. 19, 230-340 (in Russian) A catalogue of the spectra, photographic magnitudes and colour indices of 5000 stars in Cygnus in an area of 6^{∘} x 6^{∘} with the centre at α (1950) = 20h05m, δ (1950) = +36^{∘}

Numerova

N = 5024

1958R1

RISHBETH H. 1958,Austral. J. Phys. 11, 550-563 Radio emission from the Vela-Puppis region

R

Table 1 : (Nos 1-77) sources observed at λ = 3.5m Table 2 : (Nos 100-115) sources observed at λ = 15.2m Total number: N = 93

1958S1

STRAND K.Aa., LENHAM A., OWEN T. 1958,A.J. 63, 337-339 A survey of stars with large proper motions in the region of the Orion constellation

Strand

(Nos 1-40)

1958W1

WESTERHOUT G. 1958,B.A.N. 14, 215-260 A survey of the continuous radiation from the galactic system at a frequency of 1390 Mc/s

W

N = 82

1958Y1

YASUDA H., HARA H. 1958,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 6, 1-53 The catalogue of the right ascension of 612 zenith stars for the equinox 1950.0. Observed with Gautier meridian circle

MZC 2α

N = 612

1958Z1

ZVEREV M.S., POLOZHENTSEV D.D. 1958,Trudy Glav. Astr. Obs. Pulkovo, Ser. 2, No.72, 5-76 (in Russian) A preliminary general catalogue of fundamental faint stars with declinations from +90^{∘} to -20^{∘} (FKSZ)

FKSZ

N = 587 ; (Nos 2-931)

1959B1

BLAAUW A., HILTNER W.A., JOHNSON H.L. 1959,Ap.J. 130, 69-79 Photoelectric photometry of the association III Cephei. Erratum in Ap.J. 131, 327 (1960)

BHJ

N = 83 ; Partly cross-identif. with HD, BD, Brodskaja, Munch, ADS

1959B2

BERTAUD C. 1959,J. Observateurs 42, 45-73 Catalogue et bibliographie des etoiles A a spectre particulier (Catalogue and bibliography of A stars with peculiar spectra)

CB59

N = 476 Superseded by: Bertaud + Floquet, N = 1049 + (possible) 189 stars, ref. 1974BF

1959D1

DOLIDZE M.V., ARAKELIAN M.A. 1959,Astr. Zh. 36, 444-447 = Sov. Astr. AJ 3, 434-438 (in Russian) The T-association near ρ Ophiuchi

Do-Ar

N = 88

1959D2

DRAKE F.D. 1959,Paris Symposium on Radio Astronomy, Stanford Univ. Press = IAU Symposium No. 9 and URSI Symposium No. 1, paper 65, 339-346: The nature of the radio source Cygnus X

D

N = 12

1959E1

EDGE D.O., SHAKESHAFT J.R., McADAM W.B., BALDWIN J.E., ARCHER S. 1959,Mem.R.A.S. 68, 37-60 A survey of radio sources at a frequency of 159 Mc/s. 3C survey

3C

N = 471 ; ν = 159 MHz ; HPBW = 72’ x 460’

1959H1 A

HARDORP J., ROHLFS K., SLETTEBAK A., STOCK J. 1959,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol I. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. I. Hamburg spectral survey

LS

N = 1910

1959H1 B

STOCK J., NASSAU J.J., STEPHENSON C.B. 1960,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol. II. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. II.

LS

This volume presents 1095 stars between galactic longitudes 45^{∘}and 80^{∘} N = 1095

1959H1 C

HARDORP J., THEILE I., VOIGT H.H. 1964,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol. III. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. III.

LS

N = 1800

1959H1 D

NASSAU J.J., STEPHENSON C.B. 1963,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol. IV. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. IV.

LS

N = 800

1959H1 E

HARDORP J., THEILE I., VOIGT H.H. 1965,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol. V. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. V.

LS

N = 1320

1959H1 F

NASSAU J.J., STEPHENSON C.B., MacCONNELL D.J. 1965,Hamburger Sternwarte-Warner and Swasey Obs., Hamburg-Bergedorf. Vol. VI. Luminous stars in the Northern Milky Way. VI.

LS

N = 500 Identif. charts: Hamburger Sternwarte, Warner and Swasey Obs. : IIa 1962 Stephenson, C.B., Nassau, J.J. IVa 1963 Stephenson, C.B., Nassau, J.J. VIa 1965 Stephenson, C.B., Nassau, J.J., McConnell, D.J. No published Identif. charts for Vol. I, III, V.

1959K1

KOELBLOED D. 1959,B.A.N. 14, 265-278 Three-colour photometry of the three southern open clusters NGC 3532, 6475 (M7) and 6124

KO

Table 3 : (Nos 1-255) ∗ in NGC 3532 Table 6 : (Nos 1-130) ∗ in NGC 6475 Table 7 : (Nos 1-46) ∗ in NGC 6124

1959M1

MANOVA G.A. 1959,Astr. Zh. 36, 187-190 Newly detected emission stars in Orion

Manova

N = 32

1959M2

MULLER H.G. 1959,Veroff. Univ.-Sternw. Bonn, No. 52, 49 pp. (in German) Messung des kosmischen Radiokontinuums bei 1420 MHz mit hoher Temperaturauflosung (Measurement of the cosmic radio continuum at 1420 MHz with high temperature resolution)

MUL

N = 27 ; (Nos 1-25)

1959P1

PISMIS P. 1959,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, No. 18, 37-38 (in Spanish) New Southern star clusters

Pismis

Table I : (Nos 1-24) OCL Table II : (Nos 1-2) GCL The GCL were subsequently given No. 25 and 26 by Alter et al., ref. 1970AR

1959S1

SLETTEBAK A., STOCK J. 1959,Abh. Hamburger Sternwarte V, 105-128 A finding-list of stars of spectral type F2 and earlier in a north galactic pole region

Table 1 : (Nos 1-365)  SS I
Table 2 : (Nos 1-236) Non BD stars ; finding charts  SS II

1959S2

STEPHENSON C.B. 1959,P.A.S.P. 71, 145-150 and Plate I A possible new galactic cluster involving DEL Lyrae

Stephenson

N = 1 ; C 1851 + 368

1959S3

SHARPLESS S. 1959,Ap.J.Suppl. 4, 257-279 A catalogue of H II regions

Sh2-

N = 313 24 are PN (see PK Nomenclature) ; Sh2-191 probably is Maffei 1, Sh2-197 is Maffei 2 (extragalactic sources) ; Sh2-172 may be extragalactic (4C 60.01 ?)

1959V1 A

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1959,Publ. David Dunlap Obs. 2, 145-156 A catalogue of dwarf galaxies

DDO

(Nos 1-222) ; δ > −23^{∘}

1959V1 B

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1966,A.J. 71, 922-926 Luminosity classifications of dwarf galaxies

DDO

N = 21 ; (Nos 223-243) ; −33^{∘} < δ < −23^{∘}

1960A1

ARP H., VAN DEN BERGH S. 1960,P.A.S.P. 72, 48 and Plate A new faint Globular Cluster

Arp

Arp 1 = Pal 14 = C 1608 + 150 Arp 2 (defined later) = C 1925 - 304

1960F1

FEAST M.W., THACKERAY A.D., WESSELINK A.J. 1960,M.N.R.A.S. 121, 337-385 The brightest stars in Magellanic Clouds

Table II : N = 158 (Nos 1-50) in SMC (Nos 51-158) in LMC

R

Table III: Proven foreground stars (Nos 1F-30F) in SMC (Nos 31F-103F) in LMC

R...F

Identif. charts

1960H1

HARRIS D.E., ROBERTS J.A. 1960,P.A.S.P. 72, 237-255 Radio source measurements at 960 Mc/s

CTA

N = 106 ; among which 6 new sources : CTA 1, 21, 26, 80, 97, 102

1960H2

HODGE P.W. 1960,Ap.J. 131, 351-357 Studies of the Large Magellanic Cloud. I. The red globular clusters

Hodge

(Nos 1-14) ; Nos 12 and 13 are missing

1960K1

KHAVTASI D.Sh. 1960,Byull. Abastumansk. Astrofiz. Obs. (in Russian) Atlas of galactic dark nebulae

Kh

N = 762 The same author used different numbering for the catalogue, ref. 1955K1

1960K2

KUZ’MIN A.D., LEVCHENKO M.T., NOSKOVA R.I., SALOMONOVICH A.E. 1960,Astr. Zh. 37, 975-978 Observations of discrete sources of radio emission on 9.6 cm

KLNS

N = 57

1960L1

LUYTEN W.J. 1960,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 4 p. A search for faint blue stars. XXI. Proper motions for 150 faint stars

R

(Nos 1-16) ; Red stars.

1960R1

RODGERS A.W. 1960,M.N.R.A.S. 120, 163-172 Three-colour photometry in the Southern Coalsack

R

(Nos 1-19)

1960R2

RODGERS A.W., CAMPBELL C.T., WHITEOAK J.B. 1960,M.N.R.A.S. 121, 103-110 A catalogue of Hα emission regions in the southern Milky Way

RCW

N = 182 ; 26 are PN (see PK Nomenclature).

1960R3

ROSLUND C. 1960,P.A.S.P. 72, 205-207 Remarks on some new and some known galactic clusters

Roslund

(Nos 1-7)

1960S1 A

STEPHENSON C.B. 1960,P.A.S.P. 72, 387-392 A spectroscopic search of white dwarfs in the Ursa Major Cluster

C

N = 1 ; See WD Nomenclature

1960S1 B

STEPHENSON C.B. 1962,P.A.S.P. 74, 210-214 A spectroscopic search for new white dwarfs

C

N = 2 ; (Nos 2-3) See WD Nomenclature

1960W1

WILSON R.W., BOLTON J.G. 1960,P.A.S.P. 72, 331-347 A survey of galactic radiation at 960 Mc/S

CTB

N = 110 ; Revised by Wilson, 1963, A.J. 68, 181-185

1960Z1 A

ZWICKY F., HERZOG E., WILD P. 1960,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 32O p. Catalogue of galaxies and of clusters of galaxies. Vol. I

Format FFF-NN or HHMM±DDMM  Cluster of G  ZWCL
Format FFF-NNN or FFF-NNN/N or HHMM.m+DDMM  G  Z

1960Z1 B

ZWICKY F., HERZOG E. 1963,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 8 + 371 pp. Catalogue of galaxies and of clusters of galaxies. Vol. II {ZWCL \atop Z}

1960Z1 C

ZWICKY F., HERZOG E. 1966,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 9 + 394 pp. Catalogue of galaxies and of clusters of galaxies. Vol. III

{ZWCL \atop Z}

Vol. covering the Palomar survey fields of the declination zones +36^{∘}, +42^{∘}, +48^{∘}, +54^{∘} between 5h30m and 20h00m in right ascension.

1960Z1 D

ZWICKY F., HERZOG E. 1968,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 11 + 294 pp. Catalogue of galaxies and clusters of galaxies. Vol. IV

{ZWCL \atop Z}

Vol. covering the Palomar survey fields of the declination zones +60^{∘}, +66^{∘}, +72^{∘}, +78^{∘}, +84^{∘}, +90^{∘}

1960Z1 E

ZWICKY F., KARPOWICZ M., KOWAL C.T. 1965,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 11 + 319 pp. Catalogue of galaxies and of clusters of galaxies. Vol. V

{ZWCL \atop Z}

Vol. covering the Palomar survey fields of the declination zones 0^{∘}, +6^{∘}, +12^{∘}, +18^{∘} between 19h30m and 6h00 in RA.

1960Z1 F

ZWICKY F., KOWAL C.T. 1968,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA, 14 + 246 pp. Catalogue of galaxies and clusters of galaxies. Vol. VI

{ZWCL \atop Z}

Vol. covering the Palomar survey fields of the declination zones +24^{∘}, +30^{∘}, +36^{∘}, +42^{∘}, +48^{∘}, +54^{∘} in the southern galactic cap

1960Z1 G

THOMSON M.J. 1992,Quarterly J. Royal Astr. Soc. 33, 59-81 A list of some corrections to Zwicky’s Catalogue of Galaxies and Clusters of Galaxies

Z

Research motivated by a study of NGC and IC galaxies with identity problems resulting from differences found to exist between various authorities, both historical and modern. 162 errors were found, which may be grouped into 4 types:

type 1: Listing NGC and IC galaxies as being anonymous type 2: Listing duplicate identities type 3: Failure to detect or properly research previously published corrections type 4: Errors created solely by the CGCG The Tables I-VI correspond to the 6 volumes of the CGCG

1961B1

BAADE W., SWOPE H.H. 1961,A.J. 66, 300-347 The Draco System, a dwarf galaxy

BASV

N = 203 ; (Variable stars)

1961B2

BLANCO V.M. 1961,Contr. Bosscha 13, 12 p. A catalogue of Hα emission objects in the galactic center region

Bl

Table I : (Nos 1-25) Hα emission stars Table II : (A-Q), N = 17 PN, see PK Nomenclature

Bl J = Bl K

Identif. charts

1961D1

DOLIDZE M.V. 1961,Astr. Cirk. 223, 11-12 and subsequent references (in Russian)

Dolidze

N = 47 ; (No 7 is missing)

1961E1

EGGEN O.J., STOY R.H. 1961,R. Obs. Bull., Ser. E, No. 24, E29-E35 Photometry of the cluster NGC 2477

ES

N ≃ 120 ; (Nos 85-998)

1961F1

FOSTER P.R.R. 1961,Ph. D. Thesis, Univ. of Cambridge A study of radio stars

PRF

N = 894

1961I1

ISKUDARIAN S.G., SAAKIAN K.A. 1961,Astr. Cirk. 221, 6-9 (in Russian) The cluster of white dwarfs in Lyra

Iskudarian

N = 1 ; (C 1846 + 368)

1961L1

LARGE M.I., MATHEWSON D.S., HASLAM C.G.T. 1961,M.N.R.A.S. 123, 113-122 A radio survey of the galactic plane at a frequency of 408 MHz. I. The discrete sources

LMH

N = 51

1961L2

LINDSAY E.M. 1961,A.J. 66, 169-185 A new catalogue of emission-line stars and planetary nebulae in the Small Magellanic Cloud

LIN

(Nos 1-593) ; 1900 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. ; Identif. charts

1961M1

McCUSKEY S.W. 1961,P.A.S.P. 73, 264-265 Emission objects near Selected Area 158

Em

N = 7 ; Nos 1, 2, 5 are PN ; see PK Nomenclature

1961M2

MARKARIAN B.E., OGANESIAN E.Y. 1961,Soob. Biurakan Obs. 29, 71-80 (in Russian) White dwarfs in Praesepe (NGC 2632)

M+O

Table 1 : (Nos 1-28) Table 2 : (Nos 1-17)

1961M3

MINKOWSKI R. 1961,A.J. 66, 558-561 NGC 6166 and the cluster Abell 2199

(M)

N = 19

1961S1

SLETTEBAK A., BAHNER K., STOCK J. 1961,Ap.J. 134, 195-206 Spectra and colors of early-type stars near the North Galactic pole

SBS

N = 84

1961T1

THE P.-S. 1961,Contr. Bosscha 10, 8 p. Hα emission stars in the vicinity of NGC 6334 and NGC 6357

THA 10-

Table 2 : (Nos 1-27)

1961V1

VAN BIESBROECK G. 1961,A.J. 66, 528-530 A search for stars of low luminosity

VB

Table I : N = 12 (Nos 1-12) Table II : N = 17 (Nos 13-29)

1961V2

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A. 1961,Astr. Zh. 38, 375-376 New planetary and peculiar gas nebulae

V-V1-

(Nos 1-9) ; See PK Nomenclature V-V1-2 (Sh2-207), V-V1-3 (Sh2-269), V-V1-4 (Sh2-271), V-V1-5 (Sh2-267) are H II regions.

1961W1 A

WILDEY R.L. 1961,Ap.J. 133, 430-437 The color-magnitude diagram of 47 Tuc

Wildey

(Nos 1-300) ; No 197 is missing ; Identif. chart Photoelectric standards designated by greek and roman letters (α , β ; a b d e g l m n ; A B P X Y)

1961W1 B

LLOYD EVANS T. 1974,M.N.R.A.S. 167, 393-411 Near-infrared photometry of globular clusters. II. The metal-rich cluster 47 Tucanae (NGC 104)

Wildey

Table I : V, I photometry; new numbers for the outer parts of 47 Tuc, continuing Wildey numbering (Nos 301-412) Zone III TLE No. 413 Zone IV TLE

Identif. charts

1961W2

WESTERLUND B. 1961,Uppsala Astr. Obs. Ann. 5, No. 1 Population I in the Large Magellanic Cloud

W61

BVRI pg photometry Tables 3-28 ; Identif. charts Nota: The captions for fig. 7 and 8 are inverted (Fig. 7 refers to region d, Table 27) The regions studied are NGC clusters or labelled a, b, c, d, e and subdivisions (e.g. b4, c II:1) The recommended format is FF-NNN where FF is the No. of the relevant Table. Also used is e.g. NGC 2100 WES 17

1962B1 A

BENNETT A.S. 1962,Mem.R.A.S. 68, 163-172 The revised 3C catalogue of radio sources

3C

N = 328 ; ν = 178 MHz

1962B1 B

SMITH H.E., SPINRAD H., SMITH E.O. 1976,P.A.S.P. 88, 621-646 The revised 3C catalog of radio sources: a review of optical identifications and spectroscopy

3C

Optical data for the 3CR radio sources (ref. 1962B1 A) Optical positions, redshifts, magnitudes, and identifications, as well as radio flux densities and spectral indices for the sample of 297 extragalactic 3CR sources

1962B1 C

SMITH H.E., SPINRAD H. 1980,P.A.S.P. 92, 553-569 An update of the status of the Revised 3C Catalog of radio sources: 22 new galaxy redshifts

3C

Updates 1962B1 A and B 297 extragalactic sources

1962B1 D

SPINRAD H., DJORGOVSKI S., MARR J., AGUILAR L. 1985,P.A.S.P. 97, 932-961 A third update of the status of the 3CR sources: Further new redshifts and new identifications of distant galaxies

3C

Updates 1962B1 C 298 extragalactic sources (3C 292 has been added, as strong enough for 3CR inclusion)

1962B2

BLANCO V.M. 1962,P.A.S.P. 74, 330-332 Faint Hα emission objects in Cepheus IV

Blanco

Epoch 1950 coordinates

1962C1

COUSINS A.W.J., STOY R.H. 1962,R. Obs. Bull. 49 Standard magnitudes in the E regions

E

UBVRI standards ; Identif. charts and 1980 coordinates in: Graham J.A., 1982, P.A.S.P. 94, 244-265

1962G1

GICLAS H.L., BURNHAM R.Jr, THOMAS N.G. 1962,Lowell Obs. Bull. 5, No. 118, 257-280 A proper motion survey in the Hyades

HG

Table 1 : (Nos HG7-1 to HG7-259) Table 2 : (Nos HG8-1 to HG8-82) Total number: N = 292

1962H1 A

HARO G., LUYTEN W.J. 1962,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 3, 37-117 (in Spanish) Faint blue stars in the region near the South Galactic Pole

PHL

N = 8725

1962H1 B

HARO G., CHAVIRA E. 1987,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 15, 107-116 On the nature of the PHL objects. Identif. charts of PHL objects in a field of approximately 40 sq.^{∘} centered at 0h53m and -11.5^{∘} (1950)

PHL

Table 2 : Definitely blue stars Table 3 : Blue stars Table 4 : Bluish or white stars Fig. 1-12: Identif. charts

1962H1 C

CHAVIRA E. 1988,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 16, 123-129 Identification charts of PHL objects. II. A field of approximately 40 square degrees centered at 0h04m and +6.5^{∘} (1950)

PHL

Table 2 : Very definitely blue stars Table 3 : Blue stars Table 4 : Bluish or white stars Fig. 1-12: Identif. charts

1962H1 D

CHAVIRA E. 1990,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 20, 47-50 Identification charts of PHL objects. II. Plate centered at 2h28m and -5.5^{∘}

PHL

Table 1 : Very definitely blue stars Table 2 : Blue stars Table 3 : Bluish or white stars Table 4 : Objects with redshifts z > 0.3 Fig. 1-12: Identif. charts

1962H1 E

CHAVIRA E. 1992,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 24, 139-142 Identification charts of PHL objects. II. Plate centered at 22h30m and -11.5^{∘}

PHL

Table 1 : Very definitely blue stars Table 2 : Blue stars Table 3 : Bluish or white stars Fig. 1-12: Identif. charts

1962K1

KLEMOLA A.R. 1962,A.J. 67, 740-756 Mean absolute magnitude of the blue stars at high galactic latitude

Klemola

N = 205 ; Cross-identif.

1962L1

LYNDS B.T. 1962,Ap.J.Suppl. 7, 1-52 Catalogue of dark nebulae

LDN

N = 1802 The galactic coordinates are incorrect, they have been revised by B.T. Lynds for 381 clouds (see Dieter, 1973, Ap.J. 183, 449-468, Table 1 described p. 450). LDN 134N is the core of LDN 183.

1962M1

MATHEWSON D.S., HEALEY J.R., ROME J.M. 1962,Austral. J. Phys. 15, 354-368 A radio survey of the southern Milky Way at a frequency of 1440 MHz. I. The isophotes and the discrete sources

MHR

(Nos 1-66)

1962R1

ROBERTS M.S. 1962,A.J. 67, 79-85 The galactic distributions of the Wolf-Rayet stars

Roberts

Table I : (Nos 1-123) ; See WR Nomenclature, ref. 1981VH Some stars are not WR stars.

1962R2

RYLE M., NEVILLE A.C. 1962,M.N.R.A.S. 125, 39-56 A radio survey of the north polar region with a 4.5 minute of arc pencil-beam system

RN

N = 87

1962S1

STRUVE O., STRAKA W.C. 1962,P.A.S.P. 74, 474-487 Notes on diffuse galactic nebulae

S-S

N = 74

1962T1

THE P.-S. 1962,Contr. Bosscha 15, 13 p. On faint Hα emission stars in Lupus and Scorpius

THA 15-

Table I :  Dark lane L1  (Nos 1-7)  L1-
Table II :  Dark lane L2  (Nos 8-13)  L2-
Table III :  Dark nebulosity L3  (Nos 14-44)  L3-

1962T2

TUZI K. 1962,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 8, 1-181 Tokyo Mitaka catalogue of equatorial stars for the equinox 1950.0 (TME)

TME

N = 4135

1962T3

THE P.-S. 1962,Contr. Bosscha 17, 18 p. Faint Hα emission objects in nebulosities surrounding the star m Cen

Table I, II, III : (Nos 1-90)  Hα em.∗ (among which 78 are new)  THA 17-
Table IV :  Nos A, B, C PN ; (see PK Nomenclature)  Th2-

1962T4

THE P.-S. 1962,Contr. Bosscha 14, 19 p. Hα emission objects in a dark region in Aquila and Scutum

Table II, III, IV : (Nos 1-62) Hα em.∗ Identif. charts

THA 14-

Table V :  PN  Th1-

1962T5

THACKERAY A.D. 1962,M.N.A.S. South Africa 21, 74-76 New members of the Small Magellanic Cloud

T62-

N = 13 ; (Nos 4-40) several missing numbers ; 1875 coordinates ; No magnitudes. Foreground or doubtful: Nos 27 and 37

1962U1

UPGREN A.R. Jr 1962,A.J. 67, 37-78 The space distribution of late-type stars in a north galactic pole region

NGP

N = 4027 ; Identif. charts (no coordinates) ; 1855 declinaison zones

1962V1 A

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A., KRASNOGORSKAIA A.A. 1962,Trudy Gos. Astr. Inst. Sternberg 32, 207 pp. (in Russian) Morphological catalogue of galaxies. Part I. Catalogue of 7200 galaxies between declinations +90^{∘} and +45^{∘}

MCG

N = 7200

1962V1 B

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A., ARKHIPOVA V.P. 1964,Moscow, USSR, 288 pp. (in Russian) Morphological catalogue of galaxies. Part II. Catalogue of 9650 galaxies between declinations +45^{∘} and +15^{∘}

MCG

N = 9650

1962V1 C

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A., ARKHIPOVA V.P. 1963,Trudy Gos. Astr. Inst. Sternberg 33, 260 pp. (in Russian) Morphological catalogue of galaxies. Part III. Catalogue of 6740 galaxies between declinations +15^{∘} and -9^{∘}

MCG

N = 6740

1962V1 D

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A., ARKHIPOVA V.P. 1968,Trudy Gos. Astr. Inst. Sternberg 38, 206 pp. (in Russian) Morphological catalogue of galaxies. Part IV. Catalogue of 5410 galaxies between declinations -9^{∘} and -33^{∘}

MCG

N = 5410

1962V1 E

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A., ARKHIPOVA V.P. 1974,Moscow State Univ. Morphological catalogue of galaxies. Part V.

MCG

N = 1200 ; Total Number: 30200

1962W1

WORLEY C.E. 1962,A.J. 67, 396-402 A visual survey of M-dwarf stars for duplicity

WOR

1963B1

BENNETT A.S. 1963,M.N.R.A.S. 127, 3-13 A survey of extended sources of radio emission

BEN

N = 79

1963D1

DEJC A.N., DEUTSCH A.N. 1963,Astr. Cirk. 259, 1-2 (in Russian) New intergalactic globular cluster?

Dejc

N = 1 ; (C 0234+209)

1963F1

FRICKE W., KOPFF A., GLIESE W., GONDOLATSCH F., LEDERLE T., NOWACKI H., STROBEL W., STUMPFF P. 1963,Veroff. Astr. Rechen-Inst. Heidelberg No. 10, 144 pp. Fourth Fundamental Catalogue (FK4)

FK4

Revision of FK3 ; Includes FK3 Suppl. Catalogue of 1535 fundamental stars for the equinox and epoch 1950.0 and 1975.0 N = 1595 ; (Nos 1-925 and 1001-1670) Published annually in the Apparent places of fundamental stars.

1963JV

JEFFERS H.M., VAN DEN BOS W.H., GREEBY F.M. 1963,Publ. Lick. Obs. 21, 17 + 263 pp. (part I) + 804 pp. (part II) Index catalogue of visual double stars, 1961.0

IDS

Table III in part II (1900 and 2000 coordinates) ; N ≃ 64000 Compiles about 240 discovery lists (Index of discoverer numbers, see Part I, Table II). The stars are named according to the format: HHMM.mNDDMMA (1900 coord.) where N (or S) stands for positive (or negative) declination and A (B, ..) for components. Further compilations of double stars continues in the IDS Nomenclature system. See Data Centers C17, C26, C28 in Table I.3.

1963L1

LINDSAY E.M. 1963,Irish A.J. 6, 127-132 Second list of emission-line objects in the Large Magellanic Cloud

L-

(Nos 1-358) ; 1975 coordinates ; No Identif. charts 53 objects are Henize stars S (ref. 1956H2) cross-identif. in the text The first list is ref. 1963L6 ( acronyms LM1- and LM2-) ; and the third is ref. 1964A1 (acronym AL-)

1963L2

LONG R.J., HASELER J.B., ELSMORE B. 1963,M.N.R.A.S. 125, 313-324 A survey of radio sources at 408 MHz

LHE

N = 559 In Dixon Master List, 1970, Ap.J.Suppl. 20, 1-504 ; unpublished, often quoted in QSO Catalogues.

1963L3

LUYTEN W.J. 1963,Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Bruce proper motion survey. The general catalogue. Vol. I, II

BPM

N = 98218

1963L4

LUYTEN W.J. 1963-1981,Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis, fascicules 1 to 57 Proper motion survey with the 48 inch Schmidt telescope

LP

The largest proper motions are collected in the NLTT Catalogue, Luyten, Univ. Minnesota, 1979-1980, ref. 1979LU N = 29000

1963L5

LYNGA G., WESTERLUND B.E. 1963,M.N.R.A.S. 127, 31-36 A catalogue of clusters in the outer parts of the Large Magellanic Cloud

LW

(Nos 1-435) ; 1975 and ξ , η coordinates Further description see Lindsay 1963 Irish A.J. 6, 233 Identif. on V charts of Hodge and Wright

1963L6

LINDSAY E.M., MULLAN D.J. 1963,Irish A.J. 6, 51-55 First list of emission-line objects in the Large Magellanic Cloud

Table 1 : (Nos 1-65) EM. OBJ. tentatively classified as PN  LM1-
Table 2 : (Nos 1-44) Hα Em. obj. showing no continuum  LM2-

No Identif. charts The 2nd list is ref. 1963L1, (acronym L-), the 3rd list is ref. 1964A1 (acronym AL-)

1963S1

SHAPLEY H., LINDSAY E.M. 1963,Irish A.J. 6, 74-91 A catalogue of clusters in the Large Magellanic Cloud

SL

N = 898 ; for a few errata see Lindsay 1963 Irish A.J. 6, bottom p. 232 Identif. on V charts of Hodge and Wright

1963U1

UPGREN A.R. 1963,A.J. 68, 194-206 Space distribution of stars of intermediate spectral type in a north galactic pole region

UI

N = 1127 ; Spectral type F2 to G5 ; 1855 declination zones (see also: Upgren late spectral type, UL)

1963V1

VON DORSCHNER J., GURTLER J. 1963,A.N. 287, 257-260 Untersuchungen ber Reflexionsnebel am Palomar Sky Survey. I. Verzeichnis von Reflexionsnebeln

DG-

N = 192

1964A1

ANDREWS A.D., LINDSAY E.M. 1964,Irish A.J. 6, 241-247 Third list of emission line objects in the Large Magellanic Cloud

AL-

Epoch 1975 coordinates. Cross-identif. with Henize, 1956 (Nos 1-446) ; No Identif. charts The first list is ref. 1963L6 ( acronyms LM1- and LM2-), the second list is ref. 1963L1 (acronym L-)

1964A2

APRIAMASVILI S.P. 1964,Astr. Cirk. 280, 1-2 (in Russian) On a new open cluster in Scutum

Apriamasvili

N = 1

1964B1

BLANCO V.M., FITZGERALD M.P. 1964,P.A.S.P. 76, 438-439 Faint Hα emission objects near ZET Cephei

BlFg

N = 26

1964B2

BENNETT A.S. 1964,M.N.R.A.S. 127, 1-13 A survey of extended sources of radio emission

ASB

N = 79

1964F1

FEINSTEIN A. 1964,The Observatory 84, 111-117 A group of stars around the helium star HD 96446

Feinstein

N = 1

1964HF A

HOFFLEIT D. 1964,Yale Univ. Obs., New Haven, USA Catalogue of bright stars. Third revised edition

BS

N = 9110 ; On magnetic tape. Microfiche available at CDS Strasbourg. Errata: Bull. Inf. CDS 13, 14-23. Superseded by the new edition (ref. 1982HJ)

1964HF B

HOFFLEIT D. 1979,Bull. Inf. CDS 17, 38-65 Discordances in star designations

BS

1964H1

HIGGS L.A., BROTEN N.W., MEDD W.J., RAGHAVARAO R. 1964,M.N.R.A.S. 127, 367-375 The Cygnus X complex

HBMR

Table 1 : N = 31

1964K1 A

KRAUS J.D. 1964,Nature 202, 269-272 Maps of M31 and surroundings at 600 and 1415 megacycles per second

OA

N = 51

1964K1 B

DIXON R.S., MENG S.Y., KRAUS J.D. 1965,Nature 205, 755-758 Maps of the Perseus region at 600 and 1415 megacycles per second

OA

N = 59

1964K1 C

NASH R.T. 1965,A.J. 70, 846-848 Some high galactic latitude observations at 600 and 1415 Mc/s

OA

N = 25

1964K1 D

KRAUS J.D., DIXON R.S., FISHER R.O. 1966,Ap.J. 144, 559-567 A new high-sensitivity study of the M31 region at 1415 Mc/s

OA

N = 82

1964L1

LYNGA G. 1964,Medd. Lunds Ser. II, No. 140 Studies of the Milky Way from Centaurus to Norma. II. Open clusters

Lynga

Table III : N = 14 ; suspected new clusters ; Identif. charts

1964N1

NASSAU J.J., STEPHENSON C.B., CAPRIOLI G. 1964,Ap.J. 139, 864-868 Spectral classification for new or unclassified late-type variables, emission-line stars, S stars, and planetary nebulae

NSC

N = 102

Table 1 :  (Nos 1-56)  Long period variables
Table 2 :  (Nos 1-20)  Additional em. line ∗
Table 3 :  (Nos 1-8)  Miscellaneous variables
Table 4 :  (Nos 1-16)  S - type ∗
Table 5 :  (Nos 1 and 2)  Planetary nebulae  Na

1964P1

PIKE E.M., DRAKE F.D. 1964,Ap.J. 139, 545-550 A high-resolution map of the Cygnus X region

PD

(Nos 1-26)

1964S1

SHER D. 1964,The Observatory 84, 263-266 and Plates VIII and IX A search for star clusters listed near η Carinae

Sher

N = 1 ; (C 1058-601)

1964T1

THE P.-S., LIM H.-K. 1964,Contr. Bosscha 23 New Hα emission stars in a region to the east of the T-association near ρ Ophiucchi

THA 23-

Table II : (Nos 1-32)

1964T2

THE P.-S. 1964,Contr. Bosscha 27, 1-3 Note on a group of faint Hα emission stars associated with a dark nebulosity in Ophiucus

THA 27-

(Nos 1-8) ; Identif. chart

1964W1

WESTERLUND B.E., SMITH L.F. 1964,M.N.R.A.S. 127, 449-457 Planetary nebulae in the Large Magellanic Cloud

WSPN

Table II : (Nos 1-42) ; 1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts The identified 42 objects form a circular system with the centroid at 5h22m, -69.5^{∘}

1964W2

WESTERLUND B.E., SMITH L.F. 1964,M.N.R.A.S. 128, 311-325 Wolf-Rayet stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

WSWR

Table II : (Nos 1-53) ; 1975 coordinates ; finding charts ; numerous cross-identif. with HD (ref. 1918BR) 5 WR stars identified by Feast (ref. 1960F1) are added ; These stars are identified in ref. 1981BR

1964Y1

YANG K.S., WEST L.A. 1964,A.J. 69, 246-250 Cygnus X region at 610.5 Mc/s

VRO

(Nos 1-69)

1965B1

BRACCESI A., CECCARELLI M., FANTI R., GELATO G., GIOVANNINI C., HARRIS D., ROSATELLI C., SINIGAGLIA G., VOLDERS L. 1965,Lab. Naz. Radioastron. Inst. Fis. Bologna, 33 pp. = Nuovo Cimento B 40, 267-294 A catalogue of radiosources from declination -30^{∘} to -20^{∘}at 408 MHz

Table I :  N = 654  B1
Table II:  N = 38  B1S

1965D1

DAVIS M.M., GELATO-VOLDERS L., WESTERHOUT G. 1965,B.A.N. 18, 42-50 A catalogue of discrete sources observed at 400 Mc/s

DGVW

N = 149

1965E1 A

EGGEN O.J., GREENSTEIN J.L. 1965,Ap.J. 141, 83-108 Spectra, colors luminosities and motions of the white dwarfs

EGGR

(Nos 1-166)

1965E1 B

EGGEN O.J., GREENSTEIN J.L. 1965,Ap.J. 142, 925-933 Observations of proper-motion stars. II.

EGGR

N = 12 ; (Nos 167-178)

1965E1 C

EGGEN O.J., GREENSTEIN J.L. 1967,Ap.J. 150, 927-942 Observations of Proper-motion stars. III.

EGGR

N = 31 ; (Nos 179-202) (in fact goes back to 172)

1965E1 D

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1969,Ap.J. 158, 281-293 The Lowell suspect white dwarfs

EGGR

N = 63 ; (Nos 203-266)

1965H1

HOGG A.R. 1965,Mem. Mt. Stromlo Obs. 4, No. 2, 17 pp. Catalogue of open clusters south of -45^{∘} declination

Hogg

N = 133

1965H2

HOWARD W.E. III, MARAN S.P. 1965,Ap.J.Suppl. 10, 1-330 General catalogue of discrete radio sources HM

1965H3

HODGE P.W., PYPER D.M., WEBB C.J. 1965,A.J. 70, 559-563 Dwarf galaxies in the Fornax cluster

HPW

Table I : (Nos 1-47) format NN (Nos I-III) format R 1950 coordinates ; No Identif. charts

1965K1

KELLERMANN K.I., READ R.B. 1965,Publ. Owens Valley Radio Obs. 1, 1-5 A continuum survey for discrete radio sources at 1421 MHz

CTD

N = 143 ; ν = 1421 MHz ; HPBW = 33’

1965K2

KLARE G., SCHAIFERS K. 1965,The Observatory 85, 202-203 Survey for red dwarfs in the solar neighbourhood

H-K

N = 30 ; Most stars are cross-identif. with HD, CG or Gliese number

1965K3 A

KOHOUTEK L. 1965,B.A.C. 16, 221-227 Hamburg Schmidt-camera survey of faint planetary nebulae

Table 3 :  (Nos 1-63)  PN  K3-
Table 4 :  (Nos 1-46)  Possible PN  K4-

1965K3 B

KOHOUTEK L. 1969,B.A.C. 20, 307-312 Hamburg Schmidt-camera survey of faint planetary nebulae. Galactic anticenter region

Table 5 :  (Nos 1-5)  Compact HII regions  Kohoutek
Table 2 :  (Nos 64-72)  PN  K3-
Table 3 :  (Nos 47-50)  PN  K4-

1965K3 C

KOHOUTEK L. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. 16, 291-300 Hamburg Schmidt-camera survey of faint planetary nebulae. Cygnus- Perseus region

Table 5 :  (Nos 6, 7a, 7b, 7c, 8)  HII regions  Kohoutek
Table 2 :  (Nos 73-94)  PN  K3-
Table 3 :  (Nos 51-60)  PN  K4-

1965L1

LYNDS B.T. 1965,Ap.J.Suppl. 12, 163-185 Catalogue of bright nebulae

LBN

N = 1125

1965L2

LYNGA G. 1965,Medd. Lunds Ser. II, No. 142, 3-16 Studies of the Milky Way from Centaurus to Norma. IV. Galactic structure

L

N = 6

1965M1 A

MacLEOD J.M., SWENSON G.M.Jr, YANG K.S., DICKEL J.R. 1965,A.J. 70, 756-764 A 610.5 Mc/s survey of the sky between declinations +40^{∘} and +44^{∘}

VRO

N = 239

1965M1 B

DICKEL J.R., YANG K.S., McVITTIE G.C., SWENSON G.W.Jr 1967,A.J. 72, 757-768 A survey of the sky at 610.5 MHz. II. The region between declinations +15^{∘} and +22^{∘}

VRO

N = 625

1965M1 C

WENDKER H.J., DICKEL J.R., YANG K.S. 1970,A.J. 75, 148-157 A survey of the sky at 610.5 MHz. III. The region between declinations +22^{∘} and +27^{∘}

VRO

N = 320

1965M1 D

DICKEL J.R., WEBBER J.C., YANG K.S. 1971,A.J. 76, 294-304 A survey of the sky at 610.5 MHz. IV. The region between declinations +27^{∘} and +31.5^{∘}

VRO

N = 336

1965M1 E

WEBB H.D., DICKEL J.R. 1971,A.J. 76, 223-230 Galactic radio emission at 610.5 MHz. III. The region between galactic longitudes 108^{∘} and 138^{∘}

VRO

N = 71

1965M2

MORAN M. 1965,M.N.R.A.S. 129, 447-452 Observations of the radio emission from the galactic plane at a frequency of 610 Mc/s

MM

N = 51

1965N1

NEUGEBAUER G., MARTZ D.E., LEIGHTON R.B. 1965,Ap.J. 142, 399-401 and Plates Observations of extremely cool stars

NML

N = 2 ; NML Tau = IRC +10050 = IK Tau NML Cyg = IRC +40448

1965N2

NICOLSON G.D. 1965,P.A.S.P. 77, 260-268 A survey of southern galactic radiation at 960 Mc/s

GN

(Nos 1-28)

1965P1

PARSAMIAN E.S. 1965,Izv. Akad. Nauk Armyan. SSR., Ser. Fiz.-Math. Nauk 18, 146-148 (in Russian) Catalogue of cometary nebulae discovered on Palomar maps

Parsamian

N = 23

1965P2

PILKINTON J.D.H., SCOTT P.F. 1965,Mem.R.A.S. 69, 183-224 A survey of radio sources between declinations 20^{∘} and 40^{∘}

4C

N = 1219 ; ν = 178 MHz ; See also 4CT

1965R1

RAGHAVARAO R., MEDD W.J., HIGGS L.A., BROTEN N.W. 1965,M.N.R.A.S. 129, 159-168 and Plates 1 to 5 Survey of 9.4 cm radio emission in Cassiopeia and Cepheus

NRC

N = 30 ; HPBW = 37.6’

1965R2

RICHTER N., SAHAKJAN K. 1965,Mitt. Karl-Schwarzschild Obs. Tautenburg 24, p. 5 Statistics of blue objects near the Galactic North Pole

RS

N = 53

1965S1

SANDAGE A., VERON P. 1965,Ap.J. 142, 412-414 Photometric results of a special survey for interlopers

BSO

N = 31

1965U1

UPGREN A.R., RUBIN V.C. 1965,P.A.S.P. 77, 355-358 An old open cluster near the North Galactic Pole

Upgren

N = 1 ; (C 1232+365)

1966A1

ARP G.C. 1966,California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA 19 pp. + 57 pp. of Plates Atlas of peculiar galaxies

APG

(Nos 1-338)

1966A2

ABELL G.O. 1966,Ap.J. 144, 259-279 Properties of some old Planetary Nebulae

A

Table 2 : (Nos 1-86) ; 1950 coordinates A few objects have Identif. charts

1966C1

CASWELL J.L. 1966,Ph. D. Dissertation, Univ. Cambridge, England The angular structure of radio sources observed at 178 Mc/s. The 4CP survey

4CP

N = 1551 ; HPBW = 28’ in α and 18’x sec(52^{∘}10’-δ ) in δ

1966C2

CROWTHER J.H. 1966,Ph. D. Dissertation, Univ. Cambridge, England High resolution observations at a wavelength of 1.7 metres

CR

N = 562

1966C3

CZERNIK M. 1966,Acta Astr. 16, 93-94 New open star clusters

Czernic

N = 45

1966D1

DOLIDZE M.V., DZIMSELEJSVILI G.N. 1966,Astr. Cirk. 382, 7-8 (in Russian) New possible star clusters Dolidze-Dzimselejsvili

N = 11 PN DdDm = PK 061+41 1

DdDm

1966D2

DOWNES D., RINEHART R. 1966,Ap.J. 144, 937-942 Microwave observations of the Cygnus X region

DR

N = 27

1966F1

FOMALONT E.B., ROGSTAD D.H. 1966,Ap.J. 146, 528-541 Radio emission from clusters of galaxies

FR

N = 120

1966H1

HIGGS L.A. 1966,M.N.R.A.S. 132, 67-78 The γ Cygni region of the Cygnus X radio source

HIG

(Nos 1-31)

1966H2

HODGE P.W., SEXTON J.A. 1966,A.J. 71, 363-368 457 new star clusters of the Large Magellanic Cloud

HS

Table II : (Nos 1-455) ; 1975 coordinates ; Identif. on V charts of Hodge and Wright (ref. 1967HW)

1966K1

KOMESAROFF M.M. 1966,Austral. J. Phys. 19, 75-92 A southern Milky Way survey at 408 Mc/s

KOM

N = 49

1966K2

KENDERDINE S., RYLE M., POOLEY G.G. 1966,M.N.R.A.S. 134, 189-210 Some observations of weak radio sources with the Cambridge one-mile telescope

5C1.

N = 106 ; ν = 408 and 1407 MHz

1966K3

KLARE G., SZEIDL B. 1966,Veroff. Landessternw. Heidelberg 18, 9-50 OB-stars of the southern Milky Way

Hbg

(Nos 1-1660) MK spectral types for 1113 stars are given in ref. 1977G1

1966P1

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., WADE C.M., HEESCHEN D.S. 1966,Ap.J.Suppl. 13, 65-12 Positions and flux densities of radio sources + unpublished lists

NRAO

N = 726 + ?

1966P2

PHILIP A.G.D. 1966,Ap.J.Suppl. 12, 391-447 The stellar space distribution in Pegasus at bII = -29^{∘}

Fields defined p. 392 (HLF1, HLF2a, HLF2, HLF2b)  HLF
Table 3 (HLF2 catalogue of data): 1895 stars  HLF2

N = 1895 ; (from 11^{∘} to 20^{∘} of declination), format DD-NNN

1966Q1

QUIGLEY M.J.S., LARGE M.I. 1966,M.N.R.A.S. 134, 239-243 A radio study of the North Polar Spur. III. A catalogue of discrete sources

QL

N = 22

1966R1

RUPRECHT J. 1966,B.A.C. 17, 33-44 Classification of open star clusters

Ruprecht

1966S1

STEPHENSON C.N. 1966,A.J. 71, 477-481 Search for new northern Wolf-Rayet stars

St

(Nos 1-5) ; Identif. charts ; Use WR numbers

1966S2

Smithsonian Astrophys. Obs. 1966,Smithsonian Inst., Washington, D.C., USA Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory star catalog. Positions and proper motions of 258997 stars for the epoch and equinox of 1950.0

SAO

N = 258997 ; Also on magnetic tape

1966T1

THE P.-S. 1966,Contr. Bosscha 34, 5+3 pp. New Hα emission stars in the region of the OB association Sgr III.

THA 34-

Table I : (Nos 1-43)

1966T2

THE P.-S. 1966,Contr. Bosscha 35, 10+11 pp. A catalogue of new Hα emission stars in the η Carinae nebula region

THA 35-

Table II : (Nos 1-170) Table III: (Nos 1-61)

1966U1

ULRICH B.T., NEUGEBAUER G., McCAMMON D., LEIGHTON R.B., HUGHES E.E., BECKLIN E. 1966,Ap.J. 146, 288-290 Further observations of extremely cool stars

CIT

N = 14 ; Cross-identif. with IRC by Strecker D.W., Ney E.P., 1974, A.J. 79, 1410

1966V1 A

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1966,A.J. 71, 990-998 A study of reflection nebulae

VdB

N = 158 ; the number identifies the nebula around a BD of CD star Also gives a list of 13 R Associations

1966V1 B

RACINE R. 1968,A.J. 73, 233-245 Stars in reflection nebulae

VdB

Table II (and Identif. charts, fig. 5, p. 244) introduces additional stars (format NNNa) N = 188

1966W1

WILLIAMS P.J.S., KENDERDINE S., BALDWIN J.E. 1966,Mem.R.A.S. 70, 53-110 A survey of radio sources and background radiation at 38 Mc/s

WKB

N = 1069

1966W2

WRAY J.D. 1966,Univ. Microfilm Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan A study of Hα emission objects in the Southern Milky Way

Table XV : (Nos 1-1887)  EM.∗  WRAY 15-
Table XVI : (Nos 1-423)  PN  WRAY 16-
Table XVII : (Nos 1-113)  Poss.PN  WRAY 17-
Table XVIII: (Nos 1-323)  C∗, S∗  WRAY 18-
Table XIX : (Nos 1-55)  EM.OBJ.  WRAY 19-

1967BA

BATTEN A.H. 1967,Publ. Dom. Astrophys. Obs. 13, 119-251 Sixth catalogue of the orbital elements of spectroscopic binary systems

SB

N = 737 Superseded by the 7th catalogue, ref. 1978BF

1967B1

BASINSKI J.M., BOK B.J., BOK P.F. 1967,M.N.R.A.S. 137, 55-67 A colour-magnitude array for a region in the core of the Small Magellanic Cloud

Photographic B, V photometry (U for ≃ 50%) for 377 stars ; No coordinates ; Identif. chart.

Table I : 9 standard stars  B
Table V : 377 SMC stars  BBB

1967B2

BRANSON N.J.B.A. 1967,M.N.R.A.S. 135, 149-174 A radio survey of the sky north of declination 70^{∘} at a frequency of 81.5 Mc/s

NB

N = 558

1967B3

BRAES L.L.E. 1967,B.A.N. Suppl. 2, 1-58 Determination of proper motions in the region of the association Scorpius OBl

Braes

N = 1113 ; Photos

1967B4

BURBIDGE E.M., BURBIDGE G.R., SHELTON J.W. 1967,Ap.J. 150, 783-786 and Plate 1 A peculiar galaxy that may be at a young evolutionary stage

GB

N = 1

1967B5

BECKLIN E.E., NEUGEBAUER G. 1967,Ap.J. 147, 799-802 Observations of an infrared star in the Orion nebula

BN

N = 1 ; (point source) For precise position, see KL (ref. 1967K2, note p. L4)

1967D1

DAVIS M.M. 1967,B.A.N. 19, 201-226 A 1417 MHz search for radio sources having a flux excess at short wavelengths

DW

N = 188

1967G1

GOWER J.F.R., SCOTT P.F., WILLS D. 1967,Mem.R.A.S. 71, 49-144 A survey of radio sources in the declination ranges -07^{∘} to 20^{∘}and 40^{∘} to 80^{∘}

4C

N = 3624 ; ν = 178 MHz ; format -DD-NN or DD-NN See also 4CT, ref. 1969C1

1967HW

HODGE P.W., WRIGHT F.W. 1967,Smithsonian Inst. Astrophys. Obs. No. 4699 The Large Magellanic Cloud

-

Atlas of the LMC. There are two sets of charts, one in V and one in B. Each set consists of ≃ 80 charts of square areas measuring 1^{∘}1/4 on a side. A master set shows their locations and interrelation, and Tables 3 and 4 give 1975 eq. coordinates of their centers.

Table 5 : Chart location of NGC and IC clusters Table 6 : Other NGC objects Table 7 : NGC objects within Atlas area, not marked Table 8 : Chart location of Shapley-Lindsay clusters Table 9 : Chart location of Lynga-Westerlund clusters Table 10 : Chart location of Hodge-Sexton clusters Table 11 : Chart location of Henize em. objects (here named e)

Table 12 : Variable stars in the LMC  HV

1967H1 A

HAZARD C., GULKIS S., BRAY A.D. 1967,Ap.J. 148, 669-688 and Plate 1 Lunar occultation studies of five weak radio sources of small angular size.

AO

N = 5 ; Arecibo occultation studies ; Identif. charts

1967H1 B

HAZARD C., GULKIS S., SUTTON J. 1968,Ap.J. 154, 413-422 and Plate 1 Occultation studies of weak radio sources: list 2

AO

N = 10 ; Identif. charts

1967H1 C

GULKIS S., SUTTON J., HAZARD C. 1969,Ap.J. 157, 1047-1053 and Plate 1 Arecibo occultation studies: list 3

AO

N = 10 ; Identif. charts

1967H1 D

LANG K.R., SUTTON J., HAZARD C., GULKIS S. 1970,Ap.J. 160, 17-23 and Plate 3 Additional occultation studies of weak radio sources at Arecibo Observatory: list 4.

AO

N = 10 ; Identif. charts

1967H2

HOGLUND B. 1967,Ap.J.Suppl. 15, 61-96 Pencil-beam survey of radio sources between declinations +18^{∘}and +20^{∘} at 750 and 1450 MHz

NRAO

N = 458

1967K1

KRZEMINSKI W., SERKOWSKI K. 1967,Ap.J. 147, 988-1002 Photometric and polarimetric observations of the nearby strongly reddened open cluster Stock 2

KS

(Nos 1-168)

1967K2

KLEINMANN D.E., LOW F.J. 1967,Ap.J.Lett. 149, L1-L4 Discovery of an infrared nebula in Orion

KL

N = 1 ; λ = 22μm ; extended source The KL source contains the BN object of ref. 1967B5

1967M1 A

MARKARIAN B.E. 1967,Astrophysics 3, 24-38 Galaxies with an ultraviolet continuum

MRK

(Nos 1-70) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 B

MARKARIAN B.E. 1969,Astrophysics 5, 206-225 The galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. II.

MRK

N = 130 ; (Nos 71-200) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 C

MARKARIAN B.E. 1969,Astrophysics 5, 286-301 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. III.

MRK

N = 102 ; (Nos 201-302) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 D

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1971,Astrophysics 7, 299-310 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. IV.

MRK

N = 99 ; (Nos 303-401) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 E

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1972,Astrophysics 8, 89-99 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. V.

MRK

N = 106 ; (Nos 402-507) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 F

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1973,Astrophysics 9, 283-295 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. VI.

MRK

N = 97 ; (Nos 508-604) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 G

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1974,Astrophysics 10, 185-194 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. VII.

MRK

N = 96 ; (Nos 605-700) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 H

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1976,Astrophysics 12, 241-254 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. VIII.

MRK

N = 97 ; (Nos 701-797) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 I

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1976,Astrophysics 12, 429-442 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. IX.

MRK

N = 98 ; (Nos 798-895) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 J

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1977,Astrophysics 13, 116-125 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. X.

MRK

N = 100 ; (Nos 896-995) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 K

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1977,Astrophysics 13, 215-228 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. XI.

MRK

N = 100 ; (Nos 996-1095) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 L

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 130-141 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. XII.

MRK

N = 99 ; (Nos 1096-1194) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 M

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 235-250 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. XIII.

MRK

N = 108 ; (Nos 1195-1302) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 N

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 363-376 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. XIV.

MRK

N = 97 ; (Nos 1303-1399) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions

1967M1 O

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1981,Astrophysics 17, 321-332 Galaxies with ultraviolet continuum. XV.

MRK

N = 101 ; (Nos 1400-1500) ; Identif. charts ; Accurate optical positions (Nos 1500-1515) are in ref. 1989ML

1967M1 P

KEEL W.C., VAN SOEST E.T.M. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 94, 553-568 Pairing properties of Markarian starburst galaxies

MRK

Table 4 and 5 : Probably paired, and paired Markarian galaxies

1967PK A

PEREK L., KOHOUTEK L. 1967,Prague, Czechoslovakia, Academia publishing house of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences, 276 pp. Catalogue of galactic planetary nebulae

PK

N = 1036 ; Compilation

1967PK B

ACKER A., MARCOUT J. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 30, 217-221 Bibliographical index of planetary nebulae for the period 1965-1976

PK

N = 148

1967PK C

WEINBERGER R. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 30, 335-341 A list of possible, probable and true planetary nebulae detected since 1966

PK

335 objects Nos 1-335 of first column should never be used

Defines We2- in col. 2  We2-

1967PK D

ACKER A., MARCOUT J., OCHSENBEIN F. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 265-266 Catalog and bibliographical index of planetary nebulae (magnetic tape and microfiche)

PK

N = 1455 ; (Contains Perek and Kohoutek, 1967, and Weinberger, 1977).

1967PK E

SANDULEAK N. 1976,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs., 2, 57-68 Objective-prism spectroscopy of planetary nebulae in the Southern Milky Way

PK

Table 1 :  (Nos 1-179)  Misclassified and doubtfully classified planetary nebulae
Table 2 :  (Nos 1-150)  Faint, suspected planetary nebulae

Among them, 5 have been observed by Stephenson C.B., and also named St2- (list 2 of Stephenson)

Sa3-

Table 3 : Undetected objects previously classified as planetary nebulae (identified by PK or Wray number)

1967PK F

ACKER A., MARCOUT J., OCHSENBEIN F. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 54, 315-364 Index and cross-identif. of planetary nebulae

PK

86 discovery lists of PN and cross-identif. for 1518 objects. New version of the Index of discovery lists of true, probable and possible planetary nebulae, distributed by CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg) 1982, ACKER A.+, as complement of the catalogue ref. 1982AC

1967PK G

KOHOUTEK L. 1978,IAU Symp. 76, ”Planetary Nebulae”, held at Ithaca, Ed. Y. Terzian, D. Reidel Publish. Comp., p. 47-62 New and misclassified planetary nebulae

PK

First supplementary list to the Catalogue of Galactic Planetary Nebulae: Table 1 : 226 new PN discovered between 1966 and 1977 Appendix to table 1 : 9 possible proto-planetary nebulae Table 2 : 34 misclassified planetary nebulae

1967PK H

KOHOUTEK L. 1983,IAU Symp. 103, Planetary Nebulae, p. 17-30

PK

Second supplementary list to the Catalogue of Galactic Planetary Nebulae: Table 1 : 85 new PN (discovered 1978-1981) Table 2 : 33 misclassified planetary nebulae

1967PK I

LUTZ J.H., KALER J.B. 1983,P.A.S.P. 95, 739-744 Misclassified and misidentified planetary nebulae and nuclei PK

1967PK J

KOHOUTEK L., PAULS R. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 60, 87-90 Spectroscopic verification of suspected planetary nebulae. I.

PK

Table I : 8 objects are confirmed to be PN, M4-1 is an EM.G, K2-13 a plate fault ; the status of He2-111 remains uncertain

1967PK K

WEST R.M., KOHOUTEK L. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 60, 91-97 Spectroscopic verifications of suspected planetary nebulae. II.

PK

See Table I : 7 confirmed PN among 19 objects studied The Central Stars of true and possible planetary nebulae are studied in ref. 1982AC

1967PK L

KOHOUTEK L. 1989,IAU Symp. 131, 29-37 New and misclassified planetary nebulae

PK

Table 1 : 75 new PN, 1950 coordinates Table 2 : 41 misclassified PN Table 3 : Objects with incorrect identif. in ref. 1967PK

1967PK M

ACKER A., STENHOLM B. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 86, 219-225 Misclassified planetary nebulae

PK

105 newly misclassified PN.

1967PK N

KOHOUTEK L. 1994,A.N. 315, 63-72 New and misclassified planetary nebulae

PK

Table 1: 81 objects discovered between 1987 and 1990 have been accepted as new PN. Appendix to Table 1: Possible pre-PN. Table 2: 86 misclassified objects.

1967R1

ROOD H.J., BAUM W.A. 1967,A.J. 72, 398-406 Photographic brightness profiles of Coma Cluster galaxies. I. Catalogue

RB

N = 271

1967R2

RUBIN V.C., MOORE S., BERTIAU F.C. 1967,A.J. 72, 59-64 Faint blue objects in the Virgo Cluster region

RMB

N = 228 Table 1 indicates 1950 coordinates (and references for finding charts) for 228 RMB objects and 5 TON objects.

1967S1 A

SCHEER D.J., KRAUS J.D. 1967,A.J. 72, 536-543 A high-sensitivity survey of the North Galactic Polar region at 1415 MHz

OB to OZ

Beginning of 8 papers containing the 1415 MHz Ohio survey: Collins Nos 52.113, 115 to 122; several authors. Recapitulation of all papers in ref. 1967S1 B

1967S1 B

RINSLAND C.P., DIXON R.S., KRAUS J.D. 1975,A.J. 80, 759-770 Ohio Survey supplement 2

OB to OZ

N ≃ 19000 Table I and fig. 1 of this paper are a recapitulation of the 8 previous papers (see ref. 1967S1 A) containing the 1415 MHz Ohio survey.

1967Z1

ZWICKY F., LUYTEN W.J. 1967,The Observatory, Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 4 pp. A search for faint blue stars. XLV. Ultrafaint blue stars and compact objects observed with the 200-inch telescope

ZL

N = 218

1968B1 A

BARBIERI C., ERCULIANI L., ROSINO L. 1968,Publ. Oss. Astr. Padova, No. 143 Studies of blue objects in high galactic latitudes. I. Blue faint objects in the field of 88 Leonis

A1-

N = 129 ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; field centered ℓ = 243^{∘}, b = 67^{∘}

1968B1 B

ERCULIANI ABATI L. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 48, 333-343 The physical nature of the blue objects in the field of 88 Leonis

A1-

1968B2

BAILEY F.A., POOLEY G.G. 1968,M.N.R.A.S. 138, 51-66 Fan-beam observations of radio sources at 408 and 1407 MHz

BP

N = 198

1968B3

BLANCO V.M., DEMERS S., DOUGLASS G.G., FITZGERALD M.P. 1968,Publ. U.S. Naval Obs., Second Ser., 21 (on magnetic tape) Photoelectric catalogue, magnitudes and colors of stars in the UBV and UcBV systems

USN

N = 20705 Superseded by CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg) updated compilations

1968B4

BLUM E.J., DAVIS M.M. 1968,Astrophys. Lett. 2, 41-44 Spectral characteristics of radio sources from a limited survey a 6 cm

Table I :  N = 10  (Nos 1-10)  (Field A)  BDA
Table I:  N = 24  (Nos 1-24)  (Field B)  BDB

1968B5

BRIDLE A.H., PURTON C.R. 1968,A.J. 73, 717-726 Observations of radio sources at 10.03 MHz

DB

N = 124

1968G1 A

GROSSENBACHER R., MESROBIAN W.S., UPGREN A.R. 1968,A.J. 73, 744-746 Parallaxes and proper motions of stars from plates with the Van Vleck 2O-inch refractor

VVO

(Nos 1-9)

1968G1 B

MESROBIAN W.S., NELSON R.M., UPGREN A.R., GROSSENBACHER R. 1969,A.J. 74, 752-754 Parallaxes of fourteen stars from plates taken with the Van Vleck 20-inch refractor

VVO

N = 14 ; (Nos 10-23)

1968G1 C

UPGREN A.R., MESRDBIAN W.S., NELSON R.M., GROSSENBACHER R., KERRIDGE S.J. 1970,A.J. 75, 319-320 Parallaxes and proper motions of 22 stars

VVO

N = 22 ; (Nos 24-45)

1968G1 D

KERRIDGE S.J., GROSSENBACHER R., UPGREN A.R. 1971,A.J. 76, 77-78 Parallaxes and proper motions. IV.

VVO

1968G1 E

UPGREN A.R., MESROBIAN W.S. 1971,A.J. 76, 78-80 Parallaxes and proper motions. V. Photographic measures of six double stars

VVO

N = 12 ; (Nos 74-85)

1968G1 F

MESROBIAN W.S., UPGREN A.R. 1971,A.J. 76, 1133-1134 Parallaxes and proper motions. VI.

VVO

N = 30 ; (Nos 86-115)

1968G1 G

MESROBIAN W.S., GRIESS T.D., TITTER J.C. 1972,A.J. 77, 392-394 Parallaxes and proper motions. VII. Double-star measures

VVO

N = 8 ; (Nos 116-123)

1968G1 H

TITTER J.C., MESROBIAN W.S., UPGREN A.R. 1972,A.J. 77, 875-877 Parallaxes and proper motions. VIII.

VVO

N = 24 ; (Nos 124-147)

1968G1 I

UPGREN A.R., BURT S.E., MESROBIAN W.S. 1974,A.J. 79, 708-709 Parallaxes and proper motions. IX.

VVO

N = 20 ; (Nos 148-167)

1968G1 J

UPGREN A.R., WEIS E.W. 1975,A.J. 80, 711-713 Parallaxes and proper motions. X.

VVO

N = 20 ; (Nos 168-187)

1968G1 K

BURT S.E., WEIS E.W. 1976,A.J. 81, 551-553 Parallaxes and proper motions. XI. Double-star measures

VVO

N = 10 ; (Nos 188-197)

1968G1 L

WEIS E.W., UPGREN A.R. 1976,A.J. 81, 1144-1146 Parallaxes and proper motions. XII.

VVO

N = 30 ; (Nos 198-227)

1968G1 M

UPGREN A.R., BREAKIRON L.A. 1980,A.J. 85, 71-73 Parallaxes and proper motions. XIII.

VVO

N = 7 ; (Nos 228-234) ; Cross-identif.

1968G1 N

BREAKIRON L.A., UPGREN A.R., WEIS E.W. 1982,A.J. 87, 141-144 Parallaxes and proper motions. XIV.

VVO

N = 19 ; (Nos 235-253)

1968G1 O

UPGREN A.R., KUZMA T.J. 1983,A.J. 88, 132-134 Parallaxes and proper motions. XV.

VVO

1968G1 P

WEIS E.W., NATIONS H.L., UPGREN A.R. 1983,A.J. 88, 1515-1518 Parallaxes and proper motions. XVI.

VVO

N = 30 ; (Nos 273-302)

1968G1 Q

UPGREN A.R., WEIS E.W., NATIONS H.L., LEE J.T. 1985,A.J. 90, 652-654 Parallaxes and proper motions. XVII.

VVO

N = 23 ; (Nos 303-325)

1968G1 R

UPGREN A.R., FU H.-H., LEE J.T. 1989,A.J. 98, 1100-1103 Parallaxes and proper motions. XVIII

VVO

Table I : (Nos 326-357)

1968G1 S

UPGREN A.R., ZHAO H., LEE J.T. 1992,A.J. 104, 1203-1206 Parallaxes and proper motions. XIX. The subdwarf sequence

VVO

Table 1 : (Nos 358-376) ; J2000 coordinates

1968G2

GALT J.A., KENNEDY J.E.D. 1968,A.J. 73, 135-151 Survey of radio sources observed in the continuum near 1420 MHz, declinations -5^{∘} to +70^{∘} . Dominion list A

DA

N = 615 ; ν = 1420 MHz ; HPBW = 36’

1968G3

GRUEFF G., VIGOTTI M. 1968,Astrophys. Lett. 2, 113-120 A pencil-beam deep sky survey at 408 MHz

GV

N = 328

1968H1 A

HULSBOSCH A.N.M. 1968,B.A.N. 20, 33-39 High-velocity hydrogen complexes at high galactic latitudes

A, AC, B, C K, M, SP

A, AC etc... stand for hydrogen complexes, then subcomponents or clouds are specified as AI, AII, ... Tables 1, 2 and maps define ACI to III, B, CI to III, MI and MII λ = 21 cm ; HP BW = 0.61^{∘} × 0.66^{∘}

1968H1 B

GIOVANELLI R., VERSCHUUR G.L., CRAM T.R. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 12, 209-262 High resolution studies of high velocity clouds of neutral hydrogen

A, C, M

λ - 21 cm ; HPBW = 9’.7 Table 4 : 9 concentrations in complex A (format R.N) Table 5 : 2 concentrations in complex C (format RA) Table 7 : 6 concentrations in complex M (format R.N) Also studies concentrations in 0MM360 and HVC 112+2-139 HI maps at different velocities. See also HVC and IVC in ref. 1975H1 A and B and a comprehensive study in ref. 1991WV

1968H2

HEILES C. 1968,Ap.J. 151, 919-934 Normal OH emission and interstellar clouds

Cloud

Cloud (Nos 1-5) ; Search for OH emission ; Maps for clouds 1, 2, 4 Numbering is different from that in Heiles, 1973.

1968H3 A

HARO G. 1968,Stars and Stellar Systems Vol. VII, 141-166 Flare stars Table 1 : (Nos 1-176) Flare ∗ in Orion nebula region

1900 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. with Parenago (ref. 1954P1) and Brun (1935, Pub. obs. Lyon, 1, ser. 1, 12) Identif. charts: see ref. 1968H3 B

HFS1-

Table 3 : (Nos 1-13)  Flare ∗ in NGC 2264  HFS3-
Table 4 : (Nos 1-11)  Flare ∗ in Tau DCld  HFS4-
Table 5 : (Nos 1-61)  Flare ∗ in Pleiades  HFS5-
Table 7 : (Nos 1-4)  Flare ∗ in Coma Ber  HFS7-
Table 8 : (Nos 1-11)  Flare ∗ in Praesepe  HFS8-

1968H3 B

HARO G., CHAVIRA E. 1969,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 5, 59-66 (in Spanish) Flare stars in the Orion nebula region

HFS1-

(Nos 177-254) ; 1900 coordinates For Nos 177-179 see also Haro+ 1969 Bol. Obs. Ton. Tac. 12, 33 Infrared photographic maps for 254 stars

1968H3 C

PARSAMIAN E., CHAVIRA E., GONZALEZ G. 1978,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 2, 341-343 (in Spanish) Flare stars in the Orion nebula region

HFS1-

No. 257 and 260, and (Nos 326-329) ; 1900 coordinates Fig. 1: Photographic reproductions of some new stars.

1968H3 D

CHAVIRA E., PARSAMIAN E. 1991,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 22, 15-17 New flare stars and repetitions in the Orion association region

HFS1-

(Nos 261-298) ; 1900 coordinates Fig. 2, 3: Identif. plates of new stars.

1968H3 E

PARSAMIAN E., CHAVIRA E., GONZALEZ G. 1993,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 25, 71-73 New flare stars and repetitions in the Orion association region. II.

HFS1-

(Nos 340-359) ; 1950 coordinates See also 1992IBVS.3764.1C Chavira+, same objects, and a remark: Some objects of Ton do not exist at all, they are 255, 256, 258, 259, 299-325.

1968I1 A

ISSERSTEDT J. 1968,Veroff. Astr. Inst. Univ. Bochum 1, 1-79 Sternringe, eine neue Art von Sternaggregaten und ihre Beziehung zur galaktischen Struktur. (Stellar rings, a new kind of stellar association and their relation to galactic structure)

SR

N = 1002

1968I1 B

URANOVA T.A. 1973,Astr. Cirk. 772, 4-6 (in Russian) Supplement list of stellar rings. I.

SR

(Nos Anon 1 to Anon 46)

1968I1 C

URANOVA T.A. 1973,Astr. Cirk. 773, 3-5 (in Russian) Supplement list of stellar rings. II.

SR

(Nos Anon 47 to Anon 85)

1968K1

KESTEVEN M.J.L. 1968,Austral. J. Phys. 21, 369-376 A catalogue of galactic radio sources

Kes

N = 80

1968K2

KARACHENTSEVA V.E. 1968,Soob. Biurakan Obs. 39, 61-73 The distribution of Sculptor-type dwarf galaxies

Karachentseva

(Nos 1-241) ; 1950 coordinates ; Cross-identif. with GR (format NN, ref. 1956R1 A and C) and DDO (ref. 1959V1 A)

1968L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1968,Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 219 pp. Proper motion survey with the forty-eight-inch Schmidt telescope. The North Polar cap

PSM

N = 10592

1968L1 B

LUYTEN W.J. 1970,Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 36 pp. Proper motion survey with the 48-inch Schmidt telescope. XXII. Special catalogue for the zone +70^{∘} to +75^{∘}

PSM

N = 852 ; (Nos 11015-18010) ; numbers are missing

1968L2

LYNGA G. 1968,Ark. Astr. 5, 181-196 A catalogue of faint OB stars between Carina and Centaurus

Ly

N = 284

1968M1

McCARTHY M.F., TREANOR P.J. 1968,Ric. Astr. Specola Vaticana 7, 367-398 A finding list of late type members of the Pleiades cluster

LLP

N = 144

1968M2

MAFFEI P. 1968,P.A.S.P. 80, 618-621 Infrared object in the region of IC 1805

Maffei

N = 2 ; Maffei 1 is a galaxy.

1968M3

MacCONNELL D.J. 1968,Ap.J.Suppl. 16, 275-298 A study of the Cepheus IV association

Table 4A :  (Nos 1-24)  objects having Hα in emission  MacC H
Table 4B :  (Nos 1-20)  objects suspected of Hα emission  MacC sH

Identif. charts ; See also ref. 1976 C2

1968P1

PHILIP A.G.D., SANDULEAK N. 1968,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 4, 253-268 (in Spanish) A finding list of stars of spectral type A7 and earlier in regions at high galactic latitudes. II. South galactic pole

Table 1 : (Nos 1-118) ; Cross-identif. with BD or CD Table 2 : (Nos 1-62) ; not in BD nor CD PS2-

1968P2

POOLEY G.G., KENDERDINE S. 1968,M.N.R.A.S. 139, 529-550 The 5C2 survey of radio sources

5C2.

N = 207 ; HPBW = 80”(α ) x 100”(δ ) and 23” x 30” at 1407 MHz.

1968R1

ROJKOVSKIJ D.A., KURCHAKOV A.V. 1968,Acad. Sci. Kazan. Trudi Astr. Inst., XI, p. 3-42 + tables The catalog of the reflection nebulae

RK

(Nos 1-118)

1968S1 A

SANDULEAK N. 1968,A.J. 73, 246-250 A finding list of proven or probable Small Magellanic Cloud members

Sk

(Nos 1-169) ; Identif. charts.

1968S1 B

SANDULEAK N. 1969,A.J. 74, 877-878 Proven and probable members in the wing of the Small Magellanic Cloud

Sk

N = 47 ; (Nos 170-216) ; Identif. charts.

1968S2

SMITH L.F. 1968,M.N.R.A.S. 138, 109-121 A revised spectral classification system and a new catalogue for galactic Wolf-Rayet stars

LSWR

(Nos 1-16) ; See WR Nomenclature, ref. 1981VH

1968W1

WESTERLUND B.E. 1968,Ap.J.Lett. 154, L67-L68 and Plate L1 On the extended infrared source in Ara

Westerlund

N = 1 ; (C 1644-457) ; 1950 coordinates: α = 16h43.2min ; δ = −45^{∘}45.2′ First defined in Westerlund, 1961, P.A.S.P. 73, 51 Westerlund 2 (defined elsewhere) = C 1022-575

1969A1

ANDRIEVSKI A.E., SPANGENBERG E.E., VALTZ I.E., GINDILIS L.M., GORSHKOV A.G., IVANOV V.N., KONNIKOVA V.K., KURILCHIK V.N., LARIONOV M.G., MOISEEV I.G.,NIKITIN V.V., PORTMAN V.I., SOGLASNOV V.A. 1969,Astr. Cirk. 494, 1-3 (in Russian) Flux densities of discrete radio sources at 3.5 cm wavelength

CRI

N = 130

1969C1

CASWELL J.L., CROWTHER J.H. 1969,M.N.R.A.S. 145, 181-196 A pencil-beam survey of radio sources at 178 MHz (revision and implement of 4C)

4CT

N = 726 among which 86 are new ; HP BW = 23′inαand18′.4 × sec(52^{∘}10′ − δ)inδ

1969D1

DICKEL H.R., WENDKER H.J., BIERITZ J.H. 1969,Astr. Astrophys. 1, 270-280 The Cygnus X region. V. Catalogue and distances of optically visible HII regions

DWB

N = 193

1969E1 A

EKERS J.A. 1969,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 7, 1-75 The Parkes catalogue of radio sources, declination zone +20^{∘}to -90^{∘}

PKS

This list replaces and improves the earlier four lists (1964 to 1966). N = 1780 ; ν = 2700 MHz ; 210 - foot telescope

1969E1 B

SHIMMINS A.J., DAY G.A. 1968,Austral. J. Phys. 21, 377-403 The Parkes catalogue of radio sources. Declination zone +20^{∘}to +27^{∘}

PKS

N = 397 ; ν = 635, 1410 and 2650 MHz ; 210-foot telescope

1969G1 A

GLIESE W. 1969,Veroff. Astr. Rechen-Inst. Heidelberg No. 22, 117 pp. Catalogue of nearby stars, edition 1969

GJ

N = 1529 ; (Nos 1.0-965.0)

1969G1 B

GLIESE W., JAHREISS H. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 38, 423-448 Nearby star data published 1969-1978

GJ

Table 1 :  (Nos 1000-1294)  Nearby stars
Table 2 :  (Nos 2001-2159)  Suspected nearby stars

1969H1

HOLDEN D.J., CASWELL J.L. 1969,M.N.R.A.S. 143, 407-435 178 MHz observations of galactic radio sources

HC

N = 45 ; Cross-identif. with K, A, W, CTB, M, LMH, D, 3CR, ASB (defined p. 409).

1969H2

HUGHES V.A., ROUTLEDGE D. 1969,A.J. 74, 604-607 A detailed survey of the galactic plane at a wavelength of 9.26 cm between longitudes 32^{∘} and 49^{∘}

(HR)

Table II : N = 55

1969J1

JAIDEE S., LYNGA G. 1969,Ark. Astr. 5, 345-379 A search for faint violet stars in southern galactic latitudes

JL

N = 296

1969KK A

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., PSKOVSKIJ Yu.P., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S. 1969,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst., 336 pp. (in Russian) General catalogue of Variable Stars. 3rd edition, volumes I-III

V

3 volumes (1969, 1970, 1971) This catalogue is often designated as GCVS

1969KK B

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., PSKOVSKIJ Yu.P., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S. 1971,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. (in Russian and English) First supplement to the third edition of the General Catalogue of Variable Stars

V

Containing information on 2216 variable stars designated in 1970 and improved information on 1907 previously designated stars

1969KK C

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S. 1972-1976,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst., 234 pp. (in Russian and English) Special supplements to the third edition of the General Catalogue of Variable Stars

V

Supplements containing the list of stars arranged in the order of right ascension for the equinox 1950.0

1969KK D

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S. 1972,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. (in Russian and English) Special supplement to the third edition of the General Catalogue of Variable Stars

V

Containing the list of 32731 variable stars arranged in the order of α (1950,0)

1969KK E

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., EFREMOV Yu.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., PSKOVSKIJ Yu.P., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S. 1974,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. (in Russian and English) Second supplement to the third edition of the General Catalogue of Variable Stars

V

Containing information on 2490 variable stars designated in 1972-73 and improved information on 2196 previously designated stars

1969KK F

KUKARKIN B.V., KHOLOPOV P.N., FEDOROVICH V.P., FROLOV M.S., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., PSKOVSKIJ Yu.P. 1976,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. (in Russian and English) Third supplement to the third edition of the General Catalogue of Variable Stars

V

Containing information on 699 variable stars designated in 1974-75 and improved information on 3923 previously designated stars

1969K1

KLEMOLA A.R. 1969,A.J. 74, 804-806 Groups and clusters of southern galaxies

KLEM

N = 44 ; 1875 coordinates ; angular diameter ; magnitude of the brightest galaxy.

1969L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1969,Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis Proper motion survey with the 48-inch Schmidt telescope. XIX. Special catalogue in the North Polar Cap

LPD

(Nos 1-313)

1969L1 B

LUYTEN W.J. 1970,Univ. of Minnesota, Minneapolis, 36 pp. Proper motion survey with the 48-inch Schmidt telescope. XXII. Special catalogues for the zone +70^{∘} to +75^{∘}

LPD

N = 216 ; (Nos 314-524)

1969M1

MELCHIOR P., DEJAIFFE R. 1969,Ann. Obs. R. Belgique, 3e ser., 10, 63-339 (in French) Calcul des declinaisons et mouvements propres des etoiles du Servi- ce International des Latitudes a partir des catalogues meridiens

ILS

N = 440 ; See also Melchior + Dejaiffe, Obs. R. Belgique, Comm. Ser. B, No. 74 (1973)

1969N1

NEUGEBAUER G., LEIGHTON R.B. 1969,NASA SP-3047 Two μm sky survey: a preliminary catalog. Caltech infrared Catalog

IRC

N ≃ 20000

1969P1

POOLEY G.G. 1969,M.N.R.A.S. 144, 101-127 5C3: A radio continuum survey of M31 and its neighbourhood

5C3.

N = 213 ; ν = 408 MHz, HPBW = 80” x 120”

ν = 1407 MHz, HPBW = 23” x 35”

1969S1

SOFIA S., EICHHORN H., GATEWOOD G. 1969,A.J. 74, 20-24 A study of the positions and proper motions of 83 stars in the region of Sco X-1

SEG

N = 83

1969S2

STOCKTON A. 1969,Ap.J.Lett. 155, L141-L142 Spectroscopy of a new, faint quasi-stellar object

QS

N = 1

1969S3

SVOPOULOS S.N. 1969,A.N. 291, 129-130 Distribution of luminous stars in the region of one high velocity hydrogen cloud

Svop

(ℓ)II = 72.6^{∘}, (b)II= +15.9^{∘}

1969V1

VERSCHUUR G.L. 1969,Astrophys. Lett. 4, 85-87 Some very cold HI clouds found in emission

Cloud

N = 7 ; (Cold HI clouds)

1969V2

VAN ALTENA W.F. 1969,A.J. 74, 2-19 Low luminosity members of the Hyades cluster. II.

vA

(Nos 1-778) ; List first given in A.J. 71, 482, 1966 (positions are better here)

1969W1

WINDRAM M.D., KENDERDINE S. 1969,M.N.R.A.S. 146, 265-288 Extension of the radio source luminosity function. I. Observations

WK

(Nos 1-478)

1970AR A

ALTER G., RUPRECHT J., VANYSEK J. 1970,Akad. Kiado, Budapest, 3086 p., 2nd edition Catalogue of star clusters and associations + supplements

N = 70  Associations  Ass-
N = 125  Globular clusters  GCl-
N = 1044  Open clusters  OCl-

1970AR B

RUPRECHT J., BALAZS B., WHITE R.E. 1981,Akad. Kiado, Budapest Catalogue of star clusters and associations. Suppl. 1 to the 2nd edition

The bibliography is complete up to 1973 Errata to part A: Bull. Inf. CDS 23, 74, 1982. Part A : Introduction

Errata in 2nd ed. (1970AR)

Table 2 : lists of new objects (introduces insertions in the format)

Table 3 : Objects ordered according to α

Table 4 : GCl ordered according to galactic coordinates

Table 5 : Objects in the Supplement

Table 6 : Cross-identif. with NGC, IC, M, Cluster names

Table 7, 8, 9: O Associations, alphabetical order,

Morgan’s designation, Schmidt’s designation

Part B1 : New data (Nos 1-1044) : Open clusters (Nos 1-1039) and Moving clusters (Nos 1040-1044), p. 400-401

OCl-

N = 14 : Stellar groups, p. 402-412,

the designation is the name of the stellar group

Part B2 : (Nos 1-70) : Associations, p. 413-484  Ass-
(Nos 1-125) : Globular clusters, p. 487-623  GCl-

Extragal. Objects, p. 626-653 (NGC objects and Magellanic Clouds)

1970B1 A

BERNACCA P.L., PERINOTTO M. 1970,Contr. Oss. Astrofis. Asiago 239 A catalog of stellar rotational velocities. I. II.

Bernacca

I. Main sequence single stars (numbered 1-1005) II. Main sequence spectroscopic binaries and eclipsing systems (numbered 1-360)

1970B1 B

BERNACCA P.L., PERINOTTO M. 1971,Contr. Oss. Astrofis. Asiago 250 A catalog of stellar rotational velocities. III.

Bernacca

III.Stars with peculiar spectrum a) Be and shell stars (Nos 1-189)

b) Bp, Ap, Apec and Am stars (Nos 1-243)

1970B1 C

BERNACCA P.L., PERINOTTO M. 1973,Contr. Oss. Astrofis. Asiago 294 A catalog of stellar rotational velocities. IV.

Bernacca

IV.Evolved stars (Nos 1-1278)

1970B2

BAHCALL J.N., BAHCALL N. 1970,P.A.S.P. 82, 721-729 On the galaxies in the direction of TON 256 and B 264

B & B

N = 21 ; (2 tables numbered 1-21) ; 1950 coordinates and estimated mV ; Identif. charts

1970B3

BRACCESI A., FORMIGGINI L., GANDOLFI E. 1970,Astr. Astrophys. 5, 264-279 Magnitudes, colours and coordinates of 175 ultraviolet excess objects in the field 13h, +36^{∘}

AB

N = 175 ; It would be better to use Braccesi

1970C1 A

COLLA G., FANTI C., FANTI R., FICARRA A., FORMIGGINI L., GANDOLFI E., GRUEFF G., LARI C., PADRIELLI L., ROFFI G., TOMASI P., VIGOTTI M. 1969,Lab. Naz. Radioastron. Inst. Fis. Bologna, contr. No. 55, 74 pp. = Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 1, 281-317 A catalogue of 3235 radio sources at 408 MHz

B2.1

N = 3235

1970C1 B

COLLA G., FANTI C., FANTI R., FICARRA A., FORMIGGINI L., GANDOLFI E., LARI C., MARANO B., PADRIELLI L., TOMASI P. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 7, 1-34 The B2 catalogue of radio sources - second part.

B2.2

N = 3013

1970C1 C

COLLA G., FANTI C., FANTI R., FICARRA A., FORMIGGINI L., GANDOLFI E., GIOIA I., LARI C., MARANO B., PADRIELLI L., TOMASI P. 1972,Lab. Naz. Radioastron. Inst. Fis. Bologna, separate print, 2 + 52 pp. = Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 11, 291-325 The B2 catalogue of radio sources - third part.

B2.3

N = 3227

1970C1 D

FANTI C., FANTI R., FICARRA A., PADRIELLI L. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 18, 147-156 The B2 catalogue of radio sources - fourth part.

B2.4

N = 448

1970DI

DIXON R.S. 1970,Ap.J.Suppl. 20, 1-504 A Master List of Radio Sources -

1970F1 A

FEHRENBACH C., DUFLOT M. 1970,Astr. Astrophys. Special Suppl. 1, 1-67 Grand Nuage de Magellan. Liste des etoiles membres du Grand Nuage de Magellan et liste d’etoiles galactiques

(Nos 1-495) :  ∗ grande vitesse  G
(Nos 1-1830):  ∗ petite vitesse  P

(Nos 1-110) : Liste supplementaire later renumbered as for G or P stars, see ref. 1970F1 C, remarks to list G p. 15 and to list P p. 18

S

Identif. charts ; but rather use later identif. charts, ref. 1970F1 B, 1974 Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 365-444, and 1970F1 D

1970F1 B

FEHRENBACH C., DUFLOT M. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 10, 231-265 Grand Nuage de Magellan. Seconde liste d’etoiles membres du Grand Nuage de Magellan et liste d’etoiles galactiques

(Nos 501-588) : ∗ grande vitesse  G
(Nos 2001-2253): ∗ petite vitesse  P

Identif. charts for stars G. P, also C (ref. 1972A2), R (ref. 1960F1); see also Astr. Astrophys. 16, 365-444

1970F1 C

FEHRENBACH C., DUFLOT M. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 46, 13-19 Grand Nuage de Magellan. Troisieme liste d’etoiles membres du Grand Nuage de Magellan et liste d’etoiles galactiques

(Nos 601-767)  G
(Nos 2501-2990)  P

1970F1 D

FEHRENBACH C., DUFLOT M. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 48, 1-55 Cartes d’identification d’etoiles dans la direction du Grand Nuage de Magellan. Deuxieme serie

{G \atop P}

Identification on the B Charts of Hodge and Wright of P stars (left hand maps) and of the stars of LMC (right hand maps) with their G (ref. 1970F1 A, B, C), C (ref. 1972A2), A (Martin + Rebeirot, 1972), R and R...F (ref. 1960F1), Sk (ref. 1970S1 or Dachs (Dachs, 1972) number A first series of Identif. charts (1974, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 365-444) was concerned with stars of ref. 1970F1 A and B only

1970F1 E

FEHRENBACH C., DUFLOT M. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 48, 409-442 Vitesses radiales au prisme objectif dans la direction du Grand Nuage de Magellan

{G \atop P}

Revision of G and P lists given in ref. 1970F1 A, B and C. A few P stars are found to be members of the LMC (ex. Nos 295, 405, 447, 592, 728, 1001, ..., see p. 417-427); a few G stars are not members (see Table IV p. 439). The revision of the G list p. 417-427 yields 711 stars numbered Nos 1-711 without acronym: this list contains additional G numbers (ex. G 225ter, G 234bis). Cross-identif. with several catalogues. Revises and completes Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 13, 173-267 which was concerned with crossidentif. of stars of ref. 1970F1 A and B only.

1970G1 A

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1970,Ap.J.Lett. 162, L55-L59 Some new white dwarfs with peculiar spectra. VI.

EGGR

N = 18 ; (Nos 267-284) The first GR number is 267, because it follows on from the EG numbers.

1970G1 B

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1974,Ap.J.Lett. 189, L131-L133 A new list of 52 degenerate stars. VII.

EGGR

1970G1 C

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1975,Ap.J.Lett. 196, L117-L120 A further list of degenerate stars. VIII.

EGGR

N = 44 ; (Nos 337-380)

1970G1 D

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1976,Ap.J.Lett. 207, L119-L123 Some further degenerate stars. IX.

EGGR

N = 25 ; (Nos 381-405)

1970G1 E

GREENSTEIN J.L., OKE J.B., RICHSTONE D., VAN ALTENA W.F., STEPPE H. 1977,Ap.J.Lett. 218, L21-L25 Further degenerate stars. X.

EGGR

N = 51 ; (Nos 406-456)

1970G1 F

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1979,Ap.J. 227, 244-251 A further list and some properties of red degenerates. XI.

EGGR

N = 51 ; (Nos 457-507)

1970G1 G

GREENSTEIN J.L. 1980,Ap.J. 242, 738-748 Degenerate stars. XII. Recognition of hot nondegenerates

EGGR

N = 51 ; (Nos 508-558)

1970G2

GAPOSHKIN S. 1970,Smithsonian Astrophys. Obs., Special Report 310 The Large Magellanic Cloud: its topography of 1830 variable stars

LMV

Table 12 : (Nos 1-1830) ; type of variability ; amplitude ; period (for periodic variables) previous designation : HV, W=Wooley, G, variables found during this investigation. Among them 1128 Cepheids. No coordinates are given.

19 Identif. charts (1mm = 0.2’)

1970H1

HOSKINS D.G., MURDOCH H.S. 1970,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 15, 1-16 Right ascensions for 389 southern radio sources from the Molonglo fan beam survey

MLO

Table 2 : N = 181 Table 3 : N = 208

1970K1

KAWAJIRI N. 1970,P.A.S.J. 22, 165-175 Two continuum surveys along the galactic plane at 8000 MHz

NK

Table 2 : (Nos 1-58) Table 3 : (Nos 1-59)

1970L1

LUCKE P.B., HODGE P.W. 1970,A.J. 75, 171-175 A catalogue of stellar associations in the Large Magellanic Cloud

LH

Table I : (Nos 1-122) ; associated objects ; Identif. charts See the stellar content in ref. 1972L1 (acronym Lucke)

1970M1

MENG S.Y., KRAUS J.D. 1970,A.J. 75, 535-562 Observations of high velocity hydrogen clouds at 21 cm OBH to OZH OBM to OZM

Table I : N = 52

1970N1 A

NANDY K., SMRIGLIO F. 1971,Publ. R. Obs. Edinburgh 7, 1-18 Spectrophotometry of cool stars in the near infrared. I. Results

Edinburgh

Table 4a : N = 410 (Nos 1-410) M ∗ Table 4b : N = 32 (Nos 411-442) Carbon ∗ and probable Carbon ∗

1970N1 B

NANDY K., SMRIGLIO F. 1971,Publ. R. Obs. Edinburgh 7, 73-84 Spectrophotometry of cool stars in the near infrared. II. Results for a region in the direction of the Galactic Anticenter

Edinburgh

Table 2 :  N = 274 (Nos 1-274)  M ∗
Table 3 :  N = 5  (Nos 275-279)  Carbon ∗

1970N1 C

NANDY K., SMRIGLIO F. 1976,Publ. R. Obs. Edinburgh 9, 4 Spectrophotometry of cool stars in the near infrared. III. Results for a region in the direction of l(II) = 138

Edinburgh

N = 284 ; (Nos 1-284) ; M ∗ ; Identif. charts No list of Carbon ∗

1970N1 D

NANDY K., SMRIGLIO F., BUONANNO R. 1978,Publ. R. Obs. Edinburgh 9, No. 5, 125-134 Spectrophotometry of cool stars in the near infrared. IV. Results for a region in Cassiopeia

Edinburgh

Table 3a : N = 543 (Nos 1-543) M ∗ Table 3b : N = 20 (Nos 544 C to 563 C) Carbon ∗ Identif. charts but no coordinates 15 sq.^{∘} in the direction Cassiopeia (ℓ = 118^{∘}), centered on α = 23h58, δ = +60^{∘}09’

1970S1

SANDULEAK N. 1970,Contr. Cerro-Tololo 89, 67 pp. A deep objective-prism survey for Large Magellanic Cloud Members

Sk

N = 1272 ; LMC members brighter than mpg = 14 ; Identif. charts

1970S2

SNOW T.P.Jr 1970,A.J. 75, 237-238 Groups and clusters of galaxies

SNOW

N = 34 ; 34 possible groups and clusters of southern galaxies ; 1875 coordinates ; angular diameter

1970U1

UESUGI A., FUKUDA I. 1970,Contr. Inst. Astrophys. Kwasan Obs., Kyoto, No. 189 = Mem. Fac. Sci. Kyoto Univ., Ser. Phys. Astrophys. Geophys. Chem. 33, 205-250 A catalog of rotational velocities of the stars

Uesugi

(Nos 1-3951) ; Compilation (partial)

1970V1 A

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A. 1970,Moscow, Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Astronomical Council, Sternberg Astr. Inst. Atlas and Catalogue of Interacting Galaxies, Part I

IGVV

(Nos 1-355)

1970V1 B

VORONTSOV-VEL’YAMINOV B.A. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 28, 1-117 Atlas of interacting galaxies, Part. II and the concept of fragmen- tation of galaxies

IGVV

(Nos 356-852) ; Cross-identif. with NGC, MCG etc. Plates: finding list of VV numbers, Table 1 p. 47

1970WA A

WACKERLING L.R. 1970,Mem.R.A.S. 73, 153-319 A catalogue of early-type stars whose spectra have shown emission lines

-

N = 5326 ; Cross-identif.

1970WA B

STEPHENSON C.B., SANDULEAK N. 1977,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 2, 73-99 New position determinations and other data for 1280 known Hα emission stars in the Milky Way

-

N = 1280

1970W1

WILLSON M.A.G. 1970,M.N.R.A.S. 151, 1-44 Radio observations of the cluster of galaxies in Coma Berenices. The 5C4 survey

5C4.

N = 189 ν = 408 MHz HPBW = 80” x 170”

ν = 1407 MHz HPBW = 23” x 49”

1970W2

WINNBERG A. 1970,Astr. Astrophys. 9, 259-268 Further observations of some OH sources in Cygnus

ON

N = 4

1970W3

WOOLLEY R.v.d.R., EPPS E.A., PENSTON M.J., POCOCK S.B. 1970,R. Obs. Ann., No. 5, 227 pp. Catalogue of stars within twenty-five parsecs of the Sun

Woolley

Tables Ia and Ib : (Nos 9001-9850) ; Gliese Extension. No. 9419 subsequently removed since new parallax measurement while Nos 9849 and 9840 were added. The tables also contain Gliese stars (GJ , ref. 1969G1 A,B) No Identif. charts.

1971A1

AGUERO E.L. 1971,P.A.S.P. 83, 310-312 A list of interesting southern galaxies

Aguero

N = 48

1971B1

BECKER W., FENKART R. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 4, 241-252 A catalogue of galactic star clusters observed in three colours

Basel

N = 12 ; The numbering has been continued up to 20

1971C1

CHINCARINI G., ROOD H.J. 1971,Ap.J. 168, 321-325 Dynamics of the Perseus cluster of galaxies

CR

N = 47

1971C2

CUDWORTH K.M. 1971,A.J. 76, 475-483 Relative proper motions in the region of the open cluster NGC 2168 (M35)

Cd

N = 763

1971C3 A

CAROZZI N., PEYRIN Y., ROBIN A. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 4, 231-240 (in French) Large radial velocity stars in the wing of the Small Magellanic Cloud

OM

(Nos 1-49) ; 1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts ; very few cross-identif.

1971C3 B

CAROZZI N. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 277-287 (in French) Non-supergiant high-velocity stars near the Magellanic Clouds

OM

Table 1 : N = 57 ; (Nos 50-106) ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts ; many foreground stars

1971D1 A

DAVIS M.M. 1971,A.J. 76, 980-992 The NRAO 5-GHz radio source survey. I. A survey of faint sources. Green Bank C list

GC

N = 254

1971D1 B

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., KELLERMANN K.I., DAVIS M.M., FOMALONT E.B., SHAFFER D.B. 1972,A.J. 77, 265-284 The NRAO 5-GHz radio survey. II. The 140-ft ”strong”,”intermediate” and ”deep” source surveys. The S2, I and D surveys

GC

N = 245 (table II) + 72 (table III) + 19 (table IV)

1971D1 C

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., KELLERMANN K.I. 1972,A.J. 77, 797-809 The NRAO 5-GHz radio source survey. III. The 140-ft ”strong” source survey. The S3 survey

GC

N = 240

1971D2

DOTTORI H., CARRANZA G. 1971,Astrophys. Space Sci. 13, 180-184 Interferometric study of the Milky Way between Carina and Aquila

(DC)

N = 46

1971D3

DOWNES D. 1971,A.J. 76, 305-316 New radio results on supernova remnants

DOW

N = 117 ; Updated by Milne, ref. 1979ML

1971F1

FEINSTEIN A., MARRACO H.G. -, The open cluster NGC 4609 behind the Coalsack

N = 52 ; table I (beginning)  FM
N = 17 ; table I (end) ; ”H” refers to the Hogg 15 Cluster  FMH

1971G1 A

GICLAS H.L., BURNHAM R.Jr, THOMAS N.G. 1971,Lowell Obs., Flagstaff, Arizona, USA, 175 pp. Lowell proper motion survey, Northern hemisphere ; the G numbered stars

Giclas

N = 8991 Recapitulation of more detailed lists published for the Northern hemisphere, in Lowell Obs. Bull. Nos 4, p. 136 (1959)

5, p. 61 (1961) 6, p. 1 (1963) 6, p. 103 (1964) 6, p. 197 (1965) 6, p. 233 (1966) 6, p. 271 (1966) 7, p. 1 (1967) 7, p. 31 (1967) 7, p. 67 (1968) 7, p. 129 (1969) 7, p. 149 (1969) 7, p. 165 (1970)

1971G1 B

GICLAS H.L., BURNHAM R.Jr, THOMAS N.G. 1978,Lowell Obs. Bull. 164, vol. VIII, No. 4, 89-144 Lowell proper motion survey. Southern hemisphere. Catalog 1978.

Giclas

N = 2758 Recapitulation of more detailed lists for the Southern hemisphere. Cross-identif. with Wolf, Ross, BPM, LTT, LFT

1971G1 C

GICLAS H.L., BURNHAM R.Jr, THOMAS N.G. 1979,Lowell Obs. Bull. 165, vol. VIII, No. 5, 145-154

Giclas

N = 174 In Appendix, the Lowell Obs. Bull. 120, 122, 124, 132, 136, 140, 152, 158, 160, 162, 163 (ranging from 1963 to 1980) define blue-red pairs, with the format GFFF-BNN

G...-B

A suffix A or B is added for the designation of the primary or secondary (ex. G216-B14B)

1971H1

HOFFMANN W.F., FREDERICK C.L., EMERY R.J. 1971,Ap.J.Lett. 170, L89-L97 100 μm survey of the galactic plane

HFE

N = 72

1971L1

LARIONOV M.G., GORSHKOV A.G., POPOV M.V., MOISEEV I.G. 1971,Astr. Cirk. 665, 1-6 (in Russian) The fast survey of the sky at frequency 8550 MHz in the range of declination +0^{∘}- +30^{∘}

Simeis

N = 121

1971L2

LU P.K. 1971,A.J. 76, 775-776 and Plates 947-949 Some unusual southern hemisphere objects

YC

N = 40 ; Peculiar galaxies and nebulosities ; All with APM number

1971M1 A

MASLOWSKI J. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. 14, 215-222 A Green Bank sky survey in search of radio sources at 1400 MHz. I. A spectral analysis of the 5C1 sources

GB

N = 32

1971M1 B

MASLOWSKI J. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. 16, 197-203 A Green Bank sky survey in search of radio sources at 1400 MHz. II. Spectral properties of the 5C1 and 5C2 sources

GB

N = 40

1971M1 C

MASLOWSKI J. 1972,Acta Astr. 22, 227-260 A Green Bank sky survey in search of radio sources at 1400 Mhz. III. Positions and flux densities of the GB radio sources

GB

N = 1086

1971P1

PAVLOV N.N., AFANAS’EVA P.M., STARYTSIN G.V. 1971,Trudy Glav. Astr. Obs. Pulkovo, Ser. 2, 78, 59-98 (in Russian) The general catalogue of the USSR Time Service

KSV

(Nos 1-687) + 120 additional stars (Nos 1001-1120)

1971R1

RICKARD J.J. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. 11, 270-278 A survey of high-velocity and intermediate-velocity clouds with 12.5’ angular resolution

R

N = 3

1971R2 A

RUBIN V.C., LOSEE J.M. 1971,A.J. 76, 1099-1101 and Plates p. 1173-1176 A finding list of faint blue stars in the anticenter region of the Galaxy RL

1971R2 B

RUBIN V.C., WESTPFAHL D., TUVE M. 1974,A.J. 79, 1406-1409 and Plates p. 1501-1505 Second finding list of faint blue stars in the anticenter region of the Galaxy

RL

(Nos 64-152)

1971S1 A

SWARUP G., KAPAHI V.K., SARMA N.V.G., KRISHNA G., JOSHI M.N., RAO A.P. 1971,Astrophys. Lett. 9, 53-59 Lunar occultations observations of 25 radio sources made with the Ooty radio telescope: list I

OTL

N = 25

1971S1 B

KAPAHI V.K., JOSHI M.N., KANDASWAMY J. 1973,Astrophys. Lett. 14, 31-35 Occultation observations of six radio sources with flat spectra

OTL

N = 6

1971S2

SANDULEAK N. 1971,P.A.S.P. 83, 95-97 Detection of T Tauri-like spectra in six stars in Orion

Sanduleak

N = 6 ; Identif. charts

1971S3

SLETTEBAK A., BRUNDAGE R.K. 1971,A.J. 76, 338-362 A finding list of early-type stars near the south galactic pole

SB

N = 957

1971S4

STEPHENSON C.B., SANDULEAK N. 1971,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 1, 100 + 100 pp. Luminous stars in the southern Milky Way

LS

N = 5132

1971S5

SANDULEAK N. 1971,Ap.J.Lett. 164, L71-L72 On stars having strong OVI emission

Sand WR

Spectral type: WC (OVI)

(Nos 1-5) : Sanduleak 1 = Sk 188 in SMC (WC4 star) ref. 1968S1 Sanduleak 2 = Sk -68 145 in LMC (WC4 star) ref. 1970S1 Sanduleak 3 = WR 72 in WR Nomenclature ref. 1981VH Sanduleak 4 = WR 102 in WR Nomenclature ref. 1981VH Sanduleak 5 = WR 142 in WR Nomenclature ref. 1981VH

1971T1

TERZAN A. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. 12, 477-481 Quatre nouveaux amas stellaires dans la direction de la region centrale de la Galaxie

Terzan

N = 12 ; Nos 3 and 8 are OCL, possibly No. 10 ; other Terzan clusters are GCL

1971W1

WEEDMAN D.W. 1971,Astrophys. Lett. 9, 49-51 Very blue stellar objects appearing near galaxies

Weedman

N = 9 ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1971W2

WESTERLUND B.E., GLASPEY J. 1971,Astr. Astrophys. 10, 1-7 On the structure of the wing of the Small Magellanic Cloud

WG

Table 3 : (Nos 1-18) α (1950) from 01h42 to 02h16

UBV measurements of stars : Table 1 and Fig. 1 : Area I, Nos 1-98, Table 2 and Fig. 2 : Area II, Nos 1-123

1971Z1 A

ZWICKY F., WICKY M.A. 1971,F. Zwicky, Guemligen, Switzerland, 32 + 388 p. Catalogue of selected compact galaxies and of post-eruptive galaxies

1Zw to 7Zw

N > 3700

1971Z1 B

ZWICKY F., SARGENT W.L.W., KOWAL C.T. 1975,A.J. 80, 545-558 Eighth list of compact galaxies

8Zw

1972AB A

ABT H.A., BIGGS E.S. 1972,Kitt Peak National Observatory Bibliography of stellar radial velocities

-

Compilation ; Includes data up to June 1970 N ≃ 25000 ; (44000 references)

1972AB B

BARBIER M. 1975,Bull. Inf. CDS 8, 12 Radial velocities

-

Description of a punched card catalogue, which continues the Abt and Biggs compilation. Description of a future mean radial velocities catalogue

1972AB C

BARBIER M., PETIT M. 1977,Microfiche No. 3038 edited by CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg) Strasbourg, France Bibliographic catalogue of radial velocities

-

Continues the compilation of Abt and Biggs for the years 1970-1975. ≃ 5500 references.

1972A1

ANTALOVA A. 1972,B.A.C. 23, 126-139 UBV photographic photometry of stars in the region α (1950): 17h03m - 17h41m, δ (1950): -28.8^{∘} to -33.4^{∘}III. The catalogue and identification maps of the open star clusters: NGC 6405, NGC 6383, ”NGC 6374”, Av2, NGC 6416 and Hα emission regions: Gum 67 (Av3) ; Gum 68 (Av2)

Av

Av1 = C 1725-315 Em. region behind Gum 68 Av2 = C 1726-324 OCL Av3 Em. region behind Gum 67

1972A2 A

ARDEBERG A., BRUNET J.P., MAURICE E., PREVOT L. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 6, 249-309 Spectrographic and photometric observations of supergiants and foreground stars, in the direction of the Large Magellanic Cloud

N = 583 Part 1 (Nos 1-409) LMC ∗ Part 2 Nos 501-542) Possible LMC ∗ Part 3 (Nos 601-732) Galactic ∗

ARDB

(Nos 1-61)  defined inside the 3 parts here above (1st column)  C

Identif. charts for the newly defined stars, labelled C

1972A2 B

BRUNET J.P., PREVOT L., MAURICE E., MURATORIO G. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 9, 447-458 Additional observations of supergiants and foreground stars in the direction of the Large Magellanic Cloud

C

N =11 ; (Nos 62-72) ; Identif. charts

1972A3

ARP H.C. 1972,Ap.J.Lett. 174, L111-L114 A grouping of radio sources in the area of NGC 7331 and Stephan’s Quintet

HA

(Nos 1-7)

1972B1

BARBIERI C., ROSINO L. 1972,Astrophys. Space Sci. 16, 324-335 Studies of blue objects at high galactic latitudes. Faint blue objects in the field of BD +29 2348 (the Galactic North Pole)

A2-

N = 487 ; Identif. charts

1972D1

DICKENS R.J. 1972,M.N.R.A.S. 157, 299-307 The colour-magnitude diagram of the globular cluster NGC 7099

PE

(Nos 1-142)

1972F1

FURNISS I., JENNINGS R.E., MOORWOOD A.F.M. 1972,Ap.J.Lett. 176, L105-L108 Detection of far-infrared astronomical sources

FJM

N = 6 (among which 4 have not been previously detected)

1972F2

FLORSCH A. 1972,Publ. Obs. Astr. Strasbourg 2, pp. 129 Etude du Petit Nuage de Magellan par la technique du prisme-objectif de Fehrenbach

FLO

Table I-III : N = 776

1972G1

GIACCONI R., MURRAY S., GURSKY H., KELLOGG E., SCHREIER E., TANANBAUM H. 1972,Ap.J. 178, 281-308 The Uhuru catalog of X-ray sources

2U

N = 125 ; All sky

1972HR

HERBIG G.H., RAO N.K. 1972,Ap.J. 174, 401-423 Second catalog of emission-line stars of the Orion population

HRC

N = 323 ; Among them are LkH Nos 321, and 324-350 (ref. 1954H1 O) p. 420: definition of the list Haro 7-: ”Unpublished. These objects were found marked on the original plates during a visit by Herbig to Tonantzintla in 1961. The numbers have been assigned arbitrarily”.

Haro 7-

1972K1

KAP-HERR A.v., WENDKER H.J. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. 20, 313-315 The Cygnus X-region. VII. Radio continuum search for a ring of filament around the area

KW

N = 9

1972K2

KARACHENTSEV I.D. 1972,Soob. Spets. Astrofiz. Obs. Akad. Nauk. SSSR 7, 92 p. Catalogue of isolated pairs of galaxies in the northern hemisphere

Karachentsev

N = 603 pairs ; The galaxies are labeled a and b

1972L1

LUCKE P.B. 1972,Ph. D. Thesis, Univ. of Washington The OB stellar associations in the Large Magellanic Cloud

Lucke

B and V photographic study of the stars in LH Associations (ref. 1970L1) ; see also 1974, ApJ Suppl. 28, 73 for summary and a few HR diagrams. Identif. charts It is usual to write LH 48:20 or LH 48-20 for star Lucke 20 in the LH assoc. 48, for instance. The associations studied are (Nos 1-122) except a few ones ; The largest ones are subdivided: LH 77 into 771 and 772, and LH 96 into 961 to 966

1972M1 A

McGEE R.X., BROOKS J.W., BATCHELOR R.A. 1972,Austral. J. Phys. 25, 581-597 The radio continuum of the Large Magellanic Cloud. I. The sources at 6 cm wavelength

MC

N = 95 ; Maps and catalogue ; HPBW = 4’

1972M1 B

McGEE R.X., BROOKS J.W., BATCHELOR R.A. 1972,Austral. J. Phys. 25, 613-617 The radio continuum of the Large Magellanic Cloud. III. The sources at 11 cm wavelength

MC

Same numbering as for 6 cm ; 7 new sources (A to G) The papers II (p. 599-612) and IV (p. 619-635) present maps at 11 cm and a discussion of the spectra, respectively

1972M2

MARTIN A.H.M., DOWNES D. 1972,Astrophys. Lett. 11, 219-224 Possible sites of star formation in Sgr B2

MD

N = 7

1972M3

MacCONNELL D.J., FRYE R.L., UPGREN A.R. 1972,A.J. 77, 384-391 The absolute magnitudes of the Barium stars.

MFU

Table I : (Nos 1-151) Certain Ba II stars Table II: (Nos 152-241) Marginal Ba stars

1972P1

PECKHAM R.J., PALMER H.P. 1972,Nature, Phys. Sci. 240, 76-77 An interferometric survey of the areas surrounding four intense radio sources

PP

N = 8

1972P2

PHILIP A.G.D., STOCK J. 1972,Bol. Obs. Tonantz. y Tacub. 6, No. 38, 201-209 (in Spanish) A finding list of stars of spectral type A7 and earlier in regions at high galactic latitudes. VI. Near south galactic pole

PS6-

(Nos 1-539) ; A star of the list may be named PS 121 (say) or PS 121 VI or PS VI 121

1972P3 A

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., KELLERMANN K.I., DAVIS M.M., FOMALONT E.B., SHAFFER D.B. 1972,A.J. 77, 265-284 The NRAO 5-GHz radio source survey. II. The 140-ft ”strong”, ”intermediate”, and ”deep” source surveys.

Table II : 27 from the S1 survey of Kellermann+ Strong (1968, Astrophys. Lett. 2, 105-111) are denoted with an asterisk following the name

S1

N = 218 (without asterisk)  S2

Table III: N = 72 Intermediate

1972P3 B

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., KELLERMANN K.I. 1972,A.J. 77, 797-809 The NRAO 5-GHz radio source survey. III. The 140-ft ”strong” source survey.

GC

Table I : Areas covered

Table II: N = 240  S3

1972P3 C

PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., WITZEL A., PREUSS E., KUHR H., KELLERMANN K.I., FOMA-LONT E.B., DAVIS M.M. 1978,A.J. 83, 451-474 The 5-GHz strong source surveys. IV. Survey of the area between declination 35 and 70^{∘} and summary of source counts, spectra and optical identifications

S4

N = 484 in an area 1.71 sr

1972P3 D

KUHR H., PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., WITZEL A., SCHMIDT J. 1981,A.J. 86, 854-863 The 5 GHz strong source surveys. V. Survey of the area between declination 70 and 90^{∘}

S5

Table IV : (N = 476)

1972R1

ROSS H.N. 1972,Ph. D. Thesis, Univ. of Toronto, Canada Radio sources with low frequency cut off

{ARO \atop NRAO}

N = 17 ; (2 sources with NRAO number and 15 with ARO number)

1972S1

SCOVILLE N.Z., SOLOMON P.M., THADDEUS P. 1972,Ap.J. 172, 335-353 Survey of molecular lines near the galactic center. I. 6 centimeter formaldehyde absorption in Sagittarius A, Sagittarius B2 and the galactic plane from ℓ(II) = 359.4^{∘}toℓ(II) = 2.2^{∘}

Cloud

N = 15 ; (clouds with H2CO absorption)

1972S2

STOCK J., WROBLEWSKI H. 1972,Publ. Dep. Astr. Univ. Chile, Obs. Astr. Nac. 2, 59-129 A southern objective prism survey

SOPS

N ≃ 3400 (30 tables, each numbered from No. 1, all without any proposed acronym) ; 1950 coordinates. Survey within the magnitude range from the 10th to 13th photographic magnitude. Areas I to IV, subdivised into a-g and Area V. Sometimes described by the number of the table (ex. IIa-6). Tables :

p. 64  Ia  Luminous stars  (Nos 1-217)
p. 68  Ib  Planetary Nebulae  (Nos 1-6)  StWr1-
p. 68  Ic  Peculiar F-K stars  (Nos 1-118)
p. 70  Id  Me-stars  (Nos 1-97)
p. 72  Ie  Carbon stars  (Nos 1-41)
p. 73  If  Peculiar A-stars  (Nos 1-23)
p. 75  IIa  Luminous stars  (Nos 1-322)
p. 81  IIb  Planetary nebulae  (Nos 1-48)  StWr2-
p. 82  IIc  Peculiar F-K stars  (Nos 1-224)
p. 86  IId  Me-stars  (Nos 1-174)
p. 89  IIe  Carbon stars  (Nos 1-91)
p. 91  IIf  Peculiar A-stars  (Nos 1-39)
p. 92  IIg  Miscellaneous objects  (Nos 1-20)
p. 93  IIIa  Luminous stars  (Nos 1-264)
p. 98  IIIb  Planetary nebulae  (Nos 1-8)  StWr3-
p. 98  IIIc  peculiar F-K stars  (Nos 1-139)
p.101  IIId  Me-stars  (NoS 1-56)
p.102  IIIe  Carbon stars  (Nos 1-38)
p.102  IIIf  Peculiar B-A stars  (Nos 1-99)
p.104  IIIg  Miscellaneous objects  (Nos 1-19)
p.106  IVa  Luminous stars  (Nos 1-280)
p.111  IVb  Planetary nebulae  (Nos 1-16)  StWr4-
p.111  IVc  Peculiar F-K stars  (Nos 1-388)
p.119  IVd  Me-stars  (Nos 1-173)
p.122  IVe  Carbon stars  (Nos 1-109)
p.124  IVf  Peculiar B-A stars  (Nos 1-46)
p.125  IVg  Miscellaneous objects  (Nos 1-61)
p.127  V  (Nos 1-70)
p.129  Addition to table II  (Nos 1-9)
p.129  Addition to table III  (Nos 1-2)

Only a few StWr2-, 3-, 4- are given PK numbers (ref. 1967PK F or 1967PK C) Variable stars are cross-identif. with existing V∗ nomenclature in IBVS 2054 (9 dec 1981) by Bidelman.

1972Y1 A

YAMASHITA Y. 1972,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs. 13, 169-217 The C-classification of the spectra of carbon stars

YAMAC

Table 2 : (Nos 1-183) ; 1900 coordinates ; most of them cross-identif. with HD or BD, and constellation name

1972Y1 B

YAMASHITA Y. 1975,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs. 15, 47-59 The C-classification of spectra of carbon stars, II

YAMAC

Table 2 : (Nos 186-293) ; 1900 coordinates ;

cross-identif. with HD or BD, and constellation name

Also revises or adds data for 27 stars of ref. 1972Y1 A ; Total 291 stars

1972W1

WALKER R.G., PRICE S.D. 1972,AFCRL-TR-0588, and private communication

AFCRL

Preliminary results ; Obsolete ; Only 27 sources cross-identif. with UOA ; see UOA. See AFCRL, format NNNN (ref. 1975W1) later improved by the AFGL catalogue (ref. 1976P1) N = 2363

1972W2

WILLSON M.A.G. 1972,M.N.R.A.S. 156, 7-49 Fan-beam surveys of radio sources near declinations +28^{∘} and +41^{∘}

MW

N = 320 ; ν = 408 MHz ; HP BW = 160′ × 1.8′and155′ × 2.6′

1972Z1

ZINN R.J., NEWELL E.B., GIBSON J.B. 1972,Astr. Astrophys. 18, 390-402 A search for UV-bright stars in 27 globular clusters

ZNG

N = 154

1973B1

BAHCALL N.A., BAHCALL J.N., SCHMIDT M. 1973,Ap.J. 183, 777-782 Observations of QSOs in the direction of clusters of galaxies

NAB

N = 9

1973B2 A

BERKHUIJSEN E.M. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. 24, 143-147 Galactic continuum Loops and the diameter-surface brightness relation for supernova remnants

Loop

Table 1: Loop I to IV and Origem Loop Loop I contains the North Polar Spur (near ℓ = 30^{∘}) Loop II: Cetus arc

1973B2 B

FEJES I., WESSELIUS P.R. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. 24, 1-13 The large-scale distribution of low-velocity hydrogen gas at high galactic latitudes

Loop

Comparison with Loops I to IV.

1973B2 C

NARANAN S., SHULMAN S., FRIEDMAN H., FRITZ G. 1976,Ap.J. 208, 718-726 Soft X-ray emission in Eridanus: an old supernova remnant?

Loop

Loop V ( ℓ = 210to270^{∘}) is shown on fig. 2. The nomenclature introduced in Elliot + Meaburn, 1973, ”Astrophys. Space Sci.” 20, 111-122 is somewhat confusing.

1973C1 A

CESCO C.U., GIBSON J. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 11, 335-337 Very red stars and planetary nebulae

Table 1 : N = 18 (Nos 2-19) Very red stars No. 1 is Klemola’s Very Red Star (Klemola, 1967PASP 79 271)

Y-C

Table 2 : N = 33 (Nos 1-33)  PN (see ref. 1967PK C)  CeGi

Both lists are named Y-C by the authors

1973C1 B

CESCO C.U., SANGUIN J.G., SANCHEZ G., MIRA H., CESCO M.R., VICENTENLA J.A. 1984,Bol. Asoc. Arg. de Astr. 28, 159-167 (in Spanish) Nuevo listado de estrellas rojas y nebulosas planetarias

Table 1 : N = 31 (Nos 1-31) Very red stars include (Nos 2-19) of Table 1 in ref. 1973C1 A Identif. charts

Y-C

Table 2 : N = 14 (Nos 34-47)  PN (see ref. 1967PK C)  CeGi

Both lists are named Y-C (or YC) by the authors

1973D1 A

DOUGLAS J.N., BASH F.N., GHIGO F.D., MOSELEY G.F., TORRENCE G.W. 1973,A.J. 78, 1-17 First results from the Texas interferometer: positions of 605 discrete sources

UT

N = 605

1973D1 B

GHIGO F.D., OWEN F.N. 1973,A.J. 78, 848-874 Second of arc positions and flux densities of 1583 radio sources at 365 MHz

UT

N = 1583

1973D1 C

SHARP J.R., BASH F.N. 1975,A.J. 80, 335-352 Positions and flux densities of 1075 radio sources at 365 MHz

UT

N = 1075

1973D2

DAVIES I.M., LITTLE A.G., MILLS B.Y. 1973,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 28, 1-59 The Molonglo radio source catalogue 1

MC1

N = 1545 ; ν = 408 MHz

1973D3

DAVIS R.J., DEUTCHMAN W.A., HARAMUNDANIS K.L. 1973,Smithsonian Inst., Washington, D.C., USA (on magnetic tape) Celescope Catalog of ultraviolet stellar observations

CEL

N = 5068

1973D4 A

DORSCHNER J., FRIEDEMANN C., GURTLER J. 1973,A.N. 294, 153-158 A search for extremely red stars on the Palomar Observatory Sky Survey

JENA

Table 1 : (Nos 1-37) ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

stars having B-V ≥ 4 mag

22 fields spread along a strip extending perpendicular to the galactic equator at ℓ ≃ 95^{∘}; b ≥ −10^{∘}

1973D4 B

FRIEDEMANN C., GURTLER J., PFAU W. 1977,A.N. 298, 327-329 A seaarch for extremely red stars on the Palomar observatory sky survey. II. Examination for light variability

JENA

N = 5 ; format A ; 1950 coordinates Stars A and B correspond to stars Nos 17 and 18, resp. in ref. 1973D4 A

1973E1 A

EMERSON J.P., JENNINGS R.E., MOORWOOD A.F.M. 1973,Ap.J. 184, 401-414 Far-infrared of observations of H II regions from balloon altitudes

UCL

N = 15 ; (Nos 1-18) ; Nos 3, 5, 6 are missing.

1973E1 B

FURNISS I., JENNINGS R.E., MOORWOOD A.F.M. 1975,Ap.J. 202, 400-406 40-350 μm observations of galactic sources

UCL

N = 31 ; (Nos 4-45) ; missing numbers

1973E2

EKERS R.D. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. 22, 309-310 Upper limits to the 21 cm continuum radiation from two magnetic white dwarfs

RDE

N = 12 ; (Nos 1-11)

1973F1

FINLAY E.A., JONES B.B. 1973,Austral. J. Phys. 26, 389-402 Measurements of source strengths at 29.9 MHz

FJ

N = 175

1973G1

GATEWOOD G., EICHHORN H. 1973,A.J. 78, 769-776 An unsuccessful search for a planetary companion of Barnards star (BD +4 3561)

GAT

(Nos 1-22) ; Note that Barnard’s star is: Gliese 699 and not BD +4 3561 Continuation of the GAT list:

(Nos 23-36)  1974ApJ...194..637B  BEARDSLEY W.R.+
(Nos 37-51)  1975AJ.....80..652R  RUSSELL J.+
(Nos 52-69)  1974AJ.....79...52G  GATEWOOD G.

(Nos 70-81) missing (Nos 82-93) 1975AJ.....80..652R RUSSELL J.+ (Nos 94-120) 1974PASP...86..448B BREAKIRON L.A.+

(Nos 121-144)  1974AJ.....79..815G  GATEWOOD G.+
(Nos 145-162)  1975AJ.....80..652R  RUSSELL J.+

(Nos 163-217) missing (Nos 218-230) 1976ApJ...204L..89G GATEWOOD G.+ (Nos 231-292) 1976AJ.....81..545R RUSSELL J.L.+ (Nos 293-305) 1976ApJ...209..525M MARGON B.+ (Nos 306-363) 1977AJ.....82..364S STEIN J.W.+ (Nos 364-457) missing (Nos 458-484) 1978ApJ...225..191G GATEWOOD G.+ (Nos 485-537) missing

(Nos 538-564)  1978AJ.....83.1455R  RUSSELL J.L.+
(Nos 565-597)  1980AJ.....85.1270R  RUSSELL J.L.+

(Nos 598-690) missing (Nos 691-709) 1988ApJ...332..917G GATEWOOD G.+

(Nos 710-747)  1989AJ.....97.1189G  GATEWOOD G.
(Nos 748-756)  1989AJ.....97.1184C  CASTELAZ M.W.
(Nos 757-815)  1989AJ.....98.1768C  CASTELAZ M.W.+
(Nos 816-997)  1990AJ....100.1621P  PERSINGER T.+

(Nos 998-999) 1992ApJ...392..710G GATEWOOD G.+ (No. 1000) missing (Nos 1001-1012) 1992AJ....104.1237G GATEWOOD G.+ (Nos 1013-1215) 1991AJ....102.2103C CASTELAZ M.W.+ (Nos 1216-1254) 1992AJ....104.1237G GATEWOOD G.+ (No. 1255) 1993AJ....105.1179G GATEWOOD G.+ (Nos 1256-1258) 1993PASP..105.1101G GATEWOOD G.+

1973H1

HAGGKVIST L., OJA T. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 12, 381-405 Photoelectric photometry of stars near the North Galactic Pole

HO

N = 2544 ; UBV or BV photometry ; mainly late-type giants Identif. charts and 1855 coordinates

1973H2

HEILES C. 1973,Ap.J. 183, 441-448 Measurements of the H2CO 6-centimeter excitation temperature. I. Dark dust clouds

Cloud

Positions (Nos 1-14), in dark dust clouds Numbering is different from Heiles, 1968 Position 8 is in LDN 134 Position 9 is near LDN 134 Position 10 is in cloud 4, Heiles 1968 Position 11 is near cloud 4, Heiles 1968 Position 12 is in cloud 5, Heiles 1968 Position 13 and 14 are in cloud 1, Heiles 1968

1973H3

HENIZE K.G., MENDOZA E.E. 1973,Ap.J. 180, 115-119 and Plate 2 Emission-line Stars in the Chamaeleon T association

HM

N = 32 ; 1975 coordinates ; V ; description No. 16 is named ”Cha 16” by Feast + Glass, 1973, MNRAS 164, 35P-38P

1973JB A

JUNG J., BISCHOFF M., OCHSENBEIN F. 1973,Bull. Inf. CDS 4, 27-34 The Catalogue of Stellar Identifications (CSI). A progress report II

CSI

Compilation updated by CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg)

1973JB B

OCHSENBEIN F., BISCHOFF M., EGRET D. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 259-264 Microfiche edition of CSI

CSI

N = 494946 ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-ref. tables See also IAU Colloquium 64 quoted in ref. 1982FM

1973K1 A

KATGERT P., KATGERT-MERKELIJN J.K., LE POOLE R.S. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 23, 171-194 A first 1415 MHz survey with the Westerbork synthesis radio tele- scope: an attempt to detect radio emission from quasistellar objects

WSRT

N = 224

1973K1 B

KATGERT J.K., SPINRAD H. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. 35, 393-406 A second deep survey with the Westerbork telescope at 1415 and 610 MHz: an attempt to obtain deep identifications

WSRT

N = 58

1973K1 C

KATGERT P. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. 38, 87-104 A third 1415 MHz survey with the Westerbork synthesis radio telescope: the 5C2 region (part I)

WSRT

N = 238

1973K1 D

WILLIS A.G., OOSTERBAAN C.E., DE RUITER H.R. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 25, 453-505 A Westerbork 1415 MHz survey of background radio sources. I. The catalogue

WSRT

N = 1075 in 96 fields (Nos 1-96, table 3) ; ν = 1415 MHz

1973K1 E

KATGERT J.K. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 31, 409-426 A catalogue of sources found at 610 MHz with the Westerbork synthesis radio telescope: source parameters and identifications

WSRT

N = 347

1973K2

KEEN N.J., WILSON W.E., HASLAM C.G.T., GRAHAM D.A., THOMASSON P. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. 28, 197-201 Radio observations of the Cygnus Loop at 2.7 and 10.7 GHz

CL

N = 7

1973K3

KARACHENTSEVA V.E. 1973,Soob. Spets. Astrofiz. Obs. Akad. Nauk. SSSR 8, 3-72 The catalogue of isolated galaxies (in Russian)

CIG

(Nos 1-1051) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. with NGC, IC or MCG ; δ > −03^{∘}, m < 15.7mag ; Radial velocity study in 1979, Astrophysics 15, 396

1973L1 A

LANNING H.H. 1973,P.A.S.P. 85, 70-84 A finding list of faint UV-bright stars in the galactic plane

Lanning

N = 82, (Nos 1-82)

1973L1 B

LANNING H.H., MEAKES M. 1994,P.A.S.P. 106, 38-46 A finding list of faint UV-bright stars in the galactic plane. II.

Lanning

(Nos 83-135)

1973L2

LOW F.J. 1973,AFCRL-TR-73-0371 Ground-based infrared measurements: final report

UOA

N = 27 ; λ = 5, 10 μm Confirmation of some preliminary AFCRL sources from Walker and Price, 1972, with a 20” resolution.

1973M1

MORRISON D., SIMON T. 1973,Ap.J. 186, 193-206 Broad-band 20 μm photometry of 76 stars

MS

N = 76

1973M2

MENDOZA E.E., GOMEZ T. 1973,P.A.S.P. 85, 439-455 Red stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

MG

Table II : (Nos 1-206) ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts A few cross-identif. with HV (Hodge+ 1967) and W61 (ref. 1961W2) are given in Table III

1973N1 A

NILSON P. 1973,Nova Acta Tegiae Soc. Sci. Upsaliensis, Ser. 5A, 1, 456 pp. and Uppsala Astr. Obs. Ann. 6 Uppsala general catalogue of Galaxies. Data for 12921 galaxies north of δ = -2^{∘}30’

UGC

N = 12921 19 more galaxies are listed with format NNNNNA in the addenda p. 437

1973N1 B

NILSON P. 1974,Uppsala Astr. Obs. Report No. 5 Catalogue of selected non-UGC galaxies

UGCA

N = 400 objects, incremental to UGC

1973R1

ROBINSON L.B., WAMPLER E.J. 1973,Ap.J.Lett. 179, L135-L139 Shakhbazian I: a distant cluster of compact galaxies

RW

N = 17 galaxies

1973R2

RIEKE G.H., LOW F.J., KLEINMANN D.E. 1973,Ap.J.Lett. 186, L7-L11 High-resolution maps of the Kleinmann-Low nebula in Orion

λ = 5, 10.5 and 21 μm

Table 1 :  IRc (Nos 1-5)  (IRc 1 = BN)

IRc

IRe (Nos 1-2)  (IRe 1 = KL)  IRe

1973S1 A

SLEE O.B., HIGGINS C.S. 1973,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 27, 1-43 Culgoora-1 list of radio source measurements at 80 MHz

CUL

N = 777 ; (table 5) + 222 undetected sources

1973S1 B

SLEE O.B., HIGGINS C.S. 1975,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 36, 1-60 Culgoora-2 list of radio source measurements at 80 MHz

CUL

N = 1291 (table 3) + 457 undetected sources

1973S1 C

SLEE O.B. 1977,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 43, 1-123 Culgoora-3 list of radio source measurements

CUL

N = 99 ; HPBW = 3.7’ at 80 MHz HPBW = 1.9’ at 160 MHz

1973S2

SANDULEAK N., STEPHENSON C.B. 1973,Ap.J. 185, 899-913 Low-dispersion spectra and galactic distribution of various inte- resting strong-emission-line objects in the southern Milky Way

SS73-

N = 179

1973S3 A

STEPHENSON C.B. 1973,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 1, No. 4, 79 pp. A general catalogue of cool carbon stars

CCS

N = 3219 ; No maps The catalogue or its sources are referred to as CCCS by the author.

1973S3 B

STEPHENSON C.B. 1985,A.J. 90, 784-786 New carbon stars found in a hemispheric survey

CCS

N = 105, numbered by us (CCS 3220-3324) and also found in litterature as NC (Nos 1-1015) ; 1900 coordinates ; No Identif. charts.

NC

Updated by the comprehensive catalogue CGCS ref. 1989ST.

1973S3 C

WILLEMS F.J. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. 203, 51-64 IRAS low-resolution spectra of cool carbon stars. II. Stars with thin circumstellar shells

CCS

Table 1: 72 stars from Stephenson, 1973 (ref. 1973S3), here named CNUM and with 1950 coordinates.

1973S3 D

WILLEMS F.J. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. 203, 65-70 IRAS low-resolution spectra of cool carbon stars. III. Stars with thick circumstellar shells

CCS

Table 1 : N = 15 stars from Stephenson, 1973 (ref. 1973S3) here named CNUM instead of CCS and with 1950 coordinates

1973S4 A

SHAKHBAZIAN R.K. 1973,Astrophysics 9, 296-304 Compact groups of compact galaxies

SHCG

(Nos 1-30) No. 1 is identical to Shakhbazian I , mistaken as a stellar cluster in ref. 1957S1 (and then 1970AR) and later studied in ref. 1973R1

1973S4 B

SHAKHBAZIAN R.K., PETROSIAN M.B. 1974,Astrophysics 10, 6-21 Compact groups of compact galaxies. II.

SHCG

(Nos 31-84)

1973S4 C

BAIER F.W., PETROSIAN M.B., TIERSCH H., SHAKHBAZIAN R.K. 1974,Astrophysics 10, 202-211 Compact groups of compact galaxies. III.

SHCG

1973S4 D

PETROSIAN M.B. 1974,Astrophysics 10, 291-298 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. IV.

SHCG

(Nos 139-175)

1973S4 E

BAIER F.W., TIERSCH H. 1975,Astrophysics 11, 146-155 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. V.

SHCG

(Nos 176-225)

1973S4 F

BAIER F.W., TIERSCH H. 1976,Astrophysics 12, 1-9 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. VI.

SHCG

(Nos 226-260)

1973S4 G

BAIER F.W., TIERSCH H. 1976,Astrophysics 12, 263-274 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. VII.

SHCG

(Nos 261-305)

1973S4 H

BAIER F.W., TIERSCH H. 1978,Astrophysics 14, 157-162 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. VIII.

SHCG

(Nos 306-337)

1973S4 I

PETROSIAN M.B. 1978,Astrophysics 14, 356-361 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. IX.

SHCG

(Nos 338-362) See also: Shakhbazian R.K., Amirkhanian A.S., 1978, Astrofiz. 14, 455-466 and plates. On the morphology of compact groups of compact galaxies

1973S4 J

BAIER F.W., TIERSCH H. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 24-27 and Plates Compact groups of compact galaxies. X.

SHCG

(Nos 363-377)

1973T1

TIFFT W.G., GREGORY S.A. 1973,Ap.J. 181, 15-17 Spectroscopy of outlying faint galaxies in the region of the Coma cluster

CT

N = 27 ; (Nos 1-51) ; Cross-identif. Zwicky-Herzog, 1963

1973T2

TIFFT W.G., JEWSBURY C.P., SARGENT T.A. 1973,Ap.J. 185, 115-119 Investigation of the Cancer cluster of galaxies

T

(Nos 1-8)

1973VM A

VAN DEN BERGH S., MARSCHER A.P., TERZIAN Y. 1973,Ap.J.Suppl. 26, 19-36 An optical atlas of galactic supernova remnants

-

N = 24

1973VM B

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1978,Ap.J.Suppl. 38, 119-128, Plates 10 to 16 A systematic search for galactic supernova remnants

-

Table 1 : 124 probable SNR with G designation

1973W1 A

WEGNER G. 1973,M.N.R.A.S. 163, 381-390 A spectroscopic survey of southern hemisphere white dwarfs. II. Spectroscopic data for 41 southern white dwarfs

Wg

(Nos 1-41)

1973W1 B

WEGNER G. 1975,M.N.R.A.S. 171, 637-646 A spectroscopic survey of southern hemisphere white dwarfs. V. Data for fifteen additional stars and the nature of the W219 group

Wg

N = 13 ; (Nos 42-54) ; Finding charts for Nos 46, 48, 52 ; all cross-identif. with L, BPM, DS, LFT numbers.

1973W2

WELIN G. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 9, 183-197 + Erratum: Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 28, 469 Hα emission stars in and near NGC 7000

UHα

N = 141

1973W3 A

WEISTROP D. 1973,Astr. Astrophys. 23, 215-219 A search for faint blue objects near the North Galactic Pole.

WEIS

Table I : N = 13 ; Identif. charts for 11 objects Nos taken from a UBV photometric study of 13820 stars between V = 12 and 18 near the North Galactic Pole: field centered on SA 57 (α (1950) = 13h06.4, δ (1950) = +29^{∘}44’ ; ℓ = 65.5^{∘}, b = 85.5^{∘}). See Weistrop, 1972, A.J. 77, 366-373

1973W3 B

YOSS K.M., NEESE C.L., HARTKOPF W.I. 1987,A.J. 94, 1600-1615 A kinematic and abundance survey at the galactic poles. III

WEIS

Positions and radial velocities for a sample of 83 stars drawn from UBV photometry of 6 fields near the NGP by Weistrop

1973W3 C

YOSS K.M., SHANKAR A., BELL D., NEESE C.L., DETWEILER H.L. 1989,P.A.S.P. 101, 653-660 Photoelectric V and (B-V) for Weistrop stars near the north galactic pole

WEIS

Photoelectric V and (B-V) for 173 stars near the galactic pole, and comparison with the photographic values obtained by Weistrop

1974BF

BERTAUD C., FLOQUET M. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 71-153 + Erratum: Astr. Astrophys. 20, 83 New catalogue of A stars with peculiar spectra (Ap) and with metallic lines (Am)

-

N = 1049 + 189 (no own numbering) Supersedes 1959B2 (Bertaud)

1974B1

BOHANNAN B., EPPS H.W. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 18, 47-79 Hα emission-line stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud. I. A new deep survey

BE

N = 625 ; Identif. charts

1974B2

BRANDIE G.W., BRIDLE A.H. 1974,A.J. 79, 903-917 Optical identifications and radio spectra of sources found by the Michigan 8 GHz survey

MA

N = 55 ; ν = 8000 MHz ; HPBW = 5.9’

1974C1 A

COYNE G.V., LEE T.A., DE GRAEVE E. 1974,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, 181-196 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. I. Vulpecula-Cygnus

VES

This part is revised and the cross-identif. corrected in 1974C1 F N = 132 ; (Nos 1-132)

1974C1 B

COYNE G.V., WISNIEWSKI W., CORBALLY C. 1975,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, 197-212 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. II. Cygnus

VES

This part is revised and the cross-identif. corrected in 1974C1 F N = 117 ; (Nos 133-249)

1974C1 C

WISNIEWSKI W., COYNE G.V. 1976,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, 225-235 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. III. Cygnus

VES

This part is revised and the cross-identif. corrected in 1974C1 F N = 75 ; (Nos 250-324)

1974C1 D

WISNIEWSKI W., COYNE G.V. 1977,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, 245-256 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. IV. Cygnus

VES

This part is revised and the cross-identif. corrected in 1974C1 F N = 95 ; (Nos 325-419)

1974C1 E

COYNE G.V., WISNIEWSKI W., OTTEN L.B. 1978,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, 257-265 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. V. Perseus

VES

This part is revised and the cross-identif. corrected in 1974C1 F N = 85 ; (Nos 596-680)

1974C1 F

MacCONNELL D.J., COYNE G.V. 1983,Vatican Obs. Publ. 2, No. 5, 63-72 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. VI. Revised catalogue of parts I - V

VES

List of 303 confirmed Hα emission objects and revision of the cross-identif. in ref. 1974C1 A to E

VES 205 and VES 228 are poss. PN in ref. 1992AO  MaCCo

1974C1 G

COYNE G.V., MacCONNELL D.J. 1983,Vatican Obs. Publ. 2, No. 6, 73-92 A survey for Hα emission objects in the Milky Way. VII.

VES

N = 297 ; (Nos 681-977) ; Identif. charts and UBVRI photometry

VES 866 and VES 905 are poss. PN in ref. 1992AO  CoMaC

1974C2

CRUZ-GONZALEZ C., RECILLAS-CRUZ E., COSTERO R., PEIMBERT M., TORRES-PEIMBERT S. 1974,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 1, 211-259 A catalogue of galactic O stars and the ionization of the low density interstellar medium by runaway stars

CGO

N = 664

1974EC

EICHHORN H. 1974,New York Astronomy of Star Positions

AC

Description of/and explanations about astrographic catalogues and catalogues of accurate positions of stars. See also the catalogues of catalogues by Sevarlic et al. also quoted in the introduction.

1974F1 A

FANTI C., FELLI M., FICARRA A., SALTER C.J., TOFANI G., TOMASI P. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 43-61 1408 MHz fan-beam survey at low galactic latitudes. I. The observations and a catalogue of small diameter sources

BG

N = 586

1974F1 B

FANTI C., MANTOVANI F., TOMASI P. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 1-17 New galactic sources in the BG catalogue: search at 1.4 GHz with the Westerbork synthesis radiotelescope

BG

Maps (HPBW from 18’ to 72’ ) of selected BG sources (the original BG survey had HPBW = 4’ x 1.9^{∘}). In the format, the subdivision A indicates a source connected with the BG source, α small scale structures, NN sources probably unrelated to the BG source.

1974F2

FEINSTEIN A., FORTE J.C. 1974,P.A.S.P. 86, 284-288 The open cluster NGC 6281

FF

N = 73

1974F3

FITZGERALD M.P. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. 32, 465-474 A remarkable ”Bright Dark Nebula” in Chamaeleon

CDN

N = 1

1974F4

FRIEDLANDER M.W., GOEBEL J.H., JOSEPH R.D. 1974,Ap.J.Lett. 194, L5-L8 Detection of new celestial objects at far-infrared Wavelengths

WU

N = 12

1974G1

GILLESPIE A.R. 1974,M.N.R.A.S. 166, 11P-15P Initial results from a radio continuum survey of the area around NGC 7331 and Stephan’s Quintet

ARG

N = 8

1974G2

GREENSTEIN J.L., SARGENT A.I. 1974,Ap.J.Suppl. 28, 157-209 The nature of faint blue stars in the halo. II.

FB

N = 189 This is the most extensive published reference, although not covering the 189 stars

1974G3 A

GATLEY I., BECKLIN E.E., MATTHEWS K., NEUGEBAUER G., PENSTON M.V., SCOV-ILLE N. 1974,Ap.J.Lett. 191, L121-L125 A new IR complex and molecular cloud in Orion

Ori MC

Named OMC2 (CO and 2.2μ map) Ori MC1 (centered 1’ NW of Trapezium) has a dense core containing Ori BN and Ori KL.

1974G3 B

MORRIS M., ZUCKERMANN B., TURNER B.E., PALMER P. 1974,Ap.J.Lett. 192, L27-L30 The new molecular cloud in Orion

Ori MC

1974G3 C

WERNER M.W., ELIAS J.H., GEZARI D.Y., WESTBROOK W.E. 1974,Ap.J.Lett. 192, L31-L32 1-millimeter continuum radiation from Orion Molecular Cloud 2

Ori MC

1974G4

GIACCONI R., MURRAY S., GURSKY H., KELLOGG E., SCHREIER E., MATILSKY T., KOCH D., TANANBAUM H. 1974,Ap.J.Suppl. 27, 37-64 The third Uhuru catalog of X-ray sources

3U

N = 161 ; All sky

1974H1 A

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 18, 463-489 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. I. Quick blue survey

ESO

In the format, the type may be T, TT, T ? Or TT ? N = 420 ; 20 fields Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 B

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 18, 491-509 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. II.

ESO

N = 446 ; 16 fields Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 C

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 22, 327-402 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. III.

ESO

N = 2280 ; 80 fields ; ≃ 70% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 D

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 27, 295-342 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. IV.

ESO

N = 2920 ; 101 fields ; 70% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 E

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 31, 15-54 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. V.

ESO

N = 2395 ; 78 fields ; 75% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 F

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 34, 285-340 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. VI.

ESO

N = 3162 ; 98 fields ; 90% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 G

HOLMBERG E.B., LAUBERTS A., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 39, 173-195 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. VII.

ESO

N = 2395 ; 72 fields ; ≃ 50% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 H

LAUBERTS A., HOLMBERG E.B., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 307-329 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. VIII.

ESO

N = 2597 ; 78 fields ; ≃ 50% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H1 I

LAUBERTS A., HOLMBERG E.B., SCHUSTER H.E., WEST R.M. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 46, 311-346 The ESO/Uppsala survey of the ESO(B) Atlas of the southern sky. IX.

ESO

N = 1881 ; 64 fields ; 50% are new objects Revised and superseded by Lauberts, ref. 1982LA

1974H2 A

HERBIG G.H. 1974,Lick Obs. Bull. 658, 11 + 10 pp. Draft catalog of Herbig-Haro objects

HH

Table 1 : (Nos 1-43) except Nos 13 ( marked on Fig. 2 but not listed) and 37.

later found: No. 28 = LP 415-1166 , No. 29 = LP 415-171 (ref. 1954H1 Q) Also defines LkH 321 and 324 to 350

1974H2 B

STROM S.E., GRASDALEN G.L., STROM K.M. 1974,Ap.J. 191, 111-142 Infrared and optical observations of Herbig-Haro objects

HH

N = 4 ; (H-H 100 to H-H l03 and H-HA to H-HE)

1974H2 C

SCHWARTZ R.D. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 35, 161-170 A survey of southern dark clouds for Herbig-Haro objects and Hα emission stars

Table 2 : (Nos 41-57 but no No. 43)  HH
Tables 3 to 9 : N = 140  Sz

Sz 80 (α = 15 51 47.5, δ = -37 54 37, 1950) is an emission galaxy (z = 0.026, Schwartz 1978, P.A.S.P. 90, 393-395)

1974H2 D

DOPITA M.A. 1978,Ap.J.Suppl. 37, 117-144 Optical emission from shocks. IV. The Herbig-Haro objects

HH

Subdivision explained p. 127 ; C may mean central

1974H2 E

HERBIG G.H., JONES B.F. 1981,A.J. 86, 1232-1244 Large proper motions of the Herbig-Haro objects HH1 and HH2

HH

Subdivisions, photographs, proper motions: HH-1 A to F ; HH-2 A to E, G to M, A’ ; HH-3, C-S star between HH-1 and HH-2 (fig. 3 and 7)

1974H2 F

DOPITA M.A., SCHWARTZ R.D., EVANS I. 1982,Ap.J.Lett. 263, L73-L77 Herbig-Haro objects 46 and 47: evidence for bipolar ejection from a young star

HH

HH-47C: a new Herbig-Haro objects HH-47D: a bubble-like nebula surrounding HH-47A = HH-47 (ref. 1974H2 C) The nearby ”Stars 1 and 2” (Schwartz, 1977, Ap.J.Lett. 212, L25-26, Table 1) are symbiotic and carbon stars

1974H2 G

JONES B.F., HERBIG G.H. 1982,A.J. 87, 1223-1232 Proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects. II. The relationship of HH-39 to R Mon and NGC 2261

HH

Accurate positions and photographs of R Mon a, b, c, HH-39 A to E

1974H2 H

HERBIG G.H., JONES B.F. 1983,A.J. 88, 1040-1052 Proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects. III. HH-7 through -11, HH-12 and HH-32

HH

Accurate positions, photographs, proper motions of: HH-7 to -12 and -17 (near NGC 1333) and AS 353 and HH-32

1974H2 I

SCHWARTZ R.D., JONES B.F., SIRK M. 1984,A.J. 89, 1735-1739 and Plates 90-94 Proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects. V. Southern HH objects

HH

Accurate 1950 positions, photographs, proper motions for HH-46, 47AN, AS, BN, BS, CN, CS, HH-48, HH-49, HH-50 A to E, HH-52, HH-53 A, B, HH-54 B, D, X, HH-56, HH-57, HH-99 A, HH-101 N and S, HH-104 A and B Paper IV of the series proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects is devoted to RNO 40 and 43, see ref. 1980C1 B

1974H2 J

PETTERSSON B. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 139, 135-146 A study of the Herbig-Haro object HH 120 and the associated cometary globule CG 30

HH

Infrared and spectroscopic observations of the new HH object HH 120 in the cometary globule CG 30, and JHKLM photometry of 5 IR sources. Plate in Fig. 1a

1974H2 K

HARTIGAN P., LADA C.J. 1985,Ap.J.Suppl. 59, 383-396 and Plates 2-22 CCD images of suspected Herbig-Haro objects

HH

V, R, I, Hα CCD images of 10 regions suspected to contain Herbig-Haro objects and discovery of HH 105 in the northern field of NGC 7129. Identif. chart Fig. 27 and 30 (Plate 14) Table 2 : Photometry and positions of objects in the 10 fields ; 1950 coordinates ; HH 105 is No. 24 in the field NGC 7129-N

1974H2 L

HARTIGAN P., GRAHAM J.A. 1987,A.J. 93, 913-919 and Plate 59 Outflows in the star-formation region near R CrA

HH

Photographs, spectra, and velocities of Herbig-Haro and associated visible stars : HH-99 A, HH-99 B, HH-104 A, HH-104 B, HH-101 A, HH-101 B, HH-101 S, HH-101 N and 3 new HH objects: Table 1 : Nos 96, 97, 98 ; 1950 coordinates Identif. Chart Fig. 1 (Plate) and 2

1974H2 M

JONES B.F., COHEN M., WEHINGER P.A., GEHREN T. 1987,A.J. 94, 1260-1270 Proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects. VIII. The region of NGC 2068

HH

Proper motions and long-slit low-resolution spectroscopy for many of the Herbig-Haro objects in the region of NGC 2068. Nomenclature for subdivisions (especially HH 24, see Sect. II )

1974H2 N

REIPURTH B., GRAHAM J.A. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. 202, 219-239 New Herbig-Haro objects in star-forming regions

HH

Table 3 : (Nos 58-82) New Herbig-Haro objects Individual HH-knots (Table 4) are given in the format NNa Identif. charts ([SII] 6717+6731 CCD frames)

1974H2 O

REIPURTH B. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. 220, 249-268 Herbig-Haro objects in flows from young stars in Orion

HH

Table 1 : 13 new objects (Nos 83-95) in LDN 1641 and 1630,

cross-identif. with Reipurth (1981R2 A and B)

Table 5 : components and adjacent stars ; 1950 coordinates format NNAN Filter CCD images and long slit spectroscopy

1974H2 P

REIPURTH B. 1989,Nature 340, 42-45 The HH 111 jet and multiple outflow episodes from young stars

HH

Discovery of an exceptionally fine jet, HH 111, emerging from a young star still embedded in the Orion molecular clouds Identif. chart Fig. 1, see legend for positions

1974H2 Q

REIPURTH B., MADSEN C. 1989,The Messenger 55, 32-37 Signposts of low mass star formation in molecular clouds

HH

Discovery of a new HH object, HH 122, seen as a tiny group of small nebulae near the eastern edge of the LDN 1622 cloud ; Identif. chart

1974H2 R

OGURA K. 1990,P.A.S.P. 102, 1366-1371 Two Herbig-Haro objects discovered by narrow-band CCD imagery

HH

Accurate 1950 coordinates of two new Herbig-Haro objects, HH-132 and 133, and of knots 132 A, B, C and 133 A, B, C, D, located in Puppis R2 and in Vela R2 ; Identif. charts

1974H2 S

REIPURTH B., HEATHCOTE S. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. 229, 527-532 HH 123: a Herbig-Haro object in the high-latitude cloud L 1642 4HH 123 is associated with the nebulous binary L 1642-2 / IRAS 04325-1419 of separ. 5.8” (Sandell+ 1987, Astr. Astrophys. 181, 283) Fig. 1: Hα , [S II], cont. and gz filters images Table 1 and Fig. 2 : Spectrum of HH 123

HH

1974H2 T

OGURA K., WALSH J.R. 1990,A.J. 101, 185-195 Five new Herbig-Haro objects in the Orion region

HH

Table II : 5 new HH (Nos 126-130)

the knots HH-126 A, B, HH-127 A, B, HH-130 A to C, HH-61 A, B, HH-62 A to D, HH-83 A to G Nearby IRAS Point Sources Accurates 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with Reipurth

1974H2 U

OGURA K. 1991,A.J. 101, 1803-1806 A peculiar Herbig-Haro object located far outside Lynds 1641

HH

Accurate 1950 coordinates of a new HH object HH-131, and of the 8 knots HH-131 A to G

1974H2 V

REIPURTH B., OLBERG M. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 246, 535-550 Herbig-Haro jets and molecular outflows in L 1617

HH

(Nos 110-113) and components ; 1950 coordinates For HH 111, refer to Reipurth ref. 1974H2 P Identif. charts for LDN 1617 (Fig. 1), HH 110 (Fig. 5), HH 111 (Fig. 12 and ref. 1974H2 P), HH 112 (Fig. 18), HH 113 (Fig. 19 and 20)

1974H2 W

OGURA K. 1991,Proc. Astr. Soc. Austral. 9, 295-296 A large number of Herbig-Haro objects/candidates in star-forming regions

HH

(Nos 124-138) discovered by slit spectroscopy and narrow-band CCD imagery.

1974H2 X

REIPURTH B., EIROA C. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 256, L1-L4 Discovery of four Herbig-Haro objects in Serpens

HH

Four small nebulae in the Serpens molecular cloud have been confirmed with interference filter CCD imaging as Herbig Haro objects Table 1 : (Nos 106-109) ; 1950 coordinates ; maps and photographs

1974H2 Y

REIPURTH B., HEATHCOTE S., VRBA F. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 256, 225-230 Star formation in Bok globules and low-mass clouds. IV. Herbig-Haro objects in B335

HH

ESO NTT (New Technology Telescope) Table 1 : positions and proper motions of HH 119A, B and C ; maps ; photographs ; low-resolution spectra near Hα

1974H2 Z

REIPURTH B., HEATHCOTE S. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 257, 693-700 Multiple bow shocks in HH 34 system

HH

Study of HH 34 and definition of HH 134 1.5’ to SW Identif. chart (Fig. 1a and 4) Table 2 : subcomponents HH 134A to H ; subcomponent HH 34X ; positions ; 1950 coordinates

1974H2AA

WALSH J.R., OGURA K., REIPURTH B. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 257, 110-118 and 2 Plates Two remarkable Herbig-Haro objects in the NGC 2264 region

HH

Two groups of Herbig-Haro objects, designated HH 124 and HH 125 have been discovered in the NGC 2264 complex. Direct plates, narrow-band CCD images, low-dispersion spectra and high-resolution line profiles of the sources have been obtained. Table 2 : HH 124 and 125 and subcomponents (respectively A to F, and A to P).

1974H2AB

OGURA K., WALSH J.R. 1992,Ap.J. 400, 248-259 Spectacular Herbig-Haro objects in the Carina region

HH

Low and high-dispersion spectroscopy ; [SII] images ; astrometry of two new HH objects in the eastern Carina (associated with BBW 347 in RCW 54 and the dark cloud DCLD 290.4+01.9 (ref.1986H1)). Table 2 : 1950 coordinates of HH135, HH 136 knots A to J, IRAS 11101-5830 ; Identif charts fig. 1 (plate 2).

1974H2AC

REIPURTH B., CHINI R., KRUGEL E., KREYSA E., SIEVERS A. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. 273, 221-238 Cold dust around Herbig-Haro energy sources: a 1300 μm survey

HH

Table 1: 1950 coordinates and IRAS fluxes of HH 114/115 (IRAS 05155+0707), HH 116 (IRAS 05494+0820) and HH 117/118 (IRAS 05496+0812)

1974H3

HODGE P.W., WRIGHT F.W. 1974,A.J. 79, 858-859 Catalog of 86 new star clusters in the Small Magellanic Cloud Identif. on the V charts of Hodge and Wright

HW

N = 86

1974H4

HOLDEN F. 1974,P.A.S.P. 86, 907-911 Measures of southern visual double stars

Hln

(Nos 1-17) ; addendum to the table p. 911.

1974H5

HODGE P.W. 1974,P.A.S.P. 86, 263-266 Dark nebulae in the Small Magellanic Cloud

HDN

(Nos 1-45) ; 1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1974K1

KOCH R.H., PERRY P.M. 1974,A.J. 79, 379-386 Photographic photometry in the field of NGC 2264

Koch

N = 300 ; (Nos 240-539) Continues W = WALK, ref. 1956W1, (Nos 1-239)

1974L1

LOYOLA P.R., SHISHKINA V.N. 1974,Publ. Dep. Astr. Univ. Chile, Obs. Astr. Nac. 2, 159-180 Third Santiago-Pulkovo fundamental star catalogue (SPF3). A catalogue in α of 671 fundamental bright stars of the zone +40^{∘} to -90^{∘}

SPF3

N = 671

1974MA

MARSALKOVA P. 1974,Astrophys. Space Sci. 27, 3-110 A comparison catalogue of HII-regions

Marsalkova

N = 698 ; From 13 catalogues or lists.

1974SS

SARGENT W.L.W., SEARLE L., KOWAL C.T. 1974,Proc. Int. Conf. on Supernovae, held in Lecce, ed. by C.B. Cosmovici, Dordrecht: Reidel, p. 33-49 Communication: the Palomar supernova search, in Supernovae and Supernovae remnants

SN

N ≃ 380 Table VIII p. 41-47 : supernovae discovered since 1885 Updated by Kowal. Superseded by 1984BC

1974S1

SERSIC J.L. 1974,Astrophys. Space Sci. 28, 365-373 A list of peculiar galaxies, interacting pairs, groups and clusters south of declination -43^{∘}

SER

N = 186 ; Apparent photographic magnitude (estimate), apparent diameter

1974S2

SISTLA G., KAFTAN-KASSIM M.A. 1974,M.N.R.A.S. 166, 17P-19P A confusing radio source near the planetary nebula IC 2149

SKK

N = 1 ; (α = 05h52m29s.5 , δ = +48^{∘}’08”.0)

1974S3

SIVAN J.P. 1974,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 16, 163-172 A new look at the interstellar hydrogen through a very-wide-field photographic Hα survey of the whole Milky Way

Siv

(Nos 1-11)

1974S4

SUTTON J.M., DAVIES I.M., LITTLE A.G., MURDOCH H.S. 1974,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 33, 1-44 The Molonglo radio source catalogues 2 and 3

Table 2 : N = 609  MC2
Table 3 : N = 657  MC3

1974S5

SANDULEAK N. 1974,P.A.S.P. 86, 215-216 New Southern Planetary Nebulae previously classified as emission-line stars

Sa1-

Table 1 : Star names ; 1950 coordinates ; N = 8 ; No Identif. charts The objects are not numbered in the paper, as each is given one (or two) name(s) then available (see below, col. 2). Subsequently, the acronym Sa1- was introduced (ref. 1967PK C) but only for Nos 4, 5, 8, though all objects are quoted under their PK names in the same ref. The other names qouted in 1967PK C, (col. 5 below) make use of 3 new acronyms, namely St1- (for Stephenson, observer of St1-1 = Sa1-1), StWr (ref. 1972S2), VVDKA. Later (ref. 1967PK F), they were transformed into Sp1-, StWr2- and StWr4- (differentiating between the different tables of PN in ref. 1972S2, a ref. which contains 30 tables all without any prposed acronym) and V-V3- (acronym introduced by Kohoutek, ref. 1967PK G). We collected here all available synonyms : The Col. 1, 2, 3 are taken in this ref. 1974S5 The Col 5 is taken in the ref. 1967PK C The Col. 6, 7 are taken in the ref. 1967PK F Col. 1: serial number (not printed in ref. 1974S5) Col. 2 : name of the object : HEN means He3- (ref. 1976H2);

WRA means WRAY 15- (ref. 1966W2); AS (ref. 1950M1)

Col. 3 : name of the observer : CBS = C.B. Stephenson,

NS = N. Sanduleak, SW = Stock + Wroblewski

Col. 4 : PK number (from ref. 1967PK C and G ;

PK 330-02 2 and PK 330-02 3 are erroneous in ref. 1967PK F)

Col. 5 : only synonym with the PK number given in ref. 1967PK C Col. 6 : Sa2- (ref. 1975S2) Col. 7 : other synonyms given in ref. 1967PK F

(1) (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6) (7)
1 WRA 490,  CBS  284 − 05 1  St1-1  51 Sp1-1  (∗)

HEN 358

2 HEN 959  SW  317 + 19 1  StWr 9  102 StWr4-9
3 WRA 1407  NS,SW 336 + 08 1  StWr 10  132 StWr4-10
4 WRA 1441  NS  330 − 02 3  Sa1-4  138 Sa1-4
5 WRA 1633  NS  340 − 04 1  Sa1-5  177 Sa1-5
6 WRA 1818  SW  340 − 14 1  StWr 41  278 StWr2-41
7 HEN 1716  NS  014 − 05 1  VVKDA 5 351 V-V3-5,

V-V Anon.2

8 AS 326 NS 020 − 05 1 Sa1-8 370 (∗) This is also LSWR 1, first misclassified as a WR star

1975A1 A

AZZOPARDI M., VIGNEAU J., MACQUET M. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 22, 285-321 List of 506 stars, probable SMC members

AzV

(Nos 1-506) ; UBV photoelectric photometry ; finding charts ; epoch 1975 coordinates. 193 of these stars have been previously confirmed as SMC members.

1975A1 B

AZZOPARDI M., VIGNEAU J. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 35, 353-369 Small Magellanic Cloud, additional list of probable members and foreground stars (among which 4 WR stars)

Table 1 : N = 18 new stars in SMC ; format NNNa ; the letter in the format means inclusion between two consecutive stars of the previous lists ordered in right ascension. Thus NNN ≤ 506

AzV

Table 2 : (Nos 1-124) Foreground stars, cross-identif.  AZVI...F

Identif. charts ; other maps and cross-identif. for SMC members can be found in ref. 1982AZ

1975A2

ARAKELIAN M.A. 1975,Soob. Biurakan Obs. 47, 3-40 The galaxies of high surface brightness

ARAK

Table 2 : N = 591 ; Identif. charts

1975A3

ARP H., O’CONNELL R.W. 1975,Ap.J. 197, 291-296 Properties of two blue compact galaxies

ACG

The acronym given by the authors is CG, from a type of galaxy.

1975B1

BRUNET J.P., IMBERT M., MARTIN N., MIANES P., PREVOT L., REBEIROT E., ROUSSEAU J. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 21, 109-136 Recherches dans le Grand Nuage de Magellan. I. Un catalogue de 272 etoiles O-B2 nouvelles

BI

Finding charts ; 1975 coordinates ; magnitudes and colours in UBV photmetry ; and spectral classifications

1975D1

DE VAUCOULEURS G. 1975,Stars and Stellar Systems Vol. IX: Galaxies and the Universe, chapter 14, p. 557-600 Nearby groups of galaxies

DEV G

N = 54

1975D2

DURDIN J.M., PLETICHA D., CONDON J.J., YERBURY M.J., JAUNCEY D.L., HAZARD C. 1975,NAIC Report 45, Arecibo, Puerto Rico, Ithaca, New york, (March 1975) The NAIC 611 MHz multibeam sky survey source list

NAIC

N = 3118 ; (0h ≤ α ≤ 12h, −2^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ +18^{∘})

1975E1

ELVIUS A. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. 44, 17-121 Variable blue object with a peculiar spectrum

AE

N = 1 ; He-rich obj. ; See also V ∗ Nomenclature

1975G1

GUIDA P. 1975,Unpublished Star discovered in 1975 in Cygnus

PG

Provisional unpublished designation used at the Maria Mitchell Obs. Ex.: PG 7, quoted by: HARNS G.L., 1978, J. Amer. Ass. Var. Stars Observers 6, 62 N = 1: 19h28 +38^{∘} 45 (W UMa type)

1975H1 A

HULSBOSCH A.N.M. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. 40, 1-25 Studies on high-velocity clouds of neutral hydrogen

{HVC \atop IVC}

ℓ = 60 to 180^{∘} Table 1 and 2 list surveys and detailed investigations Table 4 : N = 90 ; Identif. charts Also quoted (Identif. chart: Fig. 1) the complexes A, AC, B, M, OMM. See a comprehensive study in ref. 1991WV.

1975H1 B

GIOVANELLI R. 1980,A.J. 85, 1155-1181 Studies of high-velocity clouds. I. A high-sensitivity survey

{HVC \atop IVC}

(Nos 1-799)  Giovanelli

−900kms^{−1} < V LSR < +900kms^{−1} ; −15^{∘} < δ < +60^{∘} and ”Expanded Sample” defined p. 1168a

1975H1 C

MIRABEL I.F. 1981,Ap.J. 247, 97-103 A complex of high-velocity clouds in Sagittarius

HVC

Table 1 and maps : 6 clouds The systematic nomenclature HVC is being used for further lists, for instance objects detected near galaxies of the Local Group. See also other HVC in the complexes A, AC, B, M (ref. 1968H1) and MS (ref. 1977M2)

1975H1 D

HULSBOSCH A.N.M., WAKKER B.P. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 75, 191-236 A deep, nearly complete, survey of northern high-velocity clouds

HVC

Survey with the Dwingeloo telescope (HPBW = 35’), whole sky north of δ = -17.2^{∘}; Survey almost complete within the velocity interval -900 to +750kms^{−1}, for |V_{LSR}| > 100km.s^{−1} and T_{B} > 0.05K

Table I : Table of high-velocity profile components (N = 8491)

for a 1x1^{∘} grid defined in Table II

Table III: Selected newly discovered high-velocity clouds N = 15 Table IV : Identified galaxies The work by Bajaja+ 1985, Ap.J.Suppl. 58, 143-165, for the southern sky at the Instituto Argentino de Radioastronomia (HPBW = 34’), provides data for a 2/cos(δ ) x 2^{∘} grid (N = 742 measured points) but no individual HVC

1975H1 E

BAJAJA E., CAPPA DE NICOLAU C.E., MARTIN M.C., MORRAS R., OLANO C.A., POP-PEL W.G.L. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 345-362 A survey of several southern high-velocity complexes

HVC

complements Bajaja+ 1985, Ap.J.Suppl. 58, 143-165, with more detailed observations of selected objects with higher sensitivity 18 objects (Tables I, II, III) The location in ℓ, b coordinates is shown in Fig. 1 ; HI maps

1975H2

HECKMANN O., DIECKVOSS W., KOX H., GUNTHER A., BROSTERHUS E. 1975,Hamburger Sternwarte, Hamburg-Bergedorf, vol. 1 to 8 Katalog der Astronomischen Gesellschaft.

AGK3

N = 180000 ; On magnetic tape The first (AGK) and second (AGK2) editions are superseded by AGK3 Star Catalogue of positions and proper motions north of -2.5^{∘}declination See also the magnetic edited by CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg)

1975M1 A

MOFFAT A.F.J., VOGT N. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 20, 85-124 Southern open star clusters. IV. UBV - Hβ photometry of 26 clusters from Monoceros to Vela

Bochum

N = 7

1975M1 B

MOFFAT A.F.J., VOGT N. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 20, 125-153 Southern open star clusters. V. UBV - Hβ photometry of 20 clusters in Carina

Bochum

N = 5 ; (Nos 8 - 12) Bochum 8 (Anon near HR 4009), α = 10h10.0, δ = -57^{∘}45’ (1950) is Van den Bergh-Hagen 90 = C 1010-578

1975M1 C

MOFFAT A.F.J., VOGT N. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 20, 155-182 Southern open star clusters. VI. UBV - Hβ photometry of 18 clusters from Centaurus to Sagittarius

Bochum

(Bo 13 and 14)

1975M1 D

FITZGERALD M.P., HURKENS R., MOFFAT A.F.J. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. 46, 287-291 Bochum 15, a new young stellar aggregate in Puppis

Bochum

N = 1

1975M2

MELNICK J., QUINTANA H. 1975,Ap.J.Lett. 198, L97-L99 Southern galaxy clusters identified with 3U X-ray sources

MQCG

N = 6

1975M3 A

MAFFEI P. 1975,I.B.V.S. 985, 6 pp. New variable stars in the field of M16-M17

M

N = 198 new objects ; (Nos 1-208)

1975M3 B

MAFFEI P. 1977,I.B.V.S. 1302, 3 pp. New variable stars in the field of γ Cygni

M

N = 62 new objects ; (Nos 210-277) The lack of some numbers (Nos 209, 227, 231, 232, 250, 255, 262) is due to the exclusion of a few variables, not confirmed later

1975M3 C

GASPERONI V., MAFFEI P., TOSTI G. 1991,I.B.V.S. 3573, 2 pp. New variable stars in the field of IC1805

M

N = 35 new objects ; (Nos 278-312)

1975M4

MORGAN W.W., KAYSER S., WHITE R.A. 1975,Ap.J. 199, 545-548 cD galaxies in poor clusters

MKW

N = 16 ; (Nos 1-12 and 1s-4s)

1975N1

NORDSTROM B. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 21, 193-239 A spectral survey of the southern Milky Way. Il. 0-B5 stars: l = 237^{∘} to 281^{∘}

Ns

Table 3 : (Nos 1-568) ; Finding charts (6 missing numbers) No. 238 = PK 254+0^{∘}

1975P1

PEARSON T.J. 1975,M.N.R.A.S. 171, 475-505 The 5C5 survey of radio sources

5C5.

N = 250 ; ν = 408 MHz ν = 1407 MHz HPBW = 80”x109” HPBW = 23” x 31”

1975R1

ROSS H.N. 1975,Ap.J. 200, 790-802 Variable radio source structure on a scale of several minutes of arc

G

Table 6 : N = 19

1975S1

STENHOLM B. 1975,Astr. Astrophys. 39, 307-318 Wolf-Rayet stars and galactic structure

Table I : N = 6  (Nos 1-6)  WR  SB

Nos 2, 5, 6 are rejected from WR Nomenclature (ref. 1981VH A)

Table II: N = 4 (Nos 1-4) PN Ste-

See PK Nomenclature

1975S2

SANDULEAK N. 1975,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs., Vol. 2, No. 1 A Catalog of confirmed Planetary Nebulae in the Southern Milky Way noted on low-dispersion objective-prism plates

Sa2-

Table I : (Nos 1-392) ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with PK (ref. 1967PK) and WRAY 15-, 16-, 17-, 19- (ref. 1966W2) No Identif. charts

1975V1 A

VAN DEN BERGH S., HERBST W. 1975,A.J. 80, 208-211 and Plates p. 255-262 Catalogue of southern stars embedded in nebulosity

VdBH

N = 136 stars ; (format NNa) ; Identif. charts The NN number refers to the corresponding reflexion nebula (Nos 1-93)

1975V1 B

HERBST W. 1975,A.J. 80, 212-226 R Associations. I. UBV photometry and MK spectroscopy of stars in southern reflection nebulae

VdBH

Table II : 156 stars in 93 RFN Table III: 47 stars near RFN

(format NNa for both tables)

Table VI :Southern R Associations (N = 20)

1975V1 C

GAHM G.F., MALMORT A.M. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 82, 295-304 A study of stars in Southern Dust Clouds with bright nebulosities

VdBH

Table 1 : new stars in RFN ; N = 9 ; Identif. charts

1975V2

VAN DEN BERGH S., HAGEN G.L. 1975,A.J. 80, 11-16 Uniform survey of clusters in the Southern Milky Way Van den Bergh-Hagen

N = 1 to 262 ; (several cross-identif.) ; 63 new objects Curtis-Schmidt Tel. of Cerro Tololo Obs. ; ℓ = 250^{∘}to360^{∘}

1975V3

VINER M.R., ERICKSON W.C. 1975,A.J. 80, 931-954 26.3 MHz radio source survey. II. Radio source positions and fluxes

CL

N = 590

1975V4

VRBA F.J., STROM K.M., STROM S.E., GRASDALEN G.L. 1975,Ap.J. 197, 77-84 Further study of the stellar cluster embedded in the Ophiuchus dark cloud complex

N = 1 ; (C 1622 - 243) ; OCL  Grasdalen
Table 1 : (Nos 1-31) ; 2 μm sources in the cluster C 1622-243  VSSG

discovered by Grasdalen+ 1973ApJ.184.L53G ; Identif. chart

1975W1

WALKER R.G., PRICE S.D. 1975,AFCRL-TR-75-0373, Air Force Cambridge Research Laboratory Infrared Sky Survey, vol. 1 Catalog of observations at 4, 11 and 20 μm

AFGL

Followed and improved by the catalog AFGL Most of the sources have been later confirmed in the AFGL catalogue (ref. 1976P1) with the same number. N ≃ 3100

1976B1

BRUCK M.T. 1976,Occasional Rep. R. Obs. Edinburgh, No. 1 Star clusters in the Small Magellanic Cloud

Bruck

(Nos 1-168) ; new clusters ; charts

1976CC

CLARK D.H., CASWELL J.L. 1976,M.N.R.A.S. 174, 267-305 A study of galactic supernova remnants, based on Molonglo-Parkes observational data

-

Superseded by Milne, ref. 1979ML

1976C1

CLARKE J.N., LITTLE A.G., MILLS B.Y. 1976,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 40, 1-71 The Molonglo radio source catalogue 4: the Magellanic Cloud region

MC4

N = 1349 ; sources in SMC and LMC ; ν = 408 MHz ; beam 2.62′ (α ) × 2.86′ secz (δ ) Appendix 3: maps

1976C2

COHEN M., KUHI L.V. 1976,Ap.J. 210, 365-376 Spectrophotometric studies of young stars. I. The Cepheus IV association

MC

N = 4 ; Identif. charts

1976D1 A

DAVIES R.D., ELLIOT K.H., MEABURN J. 1976,Mem.R.A.S. 81, 89-128 The nebular complexes of the Large and Small Magellanic Clouds

Table II : (Nos 1-329)  H II in LMC  DEM L
Table III: (Nos 1-167)  H II in SMC  DEM S

Hα + [N II] photographs and Identif. charts

1976D1 B

MEABURN J. 1986,M.N.R.A.S. 223, 317-321 Young-star formation in the Magellanic H I bridge

DEM S

Table 1: (Nos 168-172) New Hα nebulosities in SMC Identif. chart; photograph of DEM S 171 (a shell of 8’ in diameter) and 172

1976D2

DUBOUT-CRILLON R. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 25, 25-54 H II regions of the northern Milky Way: medium-large-field photographic atlas and catalogue

DU

N = 527

1976D3

DE VAUCOULEURS G., DE VAUCOULEURS A., CORWIN H.G.Jr 1976,Austin: Univ. of Texas Press, 396 pp. Second reference catalogue of bright galaxies

-

N = 4364 ; (The BG2 catalogue) sources are named NGC, IC or A (anonym)

1976E1

EGGEN O.J. 1976,Ap.J.Suppl. 30, 351-396 Stellar population samples at the galactic poles. III. UBVRI observations of proper motion stars near the south pole and the luminosity laws for the halo and old disk populations

EGM

N > 823 ; (Nos 1-823) 13 stars (Table 2 : supplementary list) have format NNNb

1976F1

FEHRENBACH Ch., DUFLOT M., ACKER A. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 24, 379-388 Wolf-Rayet stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

FD

N = 80 (among which 6 are new) ; See ref. 1981BR A Identif. charts only for Nos 50, 51, 53, 56, 77

1976G1

GOMEZ T., MENDOZA E.E. 1976,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 1, 381-384 and Plates 13-75 A finding list of Hα emission objects in the Coalsack region

GM

N = 275 ; area 25 sq.^{∘} ; Identif. charts ; cross-identif. with Wray 1966 ; ref. 1966W1 (Tables XV, XVI, XVII)

1976G2 A

GREEN R.F., GREENSTEIN J.L. 1976,P.A.S.P. 88, 598-602 A blue variable at high latitude

PG

N = 1 ; (PG 2337+12)

1976G2 B

GREEN R.F. 1976,P.A.S.P. 88, 665-668 A discovery program for bright quasars: preliminary results

PG

N = 4

1976G2 C

GREEN R.F., FERGUSON D., LIEBERT J., SCHMIDT M. 1982,P.A.S.P. 94, 560-564 Cataclysmic variable candidates from the Palomar Green Survey

PG

Table I : N = 22 ; Identif. charts

1976G2 D

SCHMIDT M., GREEN R.F. 1983,Ap.J. 269, 352-374 Quasar evolution derived from the Palomar bright quasar survey and other complete quasar surveys

PG

The Palomar Bright Quasar Survey (BQS), a subset of the Palomar-Green (PG) survey. 114 objects to an average limiting magnitude B = 16.16, of which 92 quasars with M_{B} < −23

1976G2 E

GREEN R.F., SCHMIDT M., LIEBERT J. 1982,Ap.J.Suppl. 61, 305-352 The Palomar-Green catalog of ultraviolet-excess stellar objects

PG

N ≃ 2000

1976G2 F

BERRIMAN G., SCHMIDT G.D., WEST S.C., STOCKMAN H.S. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 74, 869-883 An optical polarization survey of the Palomar-Green bright quasar sample

PG

Follow-up of ref. 1976G2 D Table 1 : optical linear polarimetry of PG QSOs

One cross-identif. (when available) ; no identif. charts

1976H1 A

HAWARDEN T.G., BRAND P.W.J.L. 1976,M.N.R.A.S. 175, 19P-22P ”Cometary” globules and the structure of the Gum Nebula

CG

N = 12 ; Plates

1976H1 B

SANDQVIST Aa. 1976,M.N.R.A.S. 177, 69P-71P Four more cometary globules in the Gum Nebula

CG

N = 4 ; (Nos 13-16)

1976H1 C

ZEALEY W.J., NINKOV Z., RICE E., HARTLEY M., TRITTON S.B. 1983,Astrophys. Lett. 23, 119-131 Cometary Globules in the Gum-Vela Complex

CG

Table I : (Nos 1-36) and Nos 31 A, B, C ; 1950 coordinates CG 35 = Ori-I-2 ; The head of CG 12 is NGC 5367 ; Most of the CG objects have tails pointing directly away from Centre 1 (08h15m - 44^{∘}30’) or Centre 2 (07h46m - 46^{∘}30’)

1976H1 D

REIPURTH B. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. 117, 183-198 Star formation in Bok globules and low-mass clouds

Table 1 : Newly defined objects are CG 37 and 38, the subdivisions A to E in CG 31 (fig. 10), and a new HH object between CG 30 and 31.

CG

GDC (Nos 1-7) (Gum Dark Cloud)  GDC

1950 coordinates ; Photographs for CG 1, 4, 13, 15, 30, 31, 38, GDC 1 to 5.

1976H1 E

SRIDHARAN T.K. 1992,J. Astrophys. Astr. 13, 217-239 Kineatics of the Cometary Globules in the Gum Nebula

CG

Kinematics studied from 12CO observations at 115.27 GHz (beam 4.4 arcmin). Overallmap (fig. 2) Table 1 remeasured 1950 coordinates for head and tail-end of most of CG Nos 1-38 (and subdivisions).

1976H2

HENIZE K.G. 1976,Ap.J.Suppl. 30, 491-550 Observations of southern emission-line stars

He3-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-1929) ; He 3-1312 and 1333 are PN

1976H3

HOG E., VON DER HEIDE J. 1976,Abh. Hamburger Sternwarte IX, 1-334 PERTH 70, a catalogue of positions of 24900 stars

SRS

N = 24900 ; δ < +5^{∘} ; (Nos 1-45115) with missing intervals between 20495 and 45115 The suffix S after the number indicates a FK4 suppl. star

1976L1

LAUBERTS A. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. 52, 309-311 Three distant stellar clusters found on ESO blue survey plates

E

N = 3 ; (probable GCL) : E1 = ESO 201-SC10 = C 0353-497 E2 = ESO 120-SC08 = C 0535-618 E3 = ESO 037-SC01 = C 0921-770

1976M1

McCARTHY M.F. 1976,Vatican Obs. Publ. 1, No. 7 Emission stars in a field in Cygnus

CgHα

N = 81

1976M2

MOFFAT A.F.J. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. 50, 429-434 Mass loss from the M3 supergiant HD 143183 in a young compact star cluster in Norma

Moffat

Young compact star cluster around the M3 Ia star HD 143183 N = 1 ; (C 1557-540)

1976P1 A

PRICE S.D., WALKER R.G. 1976,AFGL-TR-76-0208 Environmental Research Papers, No. 576 The AFGL Four Color Infrared SKY Survey

AFGL

Contains most of the AFCRL (1975) catalogue with the same number (acronym AFGL = GL identical to CRL) and 306 new sources of the southern hemisphere, numbered 4001 to 4306 N ≃ 3400 λ = 4.2, 11.0, 19.8 μm (Northern hemisphere) with 3.4’x10.5’ ; beam λ = 11.1, 19.6, 17.4 μm (Southern hemisphere) with 5.1’x10.5’ ; beam

1976P1 B

PRICE S.D. 1977,AFGL-TR-77-0160 The AFGL four color infrared sky survey: supplemental catalog

AFGL

N = 2477 ; (S stands for supplement)

1976P1 C

GRASDALEN G.L., GEHRZ R.D., HACKWELL J.A., CASTELAZ M., GULLIXON C. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 53, 413-457 The stellar component of the galaxy as seen by the AFGL infrared sky survey

AFGL

Revised and pruned version of the AFGL Catalog: stellar component ; defines the following classes of objects:

Table 1 : N = 424 FMO sources (seen reliably only at 4 μm) Table 2 : N ≃ 200 LL sources (seen reliably only at λ ≥ 11 μm) Table 3 : N ≃ 200 LST sources (lost sources = rejected sources) There are 164 LL, 402 FMO, 173 LST sources in the WIRO (Wyoming Infrared Observatory) zone of the AFGL catalog

1976R1

RICHTER N., SCHNELL A. 1976,A.N. 297, 275-278 Three new remarkable pairs of spherical compact galaxies

DC

N = 3

1976R2

ROSE J.A. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 23, 109-114 A catalogue of southern clusters of galaxies

RoCG

N = 124 ; probable clusters of galaxies in selected areas around the South Galactic Pole ; 1975 coordinates ; population ; angular diameter

1976ST

STEPHENSON C.B. 1976,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 2, 21-53 A general catalogue of S-type stars

Stephenson

N = 741 ; 1st edition ; updated by ref. 1984ST A (acronym CSS)

1976S1 A

SANDQVIST Aa., LINDROOS K.P. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. 53, 179-189 Interstellar formaldehyde in southern dark dust clouds

SL

(Nos 1-42)

1976S1 B

SANDQVIST Aa. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. 57, 467-470 More southern dark dust clouds

SL

N = 95 ; (Nos 101-195)

1976S2

SANDULEAK N. 1976,A.J. 81, 350-363 Catalog of probable dwarf stars of type M3 and later in the direction of the North Galactic Pole

Sand

N = 274

1976S4

SMITH M.G., AGUIRRE C., ZEMELMAN M. 1976,Ap.J.Suppl. 32, 217-231 and Plates 1-10 Emission-line galaxies and quasars. II. The classification systems and list N 1 ; declination ≤ −27.5^{∘} ; galactic latitude ≥ +20^{∘}

Tol

(Nos 1-116) ; Cross-identif. with Parkes name ; Identif. charts ; Tol 26 is a PN = CTIO 1230-275 = PN G298.0+34.8 = PK 298+34 1

1976S5

STROM K.M., STROM S.E., VRBA F.J. 1976,A.J. 81, 308-313 and Plate p. 385 Infrared surveys of dark-cloud complexes. I. The Lynds 1630 dark cloud

SSV

(Nos 1-70) ; See also ref. 1976S6, 1976S8, 1976V1

1976S6

STROM S.E., VRBA F.J., STROM K.M. 1976,A.J. 81, 314-316 and Plate p. 387 Infrared surveys of dark-cloud complexes. II. The NGC 1333 region

StVS

(Nos 1-25) ; Similar studies in other clouds ; see ref. 1976S5, 1976S8, 1976Vl

1976S7

STOCK J., OSBORN W., IBANEZ M. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 24, 35-52 A catalogue of A and F type supergiants in the Large Magellanic Cloud

STO

(Nos 1-890) ; a few cross-identif. ; no Identif. charts

1976S8

STROM K.M., STROM S.E., VRBA F.J. 1976,A.J. 81, 320-322 and Plates p. 391-392 Infrared surveys of dark-cloud complexes. IV. The Lynds 1517 and Lynds 1551 clouds

Table 1 : (Nos 1-6)  2 μm sources in LDN 1551 dark cloud  StSV1-
Table 2 : (Nos 1-13)  2 μm sources in LDN 1517 dark cloud  StSV2-

Similar studies in other clouds, see ref. 1976S5, 1976S6, 1976V1

1976S9

STROM S.E., VRBA F.J., STROM K.M. 1976,A.J. 81, 638-640 and Plates p. 679-680 Infrared surveys of dark clouds complexes. V. The NGC 7129 region and the Serpens dark cloud

Table I : (Nos 1-16)  NGC 7129  SVS1-
Table II: (Nos 1-20)  Serpens dark cloud  SVS2-
(α ≃ 18h27m, δ ≃ +1^{∘}14’, 1950)

1976TD

TERZIAN Y., DAVIDSON K. 1976,Astrophys. Space Sci. 44, 479-500 Pulsars: observational parameters and a discussion on dispersion measures

PSR

N = 147 Catalogue updated by the authors. Same designation but with P PULS: old designation for PSR, format AA HHMM or AA HHMM+DD

1976T1

TURNER E.L., GOTT J.R. III 1976,Ap.J.Suppl. 32, 409-427 Groups of galaxies. I. A catalogue

TG

737 galaxies assigned to 103 separate groups, from a sample of 1087 galaxies

Table 1, col. 4 : (Nos 1-103) Group of galaxies Table 1, col. 1 : format FFFNNN Galaxy (from ref. 1960Z1)

1976V1

VRBA F.J., STROM S.E., STROM K.M. 1976,A.J. 81, 317-319 and Plate p. 389 Infrared surveys of dark cloud complexes. III. The R Corona Austrina dark cloud

VSST

(Nos 1-18) Similar studies in other clouds ; see ref. 1976S5, 1976S6, 1976S8

1976V2 A

VRBA F.J., STROM S.E., STROM K.M. 1976,A.J. 81, 958-969 and Plates p. 1021-1029 Magnetic field structure in the vicinity of five dark-cloud complexes

VSS

Table II : stars in ρ Oph Cloud (Nos 1-124) Table VI : stars in LDN 1630 (M78) (Nos 1-37) Table VIII: stars in CrA (Nos 1-76) Table IX : stars in LDN 1450 (NGC 1333) (Nos 1-59) Table XI : stars in LDN 1551 (Nos 1-21) Fig. 1: map of linear polarization across the CrA DCld, with designation of each star.

1976V2 B

VRBA F.J., COYNE G.V., TAPIA S. 1981,Ap.J. 243, 489-511 Observations of grain and magnetic field properties of the Coronae Australis dark cloud

VSS

Table 3 : new stars in CrA ; (Nos 77-97) ; continuation of Table VIII of ref. 1976V2 A ; 1950 coordinates. Identif. charts Polarimetric study

1976V2 C

VRBA F.J., COYNE G.V., TAPIA S. 1993,A.J. 105, 1010-1026 and Plates 54-57 An investigation of grain properties in the ρ Ophiuchi dark cloud

VSS

Table 1: (Nos 131-153) ; Additional stars in ρ Oph ; continuation of Table II of ref. 1976V2 A ; 1950 coordinates. Tables 2, 3, 4 : Spectroscopy and photometry for all stars (Nos 1-153), polarization data for a fraction among them. A few cross-identif.

1976W1

WEINBERGER R., ELSASSER E., BEETZ M., BIRKLE K. 1976,Astr. Astrophys. 48, 327-329 Another possible nearby galaxy

Calar Alto

N = 2

1977A1 A

ALKSNIS A., ALKSNE Z., PLATAIS I. 1977,Investigation of the Sun and red stars 7, 11-16 (in Russian) Carbon stars near open clusters at galactic latitude 4.5^{∘} < |b| < 9.5^{∘} between longitudes 68^{∘} and 184^{∘}

BC

Previous references are: Investigation of the Sun and red stars 1976ISKZ.4.5A, 1976ISKZ.5.15A, 1977ISKZ.6.55A ; See ref. 1977A1 B

1977A1 B

ALKSNIS A., ALKSNE Z., OZOLINA V., PLATAIS I. 1978,Investigation of the Sun and red stars 8, 5-25 New carbon stars in the zone centered at the latitude b = +7^{∘}

BC

A catalogue of cool carbon stars found with the Baldone Schmidt telescope is available at the CDS (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg), See Bull. Inf. CDS 25, 135, 1983 for (Nos 1-217) with all references. Kurtanidze and West, 1980 Astr. Astrophys. 39, 35-37, identified 10 ”new carbon stars” in Cygnus among which BC 62, 77, 96, 97 and 98.

1977A1 C

ALKSNE Z., ALKSNIS A., EGLITIS I. 1981,Investigation of the Sun and red stars 13, 5-11 New carbon stars at the galactic longitude 128^{∘}- 140^{∘}

BC

(Nos 218-234) ; Identif. charts

1977A1 D

ALKSNE Z., ALKSNIS A., EGLITIS I. 1983,Nauchnye informatsii 52, 138 Carbon stars found on infrared plates at the galactic longitude 86^{∘}

BC

(Nos 235-245) ; Identif. charts

1977A1 E

ALKSNIS A., OZOLINA V. 1983,Investigation of the Sun and red stars 19, 40-46 Search for faint carbon stars in field centered ℓ = 86^{∘}, b = 0^{∘}

BC

Table 2 : (Nos 246-255) ; Identif charts A list of 9 suspected carbon stars (1950 and galactic coordinates) is also given. The authors are considering to revise and supplement the Catalogue described in ref. 1977A1 B

1977A1 F

ALKSNIS A., ALKSNE Z. 1988,Riga Zinatne publishing house, pp. 270 Carbon stars in a field in Cygnus

{BC \atop CCS}

Photometry from R, V, B plates of 140 carbon stars situated in a 240 sq.^{∘} field, centered on galactic coordinates ℓ = 90^{∘}, b = 0^{∘} in Cygnus. Carbon stars are taken mostly from CCS (ref. 1973S3 A) and BC (ref. 1977A1 A to E) catalogs. Finding charts for stars of the 86^{∘} and 94^{∘} longitude zones are given with comparison stars identified on them in Suppl. 1 Fig. 1-103 and magnitudes for comparison stars in Suppl. 2

1977A2

ALBERT C.E., WHITE R.A., MORGAN W.W. 1977,Ap.J. 211, 309-310 cD galaxies in poor clusters. II.

AWM

N = 7

1977A3

ARDEBERG A., MAURICE E. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 28, 153-168 A spectrographic and photometric study of stars and interstellar medium surrounding HD 101205

ARMA

HD 101205 = LSS 2427 in IC 2944 (Nos 1-125)

1977A4

ARDEBERG A., MAURICE E. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 30, 261-278 Observations of supergiant stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud

SMC ARM

Catalog: (Nos 1-92) ; 1975 coordinates ; UBV ; Sp type ; interstellar CaII line and stellar radial velocities Cross-identif. with Sk (ref. 1968S1)

1977BF A

BERGER J., FRINGANT A.-M. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 28, 123-152 A search for faint blue stars in high galactic latitudes. I. Nine PSS fields near the North Galactic Pole

PB

N = 4431 stars and 84 compact obj. ; (Nos 1-4515)

1977BF B

BERGER J., FRINGANT A.-M. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 39, 39-52 A search for faint blue stars in high galactic latitudes. II. Fourteen PSS fields at declinations +6^{∘} and 0^{∘} near the South Galactic Pole

PB

N = 2011 ; (Nos 5001-7011) ; Cross-identif. with 9 catalogues

1977BF C

BERGER J., FRINGANT A.-M. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 58, 565-583 A search for faint blue stars at high galactic latitudes. III. Twelve PSS fields at declinations -6^{∘} and -12^{∘} near the South Galactic Pole

PB

N = 2484 ; (Nos 7012-9495) ; Cross-identif. 26 PB fields are shown in fig. 1

1977B1

BERNES C. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 29, 65-70 A catalogue of bright nebulosities in opaque dust clouds

Bernes

(Nos 1-160)

1977CO

COLLINS M. 1977,INSPEC Bibliography Ser. No. 2 IEE, Great Britain, Astronomical Catalogues 1951-1975

-

1977D1

DUUS A., NEWELL B. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 35, 209-219 A catalog of southern groups and clusters of galaxies

DNCG

N = 957 ; δ < −27^{∘} ; 1950 coordinates ; population ; type and distance class

1977D2

DRILLING J.S. 1977,A.J. 82, 714-717 UBV photometry of stars in a region near the South Galactic Pole

DRIL

(Nos 1-51) ; A few stars are cross-identif. with PS NN II

1977E1

EINESTO J., JOEVEER M., KAASIK A., KALAMEES P., VENNIK J. 1983,Tartu Astr. Obs. Teated No. 49, 3-73 (= Comm. Obs. Astrophys. Struve of Tartu) A list of Hypergalaxies

HYP

Table 1 : (Nos 1-60)

1977F1 A

FAIRALL A.P. 1977,M.N.R.A.S. 180, 391-400 150 southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies

Fairall

N = 150 ; (F - is used in the table)

1977F1 B

FAIRALL A.P. 1979,M.N.R.A.S. 188, 349-356 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies. II.

Fairall

N = 60 ; (Nos 151-210) ; Identif. charts for most objects

1977F1 C

FAIRALL A.P. 1980,M.N.R.A.S. 192, 389-397 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies. III.

Fairall

N = 80 ; (Nos 211-290) ; Cross-identif. given when available photographs of a few objects

1977F1 D

FAIRALL A.P. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 196, 417-424 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies. IV.

Fairall

N = 70 ; (Nos 291-360) ; Cross-identif. given when available

1977F1 E

FAIRALL A.P. 1983,M.N.R.A.S. 203, 47-54 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies. V.

Fairall

Table 1 : (Nos 361-625)

1977F1 F

FAIRALL A.P. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 210, 69-77 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies-VI

Fairall

Table 1 : (Nos 626-1065) ; 1950 coordinates Most of these galaxies show absorption line spectra No Identif. charts

1977F1 G

FAIRALL A.P. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 233, 691-696 Spectroscopic survey of southern compact and bright-nucleus galaxies-VII

Fairall

Table 1 : (Nos 1066-1185), 1950 coordinates, cross-identif. with ESO discovery name. 11 Seyfert (Table 2) and 26 other emission-line objects (Table 3). No Identif. charts. This paper marks the completion, from the South Celestial Pole to δ -30^{∘}, of a survey begun in 1975.

1977F2

FELLI M., TOFANI G., FANTI C., TOMASI P. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 27, 181-204 A 408 MHz fan-beam survey at low galactic latitudes. III. The catalogue of extended sources

BGE

N = 77 ; 15^{∘} < ℓ < 245^{∘} ; |b| ≤ 3.5^{∘} ; resol. 4.2′ × 1.9^{∘}

1977F3

FROLOV V.N. 1977,Izv. Glav. Astr. Obs. Pulkovo 195, Astrofiz. Astrometr., p. 8O-97 Photometry and proper motions of stars of four galactic clusters in Cassiopeia

Frolov

N = 1 ; (C 2354 + 613) ; α = 23h54.2 ; δ = +60^{∘}57’ (1950)

1977G1

GARRISON R.F., HILTNER W.A., SCHILD R.E. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 35, 111-126 MK spectral classifications for southern OB stars

Hbg

1113 stars out of 1660 from ref. 1966K3

1977G2

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L., MAGHAKIAN T.Yu. 1977,Sov. Astr. Lett. 3, 58-60 (errata p. 261) New cometary nebulae

GM1-

Found from an inspection of the Palomar Sky Survey prints or in Pis’ma

Table I :  (Nos 1-12)  Arcuate Nebulae
Table II :  (Nos 13-32)  Conical Nebulae
Table III:  (Nos 33-54)  Stars with tailed Nebulae
Table IV :  (Nos 55-57)  Biconical Nebulae
Table V :  (Nos 58-79)  Stars in Halo Nebulae

GM 29 is a variable cometary nebula illuminated by PV Cep (Levreault, 1984, Ap.J. 277, 634-639)

1977G3

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L., MAGHAKIAN T.Yu. 1977,Dokl. Akad. Nauk Armyan. SSR 64, 104-107 New red objects resembling H-H objects

GM2-

Table I : (Nos 1-36) Herbig-Haro like objects

identical to GGD , ref. 1978G2

Table II: (Nos 37-44) Nebular knots in nebulae Objects further studied in Magakian 1983, Sov. Astr. Lett. 9, 83-85 (NGC 7129 star formation region) and Magakian 1984, Pis’ma Astr. Zh. 10, 661-665 (New Herbig-Haro objects). GM2-7 = Bernes 130 = RNO 55 ; GM2-8 = RNO 57 ; GM2-10 A and D are 3^{∘} SW of Mon R2

1977G4

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L., MAGHAKIAN T.Yu. 1977,Astr. Cirk. 953, 1-2 (in Russian) New interesting nebulous objects

GM3-

(Nos 1-15) ; 1950 coordinates ; No plate

1977G5

GOSS W.M., SCHWARZ U.J., SIDDESH S.G., WEILER K.W. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. 61, 93-98 A high-resolution investigation of the shell source G 55.7+3.4 at 610 and 1415 MHz

12W

Table 1: (Nos 1-37) ; 1950 coordinates

1977HW

HODGE P.W., WRIGHT F.W. 1977,Univ. of Washington Press The Small Magellanic Cloud

-

Atlas of the SMC. There are two sets of charts, one in yellow light and one in blue. Each set consists of about 100 charts of square areas measuring ≃ 1^{∘}1/3 on a side. Two master charts for each set show their locations on the sky and Tables 3 and 4 give 1975 eq. coordinates for the chart centers.

Table 5 : Chart location of NGC and IC clusters Table 6 : Other NGC and IC clusters Table 7 : Kron clusters (K) Table 8 : Lindsay clusters Table 9 : Westerlund and Glaspey clusters Table 10 : Hodge-Wright clusters (HW) Table 11 : Henize em. objects (here named e) Table 12 : Sanduleak stars (S)

Table 13 : Variable stars in the SMC (and sketches for Table 13)  HV

1977H1

HAVLEN R.J., MOFFAT A.F.J. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. 58, 351-356 A new cluster containing 2 Wolf-Rayet stars and 2 Of-stars

Havlen-Moffat

N = 1 ; (C 1715-387) ; ℓ = 348.7; b = −0.8

1977H2

HOAG A.A., SMITH M.G. 1977,Ap.J. 217, 362-381 Faint emission-line quasi-stellar object candidates

HS

N = 75 ; Identif. charts and table only give coordinates the number (1 to 76) has been given by: Osmer, ref. 1980O1 B

1977H3

HARRIS D.E., BAHCALL N.A., STROM R.G. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. 60, 27-38 Radio and optical observations in the fields of five unidentified X-ray sources at high latitudes

10W

Radio observations at 610 MHz with the WSRT and optical plates from the 48” Palomar telescope were obtained for 5 fields centered on the unidentified X-ray sources: 3U 0042+32, 3U 0917+63, 3U 1443+43, 3U 1555+27, and 3U 1809+50. Table 2: (Nos 1-249) ; 1950 coordinates

1977L1

LAUSTSEN S., RICHTER W., VAN DER LANS J., WEST R.M., WILSON R.N. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. 54, 639-640 A new dwarf irregular galaxy photographed with the ES0 3.6 m telescope

LRLWW

N = 1 = Sculptor Dwarf Irregular Galaxy = SDIG (1950): α = 00h05.6m , δ = -34^{∘}51’ ; ℓ = 352^{∘}, b = −79^{∘} Photograph

1977L2

LILLER W. 1977,Ap.J.Lett. 213, L21-L23 and Plate L1 Searches for the optical counterparts of the X-ray burst sources MXB 1728-34 and MXB 1730-33

LiIler

N = 1: a globular cluster as counterpart of MXB 1730-33 ; (”The Rapid Burster”)

1977L3 A

LODEN L.O. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 29, 31-50 and Plates 1 to 9 A study of some loose clustering in the southern Milky Way

Loden

UBV for 600 stars in 19 poor clusterings The first list of clusterings was published by Loden, 1973 Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 10, 125-133 (N = 44)

1977L3 B

LODEN L.O. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 36, 83-93 Photometry of loose clusterings in the Southern Milky Way

Loden

UBV Hβ photometry for 200 stars suspected of belonging to 6 poor open clusters or associations

1977L3 C

LODEN L.O. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 38, 355-365 Continued studies of loose clusterings in the Southern Milky Way

Loden

UBV for 325 stars possibly belonging to 11 poor clusters or associations

1977L3 D

LODEN L.O. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 41, 173-181 Concluding observations of loose stellar clusterings in the Southern Milky Way

Loden

UBV for 280 stars possibly belonging to 10 poor open clusters or associations

1977L3 E

LODEN L.O. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 44, 155-158 A photometric study of two stellar clusterings in the Southern Milky Way (and a general consideration on previous and present data concerning galactic clusterings).

Loden

UBV and spectra for 68 stars around two suspected loose stellar clusterings (fields 28 and 915)

1977MN A

MERMILLIOD J.-C, NICOLET B. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 29, 259-261 A general catalogue of UBV photoelectric photometry (magnetic tape)

-

1977MN B

MERMILLIOD J.-C. 1983,Bull. Inf. CDS 25, 79-80 A complete supplement to the general catalogue

-

UBV data (1976-1982) 25654 photoelectric measurements. Comprehensive supplement to 1977MN A

1977MS A

McCOOK G.P., SION E.M. 1977,Villanova Univ. Obs. Contr., No. 2 A catalogue of spectroscopically identified white dwarfs

WD

N = 528 ; Updated by 1987MS

1977MS B

LIEBERT J., STOCKMAN H.S. 1980,P.A.S.P. 92, 657-680 Circular polarization measurements of selected white dwarfs

WD

N = 32

1977M1 A

MacALPINE G.M., SMITH S.B., LEWIS D.W. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 34, 95-100 and Plates 1 to 7 Curtis Schmidt-thin prism survey for extragalactic emission-line objects: Univ. of Michigan, List I

UM

(Nos 1-100) ; Cross-identif. with ”Tololo Designation” with Parkes format (8 digits)

1977M1 B

MacALPINE G.M., SMITH S.B., LEWIS D.W. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 35, 197-201 and Plates 15 to 21 Curtis Schmidt-thin prism survey for extragalactic emission-line objects: Univ. of Michigan, List II

UM

(Nos 101-200)

1977M1 C

MacALPINE G.M., LEWIS D.W., SMITH S.B. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 35, 203-207 and Plates 22 to 28 Curtis Schmidt-thin prism survey for extragalactic emission-line objects: Univ. of Michigan, List III

UM

(Nos 201-300)

1977M1 D

MacALPINE G.M., LEWIS D.W. 1978,Ap.J.Suppl. 36, 587-593 and Plates 7 to 14 Curtis Schmidt-thin prism survey for extragalactic emission-line objects: Univ. of Michigan, List IV UM

1977M1 E

MacALPINE G.M., WILLIAMS G.A. 1981,Ap.J.Suppl. 45, 113-120 Curtis Schmidt-thin prism survey for extragalactic emission-line objects: Univ. of Michigan, List V

UM

(Nos 421-655) 104 apparent emission-line galaxies, 131 quasar candidates, 225 sq.^{∘}: 11.3h < α < 14.3h ; −2.5^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ +2.5^{∘} (1950) Accurate optical positions to ≃ 1.5” are given for (Nos 1-420) in Kojoian+ 1982, Ap.J.Suppl. 50, 161-168

1977M1 F

MacALPINE G.M., FELDMAN F.R. 1982,Ap.J. 261, 412-421 and Plates 2 and 3 Discovery and spectrophotometry of high-redshift quasars

UM

Table 2 : (Nos 656-685) ; 1950 coordinates. Discovery of 30 new high-redshift quasars, Finding charts in Fig. 1 (plates 2 and 3) Table 1 contains spectrophotometric data for confirmed QSO from lists UM, ref. 1977M1 A to D.

1977M2

MATHEWSON D.S., SCHWARZ M.P., MURRAY J.D. 1977,Ap.J.Lett. 217, L5-L8 The Magellanic Stream: the turbulent wake of the Magellanic Clouds in the Halo of the Galaxy

MS

MSI to VI ; maps fig. 1 and 2 Later nomenclature (regions 1 to 5) and observations are described in Mirabel+ 1979, M.N.R.A.S. 186, 433-451, fig. 1 p. 434 and table 1 p. 435

1977P2

PHILIP A.G. 1977,P.A.S.P. 89, 554-556 A comparison of observations with main-sequence evolutionary models

Bok

N = 1 ; (C 1108-231)

1977R1

ROSE J.A. 1977,Ap.J. 211, 311-318 A survey of compact groups of galaxies

Rose

N = 38

1977R2 A

ROBERTSON J.G. 1977,Austral. J. Phys. 30, 209-230 The Molonglo Deep Sky Survey of Radio Sources. I. Declination Zone -20^{∘}

MDS1-

Tables 3 and 4 : N = 373 ; ν = 408 MHz ; 0.0201sr in the sky S > 88mJy ; HPBW = 2′.66(α)x2′.97(δ)

1977R2 B

ROBERTSON J.G. 1977,Austral. J. Phys. 30, 231-239 The Molonglo Deep Survey of Radio Sources. II. Declination Zone -62^{∘}

MDS1-

Table 3 : N = 95 ; ν = 408 MHz ; 5.5 x 10-3 sr in the sky S > 84mJy ; HPBW = 2′.63(α)x2′.97(δ)

1977S1

SMITH-HAENNI A.L. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 27, 205-214 A comprehensive catalogue of quasi-stellar objects

SHB-

N = 403 ; compiles 23 acronyms ; not quoted in the revised Catalogue 198OHB

1977S2

STEPHENSON C.B., SANDULEAK N. 1977,Ap.J.Suppl. 33, 459-469 New Hα emission stars in the Milky Way

SS77-

N = 455 ; The famous object SS 433 is from this catalogue

1977S3

SANDULEAK N., PHILIP A.G.D. 1977,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 2, 105-181 Carbon stars and late-type suspected supergiants in the LMC

SP77

(Nos 1-609) ; Identif. charts The field in the format is from the Hodge and Wright’s V chart (ref. 1967HW)

1977T1

THOMSON L.A. 1977,Ap.J. 211, 684-692 Possible ring galaxies near rich clusters. Systematic survey in 70 rich clusters

LT

(Nos 1-40) ; Photographs given for Nos 6, 13, 15, 19, 22, 36 The number of the Abell cluster is given

1977T2

THONNARD N., RUBIN V.C. 1977,B.A.A.S. 9, 619 The dwarf galaxy 1346-35: optical and neutral hydrogen properties

TR

N = 1

1977T3

THOMPSON D.J., FICHTEL C.E., HARTMAN R.C., KNIFFEN D.A., LAMB R.C. 1977,Ap.J. 213, 252-262 Final SAS-2 γ -ray results on sources in the galactic anticenter region

Geminga

γ -ray source in Gem (see Baker+ 1983, Astr. Astrophys. 117, 38-40) Geminga = 2CG 195+4 = γ 195+5

1977W1

WAGGETT P.C. 1977,M.N.R.A.S. 181, 547-561 The 5C9 survey of radio sources

5C9.

N = 214 ; ν = 408 and 1407 MHz ; near NGP

1977W3

WEINBERGER R., POULAKOS C. 1977,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 27, 249-253 Extraordinarily red stars on the Palomar Observatory Sky Survey

WP

(Nos 1-15) ; Identif. charts ; B − V ≥ 4.0

1978BF

BATTEN A.H., FLETCHER J.M., MANN P.J. 1978,Publ. Dom. Astrophys. Obs. 15, No. 5, 121 7th catalogue of the orbital elements of spectroscopic binary systems

Batten

N = 978 Supersedes the 6th catalogue, 1967 (ref. 1967BA, acronym SB)

1978B1 A

BRAUDE S.Ya., MEGN A.V., RASHOKOVSKI S.L., RYABOV B.P., SHARYKIN N.K., SOKOLOV K.P., TKATCHENKO A.P., ZHOUCK I.N. 1978,Astrophys. Space Sci. 54, 37-128 Decametric survey of discrete sources in the northern sky. II. Source Catalogue in the range of declinations +10^{∘} to +20^{∘}

GR

UTR-2 decametric radio telescope (Nos 1-329) and a GR name (Parkes format) for each source Cross-identif. with 3C or 4C. Ten new sources. ν = 10 to 25 MHz ; beam 68′ × 68′ seczto33′ × 33′secz

1978B1 B

BRAUDE S.Ya., MEGN A.V., SOKOLOV K.P., TKATCHENKO A.P., SHARYKIN N.K. 1979,Astrophys. Space Sci. 64, 73-126 Decametric survey of discrete sources in the Northern Sky. V. Source Catalogue in the range of declinations 0^{∘} to +10^{∘}

GR

Table I : (Nos 1-364) and a GR name (Parkes format) for each source

Cross-identif. with previous surveys.

Table III: Sixteen new sources (Nos 1-16) ; this numbering is different from Table I

1978B1 C

BRAUDE S.Ya., MIROSHNITCHENKO A.P., SOKOLOV K.P., SHARYKIN N.K. 1981,Astrophys. Space Sci. 74, 409-451 Decametric survey of discrete sources. VII. Source Catalogue in the range of declinations -2^{∘} to -13^{∘}

GR

Table I : (Nos 1-316) and a GR name (Parkes format) for each source Table III: Four new sources (Nos 1-4) ; this numbering is different from Table I

1978B1 D

BRAUDE S.Ya., SHARYKIN N.K., SOKOLOV K.P., ZAKCHARENKO S.M. 1985,Astrophys. Space Sci. 111, 1-64 Decametric survey of discrete sources in the northern sky. IX. Source Catalogue in the Declination Range 52^{∘} to 60^{∘}

GR

Table I : (Nos 1-313) and a GR name (Parkes format) for each source All sources are cross-identif. with a 4C or a Ohio source

1978B2

BRAID M.K., MacGILLIVRAY H.T. 1978,M.N.R.A.S. 182, 241-248 A finding list of southern clusters of galaxies. I.

BRAID

N = 474

1978B3

BOHUSKI T.J., FAIRALL A.P., WEEDMAN D.W. 1978,Ap.J. 221, 776-787 The nature of Tololo Emission-line Galaxies

Tol

Table 1 : (Nos 1-90) and Tololo Designation with format Parkes

new Tololo emission-line galaxies

The same extensive objective prism survey for extragalatic emission-line objects already yielded the objects named Tol (ref. 1976S4) and UM (ref. 1977M1 A to E)

1978CC

CALVET N., COHEN M. 1978,M.N.R.A.S. 182, 687-704 Studies of bipolar nebulae. V. The general phenomenon

-

13 objects

1978C1 A

CHURCHWELL E., WINNEWISSER G., WALMSLEY C.M. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. 67, 139-147 Molecular observations of a possible proto-solar nebula in a dark cloud in Taurus

Tau MC

TMC1 : α = 04h38m38s ; δ = +25^{∘}36’00” (1950)

located near the south-eastern edge of Heiles’ cloud 2

TMC2 : α = 04h29m42s ; δ = +24^{∘}16’ 43” (1950) (quoted p. 144, IVf) Maps are given p. 112 and 113 in Guelin M.+, 1982, Astr. Astrophys. 107, 107-127

1978C1 B

WALMSLEY C.M., CHURCHWELL E., NASH A., FITZPATRICK E. 1982,Ap.J.Lett. 258, L75-L78 Hyperfine anomalies of HCN in cold dark clouds

Tau MC

1978C2

COOKE B.A., RICKETTS M.J., MACCACARO T., PYE J.P., ELVIS M., WATSON M.G., GRIFFITHS R.E., POUNDS K.A., McHARDY I., MACCAGNI D., SEWARD F.D., PAGE C.G., TURNER M.J.L. 1978,M.N.R.A.S. 182, 489-515 The Ariel V (SSI) catalogue of high galactic latitude (|b| > 10^{∘}) X-ray sources

2A

N = 105 ; Group: Leicester ; Error box: 01 to 0.5 sq.^{∘}

1978E1 A

ELIAS J.H. 1978,Ap.J. 223, 859-875 A study of the IC 5146 dark cloud complex

Elias 1-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-9) Table 2 : (Nos 10-16) 1950 coordinates ; No Identif. charts

1978E1 B

ELIAS J.H. 1978,Ap.J. 224, 453-472 An infrared study of the Ophiuchus dark cloud

Elias 2-

Table 2 : (Nos 1-50) ; A few cross-identif.

with previous surveys of which VS (ref. 1975V4)

Table 3 : (Nos 51-87) 1950 coordinates ; No Identif. charts

1978E1 C

ELIAS J.H. 1978,Ap.J. 224, 857-872 A study of the Taurus dark Cloud Complex

Elias 3-

Infrared survey (1.6 and 2.2 μm) Table 1 : (Nos 1-30) ; 1950 coordinates No Identif. charts

1978G1

GRAYZECK E.J. 1978,A.J. 83, 1390-1396 New Cepheid variables in the Crux-Centaurus region (Table III)

VSF

N = 2 ; (Nos 165 and 171) ; Variable star fields In the fields, 17 new Cepheids (format NNN) are found

1978G2

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L., GLUSHKOV Yu.I., DENISYUK E.K. 1978,Ap.J.Lett. 224, L137-L138 New Herbig-Haro objects

GGD

N = 37 The clustering of sources 12 to 15 is often quoted as GGD 12-15 Nos 1-36 are identical to GM2-, ref. 1977G3 ; No. 37 is different from GM2-37

1978F1

FORMAN W., JONES C., COMINSKY L., JULIEN P., MURRAY S., PETERS G., TANAN-BAUM H., GIACCONI R. 1978,Ap.J.Suppl. 38, 357-412 The fourth Uhuru catalog of X-ray sources

4U

N = 339 ; All sky ; Supersedes the 2U (ref. 1972G1) and 3U (ref. 1974G3) catalogs

1978H1

HARRIS D.E., MILEY G.K. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 34, 117-128 Westerbork observations of five fields centered on Abell clusters of galaxies

13W

Abell 376 (Nos 1-63), Abell 407 (Nos 64-119), Abell 1035 (Nos 120-173), Abell 1904 (Nos 174-232) observed at 610 MHz Abell 2319 (Nos 233-327) observed at 610 and 1415 MHz

1978L1

LUGGER P.M. 1978,Ap.J. 221, 745-755 High-galactic latitude X-ray sources and southern clusters of galaxies

LuCG

N = 10

1978M1

MACHALSKI J. 1978,Acta Astr. 28, 367-440 The Green Bank second survey of extragalactic radio sources at 1400 MHz. The catalogue of sources

GB2

N = 2022 ; ν = 1400 MHz ; HPBW = 10.3’ ; S > 0.09Jy

1978P1

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1978,A.J. 83, 1090-1094 A catalogue of probable dwarf stars of type M3 and later in the direction of the south galactic pole PS

1978P2

PEARSON T.J., KUS A.J. 1978,M.N.R.A.S. 182, 273-274 The 5C6 and 5C7 surveys of radio sources

{5C6. \atop 5C7.}

535 sources detected at 408 MHz, stronger than 10mJy, and 121 sources at 1407 MHz, stronger than 15 mJy.

1978P3

PFLEIDERER J., WEINBERGER R., MROSS R. 1978,Proc. of the ”Star Cluster Symposium”, Budapest, edit. B.A. Balazz, p. 39-45 Some new possible very red and faint star clusters

An Cl

N = 4: C 0104+653 ; C 1755-050 ; C 2306+606 ; C 2348+620 (Lynga, 1983, private communication)

1978RM

ROUSSEAU J., MARTIN N., PREVOT L., REBEIROT E., ROBIN A., BRUNET J.P. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 31, 243-260 Studies of the Large Magellanic Cloud stellar content. III. Spectral types and V magnitudes of 1822 members

-

Collection of the known supergiants belonging to the Large Magellanic Cloud from the main published catalogues New spectroscopic and photometric results A revised version on magnetic tape, completed with spectral types and photometry from the literature is updated at the Observatoire de Marseille

1978R1

RICKER G.R., CLARK G.W., DOXSEY R.E., DOWER R.G., JERNIGAN J.G., DELVAILLE J.P., MacALPINE G.M., HJELLMING R.M. 1978,Nature 271, 35-36 Discovery of an X-ray QSO

MR

Optical object MR 2251-178, included in 1980HB

1978R2

RODGERS A.W., PETERSON B.A., HARDING P. 1978,Ap.J. 225, 768-775 A spectroscopic survey of some Zwicky compact galaxies

348 + 76 objects identified as compact galaxies candidates by Zwicky in POSS E fields 1030 (12h04 - 18^{∘}31’) and 1061 (13h12 -18^{∘})

Table 1 : 25 among 348 objects of POSS E field 1030  1SZ
Table 2 : 33 among 76 objects of POSS E field 1061  2SZ

I and II in the acronym are numerals

1978ST

SEVARLIC B.M., TELEKI G., SZARDECZKY-KARDOSS G. 1978,Publ. Dep. Astr. Univ. Beograd No. 7, 69-272 Bibliography of the Catalogues of Star Positions

-

2087 catalogues recensed

1978S1

SWEENEY L.H., HEINSHEIMER T.F., YATES F.F., MARAN S.P., LESH J.R., NAGY T.A. 1978,Aerospace Corporation TR-0078(3409-20)-1 Interim equatorial infrared catalogue, number 1

EIC

(Nos 1-896) ; sources detected at 2.7 μm ; |b| ≤ 10^{∘} Cross-identif. with AGK3, SAO, TMSS, AFGL

1978S2 A

SANDULEAK N., MacCONNELL D.J., PHILIP A.G.D. 1978,P.A.S.P. 90, 621-635 The planetary nebula systems of the Magellanic Clouds

Table I : (Nos 1-102)  PN in LMC  SMP1-
Table II: (Nos 1-28)  PN in SMC  SMP2-

1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1978S2 B

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1981,P.A.S.P. 93, 431-434 New probable planetary nebulae and VV Cephei stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud

SMP2-

Table I : (Nos 29-34) PN in SMC 1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1978S2 C

SANDULEAK N. 1984,IAU Symp. 108, 231-232 A more complete listing of the LMC planetary nebulae

SMP1-

Table I : (Nos 103-127) PN in LMC No. 104A = (SMC 1) (Savage+ 1982OBS.102.229S) 1975 coordinates ; No Identif. charts A few cross-identif.

Accurate positions and identif. charts of 11 of these PN in ref. 1992M1 (there named Sa)

1978S2 D

MORGAN D.H. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 208, 633-643 Planetary nebulae in the Magellanic clouds

Table 3 : (Nos 1-34 and J4) PN in SMC Cross-identif. with N (Henize), LN (Lindsay, 1961)

SMP2-

Table 4 : (Nos 1-102 and J5, 20, 31, 38, 41) PN in LMC Cross-identif. with L- (ref. 1963L1), LM1- or LM2- (ref. 1963L6), WS (ref. 1964W1)), AL- (ref. 1964A1), BE- (ref. 1974B1), LHA 115-N and -S, or LHA 120-N and S (ref. 1956H2) No cross-identif. with Jacoby (ref. 1980J2)

SMP1-

1978W1

WESTERLUND B.E., OLANDER N., RICHER H.B., CRABTREE D.R. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 31, 61-82 A catalogue of carbon stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

WORC

(Nos 1-302) ; Identif. charts

1978W2 A

WESTERLUND B.E., OLANDER N. 1978,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 32, 401-408 S stars in the Southern Milky Way

WOS

ℓ = 235^{∘} ⋯ 7^{∘} ; −5^{∘} < b < +5^{∘} Table 1 : (Nos 1-74) ; 1950 and gal. Coord. ; Identif. charts

1978W2 B

LLOYD EVANS T., CATCHPOLE R.M. 1989,M.N.R.A.S. 237, 219-238 The Westerlund-Olander sample of S stars in the southern Milky Way

WOS

Infrared (JHKL) photometry and spectroscopy for 72 stars classed as type S by Westerlund and Olander (ref. 1978W2 A). There are 38 S stars, 26 S stars, of which most are supergiants, and 8 stars without prominent absorption bands

1979A1

ARP H., SULENTIC J.W. 1979,Ap.J. 229, 496-502 and Plates 14 and 15 Three quasars near the spiral arms of NGC 1073

Nos 1 and 2  BSO
Object No. 3 on Plate 15  RSO

Objects 0240-002, 0241-002 in ref. 1980HB, Table 4

1979A2

ARP H., SULENTIC J.W., DI TULLIO G. 1979,Ap.J. 229, 489-495 and Plate 13 Quasars aligned a cross NGC 3384

UB

N = 16 Ultraviolet-excess objects in the vicinity of the triple system of galaxies NGC 3379/84/89, among which 8 quasars ; Identif. charts 8 objects are included in ref. 1980HB, Table 4 all labelled 1045+128

1979A3

AZZOPARDI M., BREYSACHER J. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. 75, 120-126 A search for new Wolf-Rayet stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud

SMC AB

Discovery of 4 new WR stars in the SMC (Identif. charts) All the known WR (Nos 1-8) are collected in Table 3 1975 coordinates ; photometry ; cross-identif. with AzV (ref. 1975A1) or Sk (ref. 1968S1) Table 4 describes the associated nebulae An additional WR star has been discovered subsequently by Morgan+ (MVD 1, ref. 1991M1)

1979B1

BOLTON J.G., SAVAGE A., WRIGHT A.E. 1979,Austral. J. Phys. Suppl. 46, 1-17 The Parkes 2700 MHz survey (14th part): catalogue and new optical identifications

PKS

Table 1, p. 2 : summary of the data for the 14 parts of the Parkes 2700 MHz survey (for extragalactic sources with the Parkes 64 m telescope, from 1971 to 1979): areas, number of sources, references Fig. 1, p. 3: areas surveyed, and completeness limits in Jy Sources with six digits appear in the original Parkes 408 MHz survey, sources with seven digits have been found at 2700 MHz. New formats, observations at 8400 MHz are described by Wright+ ref. 1991W4

1979B2

BOHUSKI T.J., WEEDMAN D.W. 1979,Ap.J. 231, 653-638 Limits of the number of faint quasars

Tol

Fields centered on Hydra I cluster of G (Abell 1060: 10h34 - 27^{∘}16’, 1950)

Table 2 : (Nos 1-23) and Parkes designation

New Quasar Candidates

With the Tol acronym: Use a Parkes designation (the designations given correspond to rounded rather than truncated coordinates)

Use the numbering 1-23 with the acronym BW79  BW79

1979C1

CRAINE E.R., DUERR R.E., HORNER V.M., IMHOFF C.L., ROUTSIS D.E., SWIHART D.L., TURNSHEK D.A. 1979,Steward Obs. Contr. Series A, No. 3 Near infrared photographic sky survey. Catalog of red stellar objects. I.

NIPSS

N = 1183 from 23 fields Table 1 : 23 fields 4.5^{∘} diameter at rather high latitudes Table 2 and Identif. charts : 1183 objects Survey of each field is not exhaustive (see text). Red stellar object is defined by V − I > 2.5 The fields are taken among (Nos 1-1900) defined in the Field Index of Rossano + Craine, 1980, Pachart Publishing House, Tucson, Arizona

1979EN

ENGELS D. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 36, 337-345 Catalogue of late type stars with OH, H20 or SiO maser emission

-

Literature searched through 1978. 351 Objects, classified according to types: M supergiant stars (Nos 1-7), type I OH/IR stars (Nos 8-51) type II OH/IR stars (Nos 52-129), H20/IR stars without detected OH emission (Nos 130-150), SiO/IR stars (Nos 151-206), obj. undetected in the optical or infrared (Nos 207-351).

1979E1 A

EGGEN O.J. 1979,Ap.J.Suppl. 39, 89-101 Catalogs of proper motion stars. I. Stars brighter than visual magnitude 15 and with annual proper motion of 1” or more (rounded 1950 coordinates)

PMI

N = 329

1979E1 B

EGGEN O.J. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 43, 457-468 Catalogs of proper motion stars. II. Stars brighter than visual magnitude 15 and south of declination +30^{∘} with annual proper motion between 0”.7 and 1”.0

PMII

Rounded 1950 coordinates Correction: EGGEN O.J., 1983, Ap.J.Suppl. 51, 183-202 ; Luminosity and motion of large proper motion stars. II. Stars with annual proper motion larger than 0.7 arc seconds Tables 1 and 2 : N = 432 ; stars with V ≤ 15.0 and δ < +30^{∘}

1979G1

GAVAZZI G. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. 72, 1-11 A Westerbork survey of rich clusters of galaxies. VIII. Observations of the cluster Abell 1367 at 610 and 1415 MHz

17W

Table 1: (Nos 1-12) ; 1950 coordinates Table 2: identif. of sources 17W with galaxy Fig. 2: finding charts of the 12 detected galaxies

1979G2

GISLER G.R., MILEY G.K. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. 76, 109-119 610 MHz observations of the Perseus cluster of galaxies with the Westerbork Synthesis Radio Telescope

22W

Table 2: (Nos 1-50) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif.

1979H1 A

HEILES C. 1979,Ap.J. 229, 533-544 H I shells and supershells

GSH

N = 63

1979H1 B

HEILES C. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 55, 585-595 HI shells, supershells, shell-like objects and ”worms”

GSH

Combination of two HI surveys: Heiles, ref. 1979H1, shells and supershells in the galactic plane, −10^{∘} < b < +10^{∘} Colomb+, 1980, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 40, 47-55, b < −10^{∘} and b > +10^{∘} from the surveys of Weaver and Williams (1973) and Habing (1974) Table 1 : N = 42 ; The format uses the VLSR velocity Diameters range from 200 to 3500 pc

1979K1 A

KAZARIAN M.A. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 1-15 New galaxies with ultraviolet excess. I.

KAZ

N = 136 ; Identif. charts

1979K1 B

KAZARIAN M.A. 1979,Astrophysics 15, 117-129 New galaxies with ultraviolet excess. II.

KAZ

(Nos 137-241)

1979K1 C

KAZARIAN M.A., KAZARIAN E.S. 1980,Astrophysics 16, 7-20 New galaxies with ultraviolet excess. III.

KAZ

(Nos 242-352)

1979K1 D

KAZARIAN M.A., KAZARIAN E.S. 1982,Astrofizica 18, 512-522 and Plates New galaxies with ultraviolet excess. IV.

KAZ

1979K1 E

KAZARIAN M.A., KAZARIAN E.S. 1983,Astrophysics 19, 119-128 New galaxies with ultraviolet excess. V

KAZ

List V of 114 new galaxies with ultraviolet excess found with the 40” Schmidt telescope of the Byurakan Observatory with 1 .5 objective prism Table 1 : (Nos 467-580) ; Identif. charts

1979K2

KARACHENTSEVA V.E., KARACHENTSEV I.D., SHCHERBANOVSKY A.L. 1979,Astrofiz. Issled. 11, 3-39 (in Russian) Isolated triplet of galaxies

K79

N = 84x3 galaxies of m_{pg} < 15.7 (format NNA) in 84 triplets (format NN) ; 1950 coordinates ; finding charts northern hemisphere

1979K3

KOTANYI C.G. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. 74, 156-160 Radio observations of NGC 3665: an elliptical galaxy with a dust lane

16W

Table 4: (Nos 1-11) ; 1950 coordinates

1979LU

LUYTEN W.J. 1979,Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis NLTT Catalogue

1979, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis 1, 1-283 (δ 90^{∘} to 30^{∘}) 1979, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis 2, 1-286 (δ 30^{∘} to 0^{∘}) 1979, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis 3, 1-283 (δ 0^{∘} to -30^{∘}) 1980, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis 4, 1-80 (δ -30^{∘} to -45^{∘})

LP

1980, Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis 4, 80-151 (δ -45^{∘} to -90^{∘})  L

N ≃ 15000 in each publication 1980 first supplement to the NLTT catalogue (and errata and addenda to NLTT): Proper Motion Survey with the 48-inch Telescope. LV. (New Luyten Two Tenths) This catalogue compiles stars (essentially stars with LP numbers) which have proper motions larger than 0.2” annually.

1979LY A

LYNGA G. 1979, Catalogue of open cluster data

C

A computer readable catalogue available through the CDS in Strasbourg Astrophysical data for clusters. Nomenclature according to IAU resolution ; (Inf. Bull. of the IAU, Jan. 1980, p. 22)

1979LY B

LYNGA G. 1982,Bull. Inf. CDS 23, 89 IAU numbers for some recently discovered clusters

C

N = 13

1979LY C

LYNGA G. 1983,Bull. Inf. CDS 24, 127 IAU Commission No. 37: IAU numbers for some recently discovered clusters.

C

N = 6

1979L1 A

LUYTEN W.J. 1979,Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis A catalogue of stars with proper motions exceeding 0”.5 annually (2nd edition)

LHS

1st edition in 1976, Univ. Minnesota, by Luyten LFT complement Five additional stars have been inserted in RA: LHS 325a, 2123a, 2397a, 2555a, 2691a.

1979L1 B

LUYTEN W.J., ALBERS H. 1979,Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis An atlas of Identif. chart for LHS stars

LHS

N = 3996 ; (Nos 1-73) ; (Nos 101-552) ; (Nos 1001-4058) ; Appendix (Nos 5001-5413)

1979ML

MILNE D.K. 1979,Austral. J. Phys. 32, 83-92 A new catalogue of galactic SNRs corrected for distance from the galactic plane

-

N = 125 Supersedes Clark et al., ref. 1976CC

1979M1 A

MADORE B.F., ARP H.C. 1979,Ap.J.Lett. 227, L103-L104 Three new faint star clusters

AM-

N = 3 ; AM-3 probably belongs to the SMC AM-1 is intergalactic = ESO 201-SC 10 AM-2 = ESO 368-SC 07

(ESO numbers discovered prior to Arp and Madore 1979)

1979M1 B

MADORE B.F., ARP H.C. 1982,P.A.S.P. 94, 40-42 A distant star cluster in Hydra, AM-4

AM-

Identif. chart ; AM-4 = C 1353-269 Probably intergalactic

1979M2 A

MOFFAT A.F.J., FITZGERALD M.P., JACKSON P.D. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 38, 197-225 The rotation and structure of the Galaxy beyond the solar circle. I. Photometry and spectroscopy of 276 stars in 45 H II regions and other young stellar groups toward the galactic anticenter

Wat

N = 1 ; (Nos 1-3) ; Chart

1979M2 B

FITZGERALD M.P., BOUDREAULT R., FICH M., LUIKEN M., WITT A.N. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 37, 351-360 The open clusters Pismis 6 and 8,and Wat 6

Wat

N = 3 ; (Nos 4-6) ; Wat 4 = Pismis 6 Wat 5 = Pismis 8

1979M2 C

FITZGERALD M.P., MOFFAT A.F.J. 1980,M.N.R.A.S. 193, 761-774 Luminous stars beyond the solar circle: investigation of a galactic field at ℓ = 231^{∘}

Wat

N = 1 ; (No. 7)

1979M3

MARSHALL F.E., BOLDT E.A., HOLT S.S., MUSHOTZKY R.F., PRAVDO S.H., ROTH-SCHILD R.E., SERLEMITSOS P.J. 1979,Ap.J.Suppl. 40, 657-665 New hard X-ray sources observed with HEAO A-2

H

N = 60 ; 47 are new sources ; All sky ; Energy 3-17 keV

1979M4

MARKERT T.H., WINKLER P.F., LAIRD F.N., CLARK G.W., HEARN D.R., SPROTT G.F., LI F.K., BRADT H.V., LEWIN W.H.G., SCHNOPPER H.W. 1979,Ap.J.Suppl. 39, 573-632 The MIT/OSO 7 Catalog of X-ray sources: intensities, spectra, and long-term variability

1M

M stands for Massachusetts

1979PP

PARSAMIAN E.S., PETROSIAN V.M. 1979,Soob. Biurakan Obs. 51, 3-15 Catalogue of cometary nebulae and related objects (−42^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ +66^{∘})

PP

(Nos 1-106) ; Identif. charts ; numerous cross-identif.

1979P1

PEROLA G.C., VALENTIJN E.A. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. 73, 54-66 A Westerbork survey of rich clusters of galaxies. IX. The radio luminosity function of the Hercules supercluster at 610 MHz

20W

Table 4: (Nos 1-33) ; 1950 coordinates Fig. 2: Finding charts

1979S1

SCHNEIDER S., ELMEGREEN B.G. 1979,Ap.J.Suppl. 41, 87-95 A catalog of dark globular filaments

GF

N = 23 ; Several cross-identif. ; Identif. charts

1979TU

TURNER B.E. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 37, 1-332 A survey of OH near the galactic plane

OH

Four 18 cm-lines from ℓ = 337to270 and |b| < 1.5^{∘} or exceptionally higher (see Fig. 1): sensitivity 0.65 Jy, spectral resolution 1.4 km.s^{−1}, spatial resolution 19′ Coverage is selective in the range ℓ = 85 ⋯ 270^{∘} (see p. 4) N = 916 sources show OH out of 1796 sources reached

1979T1

THUAN T.X., MARTIN G.E. 1979,Ap.J.Lett. 232, L11-L16 A new dwarf galaxy in the local group

LGS

(Nos 1-5)

1979W1

WOUTERLOOT J.G.A., DEKKER E. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 36, 323-330 The detection of planetary neblae near the galactic centre at radio wavelengths. I

19W

Table A1 : (Nos 1-123) Detected sources near the galactic Centre at 1415 MHz

1979W2

WILLIS A.G., MILEY G.K. 1979,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 37, 397-402 A 6 cm source survey with the Westerbork Synthesis Radio Telescope I: The data

21W

Table 2: (Nos 1-43) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 4995 MHz Contour maps of 4 extended sources in Fig. 1

1980A1

ARP H. 1980,Ap.J. 236, 63-69 Ultraviolet excess objects in the region of a companion galaxy to NGC 2639

U

N = 19 ultraviolet blue excess objects (UB) 10 are quasars (Nos 1-5, 7, 8, 10, 14, 15) ; Identif. charts

1980B1 A

BLANCO V.M., McCARTHY M.F., BLANCO B.M. 1980,Ap.J. 242, 938-964 Carbon and late M-type stars in the Magellanic Clouds

Table 2 : Part A  in SMC  (Nos 1-83)  (Bar)  SMC-B
Part B  in SMC  (Nos 1-56)  (Wing)  SMC-W
Part C  in LMC (Nos 1-111)  (Bar West)  LMC-BW
Part D  in LMC (Nos 1-61)  (Radio-center)  LMC-R
Part E  in LMC (Nos 1-116)  (Optical center)  LMC-O

Identif. charts

1980B1 B

FROGEL J.A., BLANCO V.M. 1990,Ap.J. 365, 168-179 The Large Magellanic Cloud Bar West field

LMC-BW

Table 2: (Nos 112-215) and (Nos 301-352) ; based on an unpublished extension of the BMB survey.

1980C1 A

COHEN M. 1980,A.J. 85, 29-35 Red and nebulous objects in dark clouds: a survey

RNO

(Nos 1-150) ; no Identif. charts ; Northern POSS.

1980C1 B

JONES B.F., COHEN M., SIRK M., JARRETT R. 1984,A.J. 89, 1404-1407 and Plates 78 and 79 The proper motions of Herbig-Haro objects. IV. RNO 40 and 43

RNO

Accurate positions, photographs, proper motions

1980C2

COHEN M., SCHWARTZ R.D. 1980,M.N.R.A.S. 191, 165-168 A search for the exciting stars of Herbig-Haro objects

C-S

Table 1 : 21 sources

1980DI

DIXON R.S. 1980,Columbus Ohio Univ. Press, pp. 835 (also on magnetic tape) A Master List of non stellar optical astronomical objects

-

Compiled by Dixon R.S. and Sonneborn G. Overlay maps in ref. 1981DG

1980D1

DRESSLER A. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 42, 565-609 A catalog of morphological types in 55 rich clusters of galaxies

DRCG

≃ 6000 galaxies in 55 rich clusters (Abell and 17 new ones) Table 1 : format HHMM-DD Table 2 : Catalog of galaxies (format NN or NNN for each cluster). 1950 positions. Maps p. 600-609.

1980D2

DOUGLAS J.N., BASH F.N., TORRENCE G.W., WOLFE C. 1980,Univ. of Texas, Publ. in Astronomy No. 17 The Texas Survey: Preliminary +18^{∘} Strip

TP

Interferometry

Table I : main catalog listing ; N = 7250 sources with a HHMM+DDda format

1950 coordinates

Table II: alternative simpler models ; N = 1859

1980E1

ELMEGREEN D.M. 1980,Ap.J. 240, 846-852 Star formation in W3 and W4: discovery of 135 possibly embedded near-infrared stars

BIRS

N = 137 ; 2^{∘} x 3^{∘} surveyed near W3, W4

1980F1

FORMIGGINI L., ZITELLI V., BONOLI F., BRACCESI A. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 39, 129-132 A sample of very faint ultraviolet excess objects in the 13h+36^{∘} field. I. The data

BVF

”The Bologna vf sample”: in the 13h+36^{∘}, 1.72 sq.^{∘}selection u − b < −0.1 or u − v < +0.4 and b < 20.2 mag No Identif. chart ; no cross-identif. The spectroscopic nature of several of these objects has been studied by Kron+, 1983, Astr. Astrophys. 127, 29-32

1980G1

GICLAS H.L., BURNHAM R.Jr, THOMAS N.G. 1980,Lowell Obs. Bull. 8, 157-206 Lowell Proper Motion Survey. Summary Catalog of GD and GR stars

GD: Recapitulation of 1965, Lowell Obs. Bull. 6, 155 (Nos 1-272)

1967, Lowell Obs. Bull. 7, 49 (Nos 273-407) 1970, Lowell Obs. Bull. 7, 183 (Nos 408-562) 1972, Lowell Obs. Bull. 7, 217 (Nos 563-952) 1975, Lowell Obs. Bull. 8, 9 (Nos 953-1338) 1978, Lowell Obs. Bull. 8, 51 (Nos 1339-1712)

GD

N = 1712 GR: Recapitulation of 1972, Lowell Obs. Bull. 7, 217 (Nos 1-47)

1973, Lowell Obs. Bull. 7, 273 (Nos 48-119) 1975, Lowell Obs. Bull. 8, 9 (Nos 120-288) 1978, Lowell Obs. Bull. 8, 51 (Nos 289-504)

GR

N = 504 A low-temperature companion to GD 165 has been discovered in 1988 Natur 336 656-658 by Becklin E.E.+, and named GD 165B

1980G2

GOY G. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 42, 91-102 Catalogue general d’etoiles de type O. Donnees spectroscopiques et photometriques. Bande magnetique et listage

Goy

(Nos 1-971) Contains a few stellar cross-identif. and the name of the associated H II region

1980G3

GAVAZZI G., PEROLA G.C. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 84, 228-236 A Westerbork survey of rich clusters of galaxies. XII. Observations of A 2197 and A 2199 at 610 MHz

18W

Table 2: (Nos 1-24) ; 1950 coordinates Fig. 3: Finding charts

1980G4

GOSS W.M., MORRIS D. 1980,J. Astrophys. Astr. 1, 189-192 No detectable supernova remnant near the pulsar PSR 1930+22

38W

Table 1: (Nos 1-33) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 610 MHz No map

1980HB

HEWITT A., BURBIDGE G. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 43, 57-158 Erratum: 1981, Ap.J.Suppl. 46, 113-115 A revised optical catalogue of quasi-stellar objects

QSO

N = 1491 (QSO) and N = 58 (BL objects) Compiles 46 acronyms (p. 59-60) Cross-identif. with Parkes format name

1980H1 A

HARRINGTON R.S., DAHN C.C. 1980,A.J. 85, 454-465 Summary of U.S. Naval Observatory Parallaxes

USNO

N = 485 Table I : (ordered by increasing α , not by USNO number); 1950 coordinates ; all stars have another name

1980H1 B

DAHN C.C., HARRINGTON R.S., RIEPE B.Y., CHRISTY J.W., GUETTER H.H., KALLARAKAL V.V., MIRANIAN M., WALKER R.L., VRBA F.J., HEWITT A.V., DURHAM W.S., ABLES H.D. 1982,A.J. 87, 419-427 U.S. Naval Observatory Parallaxes of Faint Stars. List VI.

USNO

Table I : (Nos 486-582) ; 1950 coordinates ; 97 stars in 93 systems

1980H1 C

HARRINGTON R.S., DAHN C.C., KALLARAKAL V.V., RIEPE B.Y., CHRISTY J.W., GUET-TER H.H., ABLES H.D., HEWITT A.V., VRBA F.J., WALKER R.L. 1985,A.J. 90, 123-129 U.S. Naval Observatory of Faint Stars. List VII.

USNO

Table I : (Nos 583-688) ; J2000 coordinates

1980H1 D

DAHN C.C., HARRINGTON R.S., KALLARAKAL V.V., RIEPE B.Y., GUETTER H.H., LUG-INBUHL C.B., RIEPE B.Y., WALKER R.L., PIER J.R., VRBA F.J., MONET D.G., ABLES H.D. 1988,A.J. 95, 237-246 U.S. Naval Observatory of Faint Stars. List VIII.

USNO

Table I : (Nos 689-786) ; J2000 coordinates ; cross-identif.

1980H1 E

HARRINGTON R.S., DAHN C.C., KALLARAKAL V.V., GUETTER H.H., RIEPE B.Y., WALKER R.L., PIER J.R., VRBA F.J., LUGINBUHL C.B., HARRIS H.D., ABLES H.D. 1993,A.J. 105, 1571-1580 U.S. Naval Observatory of Faint Stars. List IX.

USNO

Table I : (Nos 787-908) ; J2000 coordinates ; cross-identif.

1980H2

HARRIS D.E., KAPAHI V.K., EKERS R.D. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 39, 215-233 Westerbork synthesis observations of 8 clusters of galaxies which contain tailed radio galaxies

14W

Table II to X: sources 14W (Nos 1-145) in clusters ACO 401, 1446, 1452, 1775, 2220, 2250, 2255, and 2306 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1415 MHz, supplementary observations at 610 or 4995 MHz. Fig. 1 to 11: contour maps of a few extended sources.

1980H3

HUMMEL E. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 81, 316-322 Radio sources in the vicinity of bright galaxies

23W

Table 1: (Nos 1-90) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1415 MHz ; identif. of each NGC galaxy in the vicinity of each 23W source. No maps.

1980H4

HARRIS D.E., COSTAIN C.H., STROM R.G., PINEDA F.J., DELVAILLE J.P., SCHNOPPER H.W. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 90, 283-289 Radio and X-ray observations of Abell 754

26W

Table 2: (Nos 1-60) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 610 MHz. Fig. 3a and b: maps of sources near the cluster center.

1980J1

JONES J.E., JONES B.J.T. 1980,M.N.R.A.S. 191, 685-700 The Fornax cluster of galaxies

JJ

Table 1 : (Nos 1-150) ; 1950 coordinates, a few cross-identif. with NGC or IC No Identif. charts

1980J2

JACOBY G.H. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 42, 1-18 and Plates 1 to 12 The luminosity function for planetary nebulae and the number of planetary nebulae in Local Group galaxies

Search for PN in the Magellanic Clouds, using on-line and off-line filter photography in 4 + 4 fields (see Fig. 1 and Table 1) Table 2A : (Nos 1-27) ; 1975 coordinates PN in SMC

a few had been previously identified

J2-

Table 2B : (Nos 1-41) ; 1975 coordinates  PN in LMC  J1-

Identif. charts ; a few cross-identified objects Magnitudes are given in Tables 4 and 5

1980K1 A

KALLAS E., REICH W. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 42, 227-243 A 21cm radio continuum survey of the galactic plane between ℓ = 93^{∘} and ℓ = 162^{∘}

KR

|b| ≤ 4 Table II : (Nos 1-236) ; sources stronger than 0.3Jy ; galactic coordinates ; Contour maps ; HPBW

1980K1 B

FICH M. 1986,A.J. 92, 787-804 A complete VLA survey in the outer galaxy

KR

”Snapshot” survey of all radio continuum sources stronger than 0.3 Jy at 21cm, smaller than 2 arcmin, and in the area in the sky defined by ℓ = 93^{∘}to163^{∘}, b = −4^{∘}to + 4^{∘}. Observation with the VLA at 6cm with a resolution of 4 arcsec and a sensitivity of 1 mJy, and at 2cm for objects unresolved at 6cm.

1980K2

KOTANYI C.G. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 41, 421-432 A radio continuum survey at 1.4 GHz of the galaxies in the Virgo region

Table II : (Nos 1-41) discrete sources in full-synthesis fields at 1.4 GHz.  30W
Table III : (Nos 1-40) discrete sources at 0.6 GHz.  29W
Table IV : (Nos 1-34) parameters of discrete sources other than the galaxies in strip.  31W

A few cross-identif. ; 1950 coordinates ; No maps.

1980M1

MARKARIAN B.E., STEPANIAN J.A., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A. 1980,Astr. Cirk. 1141, 1-3 (in Russian) New quasi-stellar objects

BSS

Parkes format, also numbered (Nos 1-7)

1980M2

MEABURN J. 1980,M.N.R.A.S. 192, 365-375 The giant and supergiant shells of the Magellanic Clouds

N = 1  SGS-SMC
Nos 1-9  SGS-LMC

Table 1 and fig. 2 for Identif. chart

1980M3

MATTHEWS H.E., GOSS W.M. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 88, 267-272 Aperture synthesis observations of the NGC 7000/IC 5070 complex at 610 MHz

28W

Table 1: (Nos 1-56) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif.

1980N1 A

NOGUCHI T., MAEHARA H., KONDO M. 1980,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs. 18, 55-70 A search for ultraviolet-excess objects

KUV

N = 588 in 22 fields ; 715 sq.^{∘} distributed in ℓ = 90^{∘} − 180^{∘} ; |b| = 6^{∘}to86^{∘}) Format HHMMm±DDMM (1950 ROUNDED coordinates) Also discovery name FFFF NNN Identif. charts in ref. 1980N1 D (Fig. 2)

1980N1 B

NOGUCHI T., YUTANI M., MAEHARA H. 1982,P.A.S.J. 34, 407-415 Proper motions of ultraviolet-excess objects

KUV

N = 81 objects from ref. 1981N1 A

1980N1 C

KONDO M., WATANABE E., YUTANI M., NOGUCHI T. 1982,P.A.S.J. 34, 541-552 UBV Photometric Observations of the Ultraviolet-Excess Objects and the Kiso Photometric Standard Stars. I.

KPS ⇝ KPS

Table 1 : format FFFF-NNN and Candidates of Kiso photometric 1950 Coordinates standard stars N = 36 objects from ref. 1981N1 A

KPS

Table 2 : format FFFF-NN and 1950 Coordinates N = 47 objects from ref. 1981N1 A KUV

1980N1 D

KONDO M., NOGUCHI T., MAEHARA H. 1984,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 20, 130-189 A search for ultraviolet-excess objects. II.

KUV

Table 2 : N = 598 in 22 fields ; Format HHMMm±DDMM ; 1950 ROUNDED coordinates

also discovery name (2nd col.) FFFF NNN

Identif. charts (Fig. 3)

1980N1 E

WEGNER G., McMAHAN R.K. 1985,A.J. 90, 1511-1513 Spectral types for 26 objects in the Kiso survey

KUV

Spectral types for 26 blue stars in the Kiso survey (acronym KUV, ref. 1980N1 A, the format is FFF-NN) Spectral range 4000 − 7200Å, resolution 8Å The authors use the acronym K instead of KUV

1980N1 F

WEGNER G., McMAHAN R.K. 1986,A.J. 91, 139-143 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. II.Data for 61 stars

KUV

The authors use the acronym K instead of KUV (format HHMMm±DDMM) from ref. 1980N1 A

1980N1 G

WEGNER G., McMAHAN R.K., BOLEY F.I. 1987,A.J. 94, 1271-1279 Spectral types for objects in the KISO survey. III. Data for 102 stars

KUV

Objects from ref. 1980N1 A Table 1 : V, U-B and Spectral Type Tracing of a few spectra (λ 4000-7200, resol. 8Å, 2.8” diameter entrance hole)

1980N1 H

WEGNER G., McMAHAN R.K. 1988,A.J. 96, 1933-1940 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. IV. Data for 81 stars

KUV

Spectroscopy and spectral types for 81 UV-excess objects in the Kiso survey (ref. 1980N1 A) Spectral range 4000-7200Å, resolution 8Å Erratum, 1990 AJ 99 330: KUV 23061+1229 given at the end of Sec. IV should read KUV 23182+1007

1980N1 I

WEGNER G., SWANSON S.R. 1990,A.J. 99, 330-338 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. V. Data for 110 stars

KUV

Spectroscopy and spectral types for 110 UV-excess objects in the Kiso survey (ref. 1980N1 A and D) Spectral range 4000-7200Å, resolution 8 or 12Å

1980N1 J

WEGNER G., SWANSON S.R. 1990,A.J. 100, 1274-1284 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. VI. Data for 143 stars

KUV

Spectroscopy and spectral types for 143 UV-excess objects in the Kiso survey (ref. 1980N1 A and D) Spectral range 4500-7200Å, resolution ≃ 12Å

1980N1 K

WEGNER G., BOLEY F.I. 1993,A.J. 105, 660-664 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. VII. Data for 118 stars

KUV

Spectroscopy and spectral types for 118 UV-excess objects in the Kiso survey (ref. 1980N1 A and D) Spectral range 4000-7200Å, resolution ≃ 12Å

1980N1 L

WEGNER G., DUPUIS J. 1993,A.J. 106, 390-395 Spectral types for objects in the Kiso survey. VIII. Data for 144 stars

KUV

Spectroscopy and spectral types for 144 UV-excess objects in the Kiso survey (ref. 1980N1 A and D) Spectral range 4100-7200Å, resolution ≃ 12Å

1980O1 A

OSMER P.S., SMITH M.G. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 42, 332-349 Discovery and spectrophotometry of the quasars in the -40^{∘}zone of the CTIO Curtis Schmidt Survey

Q

N = 125 ; (Numbered 1-125 with cross-identif. to Parkes format)

1980O1 B

OSMER P.S. 1980,Ap.J.Suppl. 42, 523-540 Spectrophotometry of the quasars in the CTIO 4 meter survey

Q

Gives (Nos 1-76) to the list of Hoag + Smith, 1977 (classified by increasing α ) and cross-identif. with Q acronym with format HHMMSS-DDMM

1980T1 A

TAKASE B. 1980,P.A.S.J. 32, 605-612 Counts of Ultraviolet-Bright Galaxies and their distributions in Clusters of Galaxies

KUG

20 sky areas covering 650 sq.-^{∘}, surveyed with the Tokyo Obs. 105 cm Schmidt telescope at Kiso in UGR (see also KUV) ≃ 1100 objects (no catalogue) ; about ten times more than Markarian in the same fields See also ref. 1984T1

1980T1 B

TAKASE B., NOGUCHI T., MACHARA H. 1983,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 19, 440-462 A morphological study of Ultraviolet-Excess galaxies

KUG

Extension of the surveys for KUV (stellar objects) and KUG (galaxies) and follow-up observations Identif. charts and cross-identif. for 142 galaxies See also ref. 1984T1

1980T2 A

TERZAN A., JU K.H. 1980,The Messenger 20, 6-7 A photometric study of the bright cloud B in Sagittarius: III

TerzN

Table 1 : (Nos 1-24) ; Diffuse objects named Terzan-Ju by the authors ; Identif. charts

Some objects are PN or Poss. PN, named Te (or TeJu) in ref. 1992AO  Te

1980T2 B

TERZAN A. 1985,The Messenger 42, 4-6 A photometric study of the bright cloud B in Sagittarius: IV. 17 new diffuse objects

TerzN

Table 1 : (Nos 25-41) named Terzan by the author ; Identif. charts Continued in Table III of ref. 1982T1 B, and in Table 5 of ref. 1982T1 D

Some objects are PN or Poss. PN, named Te in ref. 1992AO  Te

1980V1

VEGA E.I., RABOLLI M., MUZZIO J.C., FEINSTEIN A. 1980,A.J. 85, 1207-1217 A search for Hα emission objects in a region in Ara

VRMF

(Nos 1-124) ; Identif. charts VRMF 90 and VRMF 104 are poss. PN named VERA in ref. 1992AO

VERA

1980V2

VIALLEFOND F., ALLEN R.J., DE BOER J.A. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 82, 207-220 Radio continuum and H I observations of the interacting galaxies NGC 4490/85

24W

Table 3: (Nos 1-14) ; 1950 coordinates ; λ = 21 cm.

1980V3

VALENTIJN E.A. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 89, 234-238 A Westerbork survey of clusters of galaxies. XIII. Deep 610 MHz source counts from the Cancer cluster field

27W

Table 2: (Nos 1-220) ; 1950 coordinates No maps.

1980W1 A

WEINBERGER R. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 40, 123-127 Galaxies near the northern galactic plane

Weinberger

(Nos 1-207) ; 200 are new ; Galaxies detected from POSS near the galactic plane (ℓ = 33to213^{∘} ; |b| < 2^{∘})

1980W1 B

WEINBERGER R. 1980,Unpublished Galaxies in the Galactic Plane

Weinberger

Quoted by Pfleiderer+, 1981, Astr. Astrophys. 102, L21-L22 H I observations of galaxies in the galactic plane Nota: letter I is not used

1980W2

WAMSTEKER W. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 127-140 Five-colour photometry of blue stars in the Magellanic Cloud region

WAMS

(Nos 1-550) ; Identif. charts

1980W3

WEILER K.W., PANAGIA N. 1980,Astr. Astrophys. 90, 269-282 Vela X and the Evolution of Plerions

-

Table 3 lists 13 probable, possible or doubtful plerions

1981AG

ANDREWS A.D., GROSSIE H.H.R. 1981,Atlas, Armagh Observatory, pp. 100 A photometric atlas of the Orion nebula

Andrews

1981A1 A

AMIRKHANIAN V.R., GORSHKOV A.G., KAPUSTKIN A.A., KONNIKOVA V.K., LAZUTKIN A.N., LARIONOV M.G., NIKANOROV A.S., SIDORENKOV V.N., UGOL’KOVA L.S., KHROMOV O.I. 1981,Astr. Zh. 58, 717-724 (Sov. Astr. 25, 412-415) A sky survey at 8.7 and 14.4 GHz: the zone δ = 0^{∘}- 4^{∘}- Tel. RATAN 600

Zel

Table 6 : (Nos 1-82) ν = 8.7 GHz Table 7 : (Nos 1-24) ν = 14.4 GHz Cross-identif. with PKS or Z number (Parkes format)

1981A1 B

AMIRKHANIAN V.R., GORSHKOV A.G., KAPUSTKIN A.A., KONNIKOVA V.K., LAZUTKIN A.N., LARIONOV M.G., NIKANOROV A.S., SIDORENKOV V.N., UGOL’KOVA L.S. 1985,Comm. of the Special Astrophys. Obs. of URSS No. 47 The Zelenchuk sky survey of the declination zone 0^{∘}- 9^{∘}at the frequency 3.9 GHz.

Zel

Table 4 : 3255 sources with a Parkes format ; 1950 coordinates Cross-identif. with other surveys in which the sources were first detected

1981A1 C

AMIRKHANIAN V.R., GORSHKOV A.G., IPATOV A.V. 1988,Comm. of the Special Astrophys. Obs. of URSS No. 58, 41-65 Deep sky survey at 3.9, 7.7 and 14.4 GHz

Zel

800 sources with a Parkes format ; 1950 coordinates Cross-identif. with other surveys in which the sources were first detected

1981A1 D

AMIRKHANIAN V.R., GORSHKOV A.G., KAPUSTKIN A.A., KONNIKOVA V.K., LAZUTKIN A.N. 1992,Pis’ma Astr. Zh. 18, 396-403 The survey of the polar region at 3900 MHz

Zel

The Zelenchuk sky survey: Table I : α = 15h to 06h ; δ = 82^{∘}30’ to 82^{∘}50’ Table II : α = 01h to 21h ; δ = 82^{∘}50’ to 83^{∘}10’ 220 radiosources with a Parkes format ; 1950 coordinates Some cross-identif. with other surveys in which the sources were first detected

1981A2

AVEDISOVA V. 1981,Supplement to the collection ”Nauchnye Informacii”, iss. 47. Riga: Zinatne, 139 pp. Catalogue of star formation regions in Galaxy: Part 1 Observational data

RSF

N = 160 complexes of 330 sources

1981BR A

BREYSACHER J. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 203-207 Spectral classification of Wolf-Rayet stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

BREY

N = 100 ; cross-identif. with 12 previous lists ; no Identif. charts

1981BR B

LORTET M.-C. 1991,IAU Symp. 143, 513-514 Nomenclature problems

BREY

Table 1: N = 15 ; Compilation of the new Wolf-Rayet stars found in the LMC since ref. 1981BR A They have been given a BREY number, format NNa, e.g. the star 3a inserted in RA between stars 3 and 4

1981BR C

HEYDARI-MALAYERI M., MELNICK J., VAN DROM E. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. 236, L21-L24 A peculiar high density H II blob ejected by a WC9 star in the Large Magellanic Cloud

BREY

Description of Brey 3a in LHA 120-N82, would be a WC9 ; Photograph

1981BR D

MOFFAT A.F.J. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 244, L9-L10 A WC9 subclass Wolf-Rayet star in the Large Magellanic Cloud?

BREY

Discussion and reclassification of star BREY 3a in LHA 120-N82 (ref. 1981BR B and C) which would rather be WNL or Of, not a WC9 star

1981DG

DIXON R.S., GEARHART M.R., SCHMIDTKE P.C. 1981,Ohio State Univ. Radio Observatory Atlas of sky overlay maps

-

1037 overays SAO stars, all catalogued non-stellar objects in ref. 1980DI ; coordinates grids (α , δ 1950, galactic coordinates and ecliptic)

1981F1 A

FUENMAYOR F.J. 1981,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 6, 83-93 A deep near infrared objective prism survey for carbon stars toward the galactic center and anticenter

FuenC

Table 1 : (Nos 1-216) in the direction of the galactic anticenter (Nos 217 -283) in the direction of the galactic center 1900 coordinates ; galactic coordinates

some cross-identif. with CCCS (= CCS), 123 newly discovered The limiting magnitude to which stars could be identified is I = 13.0

1981F1 B

JURA M., JOYCE R.R., KLEINMANN S.G. 1989,Ap.J. 336, 924-936 High-luminosity carbon stars in the galactic anticenter

FuenC

K-band photometry of 211 Fuenmayor’s stars (ref. 1981F1 A)

1981F2

FANTI C., MANTOVANI F., TOMASI P. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 1-17 New galactic sources in the BG catalogue: search at 1.4 GHz with the Westerbork Synthesis Radio Telescope

32W

Table III: (Nos 1-32) ; 1950 coordinates Other sources : R for structures related to the BG source, and Greek letter for small scale components.

Fig. 3: contour maps of extended sources.

1981G1 A

GREGORY P.C., TAYLOR A.R. 1981,Ap.J. 248, 596-605 Radio patrol of the northern Milky Way: a survey for variable sources

GT

λ = 6 cm ; resol. 2.7’ Table 3 : VLA results for 5 variable sources

1981G1 B

TAYLOR A.R., GREGORY P.C. 1983,A.J. 88, 1784-1809 Radio patrol of the Northern Milky Way: a catalog of sources. I.

GT

200 sq.^{∘} of the galactic plane at 6cm Table IV : N = 534 discrete radio sources among which 15 variables sources newly discovered (Table V)

1981G1 C

GREGORY P.C., TAYLOR A.R. 1986,A.J. 92, 371-411 Radio patrol of the northern Milky Way: a catalog of sources. II.

GT

Table II : (N = 1274) ; Format HHMM+DDd ; truncated 1950 coordinates 6cm radio-patrol survey of the galactic plane for variable sources,during 5 years.

1981G1 D

DURIC N., GREGORY P.C. 1988,A.J. 95, 1149-1158 VLA structure of variable radio sources in the galactic plane

GT

VLA observations of 17 new variable and three nonvariable radio sources (previously suspected variables)

1981H1

HARTEN R.H., GOSS W.M., MATTHEWS H.E., ISRAEL F.P. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. 103, 50-56 Synthesis observations of the radio continuum radiation of the H II region NGC 7822 (W1)

40W

Table 2: (Nos 1-30) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 610 MHz. Fig. 2: map of the H II region.

1981I1

ICHIKAWA T. 1981,P.A.S.J. 33, 107-133 The space distribution of M giants in the direction of Cassiopeia

KisoM1-

Table 2 : (Nos 1-722) M stars Table 3 : (Nos 1-34) C stars ; most of them (named I) are KisoC1- (ref. 1987M1 A) Table 4 : (Nos 1-2) S stars No Identif. charts ; galactic coordinates only

1981I2

ISAACMAN R. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 405-419 A radio search for planetary nebulae near the galactic center. IV. Survey data

35W

Table III: (Nos 1-60) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1415 MHz.

59 sources 19W (preliminary data in ref. 1979W1).

Fig. 1 to 6: contour maps of extended sources.

1981K1

KUNTH D., SARGENT W.L.W., KOWAL C. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 44, 229-239 A spectroscopic survey of emission-line objects

POX

23 emission-line galaxies and 22 QSO discovered spectroscopically, from a selection of objects on two UKS plates Identif. charts (Selection of numbers between 4 and 188)

1981K2

KUHR H., WITZEL A., PAULINY-TOTH I.I.K., NAUBER U. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 45, 367-430 A catalogue of extragalactic radio sources having flux densities greater than 1 Jy at 5 GHz

1Jy

Catalogue of 518 extragalctic radio sources. Table III: 1950 coordinates ; identification for optically identified sources.

1981L1

LARGE M.I., MILLS B.Y., LITTLE A.G., CRAWFORD D.F., SUTTON J.M. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 194, 693-704 and Table 1 = Microfiches MN 194/1 The Molonglo Reference Catalogue of Radio Sources

MRC

12141 sources S (408 MHz) ≥ 0.7 Jy 7.85 sr of the sky defined by +18.5^{∘} ≥ δ(1950) ≥ −85.0^{∘}, |b| ≥ 3^{∘} Positional accuracy about 3” to 10” Cross references to Parkes Catalogues (5000 sources in common) The raw observational material: 500 computer magnetic tapes and 40 km of corresponding chart records

1981L2 A

LONG K.S., HELFAND D.J., GRABELSKY D.A. 1981,Ap.J. 248, 925-944 A soft X-ray study of the Large Magellanic Cloud

CAL

Table 2 : (Nos 1-97) ; identif. with SNR or other objects ; Map

1981L2 B

COWLEY A.P., CRAMPTON D., HUTCHINGS J.B., HELFAND D.J., HAMILTON T.T., THORSTENSEN J.R., CHARLES P.A. 1984,Ap.J. 286, 196-208 Optical counterparts of the Large Magellanic Cloud X-ray point sources

CAL

Table 1 :sources not detected in the original IPC survey of CAL (ref. 1981L2 A) are designated by letters A-G ; letters C and D were for marginal HRI detections and are not included here. Accurate 1950 coordinates. B-band photographs for 10 sources.

1981L3

LEWIN W.H.G., JOSS P.C. 1981,Space Sci. Rev. 28, 3-87 X-ray bursters and the X-ray sources of the galactic bulge

MXB

N = 31 ; M stands for Massachusetts

1981MT

MANCHESTER R.N., TAYLOR J.H. 1981,A.J. 86, 1953-1973 Observed and derived parameters for 330 pulsars

PSR

N = 330 Updated by 1993TM

1981M1

McHARDY I.M., LAWRENCE A., PYE J.P., POUNDS K.A. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 197, 393-919 The Ariel V (3A) catalogue of X-ray sources. II.Sources at high galactic latitude (|b| > 10^{∘})

3A

1981M2

MAZETS E.P., GOLENETSKII S.V., ILYINSKII V.N., PANOV V.N., APTEKAR R.L., GURYAN Yu.A., PROSKURA M.P., SOKOLOV I.A., SOKOLOVA Z.Ya., KHARITONOVA T.V., DYATCHKOV A.V., KHAVENSON N.G. 1981,Astrophys. Space Sci. 80, 3-143 Catalog of Cosmic γ -ray bursts from the Konus experiment data, Parts I to IV

KONUS

Identified by the day, for instance: 14.09.78 a Equatorial coordinates are given in ^{∘} and fractions of ^{∘}

1981M3

McGREGOR P.J., HYLAND A.R. 1981,Ap.J. 250, 116-134 Infrared studies of the two stellar populations in 30 Doradus

Dor IR

(Nos 1-35) ; Nos 9, 12 missing ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. chart Improves the paper by Hyland A.R.+ 1978 A.J. 83, 20-75 Table 1 : JHK photometry Table 2 : derived parameters

1981RU

RUFENER F. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 45, 207-366 Third catalogue of stars measured in the Geneva Observatory Photometric System

-

Compilation of the photoelectric measurements in the Geneva Observatory seven colour system (U, B, V, B1, B2, V1, G) for 14633 stars First catalogue: 1971, A&AS 3 181-252. N=1406 Second catalogue: 1976, A&AS 26, 275-351. N=4670 Updated by 1989RU

1981R1 A

REID I.N., GILMORE G. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 196, 15P-18P Photometric survey of faint red stars (B, V, R, I to m ≃ 20) in the South Galactic Pole region, using UKS Schmidt Telescope plates

RG

N = 1

1981R1 B

GILMORE G., REID I.N. 1981,Nature 291, 208-210 RG 0044-2958: a peculiar M supergiant at a distance of 2.5 Mpc

RG

N = 1

1981R1 C

REID N., GILMORE G. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 206, 19-35 New light on faint stars. V. Infrared photometry and the H-R diagram for very low mass dwarfs

RG

Appendix describes V R I J K H data for 54 RG objects Details on the study of the UKS plates, discrimination between stars and galaxies etc... are given by the authors in M.N.R.A.S. 201, p. 77-81 (1982)

1981R2 A

REIPURTH B. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 44, 379-385 Small nebulae and Herbig-Haro objects. I. A survey of southern dark clouds

REIPURTH

Table I : 16 nebulous objects (Nos 1-16) ; 1950 coordinates ; names of the dark cloud and region in which the objects are situated Identif. charts

1981R2 B

REIPURTH B. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 61, 319-330 Small nebulae and Herbig-Haro objects. II. The Orion region

REIPURTH

Table I : 65 individual knots within 41 objects or groups of objects ; The numbering, (Nos 17-57), continues the list in 1981R2 A ; 1950 coordinates Finding Charts See 1974H2 N for those who were subsequently found to be bona fide HH objects

1981ST

SANDAGE A., TAMMANN G.A. 1981,Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 635 A Revised Shapley-Ames Catalog of Bright Galaxies

-

positions and data for 1246 galaxies

1981S1

SCHUCH N.J. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 196, 695-704 The Ursa Major supercluster. I. The optical field and the 5C10 radio survey

5C10.

265 sources detected at 408 MHz and 48 at 1407 MHz

1981S2 A

SWANENBURG B.N., BENNETT K., BIGNAMI G.F., BUCCHERI R., CARAVEO P., HERMSEN W., KANBACH G., LICHTI G.G., MASNOU J.L., MAYER-HASSELWANDER H.A., PAUL J.A., SACCO B., SCARSI L., WILLS R.D. 1981,Ap.J.Lett. 243, L69-L73 Second COS B catalog of high-energy γ -ray sources

2CG

N = 25 ; E > 100MeV ; Typical spatial resolution 1^{∘} or ≃ 0.5^{∘} for pulsed signal

1981S2 B

BIGNAMI G.F., HERMSEN W. 1983,Annual Rev. Astr. Astrophys. 21, 61-108 Galactic γ -ray sources

2CG

N = 25 ; same sources as in ref. 1981S2 A

1981U1 A

USHER P.D. 1981,Ap.J.Suppl. 46, 117-139 Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. I. Palomar Schmidt field centered on Selected Area 57

US

(Nos 1-634) (13 known quasars) ; Identif. charts (fig. 2) ; 1950 coordinates Contains primarily quasars and white dwarfs B < 20 mag, complete to B = 18.5 mag 4 new quasars detected (Nos 72, 272, 329, 519)

1981U1 B

USHER P.D., MATTSON D., WARNOCK A. III 1982,Ap.J.Suppl. 48, 51-71 Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. II. Palomar Schmidt field centered on Selected Area 29

US

(Nos 635-1184) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates

1981U1 C

USHER P.D., MITCHELL K.J. 1982,Ap.J.Suppl. 49, 27-52 Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. III. Palomar Schmidt field centered on Selected Area 28

US

(Nos 1185-2363) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates Consists primarily of quasars and white dwarfs, statistically complete to at least B = 18.5 mag

1981U1 D

HUANG K.-L., USHER P.D. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 56, 393-401 and Plates 3-16 Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. IV. Palomar Schmidt fields centered on Selected Areas 55 and 94

US

Table 1 : (Nos 2364-3101) field centered on SA 55 Table 2 : (Nos 3102-3678) field centered on SA 94 Arc second positional accuracy ; Identif. charts 1950 coordinates ; Total number: 3678

1981U1 E

USHER P.D., MITCHELL K.J., WARNOCK A. III 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 66, 1-18. Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. V. Palomar Schmidt field centered on selected area 71

US

Table 1 : (Nos 3679-3965) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates

1981U1 F

USHER P.D., MITCHELL K.J. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 74, 885-889 Faint blue objects at high galactic latitude. VI. Palomar Schmidt field centered on selected area 82

US

Table 1 : (Nos 3966-3987) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates

1981VH A

VAN DER HUCHT K.A., CONTI P.S., LUNDSTROM I., STENHOLM B. 1981,Space Sci. Rev. 28, 227-306 The sixth catalogue of galactic Wolf-Rayet stars, their past and present

WR

Critical compilation of the existing literature, with inclusion of new data. Cross-identif. between numerous lists. Identif. charts. Table VIII : (Nos 1-158) and No 29a Table IX : (Nos 1-45) central stars of planetary nebulae

type: (WR).., (O VI).., (WC 10), (WC 11)

Table X : Nos 1 and 2 WR related symbiotic stars Table XI : Nos 1 and 2 low mass WR-like stars (binaries) Table XII : (Nos 1-10) possible pre-WR stars Appendix : a bibliography (1867-1980), ibid. p. 307-382

1981VH B

VAN DEN HUCHT K.A., HIDAYAT B., ADMIRANTO A.G., SUPELLI K.R., DOOM C. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. 199, 217-234 The galactic distribution and subtype evolution of Wolf-Rayet stars. III.

WR

Updates 1981VH A 3 stars are removed (Nos 72, 99, 122), 2 stars are inserted in RA (No. 30a inserted between No. 30 and No. 31, and No. 48a between 48 and 49)

1981VH C

CRAWFORD I.A., BARLOW M.J. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 251, L39-L42 The distance to the WN8 star We 21

WR

From the interstellar Na I line, the object We 21 (Weaver 1974ApJ.189.263W) is at a distance of ≃ 11-5kpc, thus is a Pop. I WN8 star surrounded by a stellar ejecta bubble, not a PN, and We 21 = WR 47a (inserted in RA between WR 47 and WR 48)

1981V1

VAIANA G.S., CASSINELLI J.P., FABBIANO G., GIACCONI R., GOLUB L., GORENSTEIN P., HAISCH B.M., HARNDEN F.R.Jr, JOHNSON H.M., LINSKY J.L., MAXSON C.W., MEWE R., ROSNER R., SEWARD F., TOPKA K., ZWAAN C. 1981,Ap.J. 245, 163-182 Results from an extensive Einstein stellar survey

1E

1981W1

WESTERLUND B.E., OLANDER N., HEDIN B. 1981,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 267-295 Supergiant and giant M type stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

Table I : (Nos 1-537)  Supergiant M stars in LMC  WOH
Table II: (Nos 1-660)  Giant M stars in LMC  WOHG

1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts ; I, R-I, V-R, No. SP77 (Sanduleak + Philip, ref. 1977S3) WOH are designated as ”s” and WOHG as ”g” in Lundgren 1988, Astr. Astrophys. 200, 85-98, and as ”S” and ”G” in ref. 1990R1

1981W2

WARWICK R.S., MARSHALL N., FRASER G.W., WATSON M.G., LAWRENCE A., PAGE C.G., POUNDS K.A., RICKETTS M.J., SIMS M.R., SMITH A. 1981,M.N.R.A.S. 197, 865-891 The Ariel V (3A) catalogue of X-ray sources. I.Sources at low galactic latitude (|b| < 10^{∘})

3A

1982AC A

ACKER A., GLEIZES F., CHOPINET M., MARCOUT J. With the collaboration of OCHSEN-BEIN F., ROQUES J.M. and of the OHP 1982,Special Publ. of the CDS, No. 3, Strasbourg Catalogue of the central stars of Planetary Nebulae

FC

1982AC B

ACKER A., MARCOUT J., OCHSENBEIN F. 1982,Edit. Obs. de Strasbourg Complement to the Catalogue of Central Stars of true and possible planetary nebulae. I.

FC

Errata and additions: 3 new central stars and several new references

1982AC C

ACKER A., MARCOUT J., SCHOHN C. 1983,Edit. Obs. de Strasbourg Complement to the Catalogue of the Central Stars of true and possible planetary nebulae. II.

FC

4 new objects and several new references

1982AC D

ACKER A., CHOPINET M., MARCOUT J., SCHOHN C. 1984,Edit. Obs. of Strasbourg Complement to the Catalogue of the Central Stars of true and possible planetary nebulae. III.

FC

13 new objects (format NNNbis) and several new references

1982AM

AMNUEL P.R., GUSEINOV O.H., RAKHAMIMOV Sh.Yu. 1982,Astrophys. Space Sci. 82, 3-103 Second catalogue of X-ray sources

2XRS

1982AZ

AZZOPARDI M., VIGNEAU J. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 50, 291-376 Catalogue of the Small Magellanic Cloud star members

AzV

N = 524 ; (Nos 1-506) ; α = 0h41 - 1h22 (1975) a few A and B components ; 16 Identif. charts (34′ × 34′) The AZO number is identical to AzV = AZVI, ref. 1975A1

1982BC

BARBIERI C., CAPACCIOLI M., CRISTIANI S., NARDON G., OMIZZOLO A. 1982,Mem. Soc. Astr. Ital. 53, No. 3, 511-787 The Asiago catalogue of Quasi Stellar Objects

QSO

N = 2004 Table 3, p. 645-665 : synonyms cross-reference table QSO known from literature before dec. 31. 1981 Enlarged and updated from Barbieri, Capaccioli and Zambon, 1975, Mem. Soc. Astr. Ital. 46, 461

1982B1

BLITZ L., FICH M., STARK A.A. 1982,Ap.J.Suppl. 49, 183-206 Catalogue of CO radial velocities toward galactic H II regions

BFS

Catalogue p. 200-201 ; (Nos 1-65) ; Additional H II regions (not in Sharpless 1959 catalogue)

1982B2 A

BENN C.R., GRUEFF G., VIGOTTI M., WALL J.V. 1982,M.N.R.A.S. 200, 747-766 A deep radio/optical survey near the North Galactic Pole. I. The 5C12 catalogue

5C12.

299 sources detected at 408 MHz and 65 detected at 1407 MHz. Table 1, p. 749 : Recapitulation of data on the 12 5C surveys from 1966 to 1982, 5C 13 to 17 are in preparation

1982B2 B

BENN C.R., GRUEFF G., VIGOTTI M., WALL J.V. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 230, 1-53 A deep radio and optical survey near the North Galactic Pole - IV. VLA observations and optical identifications of 5C 12 sources

5C12.

VLA observations of 274 5C 12 radio sources (S > 10mJy) at 1.5 and 4.9 GHz. Identifications with optical images down to ≃ 23 mag. Area α = 13h, δ = +35^{∘}, 4^{∘} in diameter near NGP Table 8 : Optical identifications (format NNN.N)

1982B2 C

BENN C.R., KENDERLINE S. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 251, 253-266 The 5C14, 5C15 and 5C16 radio source surveys of the 5C12 area

5C12.

408 and 1407 MHz observations of 5C 12 radio sources . Table 2: 5C 12+14+15+16 catalogues. Accurate positions (1950 coordinates) for 5C12 sources. Extension of the 5C12 catalogue up to No. 691.

1982B3

BIJLEVELD W., VALENTIJN E.A. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. 111, 50-57 Radio and X-ray observations of the Abell 2241 galaxy clusters

47W

(Nos 1-27) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1412.0 MHz. Table 2: radio sources with optical identif. Table 3: unidentified radio sources. Fig. 1: map of a few sources.

1982D1

DAMASHEK M., BACKUS P.R., TAYLOR J.H., BURKHARDT R.K. 1982,Ap.J.Lett. 253, L57-L60 Northern hemisphere pulsar survey: a third radio pulsar in a binary system

PSR

23 new PSR north of δ = +20^{∘} PSR 0655+64 Table 1 : 6 recently discovered pulsars

1982FM

FERNANDEZ A., MATHEZ G., MAZURE A., NOTTALE L., ROTHENFLUG R. 1982,IAU Coll. 64, Strasbourg 1981 ”Automated Data Retrieval in Astronomy”, C. Jaschek and W. Heintz, eds, Reidel, Dordrecht, p. 265-271 Le Centre de Donnees des Amas de Galaxies (CEDAG)

-

1982GS A

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M. 1982,NASA TM 83-819 Catalogue of Infrared Observations

-

≃ 56000 individual observations of ≃ 10000 infrared sources ordering by α (1950) Alphabetical index of names: part V (orange pages) Superseded by 1984GS

1982GS B

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M. 1982,NASA TM 84-001 Far infrared supplement: Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

Selection of sources emitting at λ ≥ 5μm among 1982GS Superseded by 1984GS

1982G1

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L. 1982,Pis’ma Astr. Zh. 8, 222-223 New cometary nebulae

Gy1-

(Nos 1-13) ; No. 10 = VdBH 87 1950 coordinates ; no Identif. charts

1982G2 A

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L. 1982,Pis’ma Astr. Zh. 8, 232-233 New objects resembling Herbig-Haro ones

-

(Nos 1-21) ; 1950 coordinates ; these objects have been renumbered in 1982G2 B, use the list in 1982G2 B No plates

1982G2 B

TORELLES J.M., RODRIGUEZ L.F., CANTO J., MARCAIDE J., GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L. 1983,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 8, 147-154 A search for molecular outflows associated with peculiar nebulosities and regions of star formation

Gy2-

Table 2 : (Nos 1-22), same objects as 1982G2 A, but the numbering is different for and after No. 5 which is new ; 1950 coordinates Quoted as G1 in ref 1987G1. Also observed: PP nebulosities from ref. 1979PP (Table 3), and young objects (Table 1)

1982HJ A

HOFFLEIT D., JASCHEK C., WARREN W.H.Jr, CHARLES E.H., HAUCK B. 1982,Yale Univ. Obs., New Haven, USA The bright star catalogue. 4th revised edition

BS

(Nos 1-9110) Errata: WARREN W.H.Jr+, 1983, Bull. Inf. CDS 25, 49-50 Additions or revisions of the data for 2603 stars: (the entries are by HD, DM or SAO number) Hoffleit D., Saladyga M. and Walasuk P. 1983, Supplement to the Bright Stars catalogue, Yale Univ. Press Supersedes the previous edition (acronym BS = HR ref. 1964HF)

1982HJ B

HOFFLEIT D. 1984,Bull. Inf. CDS 27, 161-195 Additions and corrections to the Bright Star Catalogue

BS

See also WARREN W.H.Jr, 1984, Bull. Inf. CDS 27, 159-160

1982HJ C

PETERS A.R., HOFFLEIT D.E. 1992,Bull. Inf. CDS 40, 71-93 Some revisions to the Bright Stars Catalogue and its supplement

BS

Basically cross-identif. between multiple stars

1982H1

HUCHRA J.P., GELLER M.J. 1982,Ap.J. 257, 423-437 Groups of Galaxies. I. Nearby groups

HGCG

Tables 3 and 5 : 92 groups Cross-identif. with DV (De Vaucouleurs, 1975) in Table 4.

1982H2 A

HICKSON P. 1982,Ap.J. 255, 382-391 Systematic properties of compact groups of galaxies

HCG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-100) Erratum in Ap.J. 259, 930 (1982)

1982H2 B

HICKSON P., KINDL E., AUMAN J.R. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 687-698 A photometric catalog of compact groups of galaxies

HCG

Revision and new data for 463 galaxies in 100 compact groups. Table 2 : galaxies in the groups ; format NNNa ; 1950 coordinates

1982H3

HABING H.J., GOSS W.M., WINNBERG A. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. 108, 412-414 An H II region near NML Cygnus

33W

Table 1: (Nos 1-22) ; 1950 coordinates ; λ = 21 cm. Fig. 1: continuum map near NML Cygnus.

1982H4

HARRIS D.E., ROBERTSON J.G., DEWDNEY P.E., COSTAIN C.H. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. 111, 299-305 Radio and X-ray galaxies in Abell 566

39W

Table 2: (Nos 1-26) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1412 MHz. Fig. 3-5: maps of the central complex.

1982KH

KHOLOPOV P.N. 1982,Publ. Office ”Nauka”, Moscow New catalogue of suspected variable stars

NSV

(Nos 1-14811) The catalog as also been published in russian by Kukarkin+ in 1981 Updates and supersedes CSV, ref. 1951KP

1982K1

KLEBESADEL R., EVANS W.D., LAROS J.G., STRONG I.B., CLINE T.L., DESAI U., TEEGARDEN B.J., BARAT C., HURLEY K., NIEL M., VEDRENNE G., ESTULIN I.V., KUZNETSOV A.V., ZENCHENKO V.M. 1982,Ap.J.Lett. 259, L51-L56 A catalog of γ -ray bursts with Earth crossing times

{GB \atop GBS}

Table 1 : (Nos 1-111) ; the name to be used is the column ”Name”

1982LA

LAUBERTS A. 1982,ESO, Garching, 503 pp. The ESO/Uppsala Survey of the ESO(B) Atlas. Revision and compilation

ESO

Revision and compilation of 9 previous lists. Supersedes these lists Introduces Format HHMMSS = DDMM.m 1950 coordinates (1st column) ; old ESO designation (2d column) ; galactic coordinates ; Crossidentif. with ≃ 50 other catalogues N = 18438

1982M1 A

MACCACARO T., FEIGELSON E.D., FENER M., GIACCONI R., GIOIA I.M., GRIFFITHS R.E., MURRAY S.S., ZAMORANI G. 1982,Ap.J. 253, 504-511 A medium sensitivity X-ray survey using the Einstein Observatory: the Log N-Log S relation for extragalactic X-ray sources

1E

X-ray survey of ≃ 50 sq.^{∘} of the high galactic latitude sky at sensitivities in the range 7E-14 to 5E-12 ergs.cm-2.s^{−1} (0.3-3.5 keV) carried out with the Imaging Proportional Counter (IPC) Table I : 63 sources (format HHMM.m±DDMM) ; 1950 coordinates Optical identif.: see ref. 1982M1 B

1982M1 B

STOCKE J.T., LIEBERT J., GIOIA I.M., GRIFFITHS R.E., MACCACARO T., DANZIGER I.J., KUNTH D., LUB J. 1983,Ap.J. 273, 458-477 The Einstein Observatory medium sensitivity survey: optical identif. for a complete sample of X-ray sources

1E

Optical identif. for the 63 faint, high-galactic latitude X-ray sources from ref. 1982M1 A Among them, 34 are of type AGN (Table 3)

1982M2

MAZETS E.P., GOLENETSKII S.V., GURYAN Yu.A., ILYNSKII V.N. 1982,Astrophys. Space Sci. 84, 173-189 The 5 March 1979 event and the distinct class of short γ bursts: are they of the same origin?

FXP

FXP 0520-66 near N49 in LMC

1982P1

PARSAMIAN E.S., CHAVIRA E. 1982,Bol. Inst. Tonantz. 3, No. 1, p. 69-96 (in Spanish) Catalog of Hα emission stars in the region of the Orion nebula

PACH

Table 1 : (Nos 1-534) •Col. 1 : (Nos 1-534) Tonant. serial No. •Col. 2 : No. or letter in the Orion Constellation •Col. 4 : Tonant. numbering from 1953H2 (Nos 1-255) and (Nos 256-495) Identif. charts

1982P2 A

PIER J.R. 1982,A.J. 87, 1515-1526 Stars of spectral types A and B in the Southern Galactic Halo. I. UBV photometry

CTCS

Table I : Plate fields (format FFFFF) Table VI : Photometry of 234 AB stars ; 1950 coordinates No Identif. charts

1982P2 B

PIER J.R. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 53, 791-813 AB stars in the Southern Galactic Halo. II. Spectroscopy and radial velocities.

CTCS

Spectroscopy of 224 high-latitude AB stars 17 are new stars, not in Paper I. 1950 coordinates ; no Identif. charts

1982P2 C

BEERS T.C., PRESTON G.W., SHECTMAN S.A. 1985,A.J. 90, 2089-2102 A search for stars of very low metal abundance. I.

CTCS

Objective-prism and narrowband interference filter in combination on the Curtis Schmidt telescope at CTIO. Bandpass restricted to the region around H and K lines of Ca II. Slit spectra (1Åresolution) for 450 metal-poor candidates Table I : Plate fields (format FFFFF) Table V : 134 stars ; equatorial(1950) and galactic coordinates No Identif. charts

1982P2 D

BEERS T.C., PRESTON G.W., SHECTMAN S.A. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 67, 461-501 A catalog of candidate field Horizontal-Branch stars. I.

CTCS

Table 2 : 4408 candidate field horizontal-branch stars in the southern galactic hemisphere ; 1950 coordinates Erratum ApJS 70, 679: corrected coordinates for five fields

1982P2 E

DOINIDIS S.P., BEERS T.C. 1990,P.A.S.P. 102, 1392-1399 Photoelectric UBV photometry of Northern stars from the HK objective-prism survey

CTCS

Sample of 139 stars drawn from an extension of the survey of Beers+ (see ref. 1982P2 C) to the northern galactic hemisphere They are mostly stars are classified as type AB, A or MP (Metal-Poor) Table 4 : 1950 coordinates, UBV photometry and class No Identif. charts

1982P2 F

PRESTON G.W., SHECTMAN S.A., BEERS T.C. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 76, 1001-1031 Photoelectric UBV photometry of stars selected in the HK objective-prism survey

CTCS

Photoelectric UBV observations of 1782 stars from the survey of Beers+ (see ref. 1982P2 C) Table 1 : Plate fields (format FFFFF) Table 3 : Blue Horizontal Branch candidates Table 4 : Metal-poor candidates

Their 1950 equat. coordinates are provided in Table 10A

Table 5 : Stars with ambigus HK survey spectral class

Their 1950 equat. coordinates are provided in Table 10B

Table 6 : (Group 3) Probable RR Lyr stars No Identif. charts

1982P2 G

DOINIDIS S.P., BEERS T.C. 1991,P.A.S.P. 103, 973-986 Photoelectric UBV photometry of Northern stars from the HK objective-prism survey. II.

CTCS

165 stars drawn from the extension of the survey of Beers+ (see ref. 1982P2 C) Table 3 : UBV, stars with a previous identif. Table 4 : 1950 coordinates, UBV photometry, class No Identif. charts

1982P2 H

BEERS T.C., PRESTON G.W., SHECTMAN S.A., DOINIDIS S.P., GRIFFIN K.E. 1992,A.J. 103, 267-296 Spectroscopy of hot stars in the Galactic Halo

CTCS

Spectroscopy of 769 stars selected from the HK objective-prism survey of Beers+ (see ref. 1982P2 C) Table 4 : Spectroscopy and UBV photometry for hot stars ; 1950 coordinates Table 6 : stars with a previous identif. No Identif. charts

1982P2 I

BEERS T.C., PRESTON G.W., SHECTMAN S.A. 1992,A.J. 103, 1987-2034 A search for stars of very low metal abundance. II.

CTCS

Spectroscopic observations for 1044 stars, located primarily in the southern galactic hemisphere Table 1 : Plate fields (format FFFFF) Table 5 : UBV photometry and [Fe/H] abundance for the 1044 stars ; 1950 equat. and galactic coordinates No Identif. charts

1982P3

PAULS T., VAN GORKOM J.H., GOSS W.M., SHAVER P.A., DICKEY J.M., KULKARNI S. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. 112, 120-123 Westerbork and VLA observations of G 127.1+0.5

48W

Table 1: (Nos 1-23) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 608.5 MHz. No maps.

1982ST A

SEVARLIC B.M., TELEKI G., KNEZEVIC Z. 1982,Publ. Obs. Astr. Beograd, No. 29, 71-97 Bibliography of the photographic catalogues of star positions

-

140 catalogues from years 1955 to 1975

1982ST B

SEVARLIC B.M., TELEKI G., KNEZEVIC Z. 1982,Publ. Obs. Astr. Beograd, No. 29, 99-124 Bibliography of Stellar Atlases, Maps and Charts

-

261 entries from years 1537 to 1973

1982S1

SHORE S.N. 1982,P.A.S.P. 94, 682-689 CW 1103 + 254: a new cataclysmic at high galactic latitude

CW

From the Case Western Reserve Univ. 61/91 cm Burrell Schmidt Telescope (at Kitt Peak Station of Warner and Swasey Observatory) Survey of the north galactic pole region, in a search for emission-line galaxies, in preparation. N = 1

1982S2

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1982,Ap.J.Lett. 258, L11-L15 Emission-line galaxies in the direction of the proposed void in Bootes

SP82

The area surveyed is shown in Fig. 1 (RA 14 00 to 15 45, δ +32.0 to 43.0) Table 1 : (Nos 1-55) ; 1950 coordinates Identif. charts (Fig. 2)

1982T1 A

TERZAN A., BIJAOUI A., JU K.H., OUNNAS C. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 49, 715-743 New variable stars in the direction of the bright cloud B in Sagittarius

TerzV

Table III : (Nos 1-621) ; photometry of new variable stars Charts of large fields and Identif. charts

1982T1 B

TERZAN A., OUNNAS C. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 76, 205-253 A photometric study of the bright cloud B in Sagittarius. VI. 1592 new variable stars and 30 diffuse objects

Table III : (Nos 42-71) ; new diffuse objects (see ref. 1980T2)  TerzN
Table IV : (Nos 622-2213) ; new variable stars  TerzV
Identif. charts Some objects are PN or Poss. PN, named Te (or TeOu) in ref. 1992AO  Te

1982T1 C

TERZAN A., GOSSET E. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 90, 451-493 A photometric study of the bright cloud B in Sagittarius. VI. 1165 new variable stars and 65 diffuse objects

Table 2: (Nos 2215-3379) ; new variable stars ; No. 2214 is missing  TerzV
Table 5: (Nos 72-136) ; new diffuse objects (see ref. 1980T2)  TerzN

1950 eq. and gal. coordinates ; Identif. charts

1982T1 D

CUISINIER F., TERZAN A., ACKER A. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. 277, 203-204 Two new planetary nebulae in the galactic bulge

Table 1: (Nos 137-138) ; 2 new diffuse objects (see ref. 1980T2) 2000 coordinates ; Identif. charts

TerzN

These 2 objects are PN  Te

1982VB A

VOGT N., BATESON F.M. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 48, 383-407 An atlas of southern and equatorial dwarfs novae

-

Finding charts or references to finding charts All stars have V∗ designations N = 117 (from 0006-12 to 2320-08 in HHMM±DD format) Refer to 1987BF for northern dwarf novae

1982VB B

BRUCH A., MEIJER J., NAUMANN M., SCHIMPKE T., UNGRUHE R., VOGT N. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 93, 463-468 An astrometric catalogue of southern and equatorial dwarf novae

-

N = 117 ; ordered according to variable star name in Table 1, according to increasing α in Table 2 ; 1950 coordinates Mean internal accuracy of the coordinates of the order ±0.025s in α cos(δ ) and ±0.3” in δ

1982W1

WATANABE T. 1982,Astr. Astrophys. 111, 333-338 Anticenter high-velocity H I stream (Weaver Jet) and colliding H I shells

GSH

Table 1 and Fig. 2, Nos 1 and 2

1983BE

BRAZ M.A., EPCHTEIN N. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 54, 167-185 A catalogue of non stellar molecular sources and their probable infrared counterparts in the galactic plane

-

271 sources, |b| < 2^{∘} Updated by the authors It contains 288 non stellar maser sources (−2^{∘} < b < +2^{∘}) and the positions and characteristics of 76 IR objects assumed to be associated with a maser

1983BM

BRADT H.V.D., McCLINTOCK J.E. 1983,Annual Rev. Astr. Astrophys. 21, 13-66 The optical Counterparts of Compact discrete galactic X-Ray sources

X

Table 1 : Bright or compact discrete galactic X-ray sources A. Massive systems B. Low-mass systems C. X-ray sources in Globular Clusters D. Compact X-ray sources in SNR E. Cataclysmic variables F. ”Isolated” Hot White Dwarfs G. Non-degenerate Star Systems H. Other Bright Unidentified N = 96 optical identifications

Table 3 : Bright source digest (p. 40-52) ; (N ≃ 115) (Updates Bradt H.V.+, 1979, in X-ray Astronomy, ed Baity W.A., Peterson L.E., Oxford-Pergamon p. 3 (53 optical identif.)

1983B1

BOSMA A., GOSS W.M., WELLINGTON K.J. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 54, 387-391 Fleurs 21-cm continuum observations of six nearby southern spiral galaxies

50W

Table II: (Nos 1-10) ; sources near NGC 253 ; 1950 coordinates ; λ = 49 cm

1983C1

CARNOCHAN D.J., WILSON R. 1983,M.N.R.A.S. 202, 317-345 A survey of ultraviolet objects

UV

Sky survey telescope S2/68 Most of the objects of this survey have HD or DM number, except 11 objects named UV HHMM+DD

1983C2

CAMPUSANO L.E., TORRES C. 1983,A.J. 88, 1304-1322 The Cerro El Roble sample of faint ultraviolet excess objects in the south galactic pole

CT

Table II : (Nos 1-373) ; 44 sq.^{∘} ; Identif. charts

1983C3

CARRUTHERS G.R., PAGE T. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 53, 623-642 The S 201 far ultraviolet imaging survey. I. Two fields at high galactic latitude

2 fields, 20^{∘} in diameter ; 1950 Coordinates Table 3A : (Nos 1-17) Objects in Grus field, listed in Revised

S 201 Catalog

Gru C

Table 3B : (Nos 1-23) Objects detected, not listed in Revised S 201 Catalog

Gru NC

Table 4A : (Nos 1-30) Objects detected in Aqr field, listed in revised S 201 Catalog

Aqr C

Table 4B : (Nos 1-22) Objects detected, not listed in Revised S 201 Catalog

Aqr NC

Table 5 : CSI listing of stars associated with unidentified S 201 objects

1983D1

DUBOIS P., OCHSENBEIN F., PATUREL G. 1983,Bull. Inf. CDS 24, 125-126 Extension of Simbad towards Galaxies -

1983D2

DRILLING J.S. 1983,Ap.J.Lett. 270, L13-L15 The spectra of 12 new subluminous O stars

LSE

Extension of the Case-Hamburg surveys to b = ±30^{∘} for ℓ = ±60^{∘} using the Curtis-Schmidt telescope and 4^{∘} objective prism at Cerro Tololo 12 subluminous O stars excerpted from LS = LSN (ref. 1959H1), LS = LSS (ref. 1971S4), LSE (extended) Identif. charts LSS 125 is the central star of a PN named DS 2 in ref. 1992AO ; LSS 2018 is the central star of DS 1

DS

1983E1

EGRET D. 1983,Bull. Inf. CDS 24, 109-123 S.I.M.B.A.D. Story: a description of the data base of the Strasbourg Stellar Data Center

CSI

The CSI number is built from the BD or southern extension number otherwise from the 1950 equatorial coordinates 1981 Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 43, 259: Microfiche edition of CSI

1983G1

GELLER M.J., HUCHRA J.P. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 52, 61-87 + erratum Ap.J.Suppl. 54, 442 Groups of Galaxies. III. The CfA Survey

GHCG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-176) Table 2 : Content of each group Table 3 : comparison with TG (ref. 1976T1), NB (identical to HG) (ref. 1982H1),

DV (identical to DEV G) (ref. 1975D1) and other numbers

1983I1

INOUE H., KOYAMA K., TANAKA Y. 1983,IAU Symp. 101, ”Supernova remnants and their X-ray emission”, p. 535-540 Soft X-ray observation of Supernova Remnants in the Small Magellanic Cloud

IKT

Table I : (Nos 1-25) ; Association with Neb. or Radio SNR

1983K1

KONONOV V.K., PYUTUNINA T.B. 1983,Sov. Astr. 27, 399-403 A 7.6 cm radio survey of the galactic plane near the association of reflection nebulae Mon R2

RM

RATAN-600 radio tel. of the Special Astrophysical Observatory at 7.6 cm, beamwidth 56” (RA) x 10’ (δ ) Survey α = 5h39 to 7h55, δ = -6^{∘}08’ to -6^{∘}28’ (1950) Table I : Radio Sources Detected in Mon R2 Field, N = 93

1983K2

KOBAYASHI Y., OKUDA H., SATO S., JUGAKU J., DYCK H.M. 1983,P.A.S.J. 35, 101-112 Infrared polarization in the direction to the Galactic Center

GCS

Table 2 : (Nos 1-15) ; 1950 coordinates

1983LD

LU P.K., DAWSON D.W., UPGREN A.R., WEIS E.W. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 52, 169-181 A Catalog of spectral classification and photometry of barium stars.

LDUW

Table 1 : (Nos 1-221) Spectra 43Å.mm^{−1} at H-γ ; UBVRI photometry

1983L1

LANDECKER T.L., CASWELL J.L. 1983,A.J. 88, 1810-1815 DA 495. An unusual supernova remnant with resemblances to the Crab nebula.

1P

Table I : 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif. (Nos 1-21): numbering and 1P designation is a retroctive designation, by Higgs, 1986JRASC.80.51H (ref. 1986H4)

1983MO

MOREL M. 1983,Published by M. Morel, 18 Elizabeth Cook Drive, Rankin Park NSW 2287, Australia A Visual Atlas of the Large Magellanic Cloud

-

Atlas for observers with telescope of moderate aperture. 5 tables ; 7 charts ; 1950 coordinates Contents include these objects : •277 of some of the brightest variable stars (HV and NSV) •nonstellar objects from NGC, IC and other lists. •all entries in several lists of LMC members •hundreds of stars with known V magnitude

1983M1 A

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKIJ V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1983,Astrophysics 19, 14-25 The Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. I. Quasistellar and Seyfert objects.

SBSG

α = 8h - 17h, δ = 49^{∘}- 61^{∘}, down to m = 19-20 mag. Table 1 : (Nos 1-21) and Parkes designation QSO Table 2 : (Nos 1-10) and Parkes designation Seyfert G Identif. charts, 1950 coordinates Use the Parkes designation, not the No. in the 1st column of the Tables.

1983M1 B

MARKARIAN B.E., STEPANIAN J.A. 1983,Astrophysics 19, 354-368 The Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. I. The results for the region centered on α = 11h30m, δ = +59^{∘}00’ 4^{∘} x 4^{∘} field Table 1 : (Nos 1-107) and Parkes designation peculiar G

and Fig. 1

SBSG

Table 2 : (Nos 1-11) and Parkes designation blue stars and Fig. 2

SBSS

1983M1 C

MARKARIAN B.E., STEPANIAN J.A. 1984,Astrophysics 20, 10-23 The Second Markarian Spectral Sky Survey. II. The results for the region centered at α = 09h50m, δ = +55^{∘}00’

4^{∘} x 4^{∘} field Optical positions with an accuracy of ≃ 1.5 arcsec. in both coordinates are given in ref. 1983M1 G

Table 1 : (Nos 1-110) and Parkes designation  peculiar G  SBSG
Table 2 : (Nos 1-24) and Parkes designation  blue stars  SBSS

Identif. Charts, 1950 coordinates Use the Parkes format, not the No. in the 1st column of the Tables

1983M1 D

MARKARIAN B.E., STEPANIAN J.A. 1984,Astrophysics 20, 278-289 The Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. III. The results for the region centered on α = 08h00m, δ = +59^{∘}00’

4^{∘} x 4^{∘} field Table 1 : (Nos 1-94) and Parkes designation peculiar OBJ. or G

SBSG

Table 2 : (Nos 1-12) and Parkes designation  blue stars  SBSS

Identif. charts, 1950 coordinates Use the Parkes format, not the No. in the 1st column of the Tables

1983M1 E

MARKARIAN B.E., STEPANIAN J.A., ERASTOVA L.K. 1985,Astrophysics 23, 623-633 and Plates The Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. IV. The field α = 12h22m, δ = +55^{∘}00’

4^{∘} x 4^{∘} field Table 1 : (Nos 1-106) and Parkes designation peculiar OBJ. or G

SBSG

Table 2 : (Nos 1-12) and Parkes designation  blue stars  SBSS

Identif. charts, 1950 coordinates Use the Parkes format, not the No. in the 1st column of the Tables

1983M1 F

NELSON R.L., KOJOIAN G., SEAL J., PEARSON D.H. 1988,A.J. 95, 1678-1683 Accurate optical positions for 107 Byurakan objects and 11 blue stars from the ”Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey”

Optical positions for 107 Markarian-type objects and 11 blue stars listed in ref. 1983M1 B are given with an accuracy of ≃ 1.5 arcsec in both coordinates

Table II refers to galaxies (Use the Parkes format, not the No.)  SBSG
Table III refers to stars (Use the Parkes format, not the No.)  SBSS

A few corrections of the original coordinates are given in Sect. IV

1983M1 G

SEAL J., CHAVEZ D., KOJOIAN G. 1990,A.J. 100, 1028-1033 Accurate optical positions for 110 Byurakan objects and 24 blue stars from the ”Second Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey [II]”

The objects are taken from ref. 1983M1 C Accuracy 1.5 arcsec.

Table II : 110 Markarian-type objects  SBSG
Table III : 24 blue stars  SBSS

For the two tables : ignore the numbering given in the 1st column Notice (Sect. IV p. 1033) that 2 objects keep their designation, though no more in agreement with their accurate δ position

1983M2

MONTMERLE T., KOCH-MIRAMOND L., FALGARONE E., GRINDLAY J.E. 1983,Ap.J. 269, 182-201 Einstein observations of the ρ Ophiuchi dark cloud: an X-ray christmas tree

ROX

1E observations: N =47 (Nos 1-47) ; and complementary list C1-C20

1983M3 A

MATHEWSON D.S., FORD V.L., DOPITA M.A., TUOHY I.R., LONG K.S., HELFAND D.J. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 51, 345-355 and Plates 22-57 Supernova remnants in the Magellanic Clouds

SNR

Table 1 : N = 25 confirmed SNR in LMC ; 1950 coordinates ; optical and X-ray data ;

cross-identif. with LHG (ref. 1981L2) and optical nebulae

Identif. charts : [OIII], [SII], Hα , or red photographs, HRI or IPC Einstein image Table 2 : N = 6 confirmed SNR in SMC ; 1950 coordinates Astrometry of reference stars

1983M3 B

MATHEWSON D.S., FORD V.L., DOPITA M.A., TUOHY I.R., MILLS B.Y., TURTLE A.J. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 55, 189-210 and Plates p. 192-209 Supernova remnants in the Magellanic Clouds

SNR

Table 1 : 6 SNR in SMC, 2 in LMC ; 1950 coordinates Identif. charts: photographs, 843 MHz radiomap, X-ray image Astrometric positions of reference stars

1983M3 C

MATHEWSON D.S., FORD V.L., TUOHY I.R., MILLS B.Y., TURTLE A.J., HELFAND D.J. 1985,Ap.J.Suppl. 58, 197-200 and Plates 4-17 Supernova remnants in the Magellanic Clouds. III.

SNR

Table 1 : N = 7 SNR candidates in LMC ; 1950 coordinates Identif. charts [OIII], [SII], Hα photographs; 843 MHz radio maps; X-ray image from Einstein satellite Astrometry of reference stars

1983M4

MATTHEWS H.E., SPOELSTRA T.A.T. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. 126, 433-437 Observations of the ON 1 and ON 2 HII regions at 610 MHz

Table 2 : (Nos 1-86) sources in ON 1 (OH 69.54-0.98) field  45W
Table 3 : (Nos 1-25) sources in ON 2 (OH 75.8+0.3) field  46W

1950 coordinates ; No maps.

1983NJ

NUGENT J.J., JENSEN K.A., NOUSEK J.A., GARMIRE G.P., MASON K.O., WALTER F.M., BOWYER C.S., STERN R.A., RIEGLER G.R. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 51, 1-28 HEAO A-2 soft X-ray source catalog

H

N = 114, 54 were previously undiscovered and 32 remain unidentified. The catalog contains a listing of all counterpart identif. and a cross-reference to all HEAO 1 A-2 low energy detector team publications on the catalog sources complete through the end of 1981.

1983P1 A

PREVOT L., MARTIN N., MAURICE E., REBEIROT E., ROUSSEAU J. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 53, 255-269 A catalogue of late-type supergiant stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud

PMMR

Table I : (Nos 1-222) ; Identif. charts ; 1975 coordinates ; a few cross-identif.

1983P1 B

MAURICE E., ANDERSEN J., ARDEBERG A., BARDIN C., IMBERT M., LINDGREN H., MARTIN N., MAYOR M., NORDSTROM B., PREVOT L., REBEIROT E., ROUSSEAU J. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 67, 423-445 Radial velocities of southern stars obtained with the photoelectric scanner CORAVEL. VI. 233 F to M type stars in and near the Small Magellanic Cloud. Comparison with 80 spectrographic radial velocities of O to K type stars

Table I : Six galactic foreground stars, not found in any existing catalog, numbered 1F to 6F Identif. charts

MAAB

Table II: radial velocities of PMMR stars  PMMR

1983P1 C

MAURICE E., BOUCHET P., MARTIN N. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 445-467 BVR photoelectric photometry of late-type stars and a compilation of other data in the Small Magellanic Cloud

PMMR

New BVR photoelectric data for 91 PMMR, of which 88 K-M type supergiants and 3 foreground stars. Also compilation of data for OB stars and nebulae in the SMC

1983P2 A

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 51, 171-182 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. I.

Objective prism survey (eventual goal: the entire region bounded by b > +30^{∘} and δ > +30^{∘}) Identif. charts

Table 1 : (Nos 1-71)  Blue and/or Emission-Line G  CASEG
Table 2 : (Nos 1-59)  Blue and/or Emission-Line Stellar Objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 1-28)  Known and probable Blue Stars  CBS

Table 1A also gives 4 probable H II regions in Galaxies, with Zwicky and Herzog (1963, 1966) designation noted ZWG For a revised description of category III (CBS in Table 3) refer to ref. 1983P2 B , p. 517

1983P2 B

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 55, 517-532 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. II.

Region 10h50m < α < 12h50m and +29.0^{∘} < δ < +33.0^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 72-196) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 1A: (N = 40 Probable HII regions in 9 parent galaxies)

ZWG

Table 2 : (Nos 60-179)  Blue and/or emission-line stellar objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 29-66)  Known and probable blue stars  CBS

Identif. charts

1983P2 C

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1986,Ap.J.Suppl. 60, 543-549 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. III.

Field : 08h05 < α < 10h10 and +33.0^{∘} < δ < +38.0^{∘} Table 1 : (Nos 197-326) Case Blue Galaxies

CASEG

Table 1A: (N = 7 Probable HII regions in 6 parent galaxies)

ZWG

Table 2 : (Nos 180-252)  Unresolved objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 67-124)  Case Blue Stars  CBS

Identif. charts

1983P2 D

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1987,Ap.J.Suppl. 63, 809-819 and Plates 46-54 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. IV. Galaxies in the Bootes void region.

Region 14h00m < α < 15h30m and +33.0^{∘} < δ < +56.0^{∘} (1950). Table 1 : (Nos 327-752) Blue and/or Em.line galaxies

CASEG

Table 1A:  50 Probable HII in 21 galaxies  ZWG

Identif. charts

1983P2 E

WAGNER R.M., SION E.M., LIEBERT J., STARRFIELD S.G. 1988,Ap.J. 328, 213-222 Hot subluminous stars and blue objects in the Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. I.

CBS

Moderate resolution spectrophotometry, spectral type and object class (white dwarfs, sdOB, Cataclysmic Variables, ... QSO) for most of the CBS (Nos 1-158)

1983P2 F

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 66, 297-307 and Plates 3-10 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. V.

Region 10h10m < α < 12h15m and +33.0^{∘} < δ < +38.0^{∘} (1950). Table 1 : (Nos 753-895) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 1A:  Probable HII regions in 11 galaxies  ZWG
Table 2 : (Nos 253-401)  Blue and/or emission-line stellar objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 125-160)  Known and suspected blue stars  CBS

1983P2 G

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 163-171 and Plates 4-12 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. VIII. A region centered in southern Bootes

Region 14h00m < α < 15h30m and +33.0^{∘} < δ < +45.0^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 896-907) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 2 : (Nos 402-602)  Blue and/or emission-line stellar objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 161-252)  Known and suspected blue stars  CBS

1983P2 H

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 173-179 and Plates 13-20 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. IX. A region centered in northern Bootes

Region 14h00m < α < 15h30m and +45.0^{∘} < δ < +56.0^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 908-925) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 2 : (Nos 603-765)  Blue and/or emission-line objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 253-324)  Known and suspected blue stars  CBS

1983P2 I

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 72, 291-301 and Plates 84-86 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. XI. A region near the North Galactic Pole including SA 57 Region 12h50m < α < 13h20m and +27^{∘} < δ < +33^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 926-1019) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 2 : (Nos 766-881)  Blue and/or emission-line objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 325-350)  Known and suspected blue stars  CBS

1983P2 J

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N., STEPHENSON C.B. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 76, 1043-1053 and Plates 43-52 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. XII. A region in southern Canes Venatici

Region 12h15m < α < 14h00m and +33^{∘} < δ < +38^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 1020-1213) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

CASEG

Table 2 : (Nos 882-1038)  Blue and/or emission-line objects  CSO
Table 3 : (Nos 351-382)  Known and suspected blue stars  CBS

1983P2 K

STEPHENSON C.B., PESCH P., MacCONNELL D.J. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 82, 471-487 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. XII. A region in central Bootes and Corona Borealis

Region 14h08m < α < 16h10m and +29^{∘}30′ < δ < +33^{∘} 30’ (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 1214-1351) Blue and/or emission-line galaxies

Cross-identif. with PGC (ref. 1989PF)

CASEG

Table 2 : N = 4  Probable HII regions of 2 PGC galaxies  PGC
Table 3 : (Nos 1039-1121)  Blue and/or emission-line objects  CSO

Table 4 : (Nos 383-418) Known and suspected blue stars a few cross-identif.

CBS

1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1983P3

PRICE S., WALKER R.G. 1983,AFGL-TR-83-0161 The Revised Air Force Geophysics Laboratory (AFGL) infrared sky survey catalog

(Nos 5-3197) from AFCRL and AFGL catalogues and suppl. (Nos 4001-4306) (Nos 5001-5625) detections from SPICE and FIRSSE flights

RAFGL

(Nos 2S-3198S) (Nos 4001S-5800S) (Nos 6001S-7247S) new entries in the revised edition

RAFGL...S

1983R1

REAVES G. 1983,Ap.J.Suppl. 53, 375-395 A catalog of dwarf galaxies in Virgo

GR

Table 2 : (zones +6^{∘} to +15^{∘}) N = 846 dwarf galaxies in 200 sq.^{∘} of the Virgo region: 634 are dwarf elliptical, 137 are IC 3475 types, 73 dwarf spirals and irregulars, 2 jets 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts Cross-identif. with Karachentseva (ref. 1968K2), GR (Reaves, ref. 1956R1 A to D), DDO (Van den Bergh, ref. 1956M1 A to D), UGC (Nilson, ref. 1973N1), MGC (Vorontsov-Vel’jaminov + Arhipova, ref. 1962V1 B, C and D), NGC and IC.

1983R2 A

REBEIROT E., MARTIN N., MIANES P., PREVOT L., ROBIN A., ROUSSEAU J., PEYRIN Y. 1983,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 51, 277-320 Detection and BVR photometry of late-type stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud.

Table II : (Nos 1-839)  M supergiants in LMC  RM1-
Table III: (Nos 1-145)  objects not selected as M type stars  RM2-

Cross-identif. with previous lists of M stars in LMC ; Identif. charts only for newly found red stars ; Accurate coordinates (to ≃ 5”)

1983R2 B

PREVOT L., ANDERSEN J., ARDEBERG A., BENZ W., IMBERT M., LINDGREN H., MAR-TIN N., MAURICE E., MAYOR M., NORDSTROM B., REBEIROT E., ROUSSEAU J. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 62, 23-37 Radial velocities of southern stars obtained with the photo- electric scanner CORAVEL. V. 404 F to M supergiant stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

{RM1- \atop RM2-}

Red supergiant stars from ref. 1983R2 A (Rebeirot et al.) ; No Identif. charts

1983W1 A

WASILEWSKI A.J. 1983,Ap.J. 272, 68-83 The space density and spectroscopic properties of a new sample of emission-line galaxies

WAS

Table 1 : (Nos 1-96)

1983W1 B

BOTHUN G.D., HALPERN J.P., LONSDALE C.J., IMPEY C., SCHMITZ M. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 271-328 The Wasilewski sample of emission-line galaxies: follow-up CCD imaging and spectroscopic and IRAS observations

WAS

132 Wasilewski emission-line galaxies and 36 other galaxies (NGC; Markarian, ref. 1967M1; Haro, ref. 1956H4) are studied

1984AL

ALLEN D.A. 1984,Proc. Astr. Soc. Austral. 5, 369-421 A catalogue of Symbiotic Stars

-

Catalogue of more than 100 symbiotic stars complete to 1984 January 1 ; Finding charts ; Optical spectra. Summary of observational material at X-ray, ultraviolet, infrared and radio wavelengths.

1984BC

BARBON R., CAPPELLARO E., CIATTI F., TURATTO M., KOWAL C.T. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 58, 735-750 A revised supernova catalogue

SN

568 supernovae discovered since 1885 ut to 1983, and their parent galaxies. Updates and revises previous lists.

1984B1

BAHCALL N.A., SONEIRA R.M. 1984,Ap.J. 277, 27-37 A supercluster catalog

BSCG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-16) ; also designated with HHMM-DDMM coordinates of the center.

1984B2

BYSTEDT J.E.V., BRINKS E., DE BRUYN A.G., ISRAEL F.P., SCHWERING P.B.W., SHANE W.W., WALTERBOS R.A.M. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 56, 245-280 A high resolution radio continuum survey of Messier 31. I. Observations at 610 MHz, data reduction and the 36W catalogue of radio sources.

36W

ν = 610 MHz (λ = 49.2cm), resolution 54” × 82” (Nos 1-392) ; 1950 coordinates ; maps for a few sources

1984B3

BLANCO V.M., McCARTHY M.F., BLANCO B.M. 1984,A.J. 89, 636-746 and Plates 27-29 Giant M stars in Baade’s window

BMB

Table I : (Nos 1-306) ; late M giants found in Baade’s Window , 1950 coordinates Tables II to VI : cross-identif. Identif. charts

1984B4

BROSCH N., KRUMM N. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 132, 80-88 5 GHz observations of isolated and group galaxies

51W

(Nos 1-21) ; optical identif. with galaxies Table 4a: point sources, isolated galaxies Table 4b: point sources, group galaxies No maps.

1984CR A

CATALANO F.A., RENSON P. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 55, 371-392 Catalogue des periodes observees pour les etoiles Ap

-

1984CR B

CATALANO F.A., RENSON P. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 72, 1-17 Premier supplement au catalogue des periodes observees pour les etoiles Ap

-

1984CR C

CATALANO F.A., RENSON P., LEONE F. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 87, 59-68 Second supplement to the catalogue of observed periods of Ap stars

-

1984CR D

CATALANO F.A., RENSON P., LEONE F. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 98, 269-273 Third supplement to the catalogue of observed periods of Ap stars

-

1984C1

CRAMPTON D., COWLEY A.P., HUTCHINGS J.B., SCHADE D.J., VAN SPEYBROECK L.P. 1984,Ap.J. 284, 663-669 Optical counterparts for X-ray sources in M31

VS

Table 1 : (Nos 1-116) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few finding charts Einstein Observatory X-ray position for 117 sources around M31, examined with 1000Å.mm^{(} −1) slitless spectral plates obtained at the prime focus of the CFHT. Later discussed by Trinchieri and Fabbiano, ref. 1991T1 (see their Tables 2A and 2B)

1984C2

CHEN J.-S. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 134, 306-318 A study of optically selected QSOs in a field centered at 01h39m -55^{∘}

-

Table 2 : 123 QSO candidates and 12 em.line extra-galactic objects ; Identif. Charts ; UK Schmidt prism plates ; field ≃ 5^{∘} diam.

1984F1

FEITZINGER J.V., STUWE J.A. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 58, 365-386 Catalog of Dark Nebulae and Globules for Galactic Longitudes 240 to 360^{∘}

DCLD

Dark Clouds : (Nos 1-489)  FEST1-
Globules : (Nos 1-331) FEST2-

Also proposed: DCLD with LLL.ℓℓ±BB.bb format for objects of both tables In Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 63, p. 203, (Feitzinger J.V.+), an erratum is given for the first part of the catalogue (FEST1-): all values of the area (catalogue entry No. 5) must be multiplied by a factor π

1984F2

FOMALONT E.B., GOSS W.M., LYNE A.G., MANCHESTER R.N. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 210, 113-130 Astrometry of 59 pulsars: a comparison of interferometric and timing positions

PSR

Table 2 : VLA positions for 59 PSR (epoch 1981.0) and their assumed proper motions. Comparison with VLA epoch 1983.3 and PSR timing positions

1984GR

GREEN D.A. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 209, 449-478 Statistical Studies of Supernova Remnants

SNR

Table A1 : 145 Galactic SNR ; Rediscussion of distance estimates

1984GS A

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M. 1984,NASA RP-1118, 1st edition (May 1984) Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

Updates and supersedes 1982GS Scientific journals searched for the complete period 1965-1982 Over 85000 individual observations of ≃ 10000 different infrared sources.

1984GS B

SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M., GEZARI D.Y. 1987,NASA RP-1182 Infrared Source Cross-Index, First edition

-

A compilation, not a critical analysis of published positions

1984G1

GREEN D.A. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 211, 433-441 Observations of the western part of the Cygnus Loop at 408 MHz : the 5C8 survey

5C8.

Resol. 80” (α ) x 160” (δ ) ; Table A1

1984G2

GIOIA I.M., MACCACARO T., SCHILD R.E., STOCKE J.T., LIEBERT J.W., DANZIGER I.J., KUNTH D., LUB J. 1984,Ap.J. 283, 495-511, and Plates 10-13 The medium sensitivity survey: a new sample of X-ray sources with optical identifications and the revised extragalactic Log N-Log S

1E

Table 2 : N = 50 ; 49 objects are new ; 1950 coordinates Identification uncertain for 8 objects (Table 3, appended A,B,C... for each 1E source) Photometry of AGN from ref.1982M1 and the present paper (called MSS 1 and MSS 2 surveys)

1984G3

GOSS W.M., MANTOVANI F., SALTER C.J., TOMASI P., VELUSAMY T. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 138, 469-476 High resolution observations of extended radio sources near ℓ = 94^{∘}

61W

Table 1: (Nos 1-41) ; 1950 coordinates ; point sources in the field of NRAO 655 and 3C 434.1 at 608.5 MHz and 4.75 GHz. Fig. 3a: the 100-m map of 3C 434.1 and NRAO 655 at 4.75 GHz.

1984H1

HE X.-T., CANNON R.D., PEACOCK J.A., SMITH M.G., OKE J.B. 1984,M.N.R.A.S. 211, 443-459 A search for quasars in the Virgo cluster region

Table 2 : (2nd col.) Parkes format (1st col.) (Nos 1-53)

Q

Table 3 : (Nos 1-29)  and Parkes format  Ultraviolet candidates

U11 = RMB 28 ; U13 = RMB 83

U

53 em.line quasar candidates 29 ultraviolet-excess objects (possible low-redshift quasars) in 5^{∘} x 5^{∘} centered on 12h27m +13^{∘}30’ Identif. charts

1984H2

HERTZ P., GRINDLAY J.E. 1984,Ap.J. 278, 137-149 The Einstein galactic plane survey: statistical analysis of the com- plete X-ray sample

1E

A flux-limited survey of the galactic plane (|b| < 15 using the Imaging Proportional Counter. Table 3 : 71 unresolved serendipitous sources exceeding a 5 SIG threshold. Format HHMM.m±DDMM No Identif. charts (CCD frames not reproduced)

1984KU

KOWALSKI M.P., ULMER M.P., CRUDDACE R.G., WOOD K.S. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 56, 403-506 An X-ray survey of clusters of Galaxies. IV. A survey of southern clusters and a compilation of upper limits for both Abell and southern clusters

-

HEAO 1 A-1 X-ray survey of clusters of G Compilation of X-ray data (or upper limits) as well as many recent optical data such as redshifts, morphological classifications and clusters coordinates

1984K1 A

KELLY B.D., KILKENNY D. 1984,South African Astr. Obs. Circ. 8, 85-99 Early-type stars detected on UK Schmidt objective-prism plates. I. UKST Area 345

KK

Area 345 ; (α = 22h30m, δ = -40^{∘}): (Nos 1-141) ; 1980 coordinates ; charts

1984K1 B

KILKENNY D., KELLY B.D. 1986,South African Astr. Obs. Circ. 10, 17-25 Early-type stars detected on UK Schmidt objective-prism plates. II. UKST Area 788/9

KK

Area 789 ; (α = 12h30m, δ = -5^{∘}): (Nos 1-111) ; 1980 coordinates ; charts

1984K1 C

KELLY B.D., KILKENNY D. 1986,South African Astr. Obs. Circ. 10, 27-44 Early-type stars detected on UK Schmidt objective-prism plates. III. UKST Area 881

KK

Area 881 (α = 19h20m, δ = 0^{∘}): (Nos 1-317) ; 1980 coordinates ; charts

1984K1 D

KILKENNY D. 1987,M.N.R.A.S. 229, 345-354 Photometry of faint blue stars - VIII. Photometry in UKST Areas 345 and 788/9

KK

Stromgren uvby photoelectric photometry for 130 stars brighter than ≃ 16 mag

1984L1

LEVINE A.M., LANG F.L., LEWIN W.H.G., PRIMINI F.A., DOBSON C.A., DOTY J.P., HOFFMAN J.A., HOWE S.K., SCHEEPMAKER A., WHEATON W.A., MATTESON J.L., BAITY W.A., GRUBER D.E., KNIGHT F.K., NOLAN P.L., PELLING R.M., ROTHSCHILD R.E., PETERSON L.E. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 54, 581-617 The HEAO 1 A-4 Catalog of high-energy X-ray sources

H

All sky. 4 channels in the 13-180keV range Observations from 1977 August to 1979 January. Data obtained with the UCSD/MIT Hard Xray and Low-Energy ]-ray Instrument on the HEAO 1 satellite. The survey is complete down to an intensity level 1/75 of the Crab Nebulae in the 13-80 keV energy band 44 sources detected in the 40-80 keV energy band 7 sources are extragalactic

1984ME

MERMILLIOD J.-C. 1984,Bull. Inf. CDS 27, 141-143 Preliminary Catalogue of Photometric UBV. Photometry for stars in open clusters.

-

34000 stars in 127 open clusters ; cross-identif. for the stars

1984MS

McCOOK G.P., SION E.M. 1984,Villanova Univ. Obs. Contr., No. 3 A Catalogue of spectroscopically identified white dwarfs, 2nd edition, february 1984

WD

N ≃ 1500 (only white dwarfs with published spectroscopic identification) Appendix A: subdwarfs previously classified as white dwarfs or cataclysmic variables (with WD name) Appendix B: cross-reference by names (only a few of these names are explained p. VI.) Supersedes the 1st edition (ref. 1977MS, N = 528)

1984M1

MILLS B.Y., TURTLE A.J., LITTLE A.G., DURDIN J.M. 1984,Austral. J. Phys. 37, 321-357 A new look at radio supernova remnants

SNR

Table 1 : N = 27 SNR in LMC Table 2 : N = 11 SNR in SMC Table 3 : N = 2 possible SNR in the Magellanic Clouds

1984N1

NECKEL T., STAUDE H.J. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 131, 200-209 A survey of bipolar and cometary nebulae. Photographic and photometric observations

NS

Table 1 : (Nos 1-20) ; 1950 Equatorial and galactic coordinates ; associated object ; plates (Fig. 1)

1984RI A

RITTER H. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 57, 385-418 Catalogue of cataclysmic binaries, low-mass X-ray binaries and related objects

-

3rd edition, literature before 31 dec. 1983

1984RI B

RITTER H. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 70, 335-367 Catalogue of cataclysmic binaries, low-mass X-ray binaries and related objects (Fourth edition)

-

116 cataclysmics binaries, 30 low-mass X-ray binaries, 23 related objects: literature after 1983 Continued by 1984RI C

1984RI C

RITTER H. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 85, 1179-1256 Catalogue of cataclysmic binaries, low-mass X-ray binaries and related objects (Fifth edition)

-

Updates 1984RI A and B, by adding the references appeared after 1986. Uses 2000 coordinates throughout. Content given p. 1180. Lists of all objects by lexigraphical order or by right ascension. 168 cataclysmics binaries, 36 low-mass X-ray binaries, 28 related objects. References to finding charts of 222 of the 232 objects Cross-identif.

1984R1

ROBERTSON T.H. 1984,A.J. 89, 1229-1237 An objective prism survey for late M dwarf stars

RBTS

142 stars classified M2 and later Table III (several cross-identif.) and Table IV, stars numbered between 6 and 538, excepted from the unpublished Ph. D Thesis by Robertson (1978, Case-Western Reserve Univ.)

1984ST A

STEPHENSON C.B. 1984,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. 3, 1-49 A general Catalogue of Galactic S Stars, Second Edition

CSS

A compilation on galactic S stars, updating ref. 1976ST (N = 741, acronym Stephenson) No maps. Table 1 : (Nos 1-1347, no acronym proposed) ; General Catalogue of S stars Table 2 : (p. 48-49, objects not numbered) ; 1900 coordinates ; gives stars that have been published as S stars but probably or definitely are not

1984ST B

STEPHENSON C.B. 1990,A.J. 100, 569-571 New and relatively faint S stars found in the northern Milky Way

CSS2

Complement to the catalog ref. 1984ST A (Nos 1-75) ; 1900 coordinates. No maps.

1984S1

SPOELSTRA T.A.Th., HERMSEM W. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. 135, 135-140 Radio observations at 21 cm wavelength in the direction of Geminga

63W

Table 2 : (Nos 1-20)

1984S2

SCHAEFER B.E., BRADT H.V., BARAT C., HURLEY K., NIEL M., VEDRENNE G., CLINE T.L., DESAI U., TEEGARDEN B.J., EVANS W.D., FENIMORE E.E., KLEBESADEL R.W., LAROS J.G., ESTULIN I.V., KUZNETSOV A.V. 1984,Ap.J.Lett. 286, L1-L4 and Plate L1 Two probable optical flashes from γ -ray bursters

Schaefer

Two optical transients found in the error box of GRB (γ -Ray Bursts). Discussion on the three known optical transients (1901, 1928, 1944). We propose to use the format YYYY (as quoted by Greiner in 1992 Astr. Astrophys. 264, 121) The object SCHAEFER 1928, was the first discovered by Schaefer (1981Natur.294.722S) and had then been called Schaefer’s object.

1984T1 A

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1984,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 19, 595-638 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. I.

KUG

Table I-1 : Areas observed (N = 10) Table I-2a to I-2j: List of KUG objects in each area, with a few cross-identif. ; Format HHMM+DDd ; 1950 truncated coordinates. 573 objects down to mpg ≃ 17, in some 300 sq.^{∘} Identif. charts

1984T1 B

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1985,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 20, 237-281 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. II.

KUG

10 fields (Table II-1) ; 556 objects in some 300 sq.^{∘} Errata to ref. 1984T1 A Identif. charts

1984T1 C

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1985,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 20, 335-392 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. III.

KUG

10 fields ; 712 objects down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables III) A few duplications between objects of the two previous list (Table I in 1984T1 A and II in 1984T1 B) are noted (p. 337) Identif. charts

1984T1 D

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1986,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 85-106 Low-resolution spectra of Kiso ultraviolet-excess galaxies

KUG

57 ultraviolet-excess galaxies Tracing of the spectra; the position of the slit is indicated on photographs

1984T1 E

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1986,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 127-180 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. IV.

KUG

10 fields ; 752 objects down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables IV) Identif. charts

1984T1 F

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1986,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 181-217 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. V.

KUG

628 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables V) Identif. charts

1984T1 G

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1987,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 251-284 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. VI.

KUG

621 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables VI) Identif. charts

1984T1 H

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1987,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 363-386 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. VII.

KUG

425 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables VII) Identif. charts

1984T1 I

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1988,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 22, 41-58 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. VIII.

KUG

313 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables VIII) 16 duplicate objects of the previously published catalogues Identif. charts

1984T1 J

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1989,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 1, 11-42 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. IX.

KUG

583 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables IX) 55 duplicate objects of the previously published catalogues Identif. charts Errata to previously published catalogues Vol. I to VIII

1984T1 K

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1989,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 1, 97-125 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. X.

KUG

490 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables XI) 22 duplicate objects of the previously published catalogues Identif. charts

1984T1 L

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1990,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 1, 181-206 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XI.

KUG

583 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables IX) Identif. charts 41 duplicate objects of the previously published catalogues

1984T1 M

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1991,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 7-36 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XII.

KUG

564 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables XII) Identif. charts

1984T1 N

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1991,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 37-61 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XIII.

KUG

424 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables XIII) Identif. charts Errata of the previously published catalogues I to XI

1984T1 O

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1991,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 239-265 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XIV.

KUG

470 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables XIV) Identif. charts

1984T1 P

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1992,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 399-429 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XV.

KUG

544 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 17.5 (Tables XV) Identif. charts

1984T1 Q

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1992,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 573-600 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XVI.

KUG

497 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables XVI) Identif. charts Errata of the previously published catalogues I to XIII

1984T1 R

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1993,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 3, 21-43 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XVII.

KUG

379 objects in 10 fields ; down to mpg ≃ 18 (Tables XVII) Identif. charts Errata of the previously published catalogues I to XVI

1984T1 S

TAKASE B., MIYAUCHI-ISOBE N. 1993,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 3, 169-257 Kiso survey for ultraviolet-excess galaxies. XVIII.

KUG

Merged version of the 17 catalogue series I to XVII. All KUGs are arranged in order of right ascension. Sky area of some 5100 sq.degrees. After deleting the objects which appear repeatedly in some neighboring survey areas, N=8162 instead of 8968. Errata of the previously published catalogues I to XVI

1984VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1984,ESO Scientific Report No. 1 A catalogue of Quasars and Active Nuclei

-

2251 quasars with published redshift and 554 Seyfert and related galaxies known prior to September 30th, 1983. 1950 positions, redshift, photometry, 6 and 11 cm flux densities, 859 references. We list below acronyms not included in the Dictionary with the reference number as given by Véron-Cetty & Véron: BG CFH ref. 271 BG KPNO ref. 271 CD ref. 187 CF ref. 55 Arp+, 1982, Control Field CS ref. 187 Clowes+, 1983, Table 2 (N = 162) DHM ref. 657 Shanks+, 1983, (N = 1) E ref. 574 Reichert+, 1982:

Serendipitous Einstein X-ray sources (should be 1E)

EX ref. 180 Chanan+, 1981:

Serendipitous Einstein X-ray sources (N = 19) (should be 1E)

KC ref. 397 Kron and Chiu, 1981, refers to a stellar study: Chiu, 1980, Ap.J.Suppl. 44, 31-71: Table 6 (Nos 1-567 for SA 51), Table 7 (Nos 1-188 for SA57), Table 8 (Nos 1-216 for SA 68). An identifier of format NNANN (or ANN) is added in the 1st col.

NOTNI ref. 497 Notni, 1980, Table 1 : (Nos 1-144), Table 2 : (Nos 301-385)

RO ref. 575 Ritcher+, 1980 TB ref. 12 Afanasjev+, 1979, N = 7. Tautenburg Objective prism Survey TEX ref. 825 Wills+, 1979, Table 1 : (125 QSO candidates)

TEX stands for Univ. of Texas Rad. Astr. Obs.

1984V1

VENNIK J. 1984,Tartu Astr. Obs. Teated No. 73, 1-63 and fig. A list of nearby groups of galaxies

GRV

Limiting redshift 3200 km.s^{−1}, northern hemisphere List of the groups (Nos 1-116) and notes p. 47-55 The groups are cross-identif. with HYP, TG, GH, HG

1984WD

WORLEY C.E., DOUGLASS G.G. 1984,US Naval Obs. Washington, Washington Catalog of Visual Double Stars Catalog of Visual Double Stars, 1984.0

WDS

Updating of IDS. Only on magnetic tape (N = 73610 stars). Supersedes Worley, 1976, Index Catalogue of Visual Double Stars, 1976.5, 70295 records. Complete up to 1982.

1984WM

WOOD K.S., MEEKINS J.F., YENTIS D.J., SMATHERS H.W., McNUTT D.P., BLEACH R.D., BYRAM E.T., CHUBB T.A., FRIEDMAN H. 1984,Ap.J.Suppl. 56, 507-649 The HEAO A-1 X-ray Source Catalog

H

Sources detected with the NRL Large Area Sky Survey Experiment on the HEAO 1 satellite. First 6 months of data from HEAO 1. N = 842 sources ; limiting flux 250 nJy at 5 keV or ≃ 0.25 UFU. 90% complete at flux level 1.5 microJy at 5 keV Cross-referenced with published literature

1984W1

WHITE G.L. 1984,Proc. Astr. Soc. Austral. 5, 290-340 A confusion limited radio survey from the Molonglo Cross

MDS2-

Second Molonglo deep survey ; ν = 408MHz, S >??mJy Maps and Catalogue (Table 2) for a strip near δ = −20^{∘}

1984W2

WINDHORST R.A., VAN HEERDE G.M., KATGERT P. 1984,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 58, 1-37 A deep Westerbork survey of areas with multicolor Mayall 4m plates. I. The 1412 MHz catalogue, sources counts and angular size statistics

Table VII a and b : N = 471 (Nos 001 to 058)  SA 57  52W
(Nos 001 to 092)  Hercules  53W
(Nos 001 to 090)  SA 68  54W
(Nos 001 to 231)  Lynx  55W

4 high latitude areas (fields defined in Table Ia) C in the format means central ; A and B, other components (often western and easternmost)

1985B1 A

BALDWIN J.E., BOYSEN R.C., HALES S.E.G., JENNINGS J.E., WAGGETT P.C., WARNER P.J., WILSON D.M.A. 1985,M.N.R.A.S. 217, 717-730 and Microfiches The 6C survey of radio sources - I. Declination zone δ > +80^{∘}

6C

The 6th Cambridge Survey of radio sources covers most of the sky north of δ = 30’ with an angular resolution of 4.2 x 4.2 cosec δ arcmin^{2} and a limiting flux density of 120 mJy at 151 MHz. This paper describes the telescope and maps of a circular area of radius 10^{∘} centered on the North Celestial Pole and a list of 1761 sources north of δ =+80^{∘} Use a format HHMM±DDd or more digits where necessary (specified by authors)

1985B1 B

HALES S.E.G., BALDWIN J.E., WARNER P.J. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 234, 919-936 The 6C survey of radio sources. II. The zone 30^{∘} < δ < 51^{∘}, 08h30m < α < 17h30m

6C

Maps and list of 8278 sources in the 2030 sq.^{∘} covered

1985B1 C

HALES S.E.G., MASSON C.R., WARNER P.J., BALDWIN J.E. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 246, 256-262 The 6C survey of radio sources. III. The zone 48^{∘} < δ < 68^{∘}, 05h25m < α < 18h17m

6C

Maps and list of 8749 sources in the 1950 sq.^{∘} covered

1985B1 D

HALES S.E.G., MAYER C.J., WARNER P.J., BALDWIN J.E. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 251, 46-53 The 6C survey of radio sources. IV. The zone 67^{∘} < δ < 82^{∘}, 00h < α < 24h

6C

Maps and list of 5421 sources in the 1440 sq.^{∘} covered The present zone spans the gap between the North Polar zone of Paper I and the δ +58^{∘} zone of Paper III

1985B1 E

HALES S.E.G., MASSON C.R., WARNER P.J., BALDWIN J.E., GREEN D.A. 1993,M.N.R.A.S. 262, 1057-1061 The 6C survey of radio sources. V. The zones 6C-Va (48^{∘} < δ < 68^{∘}, 01h34m < α < 06h14m) and 6C-Vb (48^{∘} < δ < 68^{∘}, 17h16 < α < 20h24m)

6C

Maps and list of 3458 sources. 396 sources have alternative entries in Paper III (ref. 1985B1 C), a few others in Paper IV (ref. 1985B1 D) for 67^{∘} < δ < 68^{∘}. The present data are less uniform and in general the errors more severe than for Paper III. The survey zones I to Vb are summarised in Table 2 and shown in Fig.2.

1985B1 F

HALES S.E.G., BALDWIN J.E., WARNER P.J. 1993,M.N.R.A.S. 263, 25-30 The 6C survey of radio sources. VI. The continuous zone (30^{∘} < δ < 51^{∘}, 0h < α < 09h05m) and (22h35m < α < 24h)

6C

Maps and list of 6752 sources. 199 sources have alternative entries in Paper II (ref. 1985B1 B) and a few others in Papers III and V (ref. 1985B1 C and E) for 48^{∘} < δ < 51^{∘}, 2h < α < 09h05m. The present data are less uniform and in general the errors more severe than for Paper II. The survey zones I to VI are summarised in Table 4 and shown in Fig.2.

1985B2

BINGGELI B., SANDAGE A., TAMMANN G.A. 1985,A.J. 90, 1681-1758 Studies of the Virgo cluster. II. A catalog of 2096 galaxies in the Virgo cluster area.

VCC

(Nos 1-2096) ; 1950 coordinates ; no plates Field ≃ 140 sq.^{∘} centered at α 12h25m, δ +13^{∘}complete down to B ≃ 18

1985C1

CASWELL J.L., LANDECKER T.L., FELDMAN P.A. 1985,A.J. 90, 408-492 Radio sources near the millisecond pulsar PSR 1937+214.

2P

Table I : 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif. (Nos 1-26): numbering and 2P designation is a retroctive designation, by Higgs, 1986JRASC.80.51H (ref. 1986H4)

1985C2

CASWELL J.L. 1985,A.J. 90, 1076-1081 Is G192.8-1.1 a discrete supernova remnant, or part of the Origem Loop?

Table I : 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif. (Nos 1-31): numbering and 3P designation is a retroctive designation, by Higgs, 1986JRASC.80.51H (ref. 1986H4)

3P

Table II : 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif. (Nos 1-7): numbering and 4P designation is a retroctive designation, by Higgs, 1986JRASC.80.51H (ref. 1986H4)

4P

1985C3

CASWELL J.L. 1985,A.J. 90, 1224-1230 The supernova remnant G54.5-0.3 and its environs

5P

Table I : 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz (Nos 1-32): numbering and 5P designation is a retroctive designation, by Higgs, 1986JRASC.80.51H (ref. 1986H4), excluding Texas position (serial No. 9) and center of SNR (serial No. 26) of the numbering.

1985E1 A

EPCHTEIN N., MATSUURA O.T., LEPINE J.R.D., BRAZ M.A., MARQUES DOS SANTOS P., BOSCOLO P., LE BERTRE T., ROUSSEL A., TURON P. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 61, 203-210 Valinhos-ESO 2.2 .m survey of the southern galactic plane. Positions and JHKLM photometry of 338 sources IRSV

1985E1 B

EPCHTEIN N., LE BERTRE T., LEPINE J.R.D., MARQUES DOS SANTOS P., MATSUURA O.T., PICAZZIO E. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 71, 39-55 Valinhos 2.2 μm survey of the southern galactic plane. II. Near-IR photometry, IRAS identifications and nature of the sources.

IRSV

Erratum: Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 71, 411.

1985F1

FICARRA A., GRUEFF G., TOMASSETTI G. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 59, 255-347 A new Bologna sky survey at 408 MHz

B3

1st section of a new sky survey with the ”Northern Cross” Radiotelescope in its present version. A catalogue of 13354 radio sources, complete to 0.1 Jy in an area of 0.78 steradian included between +37^{∘}15’ and +47^{∘}37’ Declination HPBW: 2’.6 EW x 4’.8 secθ NS ; (θ zenith angle = 90^{∘}+δ - 44.5^{∘}) Accurate positions for 1103 sources and optical identif. for 354 sources in Vigotti M.+, 1989 AJ 98, 419-499

1985G1

GLASS I.S, REID N. 1985,M.N.R.A.S. 214, 405-418 A survey for red variables in the LMC. I.

GRRV

Table 2 : (Nos 1-49) ; 1950 coordinates UK Schmidt-based V-and I-band photographic survey for large -amplitude red variable stars in a field of the LMC ; Infrared JHK photometry.

1985HM

HAUCK B., MERMILLIOD M. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 60, 61-62 u v b y β photoelectric photometric catalogue (magnetic tape)

-

Homogeneous values for 40484 stars Updates Hauck and Mermilliod, 1980, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 40, 1

1985H1

HODGE P. 1985,P.A.S.P. 97, 530-536 The stellar associations of the Small Magellanic Cloud

SMC ASS

(Nos 1-70) ; 1975 coordinates ; Identif. charts ; associated clusters or nebulae

1985IR A

- 1985,IRAS Data Infrared astronomical satellite (IRAS): Catalog and Atlases Explanatory Supplement

IRAS

Ed. C.A. Beichman, G. Neugebauer, H.J. Habing, P.E. Clegg, T.J. Chester ; prepared under the supervision of the Joint IRAS Science Working Group (JISWG) Obsoleted by ref. 1988BN

1985IR B

- 1985,IRAS Data Point Source Catalogue

IRAS

PSC catalog ; Magnetic tapes and Microfiches A hard copy version will be available in the summer of 1985 (U.S. Government Printing Office) Obsoleted by 1988IR

1985IR C

KLEINMANN S.G., CUTRI R.M., YOUNG E.T., LOW F.J., GILLETT F.C. 1986,Tucson, Univ. of Arizona - 10 Microfiches IRAS Serendipitous Survey Catalog

IRAS

SSC catalog ; Accompanied by an Explanatory Supplement (on paper)

1985IR D

HELOU G., WALKER D.W. 1985,Pasadena: Joint IRAS science working group IRAS Small Scale Structure Catalog, JPLD-2988

IRAS

SSSC (or SSS) catalog Preliminary ; Associated with a tape ; Obsoleted by 1988HW

1985IR E

LONSDALE C.J., HELOU G., GOOD J.C., RICE W. 1985,Pasadena: Joint IRAS science working group, JPLD-1932 Cataloged galaxies and quasars observed in the IRAS survey.

IRAS

Preliminary ; Obsoleted by 1989LH

1985IR F

OLNON F.M., RAIMOND E.,IRAS Science Team. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 65, 607-1065 IRAS (∗) catalogues and atlases. Atlas of Low-Resolution Spectra

IRAS

This catalogue is quoted as the IRAS LRS or the LRS catalogue Plots of all 5425 spectra in the IRAS catalogue of low-resolution spectra. The catalogue contains the average spectra of most IRAS point sources with 12 μm flux densities above 10 Jy. See comment in ref. 1985IR G

1985IR G

DE MUIZON M., COX P., LEQUEUX J. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. 203, 207-209 Precautions to take when using the IRAS-LRS catalogue: spurious 12.8 μm (Ne II) line and other features

IRAS

Comment on ref. 1985IR F

1985IR H

DEUL E.R., WALKER H.J. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 81, 207-214 Responsivity variations in the IRAS survey

IRAS

A correction procedure for the 25 μm detectors

1985IR I

CHEESEMAN P., STUTZ J., SELF M., TAYLOR W., GOEBEL J., VOLK K., WALKER H. 1989,NASA RP-1217 Automatic classification of spectra from the Infrared Astronomical Satellite (IRAS)

IRAS

Applied to the Low Resolution Spectra (LRS) catalog, ref. 1985IR F

1985J1

JONCAS G., DEWDNEY P.E., HIGGS L.A., ROY J.R. 1985,Ap.J. 298, 596-613 Kinematics of the H II region Sharpless 142. II. Radio continuum and line (21 centimeter) observations

7P

Table 2: (Nos 1-50) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1420MHz ; a few cross-identif.

1985KS A

KHOLOPOV P.N., SAMUS N.N., FROLOV M.S., GORANSKIJ V.P., GORYNYA N.A., KIREEVA N.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., SHUGAROV S.Yu. 1985,Moscow ”NAUKA” publishing house General Catalogue of variable Stars, 4th edition. Editor-in-Chief P.N. Kholopov. Vol. I: Constellations Andromeda-Crux

V

Data on 28457 variable stars finally designated by 1982 (including those named in the 62nd-66th Name-lists) ; 1950 coordinates. Moreover, the 67th name-list of Variable stars (I.B.V.S. 2681, 8 march 1985) contains data for 647 additionnal new variables: thus the total number of named stars is 29104 Numbering: the first 334 stars discovered to be variable in a constellation are designated by capital letters and their combinations (R,S...Z,RR...RZ,SS...ZZ,AA...AZ,...QZ ; notice that the J letter is never used) supplemented with the 3 letters abbreviated constellation designation (ex. R And, IV Cep). The following stars are designated V335, V336 and so on, also with constellation abbreviated.

1985KS B

KHOLOPOV P.N., SAMUS N.N., FROLOV M.S., GORANSKIJ V.P., GORYNYA N.A., KAZAROVETS E.V., KIREEVA N.N., KUKARKINA N.P., KUROCHKIN N.E., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PEROVA N.B., RASTORGUEV A.S., SHUGAROV S.Yu. 1985,Moscow ”NAUKA” publishing house General Catalogue of variable Stars, 4th edition. Editor-in-Chief P.N. Kholopov. Vol. II: Constellations Cygnus-Orion

V

Data on 10234 variable stars

1985KS C

KHOLOPOV P.N., SAMUS N.N., FROLOV M.S., GORANSKIJ V.P., GORYNYA N.A., KAR-ITSKAYA E.A., KAZAROVETS E.V., KIREEVA N.N., KUKARKINA N.P., MEDVEDEVA G.I., PASTUKHOVA E.N., PEROVA N.B., SHUGAROV S.Yu. 1987,Moscow ”NAUKA” publishing house General Catalogue of variable Stars, 4th edition. Editor-in-Chief P.N. Kholopov. Vol. III: Constellations Pavo-Vulpecula

V

Data on 10307 variable stars

1985KS D

KHOLOPOV P.N., SAMUS N.N., DURLEVICH O.V., KAZAROVETS E.V., KIREEVA N.N., TSVETKOVA T.M. 1990,Moscow ”NAUKA” publishing house, pp. 360 General Catalogue of variable Stars, 4th edition. Editor-in-Chief P.N. Kholopov. Vol. IV : Reference Tables

V

I. : List of Variable Stars according to RA, p. 9-144 II. : List of Variable Stars according to their variability types, p. 145-240. III. : Tables of cross-identif. of V stars and NSV

with the major star catalogues, p. 241-357.

Most cross-identif. tables are available on the magnetic tape.

1985K1

KATGERT-MERKELIJN J.K., ROBERTSON J.G., WINDHORST R.A., KATGERT P. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 61, 517-535 A Westerbork survey of Einstein X-ray observatory deep survey areas. I. The 0.6 and 1.4 GHz catalogues, source counts and spectral index distributions

Table II: (Nos 1-202) sources in UMa area  41W
(Nos 1-183) sources in Boo area  42W
(Nos 1-87) sources in CrB area  43W
(Nos 1-216) sources in Dra area  44W

1950 coordinates. Fig 1: contours maps of extended sources.

1985L1

LANDECKER T.L., HIGGS L.A., ROGER R.S. 1985,A.J. 90, 1082-1093 High-resolution radio observations of the supernova remnants CTB 104A (G93.7-0,3) and 3C 434.1 (G94.0+1.0)

6P

Table II: (Nos 1-59) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1420MHz ; a few cross-identif.

1985M1

MAGNANI L., BLITZ L., MUNDY L. 1985,Ap.J. 295, 402-421 Molecular gas at high galactic latitudes

MBM

CO survey Table 1 : (Nos 101-166) 66 clouds at 20^{∘} ≤ |b| ≤ 25^{∘} Table 2 : (Nos 1-57) 57 clouds in 35 complexes at |b| ≥ 25^{∘}

1985M2 A

MORGAN D.H., GOOD A.R. 1985,M.N.R.A.S. 216, 459-465 New Wolf-Rayet stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

MGWR

Table 2 : (Nos 1-7) ; 1975 coordinates ; finding charts

1985M2 B

MORGAN D.H., GOOD A.R. 1987,M.N.R.A.S. 224, 435-442 Two faint WR stars near 30 Doradus

MGWR

New spectrophotometric observations allow corrections of the spectral types of MGWR 4 and 5

1985M2 C

MORGAN D.H., GOOD A.R. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 243, 459-461 Wolf-Rayet stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

MGWR

A new Wolf-Rayet star MGWR 8 = BE 546 (ref. 1974B1)

1985M3

MELNICK J. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. 153, 235-244 The 30 Doradus nebula. I. Spectral classification of 69 stars in the central cluster

Melnick

Table 1 : numbering between 1 and 80 with missing numbers

also stars named B, B1, B2, B3

Finding chart Spectra are also given for a number of R stars (Radcliffe, ref. 1960F1)

1985M4

MORGAN D.H., GOOD A.R. 1985,M.N.R.A.S. 213, 491-494 and Plates New planetary nebulae in the Small Magellanic Cloud

MGPN1-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-13)

10 new PN candidates

3 PN (Nos 8, 9, 13) are from Morgan, 1984, M.N.R.A.S. 209, section 4, p. 243-244

Identif. charts

1985NV

NECKEL Th., VEHRENBERG H. 1985,Treugesel-Verlag K.G., D-4000 Dusseldorf 1 Atlas of Galactic Nebulae, Vol. I

GN

435 nebulae with α from 0h00m to 12h00m and δ +90^{∘} to -33^{∘} Cross-identif. ; 1950 and 2000 coordinates ; galactic coordinates Ordered and named from 1950 right-ascension: format rounded HH.MM.m.NN where NN is a running number when several objects have similar α The catalogue itself is named AGN (!)

Some objects are PN (ref. 1992AO)  NeVe

1985O1

OORT M.J.A., WINDHORST R.A. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. 145, 405-424 A very deep Westerbork survey of a field previously observed with the VLA

60W

(Nos 1-123) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1412 MHz. Table 3: source list for the complete sample (Nos 1-100) Table 4: additional sources (Nos 101-123) Fig 1 and 2: inner part of the full resolution and low resolution maps.

1985R1

REID N., MOULD J. 1985,Ap.J. 299, 236-254 The evolution of asymptotic giant branch stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud. II. Spectroscopy of a complete sample

LMC AGB

Subsample of Reid and Mould 1984 (who did not give any list) Table 1 : 113 stars among (Nos 1-423) ; 1950 coordinates

V, V-I sp. type ; velocity

The prefixes A to F are related to 6 fields

Appendix :14 stars among Nos 429-461

1985S1

SHECTMAN S.A. 1985,Ap.J.Suppl. 57, 77-90 Clusters of galaxies from the Shane-Wirtanen counts

SWCG

Table 1A : (Nos 1-651), no number 421-425

1985VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1985,ESO Scientific Report No. 4 A Catalog of Quasars and Active Nuclei (2nd edition)

-

2855 quasars, 739 active galaxies (of which 236 are Seyfert 1) Table of 73 BL Lac objects Updated version of ref. 1984VV A

1985V1

VALLEE J.P., HIGGS L.A. 1985,A.J. 90, 2061-2073 Radio observations of the H II region S121 and its surroundings

8P

Table II: (Nos 1-58) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1420MHz ; a few cross-identif.

1985WE

WEBBINK R.F. 1985,IAU Symp. 113, 541-577 Structure parameters of galactic globular clusters

C

Table Ia : IAU name 1950 ; cluster name ; 1950 coordinates.

Observed parameters for galactic clusters.

N =154

Table Ib : Observed parameters of galactic dwarf spheroidals.

N = 7

Table Ic : Observed parameters of the Fornax globular clusters.

N = 6

(The same format is used for extragalactic Globular Clusters).

Table IIa,b,c:Derived parameters. Numerous notes and ref.

1985W1

WOOD P.R., BESSELL M.S., PALTOGLOU G. 1985,Ap.J. 290, 477-486 A sample of long-period variables in the bar of the Large Magellanic Cloud and evidence for a recent burst of star formation

WBP

Search for long-period variable stars in an area of 28’ x 56’ centered on α = 05h28m 50.7s, δ = -69^{∘}37’ 56” (B1950.0) using 19 I plates (IV N +RG715). The survey did not detect variables brighter than Ic ≃ 12, due to saturation. All the variables found are marked on Fig. 1 ; Identif. charts for 62 LPV variables out of a longer list of stars. Table 1 : Sample of 33 among 232 variable candidates ; 1950 coord. ; HJK photometry (stars ordered by the period) A few cross-identif. with HV stars are given p. 480

1985W2

WALTERBOS R.A.M., BRINKS E., SHANE W.W. 1985,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 61, 451-471 A high resolution radio continuum survey of Messier 31. II. Observations at 1412 MHz, data reduction, and the 37W catalogue of radio sources

37W

ν = 1412 MHz ; flux density larger than 1 mJy ; resolution 23”x35” Table III: (Nos 1-249) ; 1950 coordinates ; maps for a few sources

1986BP

BARBIER-BROSSAT M., PETIT M. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 65, 59-61 Catalogue bibliographique de vitesses radiales stellaires

-

11000 references for galactic, Large and Small Magellanic Clouds stars from 1970 to 1980

1986B1

BRAND J., BLITZ L., WOUTERLOOT J.G.A. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 65, 537-550 The velocity field of the outer galaxy in the southern hemisphere. I. Catalogue of nebulous objects

BRAN

Catalogue of the optical nebulae in the longitude range 230^{∘} to 305^{∘} Table I : (Nos 1-400) ; 1950 equatorial and galactic coordinates ; cross-identif.

1986B2 A

BENNETT C.L., LAWRENCE C.R., BURKE B.F., HEWITT J.N., MAHONEY J. 1986,Ap.J.Suppl. 61, 1-104 The MIT-Green Bank (MG) 5 GHz survey

MG

The survey covers 1.87 sr of sky with −00^{∘}30′13” < δ_{1950.0} < +19^{∘}29′47” and |b| > 10^{∘} Table 3 : (N = 5974) The name is based on the 2000 coordinates (1950 coordinates are also given). The name of a source should be MG J0000+1903 instead of MG0000+1903

1986B2 B

LAWRENCE C.R., BENNETT C.L., HEWITT J.N., LANGSTON G.I., KLOTZ S.E. BURKE B.F., TURNER K.C. 1986,Ap.J.Suppl. 61, 105-157 5 GHz radio structure and optical identifications of sources from the MG survey. II. Maps and finding charts

MG

Follow-up of 1000 selected sources from a preliminary version of ref. 1986B2 A with the VLA ; radio maps ; only 1950 equatorial coordinates are given.

1986B2 C

LANGSTON G.I., HEFLIN M.B., CONNER S.R., LEHAR J., CARRILLI C.L., BURKE B.F. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 72, 621-681 The second MIT-Green Bank 5 GHz survey

MG

The survey covers 1.51 sr of sky in the RA range 04h-21h between +17^{∘} and +39^{∘}.15 Dec (B1950). The final MG II catalog contains 6182 sources. The name is based on the 2000 coordinates (1950 coordinates are also given). The name of a source should be MG J0400+3645 instead of MG0400+3645

1986B2 D

GRIFFITH M., LANGSTON G.I., HEFLIN M.B., CONNER S.R., LEHAR J., BURKE B.F. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 74, 129-180 The third MIT-Green Bank 5 GHz survey

MG

The survey covers 1.11 sr of sky in the RA range 16h.5-05h between +17^{∘} and +39^{∘}.15 Dec (B1950). The final MG III catalog contains 4761 sources. (Table 4 header: misprint, MG III source list, and not MG IV) The name is based on the 2000 coordinates (1950 coordinates are also given). The name of a source should be MG J0000+3039 instead of MG0000+3039

1986B2 E

GRIFFITH M., LANGSTON G.I., HEFLIN M.B., CONNER S.R., BURKE B.F. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 75, 801-833 The fourth MIT-Green Bank 5 GHz survey

MG

The survey covers 0.504 sr of sky in the RA range 15h.5-02h.5 between +37^{∘}.00 and +50^{∘}.98 Dec (B1950). The final MG IV catalog contains 3427 sources. In the overlapping zones of the four MG catalogues (Fig. 1), the IAU name for the same source may be slightly different when taken from two different MG catalogues. The name is based on the 2000 coordinates (1950 coordinates are also given). The name of a source should be MG J0000+4054 instead of MG0000+4054

1986B3

BROTEN N.W., VALLEE J.P., MacLEOD J.M. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 64, 499-501 Linear polarization observations in selected celestial zones. The Abell 2319 area

13W

A restricted celestial angular zone encompassing the cluster of galaxies Abell 2319. VLA observations at 6.2, 18.2 and 20.1 cm. 14 Sources 13W out of 341 (ref. 1978H1)

1986B4

BIRKINSHAW M. 1986,M.N.R.A.S. 222, 731-751 and microfiche MN 222/3 A deep survey of Abell 2218 at 408 and 1407 MHz: 5C 20.

5C20.

Survey of 222 5C 20 radio sources (1.4mJy < S < 12.9mJy) at 408 and 1407 MHz. Area: concentric fields of diameters about 4^{∘} and 1^{∘} centered on α = 16h35m42s, δ = +66^{∘}20’00” Suggested optical identif. of the sources.

1986C1

CLIFTON T.R., LYNE A.G. 1986,Nature 320, 43-45 High-radio-frequency survey for young and millisecond pulsars

PSR

N = 32 new pulsars of short periods (P ≥ 0.004s) and large dispersion measures (≤ 35000P cm^{−3} pc), in an area of 200 sq.^{∘} along the northern galactic plane

1986D1

DOWNES R.A. 1986,Ap.J.Suppl. 61, 569-584 The KPD survey for galactic plane ultraviolet-excess objects: space densities of white dwarfs and subdwarfs

KPD

White dwarfs : Tables 3 (and Identif. charts) and 4 ; N=20 Subdwarfs O stars : Table 6 ; N=20

1986H1

HARTLEY M., MANCHESTER R.N., SMITH R.M., TRITTON S.B., GOSS W.M. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 63, 27-48 A catalogue of southern dark clouds

DCLD

Table 1 : (N = 1101)

1986H2

HODGE P. 1986,P.A.S.P. 98, 1113-1122 Clusters of the Small Magellanic Cloud. I. A catalog of 213 new clusters

HodgeC86

Table II : (Nos 1-213) ; 1975 coordinates ; plates

1986H3 A

HERBIG G.H., VRBA F.J., RYDGREN A.E. 1986,A.J. 91, 575-582 and Plate 59, p. 686 A spectroscopic survey of the Taurus-Auriga dark clouds for pre-main-sequence stars having Ca II H, K emission

LkCa

Table I : (Nos 1-21) ; 1950 coordinates ; Nos 6, 17, 20 are missing Table V : UBVRI photometry Finding charts

1986H3 B

HARTMANN L.W., SODERBLOM D.R., STAUFFER J.R. 1987,A.J. 93, 907-912 Rotation and kinematics of the pre-main-sequence stars in Taurus-Auriga with Ca II emission

LkCa

(Nos 1-21) with No. 18 separeted into 18p and 18f

1986H4

HIGGS L.A. 1986,Journal Royal Astr. Soc. Canada 80, 51-54 The designation of radio sources observed with the DRAO synthesis telescope

-

Retroactive designations and numbering for Penticton lists: 1P (ref. 1983L1), 2P (ref. 1985C1), 3P and 4P (ref. 1985C2), and 5P (ref. 1985C3)

1986I1

ISSERSTEDT J., SCHINDLER R. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. 167, 11-24 Spate Galaxien. Die Sternentstehungsraten

ISG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-59)

1986L1 A

LIU JIYING, HUANG YONGWEI, FENG XINGCHUN 1986,Acta Astrophys. Sinica 6, 111-118 An objective prism survey for emission line galaxies

LJHY

(Nos 1-50) ; 1950 coordinates ; 47 are galaxies, 3 are PN. Finding charts

1986L1 B

HUANG YONGWEI, LIU JIYING, FENG XINGCHUN 1991,Acta Astrophys. Sinica 11, 28-37 Objective prism survey for emission line galaxies (IV)

LJHY

(Nos 51-150) ; 1950 coordinates 96 are galaxies, 3 are PN, 1 is a star.

1986MB

MAZZARELLA J.M., BALZANO V.A. 1986,Ap.J.Suppl. 62, 751-819 A catalog of Markarian galaxies

MRK

A catalog of Markarian galaxies (ref. 1967M1, 15 lists, 1500 objects, First Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey) tabulating redshifts, spectral and morphological classification, magnitudes, infrared and radio flux densities, and over 600 references to available data published before 1986 January 1. Numerous cross-identif.

1986P1

PETERSON B.A., ELLIS R.S., EFSTATHIOU G., SHANKS T., BEAN A.J., FONG R., ZEN-LONG Z. 1986,M.N.R.A.S. 221, 233-255 A complete galaxy redshift sample. III. Methods and catalogue

Referred to as AARS (Anglo Australian Redshift Survey) Table 3 : 329 galaxies, in 5 high-latitude fields,

ordered in each field by the magnitude Bj,

the numbering itself is arbitrary ; 1950 coordinates

No Identif. charts

(Nos 1-137)  GSA
(Nos 1-5)  GSAN
(Nos 1-179)  GSD
(Nos 1-100)  GSF
(Nos 1-81)  GNA
(Nos 1-95)  GNB

1986R1

ROUTLEDGE D., LANDECKER T.L., VANELDIK J.F. 1986,M.N.R.A.S. 221, 809-821 The supernova remnant OA 184 (G166.2+2.5) and associated H I

9P

Table 2: (Nos 1-32) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1420MHz

1986S1 A

SCHMIDT M., SCHNEIDER D.P., GUNN J.E. 1986,Ap.J. 306, 411-427 Spectroscopic CCD surveys for quasars at large redshift. I. A deep PFUEI survey

PC

Table 1 : N = 34 ; Emission-line objects classified as quasars (Table 2) or galaxies (Table 3) by slit spectra . Identif. charts

1986S1 B

SCHMIDT M., SCHNEIDER D.P., GUNN J.E. 1986,Ap.J. 310, 518-533 Spectroscopic CCD surveys for quasars at large redshift. II. A PFUEI transit survey

PC

Table 1 : (N = 33) ; Identif. charts

1986S2

STOKES G.H., SEGELSTEIN D.J., TAYLOR J.H., DEWEY R.J. 1986,Ap.J. 311, 694-700 Results of two surveys for fast pulsars

PSR

Table 2 : (25 new PSR discovered at Green Bank and Arecibo)

1986S3

SUNTZEFF N.B., FRIEL E., KLEMOLA A., KRAFT R.P., GRAHAM J.A. 1986,A.J. 91, 275-289 The stellar population of the Small Magellanic Cloud near NGC 121. I. The mean metallicity, metallicity spread, and radial velocity of SMC halo giants

KG

69 red stars identified by Graham in a 20^{∘} x 20^{∘} field north of NGC 121 Table 1 : N = 69 ; Identif. charts, plate 33, p. 461

1986S4

STEPHENSON C.B. 1986,Ap.J. 300, 779-784 New Hα emission stars found above 10 galactic latitude

StHA

Search for Hα emission stars (59% of the whole sky), north of declination -25^{∘} and mostly further than 10^{∘} from the galactic plane. Limiting magnitude ≃ 13. Table 1 : (Nos 1-206) ; 1950 coordinates ; A few HD or BD cross-identif. ; no Identif. charts

1986S5

STEPHENSON C.B. 1986,A.J. 91, 144-158 Dwarf K and M stars of small proper motion found in a large spectroscopic survey

StKM

Objective-prism survey covering the sky north of declination -25^{∘} and more than 10^{∘} from the galactic plane

Table 1 : (Nos 1-2201), 1900 coordinates ; visual magnitude, spectral type.

A few DM, HD cross-identif. ; no Identif. charts

1986S6

STEPHENSON C.B. 1986,A.J. 92, 139-165 Dwarf K and M stars of high proper motion found in a hemispheric survey

StKM2-

Objective-prism survey covering the sky north of declination -25^{∘} and more than 10^{∘} from the galactic plane (as in 1986S5, here for high proper motion stars) N = 1808 ; the numbering is not explicited. 1900 coordinates ; ref. to or cross-identif. in several other catalogues

1986S7

STEPHENSON C.B. 1986,Ap.J. 301, 927-937 Late M stars found in a hemispheric survey

StM

Objective-prism survey covering the sky north of declination -25^{∘} and more than 10^{∘} from the galactic plane (as in 1986S5) Late M stars not contained in the 3rd ed. of the variable star catalog or its suppl. Table 1A : No numbering ; renumbered by us (and in the literature) (Nos 1-558), and not 583 as stated in the Abstract

1986V1

VELUSAMY T., GOSS W.M., ARNAL E.M. 1986,J. Astrophys. Astr. 7, 105-112 WSTR observations of radio sources in the galactic plane near ℓ = 54^{∘}

62W

Table 2: (Nos 1-12) ; 1950 coordinates ; λ = 49 cm ; small diameter sources. Fig 1: 49 cm continuum map of the field around ℓ = 54^{∘}

1986W1

WESTERLUND B.E., AZZOPARDI M., BREYSACHER J. 1986,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 65, 79-95 Carbon stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud. I. The survey technique and results for two fields

Circular fields of 0.78 sq.^{∘} , spectral range 4350-5300Å, grism. Provisory lists: Table II : 316 stars identified as carbon stars (Nos 1-323), missing numbers

in field A centered at α (1975) = 00h50m ; δ (1975) = -73^{∘} 30m

ABW-A

Table III: 133 stars identified as carbon stars (Nos 1-137), missing numbers in field B centered at α (1975) =01h02m , δ (1975) = -72^{∘} 15m

ABW-B

Identif. charts: Rebeirot+ 1993 (ref. 1993R1), where the ABW-A and ABW-B stars have been renamed and renumbered with the RAW acronym

1987AM

ARP H.C., MADORE B.F. 1987,Cambridge Univ. Press A Catalogue of Southern Peculiar Galaxies and Associations Vol.I. Positions and descriptions Vol. II. Selected photographs (photographic reproductions by W.E. Roberton)

AM

•Vol.I. Categories p. 3 and 6-18 (interacting, doubles, ..., chains, groups, jets) ; Cross identifications (see p. 4-5) Format HHMM−DDM (or −DDMM for pairs or multiple objects) based on 1950 truncated coordinates 1950 eq. coord., galactic coord. and supergalactic coord. •Vol. II. The photographs are ordered by categories (25 categories) In the format, the 3rd digit in the declination is incorrect: the authors have truncated the arc minutes instead of writing a decimal fraction of degree e.g. –43^{∘}59’ is written –435

1987A1

ATTEIA J.-L., BARAT C., HURLEY K., NIEL M., VEDRENNE G., EVANS W.D., FENI-MORE E.E., KLEBESADEL R.W., LAROS J.G., CLINE T., DESAI U., TEEGARDEN B.J., ESTULIN I.V., ZENCHENKO V.M., KUZNETSOV A.V., KURT V.G. 1987,Ap.J.Suppl. 64, 305-382 A second catalog of γ -ray bursts: 1978-1980 localizations from the interplanetary network

{GB \atop GBS}

84 events of which 80 are localized (in α , δ or ℓ, b)

1987BF

BRUCH A., FISCHER F.-J., WILMSEN U. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 70, 481-516 An atlas and catalogue of northern dwarf novae

-

δ > 20^{∘} Supplements the Atlas of Vogt and Bateson (ref. 1982VB) for more southern stars ; Accurate 1950 coordinates ; finding charts N = 90 ; from which 53 (Table I) seen during outburst

1987B1

BAARS J.W.M., WENDKER H.J. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. 181, 210-212 The extended radio emission of P Cygni

71W

Table 1 : (Nos 1-26) ; ν = 1420 MHz

1987B2

BURBIDGE G., HEWITT A. 1987,A.J. 93, 1-5 An updated list of BL Lac objects, and their relation to galaxies and quasistellar objects

BL

An updated list of BL Lac objects taken from ref. 1987HB A

1987B3

BRUHWEILER F.C., KLINGLESMITH D.A.III, GULL T.R., SOFIA S. 1987,Ap.J. 317, 152-162 Deep Einstein X-ray imagery of the Small Magellanic Cloud

BKGS

Table 2 : (Nos 1-35) ; N = 37 ; 1950 coordinates A few cross-identif. with IKT in Table 3. Possible optical counterparts in Table 4. On the Identif. chart (Fig. 1), several sources are omitted (e.g. 7, 10, 20 through 25, 28, 31, 32) or misidentified (read 26, 27, 29, 30 instead of 25, 26, 28, 29)

1987C1 A

CALDWELL N. 1987,A.J. 94, 1116-1125 Dwarf elliptical galaxies in the Fornax cluster. I. A catalog and luminosity function

NG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-137) ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with a 9 digits IAU name

1987C1 B

CALDWELL N., BOTHUN G.D. 1987,A.J. 94, 1126-1141 and Plates 82-96 Dwarf elliptical galaxies in the Fornax cluster. II. Their structure and stellar populations

NG

CCD photometry of 31 dwarf elliptical galaxies: 26 NG and 5 JJ (ref. 1980J1, here named G), and 13 elliptical galaxies (1 NG, 9 JJ, 3 NGC) Identif. charts for half of the 44 galaxies

1987DU

DUERBECK H.W. 1987,Space Sci. Rev. 45, 1-212 A reference catalogue and atlas of galactic novae. Reedited as a book, Reidel, Dordrecht, 1987

-

The catalogue and atlas contain information on 277 objects, mainly classical novae and related objects. For most objects, brightness ranges, accurate positions, finding charts, cross-identif. and selected bibliographies are given.

1987F1

FEIGELSON E.D., JACKSON J.M., MATHIEU R.D., MYERS P.C., WALTER F.M. 1987,A.J. 94, 1251-1259 An X-ray survey for pre-main-sequence stars in the Taurus-Auriga and Perseus molecular cloud complexes

TAP

Table II : (Nos 1-59) ; Cross-identif. p.1256 ; Identif. charts (plates 105-109)

1987GS A

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M. 1987,NASA RP-1196 Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

2nd Edition (1st edition is ref. 1984GS) Updated by 1993GS Part I. Data (λ1to1000μm) Part II. Appendices

A: Index of IR source positions

B: Bibliography ordered chronologically C: First author alphabetical order listing D: Spectrum atlas

Compilation in original published form with no attempt to create a single system of infrared photometric units.

1987GS B

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., MEAD J.M. 1988,NASA RP-1205 Far Infrared Supplement: Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

Subset of the data of ref. 1987GS A (NASA RP 1196) restricted to observations at λ ≥ 5μm

1987G1

GYULBUDAGHIAN A.L., RODRIGUEZ L.F., MENDOZA-TORRES E. 1987,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 15, 53-57 Three new masers located near Herbig-Haro-like nebulosities

HHL

Table 1 : (Nos 1-77)

HH-like nebulosities found at Byurakan for water-vapor maser emission 1950 coordinates cross-identif. with GGD (ref. 1978G2), Gy2- (here G1 ref. 1982G2 B), Gy3- (here G2), Gy4- (here G3)

Table 2 : 3 new H2O masers, HHL 5, 50, and 73 Table 3 : Bright far-infrared sources (IRAS) associated with HHL obj.

1987HB A

HEWITT A., BURBIDGE G. 1987,Ap.J.Suppl. 63, 1-246 A new optical catalog of quasi-stellar objects

{QSO \atop BL}

Complete to 1986 September (3681 objects: 3594 QSOs and 87 BL Lac objects). Extensive information on names, positions, magnitudes, colors, emission-line redshifts, absorption, variability, polarization and X-ray, radio, and infrared data. The references are ordered by reference number (p. 219-236) and by alphabetical order (p. 201-218) Cross-identif. (p. 237-246) In the catalog (Table 1), the symbol BL Lac appears under the coordinate designation for all BL Lac objects

1987HB B

HEWITT A., BURBIDGE G. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 69, 1-63 The first addition to the new optical catalog of quasi-stellar objects

{QSO \atop BL}

Complete up to 1988 June Table 1 : 707 new QSOs and one BL Lac object ; 1950 coordinates Table 2 : Added or revised data on 971 QSOs

1987H1

HANDA T., SOFUE Y., NAKAI N., HIRABAYASHI H., INOUE M. 1987,P.A.S.J. 39, 709-753 A radio continuum survey of the galactic plane at 10 GHz

HSNH

Galactic plane 355^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 56^{∘} ; −1.5^{∘} ≤ b ≤ +1.5^{∘} Half-power beam size 3’.0, noise level of the resultant map typically 15 mK in brightness temperature Table 2 : (Nos 1-144) ; Identif. charts

1987I1

ISHIDA K., WEINBERGER R. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. 178, 227-236 Two senile nearby planetary nebulae and the local PN population

IsWe

Maps

1987LY A

LYNGA G. 1987,Lund Observatory Catalogue of Open Cluster Data, 5th Edition

C

Distributed as magnetic tape or microfiche by CDS, (Centre de Donnees astronomiques de Strasbourg), or by NASA Data Center. 1950 coordinates

1987LY B

JANES K.A., TILLEY C., LYNGA G. 1988,A.J. 95, 771-784 Properties of the open cluster system

C

1987L1

LANDECKER T.L., VANELDIK J.F., DEWDNEY P.E., ROUTLEDGE D. 1987,A.J. 94, 111-122 Observations at 408 MHz of the supernova remnant HB 3 (G132.6+1.5)

12P

Table III: (Nos 1-68) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 408 and 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif. Maps

1987MS

McCOOK G.P., SION E.M. 1987,Ap.J.Suppl. 65, 603-671 A catalog of spectroscopically identified white dwarfs

WD

1279 White Dwarfs identified spectroscopically. The catalogue is complete to 1987 January. Updates 1977MS+

1987M1 A

MAEHARA H., SOYANO T. 1987,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 293-310 A search for cool carbon stars. I. Cassiopeia region

KisoC1-

Search for cool carbon stars using the 4^{∘} prism spectra of the Kiso 105 cm Schmidt telescope in the area ℓ = 115 to 130^{∘}, b = −5 to +5^{∘} ; λ 6400-8800Å Table 2 : (Nos 1-210) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; 98 stars newly discovered ; cross-identif. with Stephenson, ref. 1973S3

1987M1 B

MAEHARA H., SOYANO T. 1987,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 21, 423-435 A search for cool carbon stars. II. Anticenter region

KisoC2-

ℓ = 170^{∘} to 190^{∘}, b = −14^{∘} to +8^{∘} 21 new stars discovered Table 2 : (Nos 1-125) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with Stephenson, ref. 1973S3

1987M1 C

MAEHARA H., SOYANO T. 1988,Ann. Tokyo Astr. Obs., 2nd Series 22, 59-71 A search for cool carbon stars. III. Cygnus region

KisoC3-

ℓ = 76^{∘} to 95^{∘}, b = −9^{∘} to +15^{∘} 51 new stars discovered Table 2 : (Nos 1-128) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with Stephenson, ref. 1973S3

1987M1 D

MAEHARA H., SOYANO T. 1990,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 1, 207-215 A search for cool carbon stars. IV. Serpens-Aquila-Scutum (ell ≃ 30^{∘}) region

KisoC4-

ℓ = 22^{∘} to 42^{∘}, b = −8^{∘} to +12^{∘} 28 new stars discovered (not listed in Stephenson ref. 1973S3) Table 2 : (Nos 1-60) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with Stephenson, ref. 1973S3

1987M1 E

MAEHARA H., SOYANO T. 1991,Publ. Nat. Astr. Obs. Japan 2, 203-223 A search for cool carbon stars. V. Perseus-Camelopardalis (ell ≃ 150^{∘}) region

KisoC5-

ℓ = 132^{∘} to 158^{∘}, b = −8^{∘} to +7^{∘} Table 2 : (Nos 1-226) ; Identif. charts ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with Stephenson, ref. 1989ST

1987M2

MOULD J., REID N. 1987,Ap.J. 321, 156-161 The evolution of asymptotic giant branch stars in the Magellanic Clouds. III. The problem of intermediates-mass stars Table 1 : Bright KM star sample ; N = 20 among 55 ;

1950 coordinates ; V, V-I photometry ; Sp. type ; Mbol ; velocity

BLMC

Table 2 : Constellation III sample ; N = 40 among 956 ; 1950 coordinates ; V, V-I photometry ; Sp. type ; Mbol ; velocity ; the prefix X, Z, Y are related to 3 fields

CIII

No Identif. charts

1987N1 A

NIKOLASHVILI M.G. 1987,Astrophysics 26, 125-135 Low dispersion spectral sky survey to find faint carbon stars. I. Region 115^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 130^{∘}, −5^{∘} ≤ b ≤ +5^{∘}

NikC 1-

Low dispersion: 1250Å/mm near Hγ Table 1 : (Nos 1-114) ; 1900 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1987N1 B

NIKOLASHVILI M.G. 1987,Astrophysics 27, 453-462 Low dispersion spectral sky survey to find faint carbon stars. II. Region 130^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 145^{∘}, −5^{∘} ≤ b ≤ +5^{∘}

NikC 2-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-80) ; New carbon stars ; 1900 coordinates Identif. charts, except for Nos 2, 13, 59, 71 which are Nos 2, 4, 5, 6 in Astrofizica 26, 559-561

1987N1 C

KURTANIDZE O.M., NIKOLASHVILI M.G. 1989,Astrophysics 29, 695-704 Low-dispersion spectral sky survey to find faint carbon stars. III. Region 145^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 165^{∘}, −5^{∘} ≤ b ≤ +5^{∘}

NikC 3-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-83) ; 1900 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1987N1 D

KURTANIDZE O.M., NIKOLASHVILI M.G. 1989,Astrophysics 31, 714-724 Low-dispersion spectral sky survey for revealing faint carbon stars. IV. Region 90^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 115^{∘}, −5^{∘} ≤ b ≤ +5^{∘}

NikC 4-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-146) ; 1900 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1987N1 E

KURTANIDZE O.M., NIKOLASHVILI M.G. 1990,Astrofizica 32, 173-175 and Plates A survey of the selected regions in the galactic anticenter direction

NikC 5-

Low-dispersion sky survey of the selected regions situated in the Galactic anticenter and Cas-Cyg directions. Table 1 : (Nos 1-23) ; 1900 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1987O1

OORT M.J.A. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 71, 221-243 A deep WSRT 21 cm survey down to 0.1 mJy in the Lynx area

65W

Table II: (Nos 1-349) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. Fig 1. and 2: full resolution and low resolutions maps (1^{∘} × 1^{∘}) Fig 4: contour plots of extended sources.

1987O2

OORT M.J.A., VAN LANGEVELDE H.J. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 71, 25-38 A WSRT 21 cm deep survey of two field in Hercules

Table 2 : 66W (Nos 1-69) Format NN  66W
67W (Nos 1-71) Format NNA  67W

1987P1

PURVIS A., TAPPIN S.J., REES W.G., HEWISH A., DUFFETT-SMITH P.J. 1987,M.N.R.A.S. 229, 589-619 The Cambridge IPS survey at 81.5 MHz

IPS

Survey of radio sources which exhibit interplanetary scintillation (IPS) at 81.5 MHz. The faintest sources in the catalogue have scintillating flux densities of ≃ 0.3 Jy rms. The presence of IPS indicates that there is structure in the brightness distribution of a source on scales less than 2 arcsec in extent. Table I : (N = 1789) Format HHMM±DD (truncated 1950 coordinates)

1987P2

PETTERSSON B. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 70, 69-75 An objective-prism survey for Hα -emission-line stars of a field in Puppis

PHα

27 sq.deg. NW quadrant of the Gum Nebula, centered north of RCW 19 Table II: (Nos 1-93) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. 20 rejected stars are quoted in Table III Identif. charts for all 93 stars (Fig. 4)

1987R1

ROBIN A., MARTIN N., PEYRIN Y., PREVOT L., REBEIROT E., ROUSSEAU J. 1987,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 68, 63-65 BVR photometry of late type stars in the direction of the Large Magellanic Cloud

RM3-

Table I : (Nos 1-2629 ; Magnetic tape ; Identif. chart available upon request

1987R2

RYS S., MACHALSKI J. 1987,Acta Astr. 37, 163-178 The Green Bank third (GB3) survey of extragalactic radio sources at 1400 MHz

GB3

The final sky region catalogued covers a strip of 11.3 hours in RA between 18h33m < α < 24h and 00h < α < 05h52m, +70^{∘} ≤ δ_{1950} ≤ +76^{∘}48′

Table 1 :N=502 ; GB3 radiosources stronger than 112 mJy Table 2 :N=174 ; other sources reliably detected though S < 112mJy or δ < +70^{∘}

1987TU A

TULLY R.B., FISHER J.R. 1987,Cambridge Univ. Press Nearby Galaxies Atlas

NBG

2367 galaxies with V_{hel} < 3000km.s^{−1}.

1987TU B

TULLY R.B. 1987,Cambridge Univ. Press Nearby Galaxies Catalog NBG

1987TU C

TULLY R.B. 1987,Ap.J. 321, 280-304 Nearby groups of Galaxies. II. An all-sky survey within 3000 kilometers per second.

NBGCG

Revision of Tully, 1980, Ap.J. 237, 390-403. Among 2367 galaxies, 366 groups containing 2 or more galaxies, totalizing 1525 Galaxies Categories (clusters, groups, associations, clouds and spurs) and terminology explained in Sect. III p. 281-283: Format FF-yy ; yy = 0 if the galaxy is not in a group or association Left hand F from seven general regions identified in the NBG Atlas (ref. 1987TU A) Right hand F = 0 for a galaxy of the region F which cannot be associated with any cloud (ex.: 60-1). In Appendix B, the group-finding techniques are applied to the Leo region and the results compared with other group catalogs. Table 1 : 13 clusters (common name and group number from Table 2) Table 2 : Group catalog

1987VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1987,ESO Scientific Report No. 5 A Catalogue of Quasars and Active Nuclei (3rd edition)

-

Updated version of ref. 1985VV Table 1 : 3473 quasars Table 2 : 84 BL Lac objects Table 3 : 887 active galaxies (of which 258 are Seyfert 1)

1987W1

WALBORN N.R., BLADES J.C. 1987,Ap.J.Lett. 323, L65-L67 Recent massive star formation in 30 Doradus

WB

Two early O stars embedded in nebular knots of 30 Dor ; Identif. charts The nebulous knots are quoted as K1, K2

1988BN

BEICHMAN C.A., NEUGEBAUER G., HABING H.J., CLEGG P.E., CHESTER T.J. 1988,NASA RP-1190, Vol. 1 Infrared Astronomical Satellite (IRAS), Catalogs and Atlases. Vol I. Explanatory Supplement

IRAS

Obsoletes ref. 1985IR A

1988B1

BROADHURST T.J., ELLIS R.S., SHANKS T. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 235, 827-856 The Durham/Anglo-Australian Telescope faint galaxy redshift survey

BES

Faint galaxy redshift survey, spectra with resolution ≃ 4 Å, field galaxies selected in apparent magnitude slices between 20.0 < b_{j} < 21.5 Table 3 : SGP field (Nos 1-71) ; 197 field (Nos 1-39) ; MT field (Nos 1-44) ; 419 field (Nos 1-38) ; 529 field (Nos 1-44) ; 1950 coordinates ; no Identif. charts

1988CP

CESARONI R., PALAGI F., FELLI M., CATARZI M., COMORETTO G., DI FRANCO S., GIOVANARDI C., PALLA F. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 76, 445-458 A catalogue of H2O maser sources north of δ = - 30^{∘}

H2O

Catalogue of all H2O maser sources, both stellar and non stellar, north of δ -30^{∘}, derived from the literature up to 1987 and intended to be used for single dish observations Almost all sources have a name ; 1950 coordinates Table I : N=526 ; Galactic objects

use ℓ, b numbering: format LLL.ℓℓℓ + BB.bbb

Table II : N=123 ; Extragalactic objects use α , δ numbering: format HHMM+DD (truncated 1950 coordinates)

1988C1

CORBALLY C.J., GARRISON R.F. 1988,A.J. 95, 739-744 and Plates p. 958-961 A search for early-G dwarf stars towards the south galactic pole

CG-SGP

Table III : (Nos 1-214) ; F8-G5 dwarfs Plates

1988C2

CORBALLY C.J., GARRISON R.F. 1988,A.J. 95, 745-749 and Plate p. 962 A search for early-G dwarf stars towards the north galactic pole

CG-NGP

Table II : (Nos 1-192) ; F8-G5 dwarfs Plates

1988C3

CLEMENS D.P., BARVAINIS R. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 68, 257-286 A catalog of small, optically selected molecular clouds: optical, infrared, and millimeter properties

[CB88]

Angular size less than 10’ by selection Table 1 : (Nos 1-248) ; 1950 coordinates ; associated IRAS detection No Identif. charts

1988C4

COHEN R.S., DAME T.M., GARAY G., MONTANI J., RUBIO M., THADDEUS P. 1988,Ap.J.Lett. 331, L95-L99 A complete CO survey of the Large Magellanic Cloud

LMC-CO

Survey of the central 6^{∘} × 6^{∘} of the LMC, angular resolution of 8’.8 in the J = 1 → 0 rotational transition of CO (115 GHz) N = 41 ; 1950 coordinates ; map

1988C5

CHARGEISHVILI K.B. 1988,Byull. Abastumansk. Astrofiz. Obs. 65, 18-240 (in Russian) The catalogue of spectral and luminosity classes of 6037 stars in the direction of the galaxy anticenter

AAO

Census of stars of peculiar spectrum (Ap, Bp, Emission line stars) Tables 2-5 : the number in the 1st column should not be used as identificator Catalog (pp. 21-230) : format +DD NNN ; zone δ +23^{∘} to +35^{∘} ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts ; cross-identif. with BD and SAO

1988D1

DESERT F.X., BAZELL D., BOULANGER F. 1988,Ap.J. 334, 815-840 An all-sky search for molecular Cirrus clouds

IREC

An all-sky map and a catalog of 516 significant clouds are presented and statistically analysed Table 1 : for objects with |b| > 5^{∘}; (Nos 1-516) ; area ; cross-identif. with MBM (ref. 1985M1) ; galactic coordinates

1988D2 A

DAVIES J.I., PHILLIPPS S., CAWSON M.G.M., DISNEY M.J., KIBBLEWHITE E.J. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 232, 239-258 Low surface brightness galaxies in the Fornax cluster: automated galaxy surface photometry. III.

FLSBG

(Nos 1-187) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. Additional cross-id. are given in ref. 1988D2 B, Table A3

1988D2 B

IRWIN M.J., DAVIES J.I., DISNEY M.J., PHILLIPPS S. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 245, 289-304 Automated galaxy surface photometry. V. Detection of very low surface brightness galaxies

FLSBG

Table A2 : (Nos 188-321) ; 1950 coordinates

1988F1

FRICKE W., SCHWAN H., LEDERLE T., in coolaboration with: BASTIAN U., BIEN R., BURKHARDT G., DU MONT B., HERING R., JAHRLING R., JAHREISS H., ROSER S., SCHWERDTFEGER H.M., WALTER H.G. 1988,Veroff. Astr. Rechen-Inst. Heidelberg No. 32 Fifth Fundamental Catalogue (FK5). Part I. The basic fundamental stars

FK5

”Basic FK5”. Revision of the FK4 catalogue (ref. 1963F1), 2000 and 1950 coordinates. The catalogue provides, improved mean positions and proper motions for classical 1535 fundamental stars which were already included in the FK3 and FK4; and mean positions and proper motions for new fundamental stars extending also the fundamental system to the apparent magnitude 9.5. The assignement of numbers to stars is the same as in the FK4, the data are given in the order of right ascension for equinox and epoch J2000.0. (Nos 1-905) and (Nos 1001-1630), 52 stars are no longer regarded as fundamental and are missing in the series 1-905. Northern circumpolar stars (p. 76-77) and Southern cirmcumpolar stars (p. 78-79)

1988GR A

GREEN D.A. 1988,Astrophys. Space Sci. 148, 3-74 A revised reference catalogue of galactic supernova remnants

SNR

Revises and updates Green, 1984 (ref. 1984GR)

Table I : 155 galactic SNR (galactic and 1950 equatorial coord.)

other names (see also Table II)

the objects are then described in Table IV

Objects no longer thought to be SNR: Section 4.1 p. 10, 66 and 67 Questionable SNR listed in Table I : Section 4.3 p. 68-70 Possible SNR not listed in Table I : Section 4.4 p. 70-71

1988GR B

ARENDT R.G. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 181-212, and Plates 21-120 An infrared survey of galactic supernova remnants

SNR

Table 1 : 157 SNRs ; galactic coordinates ; cross-identif. with an other common name Infrared maps at four wavelengths

1988HB A

HERBIG G.H., BELL K.R. 1988,Lick Obs. Bull. 1111, 1-90 Third catalog of emission-line stars of the Orion population

HBC

(Nos 1-742) ; pre-main sequence stars ; 1950 and gal. coordinates ; cross-id. ; many other data and references This catalog replaces the second catalog (ref. 1972HR) and adds (Nos 324-742); the HRC acronym in ref. 1972HR is obsoleted by HBC. New information and accurate astrometric coordinates, modified classification scheme for premain sequence stars.

1988HB B

WEAVER Wm., JONES G. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 78, 239-266 A catalog of co-added IRAS fluxes of Orion population stars

HBC

HBC stars are cross-identif. with IRAS PSC catalog (ref. 1985IR B)

1988HE

HECK A. 1988,Special Publ. of the CDS, No. 11 (also magnetic tape) A Bibliographical catalogue of RR Lyr stars

-

6357 RR Lyr, cross-identif., bibliographical catalogue. Updates Heck and Lakaye, 1977, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 30, 397

1988HW

HELOU G., WALKER D.W. 1988,NASA RP-1190, Vol. 7 Infrared Astronomical Satellite (IRAS), Catalogs and Atlases. Vol. 7. The Small Scale Structure Catalog

IRAS

Obsoletes SSSC catalog, ref. 1985IR D

1988H1

HERTZ P., GRINDLAY J.E. 1988,A.J. 96, 233-241 and Plates 16-18 The Einstein galactic plane survey. II. Optical observations of northern hemisphere X-ray sources

1E

67 X-ray sources, a subset of the Galactic Plane Survey covering 185 sq.^{∘}, with a median-limiting flux of 0.032 IPC counts s^{−1}. 1950 and gal. coordinates ; a few other identif. Identif. charts for 47 sources.

1988H2

HODGE P. 1988,P.A.S.P. 100, 1051-1070 A catalog of 255 new clusters in the Large Magellanic Cloud

HodgeC88

255 new clusters in 10 fields (Identif. charts), complementing the search by Hodge 1980A.J. 85, 423-431 in 5 other (peripheric) fields (Identif. charts), with the same technique (deep blue plates with the CTIO 4m telescope). Table III : (Nos 1-390) ; new clusters from both papers (15 fields) ; 1950 coordinates.

1988IR

Joint IRAS Science Working Group 1988,NASA RP-1190, Vol. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Infrared Astronomical Satellite (IRAS), Catalogs and Atlases. The Point Source Catalog

IRAS

Obsoletes PSC catalog ref. 1985IR B Vol. 2: δ 30^{∘} to 90^{∘} Vol. 3: δ 00^{∘} to 30^{∘} Vol. 4: δ -30^{∘} to 00^{∘} Vol. 5: δ -50^{∘} to -30^{∘} Vol. 6: δ -90^{∘} to -50^{∘}

1988K1

KASSIM N.E. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 68, 715-733, and Plates 181-224 The Clark Lake 30.9 MHz galactic plane survey

NEK

Synthesized beam 13.0’x11.1’ at the zenith. Contour maps and source list for the regions: 350^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 59^{∘} ; 84^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 97^{∘} ; 133^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 250^{∘} ; with |b| ≤ 2 − 3^{∘} Table 4 : 702 discrete emission sources ; 1950 coordinates

1988LE

LEISAWITZ D. 1988,NASA RP-1202 Catalog of Open Clusters and Associated Interstellar Matter

OCl-

The Catalogue name is OCISM (Open Clusters and Interstellar matter). Catalogue of data pertaining to 128 open clusters. Table 1 gives cluster names, galactic coordinates, stellar association or H II regions The IAU name (acronym C, format HHMMm±DDMM) is not given. In the catalogue the 1950 cordinates are given with the format HH.MM.m, DD.MM (for +DD) or -DD.MM (for negative decl.)

1988LO

LORTET M.-C. 1988,Bull. Inf. CDS 35, 145-154 A provisory catalogue of S Dor candidate stars in the Magellanic Clouds

-

Compilation of genuine S Dor type, and candidates or related type stars : B[e], P Cyg,.. Table 1 : Objects in LMC ordered by δ zone then by α ;

numerous cross-identif.

Table 2 : Same objects in LMC, classified by subtype Table 3 : Objects in the SMC Newly discovered related objects : SMC : LHA 115-N 82 Heydari-Malayeri, 1990A&A 234, 233-236

B[e]

RMC 40 Szeifert+ 1993A&A 280, 508-518 Genuine LBV type star, changed from B8Iae to A3Ia0

LMC : RMC 143 Parker+ 1993, Ap.J. 409, 770-775 Genuine S Dor type, from F5-F8 Ia has become a B star

LHA 120-S 154 Remillard+ 1992, ApJ. 396, 668-673, Identif. charts, 1950 coord. (04 53 17.0 -75 08 27) Symbiotic binary or LBV : Dramatic changes in spectral appearance in 1988 from a low-excitation ”FeII star” into a high-excitation state resembling symbiotic stars.

1988L1

LOISEAU N., REICH W., WIELEBINSKI R., REICH P., MUNCH W. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 75, 67-78 A survey of an area around the north ecliptic pole at λ 11 cm wavelength

LRWRM

Mapping of an area of 10^{∘} × 6^{∘} (0.01532 sr) in the radio continuum in the direction of the north ecliptic pole (α = 18h, δ = +66.5^{∘}) 469 sources detected. Table II : (Nos 1-469) ; 1950 and 2000 coordinates. Maps ; HPBW = 4.35±0.10’

1988L2

LASKER B.M., STURCH C.R., LOPEZ C., MALLAMA A.D., McLAUGHLIN S.F., RUSSELL J.L., WISNIEWSKI W.Z., GILLESPIE B.A., JENKNER H., SICILIANO E.D., KENNY D., BAUMERT J.H., GOLDBERG A.M., HENRY G.W., KEMPER E., SIEGEL M.J. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 68, 1-90, and Plates The guide star photometric catalog. I.

GSPC

All-sky set of 1477 photoelectrically determined BV sequences covering the magnitude range from 9 to 15. Table 7 : (the Catalog) ; N = 1477 ; Finding Charts.

1988L3 A

LANCE C.M. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 68, 463-485 Young, high-velocity A stars. I. Rotational velocities and a catalog of early-type stars at the South Galactic Pole.

SGPA

Table 5 : (Nos 1-305) ; 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with SB and PS I, PS II

1988L3 B

LANCE C.M. 1988,Ap.J. 334, 927-946 Young, high-velocity A stars. II. Misidentified, ejected, or unique?

SGPA

Ages, abundances, and kinematics of a large number of early-type stars at the SGP. Tables 1-3 : the 1st col. is SGPA ; the col. ID refers to SB and PS I, PS II. Table 5 : CTCS stars from ref. 1982P2 B, here named CS/22 172-12 instead of CTCS 22172-12.

1988M1

MacCONNELL D.J. 1988,A.J. 96, 354-364 New galactic carbon stars found on southern, near-infrared spectrum plates

DJM

Table I : (Nos 1-466) ; 1950 coordinates ; a few stars are cross-identif. with CCS (here designated GCCCS, ref. 1973S3+) ; and most with IRAS name No plates

1988O1

OSWALT T.D., HINTZEN P.M., LUYTEN W.J. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 66, 391-396 and Plates 21-29 Identifications and limited spectroscopy for Luyten common proper motion stars with probable white dwarf components. I. Pairs brighter than 17th magnitude

L LP LTT

Identifications are provided for 103 bright Luyten common motion (CPM) stellar systems (m_{pg} < 17.0) containing likely white dwarf (WD) components. New spectral types for 55 components. 1950 positions ; Each of the 9 subsections of Table 1 corresponds to plates 21 to 29.

1988O2

OORT M.J.A., STEEMERS W.J.G., WINDHORST R.A. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 73, 103-123 A deep 92 cm survey of the Lynx area

64W

Table II : (Nos 1-384) Table III : (Nos 385-397) additional source list

1988O3

OLSZEWSKI E.W., HARRIS H.C., SCHOMMER R.A., CANTERNA R.W. 1988,A.J. 95, 84-90 A catalog of LMC star clusters outside the Hodge-Wright atlas

OHSC

Table II : Compilation of 156 clusters outside the boundaries of the Hodge and Wright (1967) LMC atlas. Among them 37 are new ones: (Nos 1-37) 1st column. The other ones are LW (ref. 1963L5), SL (ref.1963S1), ESO, NGC, IC. 1950 coordinates accurate to 1-2 arcsec, and position (X, Y) on SRC (J) plates. Finding charts for the brighter clusters. Table III indicates a few objects misidentified as clusters in previous surveys

1988RE A

RENSON P. 1988,Bull. Inf. CDS 34, 107-115 Erreurs de designations d’etoiles Ap ou Am

-

Table of erroneous designations which appeared in the literature for Ap and Am stars

1988RE B

RENSON P. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 76, 127-135 + erratum Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 533 Liste des etoiles Ap et Am dans des amas ouverts

-

Stars that are in the field of open clusters, of those which appear in the general catalogue of Ap and Am stars

1988R1

REID N., GLASS I.S., CATCHPOLE R.M. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 232, 53-79 A survey for red variables in the LMC - II

GRV

16 sq.^{∘} area of the northern LMC. Table 2a : 1st col.: (Nos 1-126), but use GRV designation of col. 2

Cross-identif. with GR = GRRV (ref. 1985G1) for 31 stars Ordered by decreasing RA

Table 2b: N = 15 ; Additional possible red variables

Cross-identif. with GR = GRRV (ref. 1985G1)

1950 coordinates, no charts

1988R2

RIGHETTI G., GIOVANNINI G., FERETTI L. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 74, 315-324 Survey at 327 MHz of the A262 cluster region

73W

Table I: (Nos 1-308) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 327 MHz. No maps.

1988S1

SANDULEAK N., PESCH P. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 66, 387-390 and Plates 17-20 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. VII Late-type stars

CLS

132 faint red stars that show definite or strongly suspected carbon or late M-type spectra. Red magnitudes ranging from 9 to 17, area with approximate boundaries 8h15m < α < 17h30m and +29^{∘} < δ < +38^{∘} Table 1 : (N = 132, format NNNA up to NNN = 122) ; 1950 coordinates ; A few cross-identif. Identif. charts

1988S2 A

SANDULEAK N. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 66, 309-313, and Plates 11-16 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. VI. A-F stars in a region near the north galactic pole.

CAFS

Region 12h00m < α < 13h00m and +29.0^{∘} < δ < +34.0^{∘} (1950) Blue magnitudes from 5.5 to 17.5 Table 1 : (Nos 1-183) ; Finding charts

1988S2 B

PESCH P., SANDULEAK N. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 71, 549-558 and Plates 55-72 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. X. A-F stars in a region at intermediate galactic latitude primarily in Lynx and Leo Minor

CAFS

Region 8h00m < α < 11h10m and +29.0^{∘} < δ < +43.0^{∘} (1950) Blue magnitudes from 14 to 17 Table 1 : (Nos 184-723)

1988S2 C

MacCONNELL D.J., STEPHENSON C.B., PESCH P. 1993,Ap.J.Suppl. 86, 453-474 The Case low-dispersion northern sky survey. XIV. A-F stars in a region in southern Canes Venatici

CAFS

Region 12h00m < α < 14h10m and +29^{∘}00′ < δ < +38^{∘}30′(1950) excluding the region 12h00m < α < 13h00m and +29^{∘} < δ < +34^{∘} covered in ref. 1988S2 A. Blue magnitudes from 8 to 18 Table 1 : (Nos 724-1110) Fig. 2: Finding charts.

1988S3

SINNOTT R.W. 1988,Cambridge Univ. Press, ISBN 0 521 37813 3, pp. 261 NGC 2000.0

{NGC \atop IC}

13226 objects (NGC and IC) ; 2000 coordinates Include corrections from several authors and 700 from Dreyer himself

1988T1 A

TIFFT W.G., COCKE W.J. 1988,Ap.J.Suppl. 67, 1-75 Uncertainties in 21 centimeter redshifts. I. Data

TC

Table I : (Nos 1-629) ; galaxies cross-identif. with numerous other catalogues ; 1950 coordinates The 1950 coordinates in Table 1 are written very inconveniently with minus signs as separators and without leading zeroes: e.g. δ - 3- 9- 0. for TC 614 means: δ = -03^{∘}09’ 00”

0-56- 0. for TC 623 means: δ = +00^{∘}56’ 00”

1988T1 B

TIFFT W.G., HUCHTMEIER W.K. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 84, 47-58 Comparisons between 21 cm data from Effelsberg and Greenbank

TC E-

Table I : (Nos E1-E37) ; objects not in the original TC list ; 1950 coordinates ; No Identif. charts

1988T1 C

TIFFT W.G. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 73, 603-636 Properties of the redshift. I. Data and calibrations

TC

Table 2 : (Nos 631-930), Nos 630, 894-929 and many others are missing The A, B, C, P, z, b, n, w appended to the number, as explained in the footnotes to Table 2, are not part of the nomenclature

1988VH

VON HIPPEL T., BELL BURNELL S.J., WILLIAMS P.M. 1988,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 74, 431-442 A working catalogue of Herbig-Haro objects

HH

Catalogue of 184 Herbig Haro objects from the literature search complete to 1987.5 . Updates Herbig ref. 1974H2 A . HH 17 and 48 (ref. 1974H2 A and C) have been deleted from the catalogue: HH 17 is a reflexion nebula, HH 48 is a T Tau star. Table I : N = 184 objects:

HH and subcomponents (e.g. HH 14C), and others names (e.g. NGC 2023/HH 2A) accurate 1950 coordinates ; proper motions radial velocities and spectral information Cross reference to the two best finding charts for each object

Table II : N = 11 ; Candidate Herbig-Haro objects ; 1950 coordinates Table III: Herbig-Haro flows Table IV : Cross-identif. to alternative HH object names

1988W1

WARWICK R.S., NORTON A.J., TURNER M.J.L., WATSON M.G., WILLINGALE R. 1988,M.N.R.A.S. 232, 551-564 A survey of the galactic plane with EXOSAT

GPS

Distribution of 2-6 keV X-ray emission in the galactic plane in the first and fourth galactic quadrants, a series of scanning observations with the medium-energy proportional counters on EXOSAT. Table 1 : (N = 70) ; The sources are ordered by galactic longitude. GPS Galactic Plane Survey N = 70 ; format HHMM±DDd

1988W2

WALTER F.M., BROWN A., MATHIEU R.D., MYERS P.C., VRBA F.J. 1988,A.J. 96, 297-325 X-ray sources in regions of star formation. III. Naked T Tauri stars associated with the Taurus-Auriga complex

NTTS

Results from a multispectral investigation of stellar counterparts of X-ray sources in the general region of the Taurus-Auriga star formation complex. 28 new low-mass pre-main sequence ”naked T Tauri stars” Table I, 33 stars. Cross-identif. with TAP (ref. 1987F1) 1950.0 coordinates given in Table II

1989AC

ABELL G.O., CORWIN H.G.Jr, OLOWIN R.P. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 1-138 A catalog of rich clusters of galaxies

All-sky ACO catalog: revision of Abell’s northern catalog (ref. 1958A1) and new southern catalogs.

Table 3 :(Nos 1-2712) revised northern clusters ACO
Table 4 :(Nos 2713-4076) southern clusters  ACO
Table 5 :(Nos 1-1174) supplementary southern clusters ACOS

1950 and 2000 coordinates

1989A1

AARONSON M., BLANCO V.M., COOK K.H., SCHECHTER P.L. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 70, 637-659 Southern Milky Way carbon stars: new candidates, JHK photometry, and radial velocities

Table 2 : Puppis carbon stars (Nos 1-44) and cross-identif.  PupC
Table 3 : Puppis extension carbon stars (Nos 1-45) and cross-identif.  PpxC
Table 4 : Vela carbon stars (Nos 1-70) and cross-identif.  VelC
Table 5 : Carina carbon stars (Nos 1-108) and cross-identif.  CarC
Table 6 : Centaurus carbon stars (Nos 1-100) and cross-identif.  CenC
Table 7 : Crux carbon stars (Nos 1-67) and cross-identif.  CruC
Table 8 : Circinus carbon stars (Nos 1-39) and cross-identif.  CirC

1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with CCS (ref. 1973S3) and a few other names For these stars and stars from other surveys (Table 9), JHK photometry (520 stars), velocities (393 stars), and improved coordinates

1989A2 A

ABRAMIAN G.V., GIGOIAN K.S. 1989,Astrofizica 31, 601-603 and Plates The First Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. Late-type stars. I. Zone +37^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ +41^{∘}

FBS

(Nos 1-25) ; Late-type (M and Carbon) stars : FBS format L-NN Also in the table, column (2), same objects with a format HHMM+DDd: FBS HHMM+DDd 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1989A2 B

ABRAMIAN G.V., LIPOVETSKY V.A., STEPANIAN J.A. 1990,Astrofizica 32, 29-38 The First Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. Blue stellar objects. I. Zone δ = +39^{∘}

FBS

(Nos 1-100) ; Blue stellar objects : FBS format B-NNN Also in the table, column (2), same objects with a format HHMM+DDd: FBS HHMM+DDd 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1989A2 C

ABRAMIAN G.V., LIPOVETSKY V.A., MICKAELIAN A.M., STEPANIAN J.A. 1990,Astrofizica 33, 213-221 The First Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. Blue stellar objects. II. Zone δ = +39^{∘}

FBS

(Nos 101-203) ; Blue stellar objects : FBS format B-NNN Also in the table, column (2), same objects with a format HHMM+DDd: FBS HHMM+DDd 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1989A2 D

ABRAHAMIAN H.V., LIPOVETSKY V.A., MICKAELIAN A.M., STEPANIAN J.A. 1990,Astrofizica 33, 345-350 The First Byurakan Spectral Sky Survey. Blue stellar objects. III. Zone δ = +43^{∘}

FBS

(Nos 204-323) ; Blue stellar objects : FBS format B-NNN Also in the table, column (2), same objects with a format HHMM+DDd: FBS HHMM+DDd 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts

1989BA

BARBIER-BROSSAT M. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 80, 67-71 Catalogue de vitesses radiales moyennes stellaires (catalogue sur bande magnetique)

-

Magnetic tape and print N = 6451 ; more than 4500 were not included in earlier General Catalogues (for instances ref. 1972AB A,B,C)

1989BC

BARBON R., CAPPELLARO E., TURATTO M. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 81, 421-443 The Asiago Supernova Catalogue

SN

Supersedes ref. 1984BC Catalog of supernovae which tabulates the main data relative to all extragalactic SNe discovered up to 1988 December 31, and to their parent galaxies N = 661 of which 267 are classified Table 1 : SNe ordered chronologically Table 2 : SNe ordered by right ascension 1950 coordinates and discoverer

1989BF

BATTEN A.H., FLETCHER J.M., McCARTHY D.G. 1989,Publ. Dom. Astrophys. Obs., Vol. 17, 1-129 Eighth Catalogue of the Orbital Elements of Spectroscopic Binary Systems

-

Updates the seventh catalogue (ref. 1978BF). Orbital elements for 1469 spectroscopic binary systems and critical notes on most of the systems ; 1900 coordinates. Binary X-ray and radio pulsars are included. The authors do not wish their serial number (col. 1) to be used as an identifier. Finding list by constellations (p. 305-313) and HR number (ref. 1982HJ) p. 314-317. The relevant references are given for each star in the Notes.

1989B1

BHATIA R.K., MacGILLIVRAY H.T. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. 211, 9-24 An automated search for star clusters in the Magellanic Clouds. I. Description of the technique and application to a 6 sq.^{∘} field near the bar of the LMC

BMG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-282) ; clusters in LMC ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif.

1989C1

CASWELL J.L., LANDECKER T.L., ROGER R.S. 1989,A.J. 97, 1721-1726 Observations of the galactic radio structure CTB 63 (G47.5+6.0)

Field centered at α 18h53m30s, δ +15^{∘}40’ (1950) Table I : (Nos 1-93) ; 1950 coordinates

ν = 408 MHz ; a few cross-identif.

field 3.7^{∘} in radius ; map with 6.5′ × 13′ EWxNS resolution

22P

Table II : (Nos 1-68) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 1420 MHz ; field 1.1^{∘} in diameter

23P

1989C2

CHAVIRA E. 1989,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 17, 109-110 New list of blue galaxies

ChaG

Region centered at α = 02h30m, δ = −6.5^{∘} (1950) Table 1 : (Nos 1-24) ; 1950 coordinates Identif. charts (Fig. 1-2)

1989EH

ENGELS D., HESKE A. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 81, 323-334 A reference catalogue of maser and thermal emission from circum- stellar SiO molecules

-

A catalog of 191 stellar objects showing SiO maser or thermal emission in at least one transition: 128 M-supergiants and Mira variables, 29 IRC- and AFGL- sources, 32 OH/IR stars, the star forming region Orion KL, and the symbiotic star H1-36

1989FL

FULLMER L., LONDSALE C.J. 1989,JPL D-1932, Version 2 Cataloged Galaxies and Quasars observed in the IRAS Survey. Version 2

IRAS

Obsoletes ref. 1985IR E

1989F1

FERGUSON H.C. 1989,A.J. 98, 367-418 Population studies in groups and clusters of galaxies. II. A catalog of galaxies in the central 3.5^{∘} of the Fornax cluster

FCC

Table II : (Nos 1-340) ; galaxies classified as cluster members and likely cluster members ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif.

Table III: (Nos B1-B2338)

galaxies classified as possible members

and likely background galaxies

(The letter B in the format means Background)

1989F2

FEIGELSON E.D., KRISS G.A. 1989,Ap.J. 338, 262-276 Soft X-ray observations of pre-main sequence stars in the Chamaeleon Dark Cloud

CHX

1^{∘} × 2^{∘} in the Chamaeleon I star-forming cloud. Table 2 : (Nos 1-22) IPC X-ray sources ; 1950 coordinates Table 3 : Possible optical candidates, format NNa Table 4 : CTIO observations of new optical candidates, format NNa See the Appendix for additional identif. and data on stars.

1989G1

GREEN D.A. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 277-299 The DRAO Galactic plane survey. I. ℓ = 140^{∘}, b= 0^{∘}

282 compact radio sources down to a flux density of ≃ 50 mJy, 81 compact radio sources down to a flux density of ≃ 6 mJy. Table II : (Nos 1-282) ; 1950 coordinates

ν = 408 MHz ; resolution 3.8′ × 3.4′

a few cross-identif. ; Identif. charts (Fig. 3)

26P

Table III: (Nos 1-81) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 1420 MHz ; resolution 1.1′ × 1.0′

27P

Table IV : Associated 26P and 27P sources

1989H1

HUGHES S.M.G. 1989,A.J. 97, 1634-1687 Long-period variables in the Large Magellanic Cloud. I. Search and discovery

SHV

Table III : 471 Mira variables, 572 SRa variables

The position (1950 coordinates) is incorporated into the numbering

Finding Charts

1989L1

LANDECKER T.L., PINEAULT S., ROUTLEDGE D., VANELDIK J.F. 1989,M.N.R.A.S. 237, 277-297 The interaction of the supernova remnant VRO 42.05.01 with its H I environment

13P

Table 1: (Nos 1-37) ; 1950 coordinates ; ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif.

1989MK

MOSHIR M., KOPAN G., CONROW T., McCALLON H., HACKING P., GREGORICH D., ROHRBACH G., MELNYK M., RICE W., FULLMER L., WHITE J., CHESTER T. 1989, Explanatory Supplement to the IRAS Faint Source Survey, Version 1

IRAS

FSS (or FSC) catalog

1989ML

MARKARIAN B.E., LIPOVETSKY V.A., STEPANIAN J.A., ERASTOVA L.K., SHAPOVAL-OVA A.I. 1989,Soob. Spets. Astrofiz. Obs. Akad. Nauk. SSSR 62, 5-117 The First Byurakan Survey. A catalogue of galaxies with UV-continuum

MRK

Galaxies with UV-continuum detected during the First Byurakan Survey (FBS): compilation of the Markarian galaxies, acronym MRK (ref. 1967M1) Table 5 : (Nos 1501-1515) 15 new Galaxies Table 7 : (Nos 1-1515) ordering by α

1950 coordinates ; physical data

Table 8 : cross-identif. with common names for Nos 1-1515 (several catalogues) Table 9 : finding list of common names Another comprehensive review on Markarian Galaxies Nos 1-1500 is by Mazzarella+ ref. 1986MB

1989MN

MERMILLIOD J.-C., NITSCHELM C. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 81, 401-407 Up-to-date DDO photoelectric photometric catalogue

-

Magnetic tape ; data published until the end of 1988 8034 measurements of 6138 stars

1989MO

MOREL M. 1989,Published by M. Morel, 18 Elizabeth Cook Drive, Rankin Park NSW 2287, Australia A Visual Atlas of the Small Magellanic Cloud

-

This Atlas consists of the following parts: •Catalogues of plotted objects (clusters and nebulae; variable stars) presented as appendices •Master charts A and B covering the entire SMC region 0h15m < α < 1h45m, −76^{∘} < δ < −70^{∘} •Stars down to V = 14.0 or 14.5 •Ten large scale charts showing certain interesting areas of the SMC in greater detail and resolution

Appendix 1 : clusters and nebulae Appendix 2 : variables stars Appendix 3 : index to HV stars Appendix 4 : suspected variables Appendix 5 : precession tables Charts for selected areas

1989M1

MAIA M.A.G., DA COSTA L.N., LATHAM D.W. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 69, 809-829 A catalog of southern groups of galaxies

MDCG

Group catalog based on the Southern Sky Redshift Survey, consisting of 2028 galaxies, covering 1.75 sr of the southern galactic cap. Table 1 and 2 : (N = 87 groups) Table 3 : cross-comparison with HG = HGCG

DV = DVCG K = KLEM Constellation Name

1989M2 A

MAZA J., RUIZ M.T., GONZALEZ L.E., WISCHNJEWSKY M. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 69, 349-352 and Plates 7, 8 Calan-Tololo survey. I. Seyfert 1 galaxies

CTS

First list from the Calan-Tololo survey: em.-line galaxies, quasars, and galaxies with strong UVexcess Areas and nomenclature explained in Fig. 1: letters A, B, C, R, J, M; letter K refers to the area covered by Smith+ (ref. 1976S4) original Tololo survey, acronym Tol This survey is an extension of the original Tololo survey Table 1 : (Nos 1-30) ; 1950 coordinates ; Finding charts An other nomenclature with a format ANN.NN is used in the second column, and explained in fig. 1. Ex.: B25.02 is the second object found on the 25th plate of strip B

1989M2 B

MAZA J., RUIZ M.T. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 69, 353-363 Spectrophotometry of Calan-Tololo Seyfert galaxies: objects from list 1

CTS

Spectrophotometry for the 30 Seyfert galaxies in ref. 1989M2 A

1989M2 C

MAZA J., RUIZ M.T., PENA M., GONZALEZ L.E., WISCHNJEWSKY M. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 89, 389-397 Calan-Tololo survey. III. HII galaxies

CTS

Table 1 : (Nos 1001-1042) ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts An other nomenclature with a format ANN.NN is used in the second column (see ref. 1989M2+)

1989M2 D

MAZA J., RUIZ M.T., GONZALEZ L.E., WISCHNJEWSKY M. 1992,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 24, 147-149 Calan-Tololo survey. II. Seyfert 1 galaxies

CTS

Table 1 : (Nos 31-70) ; 1950 coordinates

1989M2 E

MAZA J., RUIZ M.T., GONZALEZ L.E., WISCHNJEWSKY M., ANTEZANA R. 1993,Rev. Mex. Astr. Astrofis. 25, 51-57 Calan-Tololo survey. V: Two hundred new southern quasars

CTS

Table 1 : (Nos 201-400) ; 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts An other nomenclature with a format ANN.NN is used in the second column (see ref. 1989M2+)

1989PF A

PATUREL G., FOUQUE P., BOTTINELLI L., GOUGUENHEIM L. 1989,Monographies de la base de donnees extragalactiques, No. 1, 3 Vol. Catalogue of principal galaxies

PGC

The catalogue contains 73197 galaxies and 131602 identificators ; 2000 and 1950 coordinates. A CD-ROM (PGC-ROM 1992) is available and described by Paturel+ in 1993, Bull. Inf. CDS 42, p. 33-38. Three Vol.: Vol. 1: Introduction and finding list Vol. 2: Galaxies between 0h and 11h47m57.5s in α (2000) Vol. 3: Galaxies between 11h47m and 24h in α (2000)

1989PF B

PATUREL G., FOUQUE P., BOTTINELLI L., GOUGUENHEIM L. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 80, 299-315 An extragalactic database. I. The catalogue of principal galaxies

PGC

General description of the PGC Catalogue (ref. 1989PF A)

1989PF C

PATUREL G., BOTTINELLI L., GOUGUENHEIM L., FOUQUE P. 1990,Monographies de la base de donnees extragalactiques, No. 2 Catalogue of HI data

PGC

Hydrogen I Catalogue (HIC): Compilation of raw HI-data (line-widths, velocities, fluxes) from 440 references ; 1950 coordinates. A catalogue of weighted mean HI-parameters for 6439 galaxies has been derived elsewhere (HHIC catalogue, ref. 1989PF D).

1989PF D

BOTTINELLI L., GOUGUENHEIM L., FOUQUE P., PATUREL G. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 82, 391-488 An extragalactic data base. II. The HI data

PGC

The Homogeneized Hydrogen I Catalogue (HHIC) : weighted mean HI-parameters for 6439 galaxies, as taken from ref. 1989PF C

1989PF E

PATUREL G., PETIT C., KOGOSHVILI N., DUBOIS P., BOTTINELLI L., FOUQUE P., GARNIER R., GOUGUENHEIM L. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 91, 371-397 An extragalactic data base. IV. Errors and misprints in catalogues of galaxies

-

More than 1500 errors or misprints which plague proper identif. of galaxies in the following catalogues: NGC, IC, MCG, UGC, CGCG, ESO, MRK, SGC, KARA, Fairall, RC2 (ref. 1976D3), ZW-compact, UGCA, TULLY, NGC2000, ARAK, VCC, DDO, IGVV, SBSG, PGC

1989PF F

BOTTINELLI L., DURAND N., FOUQUE P., GARNIER R., GOUGUENHEIM L., PATUREL G., TEERIKORPI P. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 93, 173-188 Observational data for kinematics of the local universe. I. Radial velocity measurements

PGC

303 new optical and HI radial velocities for several PGC galaxies.

1989RU

RUFENER F. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 469-481 Catalogue of stars measured in the Geneva Observatory photometric system (fourth edition)

-

Updates ref. 1981RU N = 29400 ; ℓ, b and 1900 equatorial coordinates ; Cross-identif. Printed and magnetic tape versions.

1989R1

RAMELLA M., GELLER M.J., HUCHRA J.P. 1989,Ap.J. 344, 57-74 Groups of galaxies in the Center for Astrophysics redshift survey

RGH

Table 4 : 128 Groups with 3 or more members ; don’t use the numbering of col. 1, use the numbering of table 5, where the groups are ordered by RA; a total of 1766 Galaxies. Table 5 : Group properties, for 92 of the previous groups ; 1950 coordinates ; the 1st column (a number between 1 and 128) gives the numbering to be used. Field: 8h ≤ α ≤ 17h; 26.5^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ 38.5^{∘}

1989R2

ROBERTSON T.H., JORDAN T.M. 1989,A.J. 98, 1354-1357 and Plates 44-46 Faint Hα emission objects near the equatorial selected areas

RJHA

An objective-prism survey of fields centered on the 24 Kapteyn Selected Areas along the celestial equator. Table 1 : (Nos 1-120) ; 1900 and 2000 coordinates ; Finding charts ; a few cross-identif.

1989ST

STEPHENSON C.B. 1989,Publ. Warner and Swasey Obs. Vol. 3, No. 2, 214 pp. A General Catalog of Cool Galactic Carbon Stars, Second edition

CGCS

Updates the first edition: ref. 1973S3 A (CCS) N = 5987 ; 1900 coordinates ; Numerous cross-identif. ; no identif. charts The catalogue is referred to as the CCGCS by the author.

1989S1

SANDULEAK N. 1989,A.J. 98, 825-842 Known and suspected late-type supergiants in the Small Magellanic Cloud

SkKM

Table I : (Nos 1-372) ; Cross-identif. ; Identif. charts

1989S2

STROM K.M., NEWTON G., STROM S.E., SEAMAN R.L., CARRASCO L., CRUZ-GONZALEZ I., SERRANO A., GRASDALEN G.L. 1989,Ap.J.Suppl. 71, 183-217 and Plates 44-54 A study of the stellar population in the Lynds 1641 dark cloud. I. The IRAS catalog sources

KMS

Table 1 : (Nos 1-123) ; cross-identif. with IRAS name (Point Source Catalog) Optical and near-infrared photometry, spectroscopic observations of a subset (Table 4)

1989S3

SCHWERING P.B.W., ISRAEL F.P. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 79, 79-103 Infrared observations of the Magellanic Clouds. I. The Small Magellanic Cloud.

LI-SMC

Results of IRAS pointed observations in four infrared wavelength bands (12, 25, 60 and 100 μm)

Table IV : (Nos 1-219) Table A2 :(Nos 220-249) in SE and SW periphery of the SMC 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with IRAS name (IRAS Point Source Catalog). 72 sources are new, not included in either the PSC or SSC IRAS Catalogs For maps, use 1990SI

1989S4

SCHWERING P.B.W. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 79, 105-145 Infrared observations of the Magellanic Clouds. II. The Large Magellanic Cloud.

LI-LMC

Results of IRAS pointed observations in four infrared wavelength bands (12, 25, 60 and 100 μm) Table III : (Nos 1-1823) Table A2 :(Nos 1824-1891) in the periphery of the LMC 1950 coordinates ; cross-identif. with IRAS name (IRAS Point Source Catalog). 802 sources are new, not included in either the PSC or SSSC IRAS Catalogs. For maps, use 1990SI

1989TL

TE LINTEL HEKKERT P., VERSTEEGE-HENSEL H.A., HABING H.J., WIERTZ M. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 399-430 A catalogue of stellar 1612 MHz maser sources

-

Objects with 1612 MHz maser emission extracted from the literature published between 1963 and 1983 Table I : (Nos 1-442) ; 1950 equatorial and galactic coordinates ; cross-identif. with IRAS and usual names

1989VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1989,ESO Scientific Report No. 7 A Catalogue of Quasars and Active Nuclei (4th Edition)

-

Updated version of ref. 1987VV Table 1 : 4169 quasars Table 2 : 117 BL Lac objects Table 3 : 1108 active galaxies (of which 358 are Seyfert 1)

1989V1

VALLEE J.P., ROGER R.S. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 77, 31-38 Radio surveys and source counts at 408 MHz and 1420 MHz towards the Abell 1314 cluster of galaxies

Field centered at α = 11h 31.5m, δ = +49^{∘}20’, radii 3.7^{∘}and 1.07^{∘} at 408 and 1420 MHz respectively. Table II : (Nos 1-169) ; 1950 coordinates

ν = 408 MHz

21P

Table III : (Nos 1-65) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 1420 MHz

20P

1989V2

VAN DEN BERGH S. 1989,A.J. 97, 1556-1560 and Plates 81-90 A survey of high-luminosity spirals in the direction of The Great Attractor

VDBG

Table II : (Nos 1-191) ; 1950 coordinates centered at ℓ = 307^{∘}, b = +9^{∘} ; α =13^{∘}15.5m, δ =-53^{∘}24’ (1950)

1989W1 A

WIRAMIHARDJA S.D., KOGURE T., YOSHIDA S., OGURA K., NAKANO M. 1989,P.A.S.J. 41, 155-174 Survey observations of Emission-Line Stars in the Orion region. I. The Kiso area A-0904

KisoHA

Hα emission objects in a 5 × 5sq.^{∘} area centered at α = 05h40m, δ = 0.0^{∘} Table 2 : (Nos 1-236) ; area A-904: format 904-NNN ;

1950 coordinates ; V magnitude ; Identif. charts ; a few cross-identif.

1989W1 B

KOGURE T., YOSHIDA S., WIRAMIHARDJA S.D., NAKANO M., IWATA T., OGURA K. 1989,P.A.S.J. 41, 1195-1213 Survey observations of Emission-Line Stars in the Orion region. II. The Kiso area A-0903

KisoHA

Hα emission objects in a 5 × 5sq.^{∘} area centered at α = 05h20m, δ = 00.0^{∘} The field includes the association Ori OB1a and b. Table 2 : (Nos 1-257) ; area A-0903: format 903-NNN ;

eq. (1950) and gal. coordinates ; V magnitude

Identif. charts ; a few cross-identif.

1989W1 C

WIRAMIHARDJA S.D., KOGURE T., YOSHIDA S., NAKANO M., OGURA K., IWATA T. 1991,P.A.S.J. 43, 27-73 Survey observations of emission-line stars in the Orion region. III. The Kiso areas A-0975 and A-0976

KisoHA

Hα emission objects in 5 × 5sq.^{∘} areas centered at α = 05h20m, δ = -05^{∘} for area A-0975 α = 05h40m, δ = -05^{∘} for area A-0976 Table 3 : (Nos 1-175) ; area A-0975: format 975-NNN Table 4 : (Nos 1-415) ; area A-0976: format 976-NNN ; this field contains Ori A and the LDN 1641 complex. eq. (1950) and gal. coordinates ; V magnitude ; Identif. charts ; numerous cross-identif. as explained p. 31 Table 5 : associated IRAS Point-Source Table 6 : associated molecular outflows

1989W1 D

WIRAMIHARDJA S.D., KOGURE T., YOSHIDA S., OGURA K., NAKANO M. 1993,P.A.S.J. 45, 643-653, and Plates 3-10 Survey observations of Emission-Line Stars in the Orion region. IV. The Kiso areas A-1047 and A-1048.

KisoHA

Hα emission objects in 5 × 5sq.^{∘} areas centered at α = 05h20m, δ = -10^{∘} for area A-1047 α = 05h40m, δ = -10^{∘} for area A-1048 Table 4 : (Nos 1-36) ; area A-1047: format 1047-NN Table 5 : (Nos 1-79) ; area A-1048: format 1048-NN eq. (1950) and gal. coordinates ; V magnitude ; Identif. charts Plates 3-10; numerous crossidentif. as explained p. 645 Table 7 : associated IRAS Point-Source

1989W2

WEST M.J. 1989,Ap.J. 347, 610-626 On the morphology of superclusters.

WSCG

Table 1 : (Nos 1-48) ; superclusters of G

1989W3 A

WROBLEWSKI H., TORRES C. 1989,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 78, 231-247 New proper-motion stars south of declination -40^{∘} and right ascension between 00h and 04h30m

WT

Table II : (Nos 1-144) ; 1950 and 2000 coordinates Photographic magnitudes range from 11.0 to 18.0 Finding charts

1989W3 B

WROBLEWSKI H., TORRES C. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 91, 129-169 New proper-motion stars south of declination -40^{∘} and right ascension between 04h30m and 16h00m

WT

Table 2 : (Nos 145-521) ; 1950 and 2000 coordinates Photographic magnitudes range from 7.0 to 18.5 Finding charts

1990BL

BENSON P.J., LITTLE-MARENIN I.R., WOODS T.C., ATTRIDGE J.M., BLAIS K.A., RUDOLPH D.B., RUBIERA M.E., KEEFE H.L. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 74, 911-1074 A catalog of observations for stellar masers

-

Catalog of almost 3000 stellar sources which have been searched for maser emission from the H2O, SiO, and/or OH molecules Of the sources listed, 368 were detected in H2O, 209 in SiO, and 713 in OH. Table 1 : (Nos 1-2958) ;

1950 coordinates ; alternate names

(many IRAS names are not quoted, the IRAS PSC was not searched) the galactic coordinates are not quoted (p. 913-960)

Table 2 : References for both detections and nondetections (N means not detected)

for each of the three molecules (p. 961-1060)

Table 3 : References ordered by code number (p. 1061-1069)

1990BP

BARBIER-BROSSAT M., PETIT M., FIGON P., GERBAL M., MARTIN S. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 85, 885-888 Catalogue bibliographique de vitesses radiales stellaires

-

This catalogue continues ref. 1986BP, and includes ≃ 24200 ref. for Galactic, Large and Small Magellanic Clouds stars, from 1970 to 1985. Regularly updated

1990B1

BINGGELI B., TARENGHI M., SANDAGE A. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. 228, 42-60 The abundance and morphological segregation of dwarf galaxies in the field

BTS

(Nos 1-179) dwarf and dwarf candidate galaxies in the field defined as the space outside of rich clusters of Galaxies. 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. ; no plates

1990B2

BLANCO V.M., McCARTHY M.F. 1990,A.J. 100, 674-685 and Plates 69-78 Identification of 849 cool-carbon LMC stars

LMC-BM

Extension of the BMB survey of Blanco V.M.+ (ref. 1980B1 ) to 49 additional fields (the previous fields were Nos 15, 22 and 26 of Table I). Table II : N = 849 ; 1950 coordinates ; plates ; a few cross-identif. with SP77 (ref. 1977S3), LI-LMC (ref. 1989S4), Westerlund 1960, Uppsala Obs. Ann. 4, 1

1990F1

FERGUSON H.C., SANDAGE A. 1990,A.J. 100, 1-31 Population studies in groups and clusters of galaxies. III. A catalog of galaxies in five nearby groups

FSG

Table II : (Nos 1-52)  G in Leo group  format II-NN
Table III: (Nos 1-79)  G in Dorado group  format III-NN
Table IV : (Nos 1-120)  G in NGC 1400 group  format IV-NNN
Table V : (Nos 1-162)  G in NGC 5044 group  format V-NNN
Table VI : (Nos 1-375)  G in Antlia group  format VI-NNN

1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. ; No identif. chart.

1990G1

GURWELL M., HODGE P. 1990,P.A.S.P. 102, 849-853 Galaxies behind the Large Magellanic Cloud

GH

List of 96 galaxies brigter than V = 16.5, seen through the LMC 11 fields; no identif. chart,

1990G2 A

GIOIA I.M., MACCACARO T., SCHILD R.E., WOLTER A., STOCKE J.T., MORRIS S.L., HENRY J.P. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 72, 567-619 The Einstein Observatory Extended Medium-Sensitivity Survey. I. X-ray data and analysis

EMSS

A rediscussion and extension of the Medium-sensitivity survey (Gioia+, ref. 1984G2) with a detection threshold 4rms. Table 3 : Catalog ; N = 835 serendipitous sources detected in IPC images at |b| > 20^{∘}; 1950 coordinates

1990G2 B

STOCKE J.T., MORRIS S.L., GIOIA I.M., MACCACARO T., SCHILD R.E., WOLTER A., FLEMING T.A., HENRY J.P. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 76, 813-874 The Einstein Observatory Extended Medium-Sensitivity Survey. II. The optical identifications

EMSS

Table 4 : Optical identifications of the EMSS (Extended Medium Sensitivity Survey) ; N = 835 This paper is quoted as EMSS II

1990G2 C

MACCACARO T., DELLA CECA R., GIOIA I.M., MORRIS S.L., STOCKE J.T., WOLTER A. 1991,Ap.J. 374, 117-133 The properties of X–ray selected active galactic nuclei. I. Luminosity function, cosmological evolution, and contribution to the diffuse X-ray background

EMSS

Data for a sample of 427 EMSS X-ray sources from ref. 1990G2 A

1990I1 A

IRWIN M.J., DEMERS S., KUNKEL W.E. 1990,A.J. 99, 191-200 A blue stellar link between the Magellanic Clouds

IDK

Table III : (Nos 1-6) ; 1950 coordinates ; Blue stellar associations Identif. chart No. 6 is studied in ref. 1990I1 B ; Nos 1, 3, 5 are studied in ref. 1990I1 C

1990I1 B

DEMERS S., GRONDIN L., IRWIN M.J., KUNKEL W.E. 1991,A.J. 101, 911-921 Young stars between the Magellanic Clouds. II. An association on the far-west side of the LMC halo

IDK

CCD BV photometry of a group of N = 196 stars in 3 fields of the southwest LMC halo: C 0421-7400 = IDK 6 (ref. 1990I1 A), and lateral E and W fields (1 pixel = 0.407 arcsec, 5.4x5.4 arcmin per field). Format 6:NNN for stars in IDK 6 ; Identif. chart

1990I1 C

GRONDIN L., DEMERS S., KUNKEL W.E. 1992,A.J. 103, 1234-1251 Young stars between the Magellanic Clouds. III. Overall properties of associations: a shallow mass function

IDK

CCD BV photometry and maps of blue stars located in the bridge of the Magellanic Clouds, in the associations IDK 1, 3, and 5 (ref. 1990I1 A) Characteristics of the associations 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 in Table 6

1990J1

JONCAS G., HIGGS L.A. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 82, 113-144 The DRAO galactic-plane survey. II. Field at ℓ = 105^{∘}

Table II : (Nos 1-213) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 408 MHz ; a few cross-identif.

24P

Table IV : (Nos 1-92) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 1420 MHz ; a few cross-identif

25P

Spectral indices (Table VI) ; Maps

1990K1

KARACHENTSEV I.D., KOPYLOV A.I. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 243, 390-399 Galaxy redshift survey in a narrow strip crossing the Coma cluster

ZCOM

(Nos 1-379) ; 1950 coordinates list of galaxies brighter than 18 mag with the coordinates in the range α = [10h42m; 15h28m]; δ = [+28^{∘}10′; +28^{∘}20′]

1990LR

LOPEZ DE COCA P., ROLLAND A., RODRIGUEZ E., GARRIDO R. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 83, 51-69 Empirical P-L-C relation for δ Scuti stars. A catalogue

-

Extensive and up to date list of 192 δ Sct stars; all have a HD number and a few other identif.

1990LS A

LASKER B.M., STURCH C.R., McLEAN B.J., RUSSELL J.L., JENKNER H., SHARA M.M. 1990,A.J. 99, 2019-2058 The Guide Star Catalog. I. Astronomical foundations and image processing

GSC

The Guide Star Catalog (GSC) has been constructed to support the operational requirement of the Hubble Space Telescope for off-axis stars. It contains approximately 1.9x10^{7} stars and other objects in the sixth to fifteenth magnitude range.

1990LS B

RUSSELL J.L., LASKER B.M., McLEAN B.J., STURCH C.R., JENKNER H. 1990,A.J. 99, 2059-2081 The Guide Star Catalog. II. Photometric and astrometric models and solutions

GSC

Models, algorithms, and procedures used to calibrate the all-sky set of objects identified and measured.

1990LS C

JENKNER H., LASKER B.M., STURCH C.R., McLEAN B.J., SHARA M.M., RUSSELL J.L. 1990,A.J. 99, 2082-2154 The Guide Star Catalog. III. Production, database organization, and population statistics

GSC

Object names are of the form GSC rrrrr NNNNN, where rrrrr is an internal region number, and NNNNN is an ordinal within the region. Each object is given a unique name.

1990L1

LONG K.S., BLAIR W.P., KIRSHNER R.P., WINKLER P.F. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 72, 61-73, and Plates 1-45 An atlas of confirmed and candidate supernova remnants in M33

SNR

Table 3: SNR and SNR candidates with a format based on rounded 1950 eq.coordinates; a few cross-identif.

1990M1 A

McGILCHRIST M.M., BALDWIN J.E., RILEY J.M., TITTERINGTON D.J., WALDRAM E.M., WARNER P.J. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 246, 110-122 and Microfiche MN 246/1 The 7C survey of radio sources at 151 MHz - two regions centred at α 10h28m, δ 41^{∘}, and α 06h28m, δ 45^{∘}

7C

7C survey, with the Cambridge Low-Frequency Synthesis Telescope at 151 MHz, angular resolution of 70x70 cosec δ arcsec^{2}, limiting flux density of 80mJy. N = 4723 ; Available on microfiches (specimen shown in Table A1) ; 1950 coordinates ; characteristics of the instrument given in Table 1 ; field centers in Table 2

1990M1 B

McGILCHRIST M.M., RILEY J.M. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 246, 123-133 The 7C survey of radio sources at 151 MHz: a search for low-frequency variability

7C

Variability in the 151-MHz flux density of radio sources, on a time-scale of 1 yr, using the Cambridge Low Frequency Synthesis Telescope in a complete sample of 811 unresolved sources with S(151) > 0.3Jy

1990NM A

NITSCHELM C., MERMILLIOD J.C. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 82, 331-337 Up-to-date Walraven VBLUW photoelectric photometric catalogue

-

The up-to-date catalogue, on magnetic tape, contains the data published until the end of 1988 (6022 measurements, for 5564 stars) The stars are identified by their Lausanne Identif. code (LID) ; numerous cross-identif. ; 1950 coordinates Updates Python, 1979 Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 38, 463-464

1990NM B

NITSCHELM C., MERMILLIOD J.C. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 85, 839-844 Photometric catalogue in the Eggen modified uvby system

-

The catalogue, on magnetic tape, contains the data published until the end of 1989 (5036 measurements, for 4469 stars) The stars are identified by their Lausanne Identif. code (LID) ; numerous cross-identif. ; 1950 coordinates

1990P1

PINEAULT S., CHASTENAY P. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 246, 169-182 Radio continuum observations of a galactic field centred on the supernova remnant G73.9+0.9

Table 3 : (Nos 1-66) ; 1950 coordinates, ν = 408 MHz ; a few cross-identif. ; resolution 3.4′ × 5.8′

14P

Table 4 : (Nos 1-52) ; 1950 coordinates, ν = 1420 MHz ; resolution 1.0′ × 1.7′

15P

1990Q1

QUINTANA H., WHITE R.A. 1990,Astrophys. Space Sci. 173, 265-292 A partial list of southern clusters of galaxies

Table II :  (Nos 1-187) ; 1950 coordinates ; Position (x,y) on ESO plates  QWCG

Table III: (Nos 1-80) ; Supplementary list of faint clusters ; 1950 coordinates ; Position (x,y) on ESO plates

QWCGS

Table IV : Cluster redshifts

1990R1

REID N., TINNEY C., MOULD J. 1990,Ap.J. 348, 98-119 Luminous asymptotic giant branch stars in the Large Magellanic Cloud

TRM

Field from ∼ 05h00m to 05h45m, δ > −68^{∘}20′ ”LMC (North) Field” No Identif. charts. Table 3 : (Nos 1-158) ; 1950 coordinates ; association with IRAS PSC is indicated.

IR fluxes

Table 4 : selects stellar sources and gives a few cross-identif.

V, V − I, a few radial velocities.

Table 5 : data for LMC superg. (with only their HV name). Appendix A Table 9 A. : data on stars from ref. 1987M2 in Shapley III (labelled X,Y,Z)

and from ref. 1985R1 (labelled A,B) Table 9 B. : data on stars WOH and WOHG ref. 1981W1, labelled S (Supergiant) or G (giant)

1990R2

REID N., MOULD J. 1990,Ap.J. 360, 490-503 An asymptotic giant branch star survey in the Small Magellanic Cloud

Table 4 : 45 stars in 3 fields ; 1950 coordinates

\begin{matrix}field 1: α = 01h8.6m , δ = −72^{∘}58′ \\ (Nos 1-7) \end{matrix}  SMC AGB1-
\begin{matrix}field 2: α = 01h4.15m , δ = −73^{∘}2′ \\ (Nos 1-20) \end{matrix}  SMC AGB2-
\begin{matrix}field 3: α = 01h4.3m , δ = −72^{∘}35′ \\ (Nos 1-18) \end{matrix}  SMC AGB3-

Table 3 : gives coordinates and Mbol for luminous stars from Blanco and McCarthy 1983, A.J. 88, 1442

1990R3 A

REES N. 1990,M.N.R.A.S. 244, 233-246 A deep 38-MHz radio survey of the area δ > +60^{∘}

8C

Deep survey of radio sources in an area of about 1 sr north of δ = +60^{∘} Angular resolution: 4.5′ × 4.5′ arcmin^{2} ; limiting flux density about 1 Jy. N = ≃ 5000 Contour plots and source lists presented on microfiches.

1990R3 B

LACY M., RAWLINGS S., WARNER P.J. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 256, 404-424 A complete sample of radio sources in the North Ecliptic Cap, selected at 38 MHz. I. The radio data

8C

A complete sample of 57 radio sources from the 8C survey to a flux density limit of S_{38} = 1.3 Jy within 3^{∘}03 of the North Ecliptic Pole, has been mapped at arcmin resolution with CLFST, and at arcsec resolution with either the VLA or the Ryle telescope. Table 2 : 1950 coordinates and radio flux for 3 frequencies.

1990SI

SCHWERING P.B.W., ISRAEL F.P. 1990,Kluwer Academic Publ., 224pp. Atlas and catalogue of infrared sources in the Magellanic Clouds

-

Contents: 1. Introduction

2. Infrared source identification tables (correlation with several optical catalogues)

3. The Leiden-IRAS Magellanic Clouds Infrared source catalogues

4. Atlas of infrared emission of the Magellanic Clouds Maps based on observations obtained in the Additional Observations (AO) program, in the Deep Sky Mapping (DPM) mode Overall maps: SMC p. 104-105 4.3^{∘} x 4.3^{∘}

LMC p. 126-127 8.5^{∘} x 8.5^{∘}

Detail maps: SMC p. 106-125 2.1^{∘} x 2.1^{∘}

LMC p. 128-205 2.1^{∘} x 2.1^{∘}

Parts 2 and 3 are included in 1989S3 (SMC) and 1989S4 (LMC), acronyms LI-SMC and LI-LMC

1990S1

SCHWARTZ R.D., PERSSON S.E., HAMANN F.W. 1990,A.J. 100, 793-798 Further results of a southern survey for Hα emission objects

SPH

Identification of 160 Hα emission objects located in five southern regions near the galactic equator 1950 coordinates ; finding charts ; cross-ref. to other catalogs (Nos 1-26) Hα emission objects in CMa (Nos 27-53) Hα emission objects in Pup (Nos 54-124) Hα emission objects in Car (Nos 125-143) Hα emission objects in Mus (Nos 144-160) Hα emission objects in Nor

1990S2 A

SAITO M., OHTANI H., ASONUMA A., KASHIKAWA N., MAKI T., NISHIDA S., WATAN-ABE T. 1990,P.A.S.J. 42, 603-624 A search for galaxies behind the Milky Way between ℓ = 210^{∘}and230^{∘}

CGMW1-

Systematic galaxy search by means of 18 film copies of the UK Schmidt Southern Infrared Atlas on the Milky Way between ℓ = 209^{∘} and 234^{∘} at b = 00^{∘} covering ≃ 500sq.^{∘} The effective wavelength is 790 nm with a bandwidth of 190 nm Table 1 : Plate fields The catalog has been compiled in a database ; N = 2411 galaxies with nine parameters of the galaxies. Of these galaxies 30 have been given in catalogs of galaxies, 81 are IRAS galaxies (Table 5, 1950 coordinates)

1990S2 B

SAITO M., OHTANI H., BABA A., HOTTA H., KAMENO S., KUROSU S., NAKADA K., TAKATA T. 1991,P.A.S.J. 43, 449-468 A search for galaxies behind the Milky Way between ℓ = 230^{∘}and250^{∘}

CGMW2-

Systematic galaxy search by means of 14 film copies between ℓ = 232^{∘}and250^{∘}atb = 00^{∘} covering 411sq.^{∘} Table 1 : Plate fields The catalog has been compiled in a database ; N = 4633 galaxies with nine parameters of the galaxies. Of these galaxies 194 have been given in catalogs of galaxies, 232 are IRAS PSC galaxies (Table 4, 1950 coordinates)

1990T1 A

TESTOR G., SCHILD H. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. 240, 299-304 New Wolf-Rayet and extreme Of stars near the 30 Doradus nebula

TSWR

Discovery of 1 new Wolf-Rayet and 2 extreme Of stars located on the western edge of the 30 Dor complex in the Large Magellanic Cloud. TSWR 1, 2, 3 are respectively Brey 65b, 65c, 74a (ref. 1981BR B)

1990T1 B

SCHILD H., TESTOR G. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 92, 729-748 Spectral types and UBV magnitudes of stars in the 30 Doradus complex

Brey 58, is in fact composed of 2 Wolf-Rayet stars separated by only 1”.5. The faintest one is labelled TSWR 4, type WC. The brighter one is [ST92] 2-12, type WN7. More details on TSWR 4 = 2-101, Brey 58 = 2-12, TSWR 1 and 2, the stellar association LH 90 are given in Testor+ 1993A&A 280, 426-434.

TSWR = TS

UBV photometry and spectral types of stars in 4 zones in the periphery of the 30 Doradus region. Identif. charts for the stars Fig. 2 to 5

[ST92]

Table 3: Nos 1-01 to 1-104, stars in zone 1 (corresponds to LH 99) Table 4: Nos 2-01 to 2-71, stars in zone 2 (corresponds to LH 90) Table 5: Nos 3-01 to 3-62, stars in zone 3 (corresponds to LH 89) Table 6: Nos 4-01 to 4-69, stars in zone 4 (corresponds to LH 104)

1990V1

VENTURI T., GIOVANNINI G., FERETTI L. 1990,A.J. 99, 1381-1396 High-sensitivity radio observations of the Coma cluster of galaxies

Table I : (Nos 1-25) radiogalaxies ; 1950 coordinates cross-identif. with optical name ν = 326MHz ; field 2.6^{∘} in radius

74W

Table II : (Nos 1-64) radiosources detected at 1.4 GHz with the VLA 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. ; field 30’ in radius

VGF

1990WH

WALTER H.G., HERING R., DE VEGT Ch. 1990,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 86, 357-393 An astrometric catalogue of radio sources

-

Available both as a printed version and an updated magnetic tape

1990W1

OGURA K., SATO F. 1990,P.A.S.J. 42, 583-596 Hα emission stars in the region of Lynds 1228

OSHA

Table 2 : (Nos 1-69) Hα emission stars

(Nos S1-S49) suspected Hα emission stars

1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts Comparison with IRAS: No. 44 is IRAS 21004+7811 The acronym could be ”LDN 1228:KisoHA” for Kiso Hα in LDN 1228

1990X1 A

XIAO ZHEN, LI JING 1990,Acta Astrophys. Sinica 10, 128-136 Search for infrared objects in the Ara region

XZLJ1-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-225) ; IR-excess objects ; 1950 coordinates ; R-I colour index 27 are optical counterparts of IRAS Point Sources and have Identif. chart, Fig. 4

1990X1 B

XIAO ZHEN, LI JING 1991,Acta Astrophys. Sinica 11, 137-142 Search for infrared objects in the Carina region

XZLJ2-

Table 1 : (Nos 1-89) ; IR-excess objects ; 1950 coordinates ; R-I colour index 12 are optical counterparts of IRAS Point Sources and have Identif. chart, Fig. 4

1990Z1 A

ZOONEMATKERMANI S., HELFAND D.J., BECKER R.H., WHITE R.L., PERLEY R.A. 1990,Ap.J.Suppl. 74, 181-224 A catalog of small-diameter radio sources in the galactic plane

GPSR

Survey of the galactic plane, −20^{∘} < ℓ < +120^{∘}, |b| ≤ 0.8^{∘}, at 1400MHz, using the VLA in the B configuration. Catalog of 1992 discrete sources smaller than ≃ 20” in diameter, although sources as faint as 8 mJy and as large as 90” are also included. Table 4 : 1992 sources ; with a galactic format ; 1950 coordinates No map

1990Z1 B

HELFAND D.J., ZOONEMATKERMANI S., BECKER R.H., WHITE R.L. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 80, 211-255 Compact radio sources near the galactic plane

GPSR

Extension of the 20cm galactic plane survey (1990Z1 A) to |b| = 1.8^{∘} over the central region of the Milky Way (−10^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 40^{∘}) Table 3 : 1457 new discrete radio sources, down to flux densities of <∼ 5mJy, and 95% complete at 20 mJy

1990Z2

ZAMORANO J., REGO M., GONZALEZ-RIESTRA R., RODRIGUEZ G. 1990,Astrophys. Space Sci. 170, 353-360 New emission-line galaxies identified from an objective prism survey

UCM

Search for Hα emission-line galaxies. Objective prism survey performed at the German-Spanish Observatory (Calar-Alto, Almeria) ; reciprocal dispersion of 1950 Å/mm^{−1} at Hα ; spectral coverage from λλ6400 to 6850 Å able to record Hα emission in galaxies with a redshift up to z = 0.04. More spectra are reproduced by Rego et al. 1989, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 79, 443-450.

1991A1

ACHILLEOS N., REMILLARD R.A., WICKRAMASINGHE D.T. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 253, 522-526 Serendipitous identifications of two magnetic dwarfs

MWD

Discovery of two magnetic DA white dwarfs MWD 0159-032 and MWD 0307-428 Charts ; 1950 coordinates (Fig. 1) Probably unassociated with the hard X-ray sources 1H of which the optical identification was searched for.

1991A2 A

AZZOPARDI M., LEQUEUX J., REBEIROT E., WESTERLUND B.E. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 88, 265-275 Carbon stars in the galactic bulge ; identification, spectrophotometric and infrared photometric data

ALR-GC C

Table 2 : (Nos 1-34) ; 1950 coordinates ; finding charts 1st results evocated by Azzopardi et al. in 1985 Astr. Astrophys. 145, L4-L6, with an ALR provisional number (obsolete)

1991A2 B

WESTERLUND B.E., LEQUEUX J., AZZOPARDI M., REBEIROT E. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 244, 367-372 Properties and origin of the galactic bulge carbon stars

ALR-GC C

Properties of the carbon stars found in 1991A2 A

1991B1

BHATIA R.K., READ M.A., HATZIDIMITRIOU D., TRITTON S. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 87, 335-352 A catalogue of binary star cluster candidates in the Large Magellanic Cloud

BRHT

Table 1 : (Nos 1-64) ; each object has 2 composantes, a and b ; 1950 coordinates

1991B2

BATTINELLI P. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 244, 69-74 A new identification technique for OB associations: OB associations in the Small Magellanic Cloud

SMC OB

31 OB associations defined from 344 O-B2 stars from ref. 1982AZ (Azzopardi and Vigneau) using the ”Path Linkage Criterion” with maximum distance admitted between two neighbouring stars 60pc. The associations are defined by their content in AZVI stars (ref. 1982AZ) and DEM nebulae (ref.1976D1) in Appendix A, and on a map of the SMC, not by coordinates. The definition and sample of stars used favour elongated and extended associations. No cross-identif. with Hodge ass. (acronym SMC ASS, ref. 1985H1).

1991B3

BECKER R.H., WHITE R.L., EDWARDS A.L. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 75, 1-229 A new catalog of 53522 4.85 GHz sources

BWE

Catalog of 53522 sources at 4.85 GHz between 0^{∘} and 75^{∘}declination, generated from observations taken with the NRAO Green Bank 300 foot (91m) telescope by Condon et al. (1989 AJ 97 1064). The same data were used for 87GB, ref. 1991G1.

1991DV

DE VAUCOULEURS G., DE VAUCOULEURS A., CORWIN H.G.Jr, BUTA R.J., PATUREL G., FOUQUE P. 1991,Springer-Verlag Third Reference Catalogue of Bright Galaxies

-

1st Vol., explanations, references, cross-identif. tables. 2nd and 3rd Vol. are the Catalogue proper, often quoted as the RC3 catalogue. N = 23024 objects

1991D1

DEMERS S., IRWIN M.J. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 91, 171-182 Catalogue of blue stars between the Magellanic Clouds

DI

Table 4 : (Nos 1-1679) ; 1950 coordinates ; V and B-V ; No identif. charts

1991F1

FOMALONT E.B., WINDHORST R.A., KRISTIAN J.A., KELLERMAN K.I. 1991,A.J. 102, 1258-1277 and Plate 38 The micro-Jansky radio source population at 5 GHz.

15V

Fifteenth VLA survey Nomenclature introduced by Fomalont et al. in the style of Cambridge, Westerbork, Penticton, for sources discovered with the VLA. 1V ... 14V have not been used formerly. 16V and 17V appear in ref. 1993W1 Table 4 : (Nos 1-94) ; 1950 coordinates. Subsequent observations at 1.5 GHz, field of area 1.5x10-5 sr centered at α = 14h16m and δ = 52.7^{∘} (1950). The range of angular size detectable is between 0”.3 to 100”. 62 sources compiled with a peak flux density at 5 GHz greater than 16 microJy at 8” resolution and a typical positional accuracy of 0”.2 ; Maps.

1991G1

GREGORY P.C., CONDON J.J. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 75, 1011-1291 The 87GB catalog of radio sources covering 00^{∘} < δ < +75^{∘} at 4.85 GHz.

87GB

The 91 m telescope in Green Bank was used during 1987 to map 6.0 sr of sky. N = 54579 discrete sources with angular sizes diameter ≤ 10′.5 and stronger than S ≃ 25 mJy derived from the maps ; 1950 coordinates (also used in the format)

1991G2

GIOMMI P., TAGLIAFERRI G., BEUERMANN K., BRANDUARDI-RAYMONT G., BRIS-SENDEN R., GRASER U., MASON K.O., MITTAZ J.D.P., MURDIN P., POOLEY G., THOMAS H.-C., TUOHY I. 1991,Ap.J. 378, 77-92 The EXOSAT high galatic latitude survey

EXO

Survey of 210 + 23 serendipitous sources found in 783 sq.^{∘}in the very soft X-ray band (0.05-2.0 keV)

Table 1 : N = 210 ; complete flux-limited sample

1950 coordinates ; X-ray, optical and radio data

Table 2 : Additional CMA (Channel Multipliex Array) serendipitous sources, N = 23 (not used for statistical analysis)

1991H1

HIGGS L.A., LANDECKER T.L., ISRAEL F.P., BALLY J. 1991,Journal Royal Astr. Soc. Canada 85, 24-42 A 408-MHz radio survey of the region surrounding Simeis 57

40P

Field centered at α 20h14m32s, δ +43^{∘}33’ 13”, diameter 8.33^{∘} CLEAN beam 3.4’x5.0’ (EWxNS)

Table II : (Nos 1-38) ; ν = 408 MHz ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. Table V : IRAS coincidence

1991H2

HUMPHREYS R.M., LANDAU R., GHIGO F.D., ZUMACH W., LABONTE A.E. 1991,A.J. 102, 395-427 BVR photoelectric sequences for selected fields in the Palomar Sky Survey and the magnitudediameter relation

PSS

Table 4 : N = 437 stars in the 49 Palomar Sky Survey fields ; 1950 coordinates ; finding charts

1991H3

HIGGS L.A., VAN DER WERF P.P. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 89, 599-630 Radio sources in a field centered on BG 2107+49 Field centered on BG 2107+49 (ℓ = 91.1^{∘}, b = 1.6^{∘})

Table 1: (Nos 1-231) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 408 MHz

28P

Table 3: (Nos 1-75) ; 1950 coordinates ν = 1420 MHz

29P

1991J1

JUNKKARINEN V., HEWITT A., BURBIDGE G. 1991,Ap.J.Suppl. 77, 203-254 A catalog of absorption in the spectra of Quasi-Stellar Objects

QSO

Table 1 : A total of 724 QSOs are listed in three tables ; 1950 and 2000 coordinates; The first column gives both the 1950 IAU name (e.g. 0013-004) and the 2000 IAU name (J0016-0012), as well as other names (UM 224, PB 5829) Erratum in 1992, Ap.J.Suppl. 81, 409-411 : Correction of the 2000 coordinates in Table 1.

1991K1

KAUFFMANN G., FAIRALL A.P. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 248, 313-324 Voids in the distribution of galaxies: an assessment of their significance and derivation of a void spectrum

KFVD

Search for nearly spherical regions which are devoid of bright galaxies. Table 3 : 129 significant voids ; galactic coordinates (also used in the format).

1991K2

KINMAN T.D., STRYKER L.L., HESSER J.E., GRAHAM J.A., WALKER A.R., HAZEN M.L., NEMEC J.M. 1991,P.A.S.P. 103, 1279-1291 New field RR Lyrae variables in the outer parts of the LMC and the properties of the LMC halo

KSH

RR Lyr variables of the Large Magellanic Cloud halo Table 3 : (Nos R1-R5) stars near 04h36m-58^{∘}30’ (R for Reticulum center)

(Nos N1-N5) stars near 03h44m-72^{∘}00’ (N for NGC 1466 center) Identif. charts ; Light curves

Table 4 : Comparison stars in each of the two fields

1991L1

LILLY S.J., COWIE L.L., GARDNER J.P. 1991,Ap.J. 369, 79-105 A deep imaging and spectroscopic survey of faint galaxies

SSA

Table 2A: SSA 13 (α = 13h) (Nos 13-01 to 13-30) Table 2B: SSA 17 (α = 17h) (Nos 17-01 to 17-35) Table 2C: SSA 22 (α = 22h) (Nos 22-01 to 22-35).

1991M1

MORGAN D.H., VASSILIADIS E., DOPITA M.A. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 251, 51P-53P A new Wolf-Rayet star in the Small Magellanic Cloud

MVD

Objective prism dispersion 800Å/mm near Hγ in the waveband λ λ 4550 − 5400Å. 1950 coordinates of the object: 00h52m 48.5s -73^{∘}00’ 51”. mv: 15.7±0.3 ; Identif. chart.

1991P1

PRIMINI F.A., MURRAY S.S., HUCHRA J., SCHILD R., BURG R., GIACCONI R. 1991,Ap.J. 374, 440-455 The CfA Einstein Observatory Extended Deep X-ray Survey

EDS

Table 3 : N = 25 sources ; 1950 coordinates

1991P2 A

PARIJSKIJ Yu.N., BURSOV N.N., LIPOVKA N.M., SOBOLEVA N.S., TEMIROVA A.V. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 87, 1-32 + erratum Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 98, 391 The RATAN-600 7.6 cm catalog of radio sources from ”Experiment Cold-80”

RC

N = 840 ; 2000 and 1950 equatorial coordinates. Use the format JHHMM+DDMM, where J stands for 2000 coordinates. The radiosources were detected at 7.6cm, strip of sky within the interval 4h < α < 22h, 5^{∘} −20′ < δ < 5^{∘} + 20′. The RATAN-600 was equipped with a cryoradiometer (”Cold” experiment)

1991P2 B

PARIJSKIJ Yu.N., BURSOV N.N., LIPOVKA N.M., SOBOLEVA N.S., TEMIROVA A.V., CHEPURNOV A.V. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 96, 583-592 + erratum Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 98, 391 The RATAN-600 7.6 cm catalogue of radio sources within the interval 22h-4h at declination of SS 433

RC

This list of 305 radio sources completes the RC catalog (ref. 1991P2 A) now containing 1144 objects.

1991P3

PERIE J., PREVOT L., ROUSSEAU M., PEYRIN Y., ROBIN A. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 90, 1-17 Positional reference stars in the Magellanic Clouds

-

Equatorial coordinates determined for 926 stars (mainly foreground to the Magellanic Clouds) Accuracy characterized by mean values O-C 0.35” and 0.38”, from the coordinates of the Perth reference stars. Table 1 : members of LMC and SMC, measured in the catalogue. Table 2 : catalogue ; 2000 coordinates ; CPD number

cross-identif. (when available) with HD, CPC, SAO, Perth. Don’t use the internal number given in col. 1.

Identif. charts for 35 double or multiple stars.

1991P4

POUNDS K.A., ABBEY A.F., BARSTOW M.A., BENTLEY R.D., BEWICK A., BREEVELD E.R., COLE R.E., COURTIER G.M., DEELEY M., DENBY M., GOODDALL C.V., GOURLAY J.A., GUTTRIDGE P.R., HARRIS A.W., HUCKLE H.E., KENT B.J., LIEU R., McCALDEN A.J., PAGE C.G., PANKIEWICZ G.S., PONMAN T.J., PYE J.P., READING D.H., RICHARDS A.G., RICKETTS M.J., ROCHESTER G.K., SANSOM A.E., SEMBAY S.E., SIDHER S., SIMS M.R., SPRAGG J.E., SUMNER T.J., SWINYARD B.M., VALLANCE R.J., WATSON D.J., WATSON M.G., WELLS A.A., WILLINGALE R., WRIGHT J.S. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 253, 364-368 The EUV mini-survey with the ROSAT wide field camera

REUV

Two filters alternated (S1 60-140Åand S2 112-200Å). Table 1 : (Nos 1-23) ; 2000 coordinates (rounded, not truncated) , probable optical counterparts. The format should be written e.g. REUV J001227+143324, with leading J.

1991RE

REIPURTH B., BRAND J., WOUTERLOOT J.G.A., HERBIG G.H., PETTERSSON B., SCHWARTZ R.D., NYMAN L.-A., KRAUTTER J., GRAHAM J.A., WILKING B.A., EIROA C. 1991,ESO Scientific Report No. 11, pp. 211, ed. B. Reipurth Low Mass Star Formation in Southern Molecular Clouds

-

Contents: Low Mass Star Formation in Orion p. 1 Brand J., Wouterlout J.G.A. The Canis Majoris OB1 Association p. 59 Herbig G.H. Low Mass Star Formation in Puppis and Vela p. 69 Pettersson B. The Chamaleon Dark Clouds and T-Associations p. 93 Schwartz R.D. The Southern Coalsack - Where are all the Young Stars? p. 119 Nyman L.-A. The Star Forming Region in Lupus p. 127 Krautter J. Young Low Mass Stars in the Norma Cloud p. 149 Reipurth B., Graham J.A. Star Formation in the Ophiuchus Molecular Cloud Complex p. 159 Wilking B.A. Star Formation in the Corona Australis Region p. 185 Graham J.A. The Serpens Molecular Cloud p. 197 Eiroa C.

1991RG A

RENSON P., GERBALDI M., CATALANO F.A. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 89, 429-434 General catalogue of Ap and Am stars

-

All the Ap and Am stars ever discovered (6684 objects), including those which were discarded since then. Available on magnetic tape The bibliography is not included Also described in Bull. Inf. CDS 40, 23-29,(+ errata in Bull. Inf. CDS 41, 57), in French. See also Hauck (ref. 1992HA), Catalano+ (ref. 1984CR A, B, C), Renson (ref. 1988RE A, B)

1991RG B

RENSON P., KOBI D., NORTH P. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 89, 61-76 A database of Ap stars

-

The database can be used on an IBM-compatible personal computer. It is essentially based on Renson’s general catalogue (ref. 1991RG). N = 3195 Ap stars

1991R1

ROSER S., BASTIAN U. 1991,Publ. Astr. Rechen-Institut, Heidelberg, Spektrum Akademischer Verlag, 1 PPM star catalogue. Positions and Proper Motions of 181731 stars north of -2.5^{∘} δ for equinox and epoch J2000.0

PPM

Vol I : +80^{∘} to +30^{∘} ; Vol II : +20^{∘} to -0^{∘} Representation of the FK5 system at higher star densities and fainter magnitudes. Will replace the AGK3 and the SAO. Collected by Declination zones of 10^{∘}

1991S1

SHARA M.M., MOFFAT A.F.J., SMITH L.F., POTTER M. 1991,A.J. 102, 716-743 A deep survey for galactic Wolf-Rayet stars. I. Motivation, search technique, and first results

Table 3 : (Nos 1-13) ; 13 new Wolf-Rayet cross-identif. with WR (ref. 1981VH)  SMSP

The new WR have a format NNa, e.g. the star WR 19a is inserted in RA between the stars 19 and 20 (see ref. 1981VH)

WR

1991S2

STRUBLE M.F., ROOD H.J. 1991,Ap.J. 374, 395-406 Superposition and incompleteness effects in Abell’s statistical sample of clusters

SRCG

Table 8 : 23 among 1134 groupings of Struble survey.

The former satisfy the criteria of Abell’s catalog (ref. 1958A1), but are not present in the ACO (ref. 1989AC). No explicit format ; 1950 coordinates ; a few cross-identif. with Shectman Clusters (ref. 1985S1) and Zwicky Clusters (ref. 1960Z1)

1991S3

SHEVCHENKO V.S., YAKUBOV S.D., HAMBARIAN V.V., GARIBJANIAN A.T. 1991,Astr. Zh. 68, 275-290 A compact star forming region associated with V 1331 Cyg

SYHG

UBVR photometry of 139 stars in the vicinity of the variable star V 1331 Cyg (= LkHA 120). 23 Hα emission stars discovered with an objective prism at the 1-m Byurakan Schmidt telescope. The star forming region is here labelled MR V 1331 Cyg. Table 1 : (Nos 1-139) stars Table 2 : (Nos E1-E23) Hα em. stars Identif. charts fig.2, 3 and 6

1991T1

TRINCHIERI G., FABBIANO G. 1991,Ap.J. 382, 82-99 The discrete X-ray source population in M31

TF

Maps (Fig. 4a, 4b and Fig. 6) Table 2A : (Nos 1-108) ; X-ray sources detected here ;

cross-identif. with Crampton+ 1984 (ref. 1984C1) ; 1950 coordinates

Table 2B : X-ray sources not detected here, but found in Crampton+ (ref. 1984C1)

Don’t use the 1st col. numbering

1991T2

TRUMPER J., HASINGER G., ASCHENBACH B., BRAUNINGER H., BRIEL U.G., BURK-ERT W., FINK H., PFEFFERMANN E., PIETSCH W., PREDEHL P., SCHMITT J.H.M.M., VOGES W., ZIMMERMANN U., BEUERMANN K. 1991,Nature 349, 579-583 X-ray survey of the Large Magellanic Cloud by ROSAT

RX

Table 1: 17 new ROSAT satellite sources in the LMC region ,

(LMC X-1 and CAL 83 are also given) ; 2000 coordinates.

It is mandatory to write the format with the letter J. The Area explored (fig. 1) is α 05h16m to 05h50m, δ -68^{∘} 10 to -70^{∘} 55.

1991VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1991,ESO Scientific Report No. 10 A Catalogue of Quasars and Active Nuclei (5th Edition)

-

Updated version of ref. 1989VV Table 1 : 6225 quasars Table 2 : 162 BL Lac objects Table 3 : 1540 active galaxies (of which 575 are Seyfert 1)

1991V1 A

VAN DEN BROEK A.C., VAN DRIEL W., DE JONG T., LUB J., DE GRIJP M.H.K., GOUD-FROOIJ P. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 91, 61-128 A study of southern extreme IRAS galaxies. I. Optical observations

VVD

Table 3a: (Nos 1-42) field I Table 3b: (Nos 43-62) field II

1991V1 B

VAN DRIEL W., VAN DEN BROEK A.C., DE JONG T. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 90, 55-81 A study of southern extreme IRAS galaxies. II. Radio continuum observations

VVD

Same sources as in ref. 1991V1 A

1991V2

MINGALIEV M.G., VERKHODANOV O.V., KHABRAKHMANOV A.R. 1991,Pis’ma Astr. Zh. 17, 787-793 A zenith survey in 1988 with RATAN-600 at 8.0 cm

RZ

Transit survey with the radio telescope RATAN-600 in the region α = 08h to 14h, δ = +47^{∘}06’ 45” to +47^{∘}07’ 45” at 3.76 GHz using all telescope surface; five scans have been made with step 15” in δ ; the half-power-beam width is 21” N = 70 ; 1950 coordinates

1991WV

WAKKER B.P., VAN WOERDEN H. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 250, 509-532 Distribution and origin of high-velocity clouds. III. Clouds, complexes and populations

WV

Table 1 : (Nos 1-561) ordered by decreasing b ; position (ℓ, b, 1950 eq. coordinates)

membership in a complex of Table 3

Table 2 : Cross-identif. with a few HVC, A, C, M, AC clouds (ref. 1968H1 and 1975H1) Table 3 : 17 complexes of high-velocity clouds

(2nd col. (Nos 1-17) and new name, e.g. ACVHV,...) They contain 255 out of the total of 561 HVC in Table 1. Several are new. Description in Sect. 3 and Fig. 1 (maps).

1991W1

WENDKER H.J., HIGGS L.A., LANDECKER T.L. 1991,Astr. Astrophys. 241, 551-580 The Cygnus X region XVIII. A detailed investigation of radio-continuum structure on large and small scales Table 2 : (Nos 1-103) ; small-diameter radiosources at 408MHz

1950 coordinates ; resolution 3.5’x5.2’

18P

Table 3 : (Nos 1-48) ; small-diameter radiosources at 1420MHz 1950 coordinates ; resolution 1.0’x1.5’

19P

Table 4 : (Nos 1-41) ; small diameter sources at 4800MHz 1950 coordinates

ECX6-

Table 6 : (Nos 1-13) ; Ridges in Cygnus X 1950 coordinates

CXR

Table 7 : (Nos 1-6) ; Holes in Cygnus X 1950 coordinates

CXH

1991W2

WANG Q., HAMILTON T., HELFAND D.J., WU X. 1991,Ap.J. 374, 475-495 The detection of X-rays from the hot interstellar medium of the Large Magellanic Cloud

Table 2 : Discrete X-ray sources ; 1950 coordinates ; 33 are reported here for the first time cross-identif. with LHG = CAL (ref. 1981L2 A), SNR and radiosources

WHHW

Table 3 : CAL sources (ref. 1981L2 A) not detected

Table 4 : Large diameter X-ray sources ; 1950 coordinates  WHHWE

1991W3

WATSON F.G., OATES A.P., SHANKS T., HALE-SUTTON D. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 253, 222-234 CCD multi-object spectroscopy of galaxies at the UKST

WOSH

Survey of galaxies in nine UKST fields: redshifts for 179 galaxies sampled at a rate of one in six from catalogues complete to the limiting magnitude bj ≤ 16.75 mag Table 5 : N = 179 ; 1950 coordinates In the format, the field is SERC field number (Table 4) The objects are e.g. 862G145 = WOSH 862-145

1991W4

WRIGHT A.E., WARK R.M., TROUP E., OTRUPCEK R., JENNINGS D., HUNT A., COOKE D.J. 1991,M.N.R.A.S. 251, 330-339 Flux densities at 8400 MHz for a large sample of radio sources

PKS

Table 2: 1194 sources selected from the 2700MHz Parkes survey (ref. 1979B1, Bolton and PKSCAT90 database). Two formats: JHHMM+DDMM and BHHMM+DDd (as in ref. 1979B1).

No new positions measured ; Optical identif. (type of object). Database: Wright A.E. & Otrupcek R. (eds), 1990 PKSCAT90 database, ATNF, Parkes, NSW, Australia (available in both printed and computer-readable formats).

1992AO

ACKER A., OCHSENBEIN F., STENHOLM B., TYLENDA T., MARCOUT J., SCHOHN C. 1992,Published by the ESO (European Southern Observatory) Strasbourg-ESO Catalogue of Galactic Planetary Nebulae

Updates ref. 1967PK. A complete rediscussion of the status of galactic planetary nebula candidates, and a collection of data, references, identif. charts for 1143 true or probable PN. 1967PK keeps its interest for all references earlier than 1965. Part I : Description of the catalogue, Finding charts of the 1143 PN

Table 1 : N = 1143 true and probable PN The format is based on gal. coordinates with one decimal, thus different from PK (ref. 1967PK)

PN

Equatorial 2000 and galactic coordinates

In Table 1b, the PN are ordered by discovery name, and cross-identif. with the PN or PK designations

Table 2 : N = 347 Possible PN (PK and other designations) Table 3 : N = 330 Rejected PN (most have a PK designation) Table 5 : Reference for the discovery lists

Part II: For each PN, the following data are listed:

• designations and names, including discovery lists

• positions, diameters (optical and radio)

• radial and expansion velocities

• line intensities and Hβ fluxes, resulting from an original spectroscopic survey • IR and Radio fluxes

• Central star data

• A full bibliography from 1965 until the beginning of 1991

1992A1

ANDERSON B.-G., ROGER R.S., WANNIER P.G. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 260, 355-369 Warm neutral halos around molecular clouds. IV. H I and continuum: aperture synthesis observations towards the molecular cloud B5

{42P \atop 43P}

Incomplete lists of sources, named according to the Penticton system 42P and 43P.

Table 2 : Cross-identif. between 43P and 42P sources observed at 2 different frequencies; 1950 coordinates ; flux at ν = 1420 MHz N = 61 among (Nos 1-94) for 43P sources (ν = 1420 MHz) N = 59 among (Nos 85-237) for 42P sources (ν = 408 MHz)

1992B1

BECKER R.H., WHITE R.L., PROCTOR D.D. 1992,A.J. 103, 544-548 A serendipitous survey of the galactic plane for type II OH masers

OH

OH masers detected in a 140^{∘} strip from 340 to 120 in galactic longitude Table 1 : N = 50 masers, including 14 new sources, IRAS sources counterpart and properties ; 1950 coordinates

1992B2

BERG C., WEGNER G., FOLTZ C.B., CHAFFEE F.H.Jr, HEWETT P.C. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 78, 409-421 Spectroscopy and spectral types for 387 stellar objects from the large, bright QSO survey

LBQS

N = 387 stellar objects brighter than BJ = 18.75 Table 1 : composite and em. objects and cataclysmic variables Table 2 : degenerate stars Table 3 : hot subdwarfs and horizontal-branch stars Table 4 : late-type stars 1950 coordinates ; no Identif. charts

1992B3

BUCCIARELLI B., DAOU D., LATTANZI M.G., TAFF L.G. 1992,A.J. 103, 1689-1699 The AGK3U: an updated version of the AGK3

AGK3U

Details of construction of an updated version of the AGK3. The AGK3 proper motions are improved, using the Palomar ”Quick V” survey, reaching a formal mean error 0.82”/century. The AGK3U positions have a mean error of 0.167” at an average epoch of 1950.62

1992B4

BEICHMAN C.A., BOULANGER F., MOSHIR M. 1992,Ap.J. 386, 248-259 Star formation in Taurus. I. The IRAS Faint Source Survey

BBM

Deep IR survey of a 187 sq.^{∘} region in Taurus using the IRAS FSS catalogue (ref. 1989MK) reveals 63 multiband objects selected on the basis of their infrared properties Table 4 : (Nos 1-63) ; 1950 coordinates Table 5 : Cross-identif. with IRAS name for (Nos 1-63)

F source in the Faint Source Catalog, Z only in the Faint Source Data Base

Table 7 : (Nos 64-91) ; Unresolved Taurus 60 μm only sources No IRAS identification ; 1950 coordinates

1992B5

BADE N., ENGELS D., FINK H., HAGEN H.-J., REIMERS D., VOGES W., WISOTZKI L. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 254, L21-L24 ROSAT active galactic nuclei identified on objective prism plates

RX

Table 1 : 41 new AGN ROSAT satellite X-ray sources ; 2000 coordinates. Notice the letter J, mandatory in the format to indicate 2000 coord.

1992B6

BATTINELLI P., DEMERS S. 1992,A.J. 104, 1458-1464 Automated identification of young associations in the inter-Magellanic Cloud region

ICA

The associations were identified from a sample of 4342 bkue stars shown in Fig. 1 Table 1: (Nos 1-78) ; 1950 coord. (RA from 02h to 04h30) ; Identif. charts Table 3: Cross-identif. with the associations WG (ref. 1971W2), IDK (ref. 1990I1), and the HII regions DEM S (ref. 1976D1)

1992C1

CLIFTON T.R., LYNE A.G., JONES A.W., McKENNA J., ASHWORTH M. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 254, 177-184 A high-frequency survey of the galactic plane for young and distant pulsars

PSR

ν = 1400 MHz, northern galactic plane, |b| < 1.1 or 0.6^{∘}, −5^{∘} < ℓ < 105^{∘} Table 1 : 40 new pulsars Table 2 : 21 previously known pulsars detected

1992ED

EGRET D., DIDELON P., McLEAN B.J., RUSSELL J.L., TURON C. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 258, 217-222 The Tycho Input Catalogue. Cross-matching the Guide Star Catalog with the Hipparcos INCA Data Base

-

N = 3154204 objects, up to a magnitude limit of V = 12.1 or B = 12.8 mag

1992E1

ELVIS M., PLUMMER D., SCHACHTER J., FABBIANO G. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 80, 257-303 The Einstein Slew Survey

1ES

Catalog of 819 sources detected in the Einstein IPC Slew Survey of the X-ray sky, 313 of them were not previously known as X-ray sources. Table 6 : 819 sources, 1950 coordinates, optical counterpart name Table 7 : New identified X-ray sources (classified by type of obj.)

1992FK

FABBIANO G., KIM D.-W., TRINCHIERI G. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 80, 531-644 An X-ray catalog and atlas of galaxies

-

N = 493 galaxies ; observed with the Einstein Observatory instruments ; 238 have been detected by Einstein ; 1950 coordinates. X-ray contour maps superimposed onto optical images (Fig. 7)

1992F1

FOMALONT E.B., GOSS W.M., LYNE A.G., MANCHESTER R.N., JUSTTANONT K. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 258, 497-510 Positions and proper motions of pulsars

PSR

VLA observations of 40 PSR Table 1 : Positions for 40 PSR from VLA observations Table 3 : Proper motions for 19 PSR from VLA observations Table 4 and 5 : Previously published positions or proper motions

1992GS

GRILLO F., SCIORTINO S., MICELA G., VAIANA G.S., HARNDEN F.R.Jr 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 81, 795-863 An Einstein Observatory SAO-based catalog of B-type stars

-

Emission between 0.16 and 4.0 keV (IPC images) from 1545 B-type SAO stars Table 1 : Optical data Table 2 : X-ray data

1992G1

GREGORIO-HETEM J., LEPINE J.R.D., QUAST G.R., TORRES C.A.O., DE LA REZA R. 1992,A.J. 103, 549-563 A search for T Tauri stars based on the IRAS Point Source Catalog. I.

PDS

Table 3 : (Nos 1-103) ; N = 109 ; Photometry ;

corresponding IRAS PSC

Table 4 : Known T Tauri stars cross-identif. with GSC (ref. 1984JL), HBC (ref. 1988HB), and other names

Table 5 : New T Tauri stars cross-identif. with GSC (ref. 1984JL), HBC (ref. 1988HB), and other names

Table 6, 7, 8 : Suspected T Tauri stars, probable Herbig Ae/Be,

other emission-line stars

No Identif. charts

1992HA

HAUCK B. 1992,Bull. Inf. CDS 40, 19-21 Fourth catalogue of Am stars with known spectral types

-

2890 determinations for 2152 stars. Obsoletes Hauck 1986, Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 64, 21

1992H1

HENNING P.A. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 78, 365-390 A study of a 21 centimeter-selected sample of galaxies. I. The

HENG

Pilot survey for galaxies at 21 cm conducted with the NRAO 300 foot (91m) telescope in the portion of the sky obscured by our Galaxy Table 1 : (Nos 1-39) ; 1950 equatorial and galactic coordinates Table 2 : cross-identif. for 19 galaxies previously known

1992H2

HYLAND A.R., STRAW S., JONES T.J., GATLEY I. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 257, 391-403 Star formation in the Magellanic Clouds. IV. Protostars in the vicinity of 30 Doradus

Dor IRS

Table 1 :(Nos 1-175) ; 1950 coordinates ; JK photometry ; a few cross-identif. Identif. charts

1992J1

JONCAS G., DURAND D., ROGER R.S. 1992,Ap.J. 387, 591-611 The Sharpless 187 gas complex: a multifrequency study

Analysis of the Sh 2-187 gas complex in the optical (BVR photometry and Hα interferometry), radio (continuum and H I line at 21 cm, 13CO), and the IR (IRAS co-add maps)

Table 3 : (Nos 1-163) 408 MHz compact sources  1950 coordinates  30P
Table 4 : (Nos 1-85) 1420 MHz compact sources  1950 coordinates  31P

cross-identif. between 30P and 31P and a few other sources

1992J2

JOHNSTON S., LYNE A.G., MANCHESTER R.N., KNIFFEN D.A., D’AMICO N.D., LIM J., ASHWORTH M. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 255, 401-411 A high-frequency survey of the southern galactic plane for pulsars

PSR

Survey of an area of 800sq.^{∘} in the region 270^{∘} ≤ ℓ ≤ 20^{∘}, |b| ≤ 04^{∘}, with the Parkes 64-m radio telescope, at a central observing frequency of 1500 MHz, and with sampling intervals of 0.3 and 1.2 ms. This survey complements a similar survey of the northern galactic plane undertaken by Clifton+, 1986, ref. 1986S2. Table 1 : 46 new pulsars Table 2 : 54 previously discovered pulsars Table 3 : 25 previously discovered pulsars undetected in the survey

1992K1

KOO B.-C., HEILES C., REACH W.T. 1992,Ap.J. 390, 108-132 Galactic worms. I. Catalog of worm candidates

GW

Correspond to the ”HI worms” detected by Heiles; HI, 60μm and 100μm features perpendicular to the gal. plane; might be debris of superbubbles; from HI observations in |b| < 10^{∘}; HPBW 36’ or 48’ (Table 1) ; Finding charts. Table 2 : N = 118 ; extension ; range in VLSR ; HI and infrared properties; col. 1: running number, col. 2: format LLL.ℓ + B.b Table 3 : Worm candidates with associated radio continuum emission. Table 4 : Worm candidates near HII regions.

1992K2

KAZAROVETS E.V., SAMUS N.N. 1992,I.B.V.S. 3743, 1-1 The SVS numbering series discontinued

SVS

N = 2887 Variable Stars discovered in the former Soviet Union, between 1918 (SVS 1 = NSV 06227) and Dec. 1991 (SVS 2887). The SVS numbering series is now discontinued. Cross-identif. with V stars and NSV in ref. 1985KS D, p. 348-357

1992LN

LUMSDEN S.L., NICHOL R.C., COLLINS C.A., GUZZO L. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 258, 1-22 The Edinburgh-Durham Southern Galaxy Catalogue. IV. The Cluster Catalogue

EDCC

Edinburgh-Durham Cluster Catalogue. The primary galaxy data set for the cluster survey is the Edinburgh-Durham Southern Galaxy Catalogue (EDSGC, ref. 1989MNRAS.238.379H). Supersedes the Abell catalogue (ref. 1989AC)as a data base for statistical studies of cluster properties. Table 3: N = 737 among (Nos 1-769) ; 1950 coordinates ;

a few cross-identif. with ACO (ref. 1989AC).

Table 4 : N = 32 among (Nos 30-760) ; 1950 coordinates ; Objects misidentified as clusters.

1992L1

LANDECKER T.L., ANDERSON M.D., ROUTLEDGE D., VANELDIK J.F. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. 258, 495-506 Sharpless 183: an H II region in the Perseus arm

45P

Field centered on α 1950 = 0h51m30.0s and δ 1950 = +65^{∘}30’ Preliminary incomplete list of 45P Table 3: N = 35 (between Nos 19 and 75) ; small-diameter sources ; 1950 coordinates.

1992M1

MORGAN D.H., GOOD A.R. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 92, 571-582 New planetary nebulae in the Large Magellanic Cloud

MGPN2-

UKST objective prism plates The wavelength band includes the important em. lines [OIII]λ λ 5007, 4959, Hβ and HeII-λ 4686 Table 2 : (Nos 1-86) ; accurate 1950 coordinates ; Identif. charts Table 3 and Plate 2 : Position measurements and Identif. chart for eleven SMP1- objects (ref. 1978S2 C)

1992N1

NORMANDEAU M., JONCAS G., GREEN D.A. 1992,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 92, 63-83 The DRAO galactic-plane survey. III. Field at ℓ = 85^{∘}

Table 2 : (Nos 1-91) ; 1950 coordinates ; resolution 4.8’x3.5’ at 408 MHz, map of a region with a 242’ radius

36P

Table 3 : (Nos 1-94) ; 1950 coordinates ; resolution 1.4’x1.0’ at 1420 MHz, continuum image with a 78’ radius

37P

Tables 4 and 5 : cross-identif. between 36P and 37P and a few other sources

1992P1

PATNAIK A.R., BROWNE I.W.A., WILKINSON P.N., WROBEL J.M. 1992,M.N.R.A.S. 254, 655-676 Interferometer phase calibration sources. I. The region 35^{∘} ≤ δ ≤ 75^{∘}

PBWW

Compact radio sources, whose positions have been measured to an rms accuracy of ≃ 12 milliarcsec with the VLA at ν = 8.4 GHz in the ”A” configuration

Table 2 : N = 800 ; 2000 coordinates ; no cross-identif.

1st column: name derived from 1950 coordinates. 2nd column: name derived from 2000 coordinates.

It is mandatory to write the format J0003+481 with the letter J just preceding the 2000 coordinates. No cross-identif., maps

1992S1

STEPHENSON C.B. 1992,A.J. 103, 263-266 A list of highly reddened stars likely to be distant luminous stars

StRS

Reddened stars found in a photographic-infrared objective prism survey using the Burrell Schmidt telescope Table 1 : (Nos 1-447) ; 1900 coordinates ; I magnitude ; a few IRAS cross-identif.

1992TC A

TURON C., CREZE M., EGRET D., GOMEZ A., GRENON M., JAHREISS H., REQUIEME Y., ARGUE A.N., BEC-BORSENBERGER A., DOMMANGET J., MENNESSIER M.O., ARENOU F., CHARETON M., CRIFO F., MERMILLIOD J.C., MORIN D., NICOLET B., NYS O., PREVOT L., ROUSSEAU M., PERRYMAN M.A.C. 1992,ESA SP-1136 The Hipparcos Input Catalogue

HIC

Main Catalogue Data: 5 Vol.: J2000 coordinates, cross-identif. Vol. 1: 00h-03h (Nos 1-18677) Vol. 2: 04h-08h (Nos 18601-44180) Vol. 3: 09h-13h (Nos 44101-68389) Vol. 4: 14h-18h (Nos 68301-93276) Vol. 5: 19h-23h (Nos 93201-118322) Vol. 6: Annex 1: Components of Double and Multiple Systems Vol. 7: Annex 2: The Atlas of Identification Charts for Faint Stars

Annex 3: Identification Charts for Stars in Galactic Open Clusters Annex 4: Identification Charts for Stars in the Magellanic Clouds

1992TC B

TURON C., CREZE M., EGRET D., GOMEZ A., GRENON M., JAHREISS H., REQUIEME Y., ARGUE A.N., BEC-BORSENBERGER A., DOMMANGET J., MENNESSIER M.O., ARENOU F., CHARETON M., CRIFO F., MERMILLIOD J.C., MORIN D., NICOLET B., NYS O., PREVOT L., ROUSSEAU M., PERRYMAN M.A.C. 1992,Bull. Inf. CDS 42, 9-20 The Hipparcos Input Catalogue

HIC

Description of the catalogue

1992W1

WANG Q., WU X. 1992,Ap.J.Suppl. 78, 391-401 A comprehensive X-ray study of the Small Magellanic Cloud

WW

Table 2A :(Nos 1-70) ; discrete X-ray sources ; 1950 coordinates ; Cross-identif. with 1E, BKGS (ref 1987B3), IKT (ref. 1983I1), a few stars (foreground or members of SMC), nebulae, five extragalactic objects (Nos 2, 4, 6, 12, 70)

Table 2C :a few IKT or BKGS sources have not been detected

1993DS

DOWNES R.A., SHARA M.M. 1993,P.A.S.P. 105, 127-245 A catalog and atlas of cataclysmic variables

-

Included: all objects which have been classified as CV (Cataclysmic Variable) at some point in time, as of Feb. 1992. Table 1a: Accurate 2000 coordinates (from the GSC, ref. 1990LS+), one other name. Table 1b: same entries ordered by RA (J2000). Table 2: variability type. References for spectra and charts ; Identif. charts (for Novae see Duerbeck, ref. 1987DU).

1993GS A

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., PITTS P.S., MEAD J.M. 1993,NASA RP-1294 Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

3rd Edition. Updates 1987GS A and B (2nd edition) Produced as a single volume. Complete for 1965 through 1990 ; 206000 individual observations. The catalog data are presented as published in the original articles. Contents: Introduction (with source name abbreviations and references) Catatalogue of Infrared observations Appendix A: Atlas of Infrared spectral ranges Appendix B: Bibliography of infrared astronomy (alphabetical order) Appendix C: Bibliography of infrared astronomy (chronological order) Appendix D: Index of infrared source positions (alphabetical order)

1993GS B

GEZARI D.Y., SCHMITZ M., PITTS P.S., MEAD J.M. 1993,NASA RP-1295 Far Infrared Supplement: Catalog of Infrared Observations

-

Subset of the data of ref. 1993GS A (NASA RP 1294) restricted to observations at λ ≥ 4.6μm Introduction (see 1993GS A) Table p. 1-161 Appendix D: Index of Infrared Source Positions (alphabetical order) p. D1-D121.

1993G1 A

GRIFFITH M.R., WRIGHT A.E. 1993,A.J. 105, 1666-1679 The Parkes-MIT-NRAO (PMN) surveys. I. The 4850 MHz surveys and data reduction

PMN

Radio surveys from -87.5^{∘}to +10^{∘}Dec, using the Parkes 64m radio telescope with the NRAO multibeam receiver at a frequency of 4850 MHz during 1990. Description of overall PMN surveys, data reduction techniques, and data quality of the two lists of sources resulting from the southern and tropical surveys, respectively −87.5^{∘} < δ < −37^{∘} and −29^{∘} < δ < −9.5^{∘}. N = 36640 for these two surveys to a flux limit about 35mJy.

1993G1 B

WRIGHT A.E., GRIFFITH M.R., BURKE B.F., EKERS R.D. 1994,Ap.J.Suppl. 91, 111-308 The Parkes-MIT-NRAO surveys. II. Source catalog for the Southern survey (−87.5^{∘} < δ < −37^{∘})

PMN

Radio surveys from -87.5^{∘}to –37^{∘}Dec, at a frequency of 4850 MHz. N = 23277 to a flux limit of 20 mJy at the southern survey limit to about 50 mJy at the northern limit.

1993G1 C

GRIFFITH M.R., WRIGHT A.E., BURKE B.F., EKERS R.D. 1994,Ap.J.Suppl. 90, 179-295 The Parkes-MIT-NRAO surveys. III. Source catalog for the Tropical survey (−29^{∘} < δ < −9.5^{∘})

PMN

Radio surveys from -29^{∘}to -9.5^{∘}Dec, at a frequency of 4850 MHz. N = 13362 to a flux limit about 42 mJy (but the flux limit varies as a function of Dec)

1993G2

GARCIA A.M. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 100, 47-90 General study of group membership. II. Determination of nearby groups

LGG

Table 1: (Nos 1-485) ; LGG catalog ; 1950 coordinates a few cross-identif. with GHCG (ref. 1983G1), HGCG (ref. 1982H1), NBGCG (ref. 1987TU C), and MDCG (ref. 1989M1)

Table 2: Identif. of galaxies in each LGG group, with PGC acronym (ref. 1989PF+) N = 3647

1993HB

HEWITT A., BURBIDGE G. 1993,Ap.J.Suppl. 87, 451-947 A revised and updated catalog of quasi-stellar objects

{QSO \atop BL}

Complete to 1992 December 31. (7315 objects: nearly all QSOs including about 90 BL Lac objects). Numbering based on 1950 coordinates, all other names are quoted (col. 2), 1950 and 2000 coordinates. The symbol BL Lac appears under the coordinate designation for all BL Lac objects. Extensive information on names, positions, magnitudes, colors, emission-line redshifts, absorption, variability, polarization and X-ray, radio, and infrared data. The references are ordered by by alphabetical order (p. 873-899) and by reference number (p. 900-926). Cross-identif. (Table 2, p. 927-966) Revises and updates ref. 1987HB.

1993M1

MEYSSONIER N., AZZOPARDI M. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 102, 451-593 A new catalogue of Hα emission-line stars and small nebulae in the Small Magellanic Cloud

MA

Table 2: (Nos 1-1898) ; 2000 coordinates ; numerous cross-id. Finding charts, Plates 1-95 Table 3: 62 proven or probable SMC PN and VLE obj. Table 4: 81 proven or probable SMC compact or small HII regions Table 5: 29 SMC proven or probable late-type Hα em.-line stars

1993P1 A

POUNDS K.A., ALLAN D.J., BARBER C., BARSTOW M.A., BERTRAM D., BRANDUARDI-RAYMONT G., BREBNER G.E.C., BUCKLEY D., BROMAGE G.E., COLE R.E., COURTIER M., CRUISE A.M., CULHANE J.L., DENBY M., DONOGHUE D.O., DUNFORD E., GEOR-GANTOPOULOS I., GOODALL C.V., GONDHALEKAR P.M., GOURLAY J.A., HARRIS A.W., HASSALL B.J.M., HELLIER C., HODGKIN S., JEFFRIES R.D., KELLETT B.J., KENT B.J., LIEU R., LLOYD C., McGALE P., MASON K.O., MATTHEWS L., MITTAZ J.P.D., PAGE C.G., PANKIEWICZ G.S., PIKE C.D., PONMAN T.J., PUCHNAREWICZ E.M., PYE J.P., QUENBY J.J., RICKETTS M.J., ROSEN S.R., SANSOM A.E., SEMBAY S., SIDHER S., SIMS M.R., STEWART B.C., SUMNER T.J., VALLANCE R.J., WATSON M.G., WARWICK R.S., WELLS A.A., WILLINGALE R., WILLMORE A.P., WILLOUGHBY G.A., WONNA-COTT D. 1993,M.N.R.A.S. 260, 77-102 The ROSAT Wide Field Camera all-sky survey of extreme-ultraviolet sources. I. The Bright Source Catalogue

REUV

First all-sky survey for cosmic sources of extreme-ultraviolet radiation 384 relatively bright EUV sources, forming the WFC Bright Source Catalogue The format should be e.g. for the first source REUV J0003+4335 or J0003+435 instead of REUV 0003+433, proposed by the authors (bottom p. 91) which is incorrect in two respects: J missing and tens of minuts instead of tenths of degrees. Nevertherless the format JHHMM+DDM has been introduced in the Simbad data base, because found in the literature.

1993P1 B

SHARA M.M., SHARA D.J., McLEAN B. 1993,P.A.S.P. 105, 387-425 An optical atlas of ROSAT wide field camera EUV sources

REUV

Finding charts for the 384 objects of ref. 1993P1 A Table 1: J2000 coordinates and cross-identif.

1993P2

PINEAULT S., LANDECKER T.L., MADORE B., GAUMONT-GUAY S. 1993,A.J. 105, 1060-1073 The supernova remnant CTA1 and the surrounding interstellar medium

48P

Table 2: (Nos 1-64) ; ν = 1420 MHz ; 1950 coordinates ; a few IRAS coincidences.

1993R1

REBEIROT E., AZZOPARDI M., WESTERLUND B.E. 1993,Astr. Astrophys. Suppl. 97, 603-728 Carbon stars in the Small Magellanic Cloud. II. Catalogue of 1707 objects with identifications and spectrophotometry

RAW

Table 1 : Fields observed ABW-A to ABW-M Table 4 : (Nos 1-1707) ; Accurate 2000 coord. ; magnitudes and colours ;

Carbon-abundance indicators

Identif. charts Cross-identif. of which ABW-A and ABW-B (ref. 1986W1), and Reid+Mould 1990 (ref. 1990R2) here designated RM2- , RM3- (instead of SMC AGB2- and SMC AGB3-) and RM-B (from Blanco+McCarthy 1983, A.J. 88, 1442)

1993R2

REGO M., CORDERO-GARCIA M., ZAMORANO J., GALLEGO J. 1993,A.J. 105, 427-436 IRAS observations of Hα selected emission-line galaxies

UCM

Table 1: N = 254 objects from the UCM objective-prism survey (ref. 1990Z2). One cross-identif. ; no coordinates ; no identif. charts.

1993TM

TAYLOR J.H., MANCHESTER R.N., LYNE A.G. 1993,Ap.J.Suppl. 88, 529-568 Catalog of 558 Pulsars

PSR

Updates 1981MT Table 1: Observed pulsar parameters (ordered by J name) and 227 references Table 2: Pulsar proper motions Table 3: Orbital elements of binary pulsars Table 4: Observed and derived pulsar parameters Table 5: Major pulsar surveys

1993VV

VERON-CETTY M.-P., VERON P. 1993,ESO Scientific Report No. 13 A Catalogue of Quasars and Active Nuclei (6th Edition)

-

Updated version of ref. 1991VV Table 1 : 7383 quasars Table 2 : 171 BL Lac objects Table 3 : 1855 active galaxies (of which 695 are Seyfert 1)

1993W1

WINDHORST R.A., FOMALONT E.B., PARTRIDGE R.B., LOWENTHAL J.D. 1993,Ap.J. 405, 498-517 Microjansky source counts and spectral indices at 8.44 GHz

VLA deep images of two 7’x7’ fields at 8.44 GHz with 10” resolution Table 1A: (Nos 1-46) ; radio sources in the Lynx.2 field

16V

Table 1B: (Nos 1-36) ; radio sources in the Cepheus field  17V

1950 coordinates ; no maps